Home

Yamaha CL5/CL3/CL1 V1.5 Reference Manual

1. BBH Bi 8 i 6 6 831 Daisy chain connection CL5 Audio signal Remote signal gt NOTE Please refer to the SB168 ES Owner s Manual for information on setting the MY 16 ES64 MY 16 EX cards and EtherSound network 145 CU 5 66 3 C 1 Reference Manual I O device and external head amp Remotely controlling an e
2. eeeoceoeo eeeecoeoeo External device gae B H e prp e rpe 2 Inthe Function Access Area press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen 3 In the center of the screen press the MIDI GPI button to access the MIDI GPI popup window 4 Pressthe MIDI SETUP tab to access the MIDI SETUP page then select the port and MIDI channel on which Program Changes will be transmitted and received as described in Basic MIDI settings on page 149 5 Press the PROGRAM CHANGE tab to access the PROGRAM CHANGE page On the PROGRAM CHANGE page you can specify how Program Changes will be transmitted and received and choose the event scene recall or effect library recall that will be assigned to each program number
3. 228 TT 230 PVG e 232 Id TT E 233 Premium Rack Processor Parameters 245 Effects and tempo synchronization eene 247 Parameters that can be assigned to control 248 NRPN parameter assianitfie lS eseck dpud nce ho asque uo pene 250 Mixing parameter operation applicability 254 Functions that can be assigned to USER DEFINED 259 Functions that can be assigned to USER DEFINED 262 Functions that can be assigned to the assignable encoders 263 ALA Te di EL Tr 264 Warming Emor 271 273 Mixer BAS IG P ar AIC 274 aere er Cat ON 275 276 CU 5 6 VL 3 V Reference Manual Function Tree e Function Tree TO STEREO MONO pi in pace ap ithe th Owner s Manual booklet CH1 48 LIBRARY DANTE OUTPUT PATCH EQ EIBRARY DANTE OUTPUT PATCH DYNAMICS LIBRARY FUNCTION ACCESS AREA 8ch INSERT DIRECT OUT
4. Cenitralogic SECTION About the Centralogic 11 Operations in the Centralogic section nnne 11 indies 12 Input and output 15 CL console internal patching and Dante audio network patching 15 Changing the output patch settings 16 Changing the input patch 5 ene 19 Inserting an external device into a 21 Directly outputting INPUT nennen 23 Recording or playing back using DAW a 25 A Signal TOW Tor input teda 27 Specifying the channel name icon and channel 28 Making HA Head Amp esee eene nnne 30 Sending a signal from an input channel to the STEREO MONO buses 35 Sending a signal from an input channel to a MIX MATRIX bus 39 Correcting delay between channe
5. To OUTPUT PATCH 0 229 is EXPAND MONITOR SELECT PREEQ POSTEQ INSERT OUT PRE FADER Keyin INSERT OUT Self PRE EQ Self POST EQ MIX21 24 OUT CUE ON MIX 1 8 9 16 17 24 POST EQ PRE FADER PFL POST ete een ae Sie x MATRIX1 3 7 f LEVEL 1 2 PRE FADER 2MATRIX 1 MATRIX2 4 8 LEVEL pw O RI BERT TTT O 0 PRE FADER POST ON PAN BAL eel a alas ed vri RE STEREO E E 271 TOST TOMONO TANBAL STL on 5 I 1 l i O 1 HHH MONO C l o gt TOLCR LCR i 9 De POST ON 2 Es 46 Output channels STEREO channel MONO C channel Each of these channels processes the signal sent from the input channels to the STEREO bus or MONO C bus and send it to the corresponding output port or MATRIX bus If input channels are in LCR mode the STEREO L R channels and the MONO C channel can be used together as a set of three output channels MIX 12 2324 M STN MATRIX CUE LR C 12 78 LR mi SC STEREO L R MONO C T2 RACKIN Paro INSERTPOINT POSTON INSERT OUT To OUTPUT PATCH STEREO 3 o Si PRE FADER INSERT OUT INSERT OUT L R MONO C 1 PREEQ INSERT OUT STEREO INSERT IN L R MONO C PREEQ EQ OUT DYNAQU
6. f BOOKMARK BOOKMARK BOOKMARK BOOKMARK PAGE CHANGE gt FUNCTION UHLATCH BOOKMARK MUTE MASTER MUTE MASTER MUTE GROUP 1 MUTE GROUP 2 HOME TALKBACK TALKBACK OH UHLATCH Press the button corresponding to the USER DEFINED key to which you want to assign the Help function In the FUNCTION column choose HELP and press the OK button When you have finished assigning functions to USER DEFINED keys press the x symbol to close the USER DEFINED KEYS page In the Function Access Area press the SETUP button to close the SETUP screen Help function B Recalling the HELP popup window using only a USER DEFINED key O9 Press the USER DEFINED key to which the Help function is assigned The HELP popup window will appear 10 close the window once again press the USER DEFINED key to which the Help function is assigned B Directly recalling the Help for a specific panel controller 9 while holding down the USER DEFINED key to which you have assigned the Help function press or rotate the panel controller for which you want to recall Help Panel controllers other than the faders will not function as long as you continue holding down the USER DEFINED key to which the Help function is assigned 10 if the corresponding controller has an explanation associated with it the HELP popup
7. Switches Control Change reception on or off ECHO button Selects whether incoming Control Changes will be echoed out from the MIDI transmit port To change the event assignment for each control number press the corresponding event The MIDI CONTROL CHANGE popup window will appear In this window you can specify the event assigned to each control number The window contains the following items MIDI CONTROL CHANGE 1 Select Control Change Parameters PARAMETER1 PARAMETER MIDI 1 MODE field Enables you to select the type of event 2 PARAMETER 1 2 field In conjunction with the MODE field this field specifies the type of event NOTE The list shown is the same for all models of the CL series For the CL3 CL1 the display will indicate Cannot Assign if you specify a parameter that does not exist on that model e If NRPN mode is selected as the Control Change transmission reception mode the settings in this window are ignored For details on the events that can be assigned to Control Changes refer to the Appendices see page 248 9 Inthe order of the MODE field gt PARAMETER field gt PARAMETERZ field specify the type of event you want to assign Use the buttons to select an item Press the OK button to confirm the change and close the MIDI CONTROL CHANGE popup window NOTE e You can also press the desired event in the field to select it f you pres
8. DANTE40 DANTE48 DANTE56 e DANTE64 I O device and external head amp NOTE e f you ve connected a device other than an I O device supported by the CL series the upper line of the button will show the first four letters of the Device Label a dash and the channel number decimal f no Dante Audio Channel Label has been specified the lower row will indicate nothing You can set the Dante Audio Channel Label using Audinate s Dante Controller software For the latest information refer to the Yamaha pro audio website http www yamahaproaudio com Press the AUTO SETUP button confirmation popup dialog will appear asking you to confirm the input patching from the I O devices to the console press OK and the patching will be performed automatically If you want to edit the patching individually press the port select button The PORT SELECT popup window will appear PORT SELECT El Select candidate vo ANTE DANTES DANTE61 DANTE62 gt m CD LIBRARY button Enables you to store or recall the DANTE INPUT PATCH settings to or from the library You can store ten sets of settings in the library NOTE e f you recall data whose I O device registration state differs from the current state patching to devices not registered in the I O device list will be kept in
9. 1 001 001 1 PATCH button Press this button to open the PORT SELECT popup window in which you can select an input port to patch to the channel 4 Access either the 1 or 8ch GAIN PATCH popup window D Use the on screen buttons or the multifunction knobs to edit the head amp gain phase and phantom power on off settings NOTE The PAD will be switched on or off internally when the HA gain is adjusted between 17 dB and 18 dB Keep in mind that noise may be generated when using phantom power if there is a difference between the Hot and Cold output impedance of an external device connected to the INPUT jack The GAIN knob and 48V button are valid only on channels for which the assigned input port is an INPUT jack on the I O device the OMNI IN on the CL unit or a slot that is connected to an external head amp device e g Yamaha AD8HR or SB168 ES Perform the same operations for other input channels as desired If you are viewing the Ich GAIN PATCH popup window you can also use the SEL keys to switch the channel for editing If you are viewing the 8ch GAIN PATCH popup window you can use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to switch the channels being controlled in groups of eight 7 When you finish editing press the x symbol in the upper right of the window CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual Setting the Gain Compensation function If you are using an I O device such as an R
10. 3 35 ke 19 0 knz rat so PEAKING PEAKING lt 5098 3598 Pr 355 ie sons 335z zs rat 90 00 PEAKING PEAKING ISHED IG ends 50B 34 598 4005 Pr 315 Hz 1 06 knz 425 iz 12 5 eRe rat wo 4 PEAKING PEAKING G 2045 1098 4008 Loo KH 150 tz 30 Ke a os 4s 35 227 UJ N N UJ zr ap A G Stroke 2 A G Arpeg 1 A G Arpeg 2 Brass Sec Male Vocal 1 Male Vocal 2 Female Vo 1 Female Vo 2 Chorus amp Harmo Total EQ 1 Total EQ 2 Appendices iow cwm nmo _ PEAKING PEAKING SHELF e ssas 2045 008 2006 7502 2 00 kHz 355 enz rat 4s PEAKING PEAKING c osas 008 2005 Cr 2241 4 00 kHz 670 kHz rat 4s 4s ons PEAKING HSHELE G ooa 0 008 4098 PF veo ve 355 Hz 200 kHz 425 Hz rat o gt 4s FEARING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING e 2045 41 508 3006 PF soon 850 Hz 212 Ke 4 50 nz ray 28 20 070 79 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING e osas 208 3506 19012 2 00 kHz 6 70 rz rat on 4s 055
11. STEREO L R MONO 1 Not displayed for GEQ 1 16 RACK 2 Not displayed for PREMIUM 3 8 RACK Displayed only for PREMIUM 1 2 RACK NOTE In the case of the CL3 CL1 channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown Graphic EQ effects and Premium Rack 2 Channel select buttons Use these buttons to select the input source channel 3 CLOSE button Closes the popup window NOTE In the case of the GEQ patching it to either an insert out or insert in will automatically assign the other patch point to the same rack Also insert mode will automatically be switched on Additionally if you defeat the insert out or insert in of a GEQ the other patch point will automatically be defeated and at the same time insert mode will automatically be switched off For more information on insert in out see Inserting an external device into a channel on page 21 To select the output source for a rack press the OUTPUT PATCH button for that rack The CH SELECT popup window will appear allowing you to select the output destination for the rack Switch the list items as necessary and select the output destination that you want to use When you select an output destination in the CH SELECT popup window a dialog box will ask you to confirm the change To confirm the change press the OK button NOTE e You can make settings such that the confirmation dialog box will not appear see page 169 e Normally you will
12. fi sample CH37 ch3 sample sample CH33 ch33 Ig 0 sample CH42 Iu 0 00 ms Pas T 0 ET CH48 2 ch48 0 00 ms sample CH47 ch47 0 sample CH41 ch41 ch42 ch43 ch44 ch45 ch46 1 DELAY SCALE button Press the button to display the DELAY SCALE popup window in which you can select the unit for the delay time 2 Channel select button Lights to indicate the currently selected input channel Press the button to select the channel 3 Delay setting knob input channels only Indicates the channel delay value Press this knob to adjust the value using the multifunction knob You can view the current value immediately above the knob in unit of ms and below the knob in the currently selected scale NOTE If ms millisecond has been selected for the DELAY SCALE nothing will appear to the right of the knob gt Access the INPUT DELAY 8ch popup window B Use the on screen buttons and the multifunction knobs to set the delay Perform the same operations for other input channels as desired If you are viewing the 8ch INPUT DELAY popup window you can use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to switch the channels being controlled in groups of eight When you finish editing press the x symbol in the upper right of the window 45 Input channels Channel library operations Channel libraries include INPUT CHANNE
13. gt L SHELF 125 Fe 000 SEND field In this field you can view the send level from the channel to each MIX MATRIX bus switch the on off status of the send signals and switch between pre and post 1 Tabs Enable you to select a group of 16 output bus channels to be displayed in the SEND field 1 161 displays MIX buses 1 16 MIX17 24 MATRIX tab displays MIX buses 17 24 and MATRIX buses 1 8 The view and the function of the knobs and buttons in the SEND field vary depending on whether a pair of bus channels odd numbered and even numbered are comprised of two mono channels or a stereo channel CH1 ch 1 0 00 00 ADMIN Send To MIX1 Initial Data PRE ON SELECTED CHANNEL section If the destination bus channels are two mono channels 1 SEND knob Sets the send level to the corresponding bus 2 PRE indicator Indicates the send point of the corresponding bus If the PRE button on the MIX SEND 8ch screen is turned ON this PRE indicator will be turned on 3 ON button Switches the send signal to the corresponding bus on or off If the destination bus is a stereo channel 1 SEND PAN knob The right hand knob adjusts the level of the signal sent to a pair of bus channels even numbered and odd numbered The left hand knob adjusts the pan and balance of the same signal 2 PRE indicator I
14. 4005 25 1098 0545 95 0 Hz 425 hz 2 80 krz 7 50 knz rat oso PEAKING PEAKING SHELF c 4598 2098 PF Tos 400 He 2 80 ne 17 0 kez mr c par sr PEAKING PEAKING e zsa 4588 2598 0048 Pr 55 12Hz 2 00 kHz 4 00 kez a Title Syn Bass 1 Syn Bass 2 Piano 2 Crunch 1 Crunch 2 Stroke 1 ew wm nmo mcn PEAKING PEAKING SHELF e 3098 2598 0598 2248 ao on so s PEAKING PEAKING HSHELE PF 85 0 Hz 950 Hz 4 00 kHz 125 aol oo PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING HSHELF Fr usn none 112z 12 5 eRe rat 1s 89 22 PEAKING PEAKING PF son 950 Hz 3 15 knz 750 knz ray 99 PEAKING PEAKING 3598 amp sds 1598 3005 Pr 600 Hz 315 ez 5 30 kHz rat ss 100 FEARING PEAKING PEAKING HSHEF 2098 30 598 2545 PF 265 vie 400 He 1 32 ke 4 50 knz al om 63 FEARING PEAKING PEAKING PERKING IG 34098 2 PF 190 tz 5 60 eR 4s 96 90 C FEAKING PEAKING PEAKING SHELF 7 sdb eds 2598 Pr usns
15. 104 6 Monitor and Cue functions To enable Cue out for the port you specified in step 5 press the CUE OUTPUT button to turn it on NOTE The cue signal is sent to the monitor output and PHONES output jacks regardless of whether the CUE OUTPUT button is on or off However be aware that the cue signal will no longer be sent to monitor output if CUE INTERRUPTION is turned off The cue signal is always sent to the PHONES output jack regardless of the CUE INTERRUPTION setting Press the CUE key for a desired channel or DCA group to turn it on The cue signal of the corresponding channel will be sent to the output destination specified in step 5 and to monitor output A cue meter is shown in the meter field of the function access area indicating the cue output level The upper part of the cue meter shows an abbreviation indicating the currently enabled cue group or cue type The abbreviations displayed for the cue meters have the following meaning INPUT CUE group DCA DCA CUE group OUT OUTPUT CUE group EFFECT CUE in the EFFECT and PREMIUM RACK Other CUE groups KEY IN KEY IN CUE in the DYNAMICS 1 popup window Other CUE groups REC PB CUE in the RECORDER INPUT PLAYBACK OUT Other CUE groups CUE meter NOTE e When using the MIX MATRIX bus select buttons the SENDS ON FADER popup window you can press the selected button once again to turn on Cue for the corresponding MIX MATRIX channel see page 43
16. 82 Using the Global Paste TUNCE ON 85 Using the FOCUS 87 Using the Recall Safe nennen 88 Using the Fade 91 Outputting a control signal to an external device in tandem with scene recall 93 Playing back an audio file that links to a scene recall 94 Preview ONS ctr P 96 Monitor and functions cccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccses OF About the Monitor and Cue functions 97 Using the Monitor function 98 USING the Cue TONCO esien n 101 OSE US IC 102 Talkback and 106 About the Talkback and Oscillator functions sese 106 TEAM CU argc 106 S 108 OU TT 111 Operations in tie METER 111 Using an MBCL meter bridge optional on console 113 CU 5 6 VL 3 V Reference Manual Graphic EQ effects and Premium Rack ADOUE Ne V
17. Saving and loading setup data to and from a USB flash a USB Mar OV n Recorde Per riais aaa aaa About Ine USB MENMOrY an beber E EE A O eE i SE Assigning channels to the input and output of the recorder Recording audio to a USB flash drive rero Playing back audio files from a USB flash UC MIST os c Using the CL console with Nuendo Help function 000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 Loading Help file from a USB flash Contents Loading a text file from a USB flash 123 E o DELETE 194 Using USER DEFINED keys to recall Help 194 Other functions ccccccccccccccccccccccscccccccccccccccsscccccsccccsssccccccs 196 ADOUNC SERUP COI vexit baies 196 Word clock and SIOL SELF 198 USING 1 200 Basic settings
18. C PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING HSPE 204b 5048 2548 4005 PF 236 He 265 kHz 6 70 nz rat on 56 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING node 31598 2065 PF nens 400 hz 2 65 kr 6 00 nz rat ore 045 ose PEAKING e zoas asas 91598 2506 F 200 kHz 670 Hz q ez FEARING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING G 20 51598 3065 PF soon 850 Hz 212 wie 4 50 kHz ao 28 20 070 79 FEARING PEAKING PEAKING c osas 3 008 655 PF 95 0He 950 Hz 212 knz 16 0 nz ray 70 zz 6 PEAKING PEAKING ISHED FG roas ds 2098 6006 PF sson 750 Hz 1 80 knz 18 042 rat zo zs 56 CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual Total EQ 3 Bass Drum 3 Snare Drum 3 Tom tom 2 Piano 3 Piano Low Fine EQ Cass Narrator Parameter Parameter O O iow mn nmo PEAKING PEAKING FISHEL Pr 850 Hz 1 15 0 kez rat PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING P rene 315 Hz 425 nie 20 0 knz rat zo 109 040 ESHE PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING 224 iz 4 25 kz 4 00 knz a 5 28 010 PEAKING PEAKING SHELF PF soon 212 530z 17 0 ez mp T Wl
19. MONO CUE OUT ON DELAY CUE L BUS CUE L ee 1000 19 20 CUE OUTL To OUTPUT PATCH 1 1 1 i CUERBUS gt CUER D cg usa ow e NACO i i CUE OUT R To OUTPUT PATCH 1 Wr RUE ms E sd CUE OUT LEVEL CUE LOGIC PHONES et rt t ae 31 To PHONES OUT mM AZ 1 9 1o i DELAY Lo LPHONESR To PHONES OUT OMNIIN 1 2 gt MAX 1000ms 1 MNIIN34 gt Eo gt OMNI IN 5 6 i 178497 1 i wv 7 tweTeRIMoniton 111 dip 5 Ja Cla oo i Toba MONITORL pai METER MONITOR L L g o DEAY MONITOR OUTE gt OUTPUT PATCH STEREO OUT LR gt 8 101 d b T 1 mt STEREO OUT MONO C gt 4 MONITORR N METER MONITOR R l Hio A J ae 12 MONITOR OUT R STEREO OUTL CR gt Eam ELE r i ed acetone METER MONITOR MONO C E DELAY i 1 1 MONITOR OUT MONO C c MONITOR MONO C 1 glo A n ie E ET m Blo To OUTPUT PATCH OMNI IN 3 4 a ON cna HN N 36 ON An output port aplay paroman nyald w PLAYBACK OUT DEFINE CUE INTERRUPTION assigning a monitor out to the output port MIX TALKBACKON MONITOR MONITOR STEREO OUTL R MAX 8ch MONITOR DIMM LEVEL FADER STEREO OUT MONO C MIX OUT1 24 MATRIX OUT1 8 Monitor and Cue functions MONITOR SELECT S
20. User settings Security Master fader You can set channels that will be controlled by the two faders in the Master fader section 1 In the Function Access Area press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen 2 Press the USER SETUP button to access the USER SETUP popup window CUSTOM FADER BANK MASTER FADER for Administrator CUSTOM FADER BANK CHANNEL ASSIGN USTOM FADER 3 Press the CUSTOM FADER tab to access the CUSTOM FADER BANK MASTER FADER page If you are logged in as the Administrator you can also turn on the FOR GUEST button in the lower right of the screen to access the CUSTOM FADER BANK MASTER FADER for Guest page and make master fader settings for the Guest account 4 Press the MASTER button The CHANNEL ASSIGN field shows the channel assignments of the master section CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual USER SETUP CUSTOM FADER BANK MASTER FADER for_Administrator CUSTOM FADER BANK MASTER FADER MASTER CHANNEL ASSIGN USTOM FADER D Press the channel select popup button of the fader A or B that you want to edit and choose the channel CH SELECT Select candidate 7 ST DCA MONITOR Use the list in the left column to select the desired channel group then use the buttons in the right column to select channels When you have finished selecting the channels press the CLOSE button 175 User settings Security
21. Talkback and Oscillator Using the Oscillator function You can send a sine wave or pink noise from the internal oscillator to the desired bus 1 In the Function Access Area press the MONITOR button to access the MONITOR screen In the MONITOR screen the OSCILLATOR field lets you check the current oscillator settings and turn the oscillator on or off If you want to view or edit the oscillator settings in greater detail use the OSCILLATOR popup window described in step 2 and subsequent steps MONITOR CUE MODE INPUT DCA ouTPuT LEVEL OUTPUT PFL PRE PFL 0 0 0 O CLEAR MIX CUE CUE SOURCE SELECT DIMMER MONITOR STEREO MOHO FADER LZR EE OVER p PHOHES LEVEL LINK 18 LCR 2 3 4 20 0 00 1 30 30 2 FADER 2555 Figi OMHI DEFINI ASSIGN MOHO sis dH dd MONITOR OSCILLATOR SINE WAVE ASSIGN mme 8 PINK NOISE BURST NOISE MIX 1 8 D n 17 24 ITE MRTRIX 1 8 MODE D 14 ST MONO iR TALKBACK TALKBACK IN INPUT TO TALKBACK ASSIGN ws TALKBACK 9 16 OH 7 24 MATRIX 1 8 ST MONO MIX 1 OSCILLATOR popup display button Enables you to access the OSCILLATOR popup window in which you can make detailed oscillator settings 2 OSCILLATOR LEVEL field This adjusts the level of the oscillator A meter beside the LEVEL knob indicates the output level of the oscillator If OS
22. o e o f o wee MXPOCSNNG O0 E mI Dynamics me To Matrix oe OO E o in SING EHI E a D rom Input wn 09 WITH MIX SEND WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs WITH MIX SER EE Recall Safe Focus Recall Global Paste O These parameters are available if FADER ON or PROCESSING for the Send source channel is set to ON At that time WITH SEND for the Send destination channel must also be set to ON Applicable to parameters that function only when ALL is selected 6 Applicable only to On Off 7 Valid when they are set for either the Send source channel or Send destination channel 8 Settings marked GLOBAL in this table apply to all channels these settings are GLOBAL RECALL SAFE FOCUS PARAMETER and GLOBAL PASTE for PATCH NAME 9 Applies to ALL only when using GLOBAL PASTE and only to ON OFF 11 Balance only 12 For GLOBAL PASTE the MIX MATRIX STEREO and MONO settings of each channel will be set in common as the OUTPUT 13 Linked only for stereo MATRIX 256 CU 5 C UL 3 1 Reference Manual MATRIX Channels 8 12 pm Linked for a RECALL SAFE FOCUS RECALL GLOBAL PAST Channel stereo pair Parameter Select button Name Icon Color MATRIX NAME GLOBAL OUTPUT NAME OUTPUT NAME
23. 0 0 1000 0 ms FB 99 to 49996 Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback DELAY HI 0 1 1 0 Delay high frequency feedback ratio DLY BAL 0 100 Delay and delayed reverb balance 0 all delayed reverb 100 all delay LPF 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency ow 1 1 1 NOTEL Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY L NOTER Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY R NOTE FB Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB DLY 1 FR F bh ddd Dh J da d d aa Maximum value depends on the tempo setting CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual DIST DELAY One input two output distortion and delay effects in series DST1 DST2 OVD1 oe DST OVD2 CRUNCH Distortion type DST distortion OVD overdrive DLY NOTE Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY MOD NOTE Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ ar Feedback plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for i reverse phase feedback HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth Distortion and delay balance 0 0 all distortion 100 all delayed distortion FR D ddd Je d da d d Maximum value depends on the tempo setting E Fi RII
24. 2 ch 3 ch4 na ch5 a ch6 7 8 2c E Ji om 2c Oc ST LCR ST ST ST ST ST um CH12 2 ch12 PA CH10 CH15 ch15 o Al o di o Al o A gt CH11 chii CH13 chl3 CH14 CH16 ch14 ch16 ST C ST ST ST ST ST ST PAN AME C C C CH19 2 CH20 A CH21 CH22 PA CH23 chl9 f ch 0 ch 1l 22 23 o fd 01 f o fd o A gt ST ST ST ST ST E A A ch32 gt 5 CH24 ch2 PAN CH27 CH30 ch27 ch30 ur ST PAN CH44 CH47 ch44 ch47 1 Channel select button Selects the channel You can select multiple channels simultaneously 2 gt clipping indicator Lights to indicate a signal is clipping at some point in the channel 3 TO ST PAN TO ST BALANCE knob Adjusts the panning or balance To adjust the value press the knob to select it and then operate the corresponding multifunction knob If the signal reaches the overload point at any meter detection point in that channel the indicator to the right of the knob will light 4 ST MONO indicators If a channel is set to ST MONO mode these indicators will individually indicate the on off status of signals sent from the channel to the STEREO bus MONO bus If a channel is set to LCR mode the LCR indicator w
25. 2 Inthe center of the screen press the MIDI GPI button to access the MIDI GPI popup window This window includes several pages which you can switch among using the tabs located at the bottom of the window MIDI SETUP 149 CU 5 66 3 C 1 Reference Manual 3 Press the MIDI SETUP tab to access the MIDI SETUP page In the MIDI SETUP page you can select the type of MIDI messages that will be transmitted and received and choose the port that will be used This page includes the following items MIDI GPI x MIDI SETUP PORT CH MODE PROGRAM contro CHANGE orm PARAMETER CHANGE OTHER COMMAND CQ 6 MIDI SETUP 1 PORT CH field Enables you to select the port and MIDI channel that will be used to transmit and receive MIDI messages Tx PORT Tx CH Press these buttons to open popup windows in which you can respectively select a port and MIDI channel to transmit MIDI messages Rx PORT Rx CH Press these button to open popup windows in which you can respectively select a port and MIDI channel to receive MIDI messages 2 PROGRAM CHANGE field Enables you to switch MIDI Program Change message transmission and reception on or off Hb OMIM RS Switches Program Change transmission on or off Bo cM X M Switches Program Change reception on or off e Switches on off echo output of Program Change messages If this fu
26. 2 OVER indicator Warns you when the signal is clipping A GAIN auER DANTE 3 48V indicator Indicates the phantom power on or off status for the head amp 4 Phase indicator Indicates the input phase setting for the head amp NOTE For an input channel that is patched to an input that has no head amp 1 will be a gray circle and 3 will not be shown For an output channel 1 will be a gray circle and 2 4 will not be shown f GAIN KNOB FUNCTION is set to DIGITAL GAIN in the USER SETUP gt PREFERENCE screen the digital gain knob will appear for 1 and 3 will not be displayed For details refer to Making HA Head Amp settings on page 30 PAN BALANCE field This field enables you to switch the on off status of the signal sent from the selected channel to the STEREO MONO bus and adjust the pan and balance The view and the function of the controllers in this field vary depending on the type of the selected channel When an input channel or MIX channel is selected 1 TO STEREO PAN knob Sets the pan position of a signal routed to the STEREO bus Press the knob to open the STEREO MONO 8ch popup window If the ST IN channel is selected you can specify whether to view the PAN knob or the BALANCE knob in this popup window For a MIX channel the PAN knob will appear if the signal is mono and the BALANCE knob will appear if the signal is stereo SELECTED CHANNEL section 2 S
27. CU 5 VL 3 V Reference Manual DANTE INPUT PATCH From Dante To Console DANTE1 e DANTE9 DANTE17 gt DANTE25 DANTE33 DANTE41 DANTE49 DANTE2 DANTE10 aa DANTE18 DANTE26 DANTE34 DANTE42 DANTE40 E DANTE58 DANTE3 a DANTE11 DANTE19 DANTE2 eee ul DANTE35 DANTE43 DANTE41 DANTES9 DANTE4 e DANTE12 Ss a DANTE20 gt e DANTE28 e DANTE36 DANTE44 DANTE42 mansn DANTE60 DANTES DANTE13 eet DANTE21 DANTE29 DANTE3 DANTE45 DANTE53 gt LIBRARY DANTE6 DANTE14 Se us DANTE22 DANTE30 ul DANTE38 DANTE46 1 DANTE54 AUTO SETUP DANTE oss ue DANTE15 sa e DANTE 23 ue DANTE 31 DANTE39 DANTE47 ue DANTE55 DANTE63 DANTES DANTE16 DANTE24 DANTE32
28. REC DEC Selects the recording deck type Adjusts the input level of the recording deck As you raise the level tape REC LVL 96 0 to 418 0 dB compression is generated which narrows the dynamic range and distorts the sound REC HI 6 0 to 46 0 dB Adjusts the high range gain of the recording deck REC BIAS 1 00 to 1 00 Adjusts the bias of the recording deck Swss7O Swss78 Swss85 REPR DEC Selects the playback deck type REPR LVL 96 0 to 18 0 dB Adjusts the output level of the playback deck REPRHI 6 0 to 46 0 dB Adjusts the high range gain of the playback deck REPR LO 6 0 to 46 0 dB Adjusts the low range gain of the playback deck When you adjust the REC LVL the REPR LVL reflects the change MAKE UP Off On maintaining the relative output level You can change the amount of distortion without changing the output level TP SPEED 15ips 30ips Selects the tape speed TP KIND Old New Selects the tape type M BAND DYNA Two input two output 3 band dynamics processor with individual solo and gain reduction metering for each band CMP ATK 0 120 ms Attack time of the compressor CMP REL Release time of the compressor CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual Positive values lower the threshold of the high band and raise the threshold of the low band Negative values do the opposite If this is PRESENCE 10 to 10 set to 0 the high mid and low bands will be affected in the same way L
29. SLOT3 1 SLOT3 16 GEQ1L A GEQ16R B Output channels only EFFECT FXIL A FX8R B PREMIUM RACK PRIL A PR2R B Specify the input port you will use for insert in and press the CLOSE button Press the INSERT ON OFF button to turn it ON In this state insert out in is enabled Adjust the input output levels of your external device if necessary NOTE f you have selected the OMNI IN jack on the CL console as the input port for insert in make the HA settings in the f F INSERT IN HA field is P Even if the INSERT ON OFF button is OFF the signal 6 GAIN selected for insert out will continue to be sent If you want to change the insert out in position access the one channel INSERT DIRECT OUT popup button and press one of the three INSERT fields The INSERT field you pressed will be enabled When you have finished making all settings press the x symbol located in the upper right to close the window You will return to the OVERVIEW screen As desired make insert settings for other channels as well Input and output patching Directly outputting an INPUT channel The signal of an INPUT channel can be output directly from an OUTPUT jack on the I O device from the desired OMNI OUT jack or from the output channel of a desired slot 1 Connect your external device to an OMNI OU
30. The USB flash drive could not be recognized Access is not possible because the USB flash drive is not ready The CL series console is not synchronized to the xxx signal Tap operation was ignored because the TAP TEMPO button is not displayed in the screen This operation has been ignored because the current user does not have permission Loading is not possible because the bitmap file is too large The maximum supported file size is 307 256 Bytes Copying 31BandGEQ and comparing it to Flex15GEQ has failed because more than 15 bands are included in the copy source Copying and pasting 31BandGEQ to Flex15GEQ has failed because more than 15 bands are included in the copy source Power consumption of the I O cards installed in the slots has exceeded the rated value Your operation has been ignored because there is no parameter that corresponds to the knob you operated The file you attempted to load from the USB flash drive is of an unsupported format Save or Load operations are unavailable because the USB memory recorder is recording or playing The recorder cannot operate since mixer scene memory or library data is being saved to or loaded from the USB flash drive Recording playback stopped because time is required for USB flash drive processing Can t save the RECORDER playlist because there is insufficient free space on the USB flash drive Recorder processing was halted because the USB flash drive capacity ran
31. e f you want cue operations and channel select operations to be linked open the USER SETUP popup window choose the PREFERENCE tab and then turn on CUE gt SEL LINK see page 168 CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual If you re auditioning the CUE signal the monitor adjust the Cue signal level by using the MONITOR LEVEL knob located in the SCENE MEMORY MONITOR section of the top panel Also adjust the MONITOR FADER LEVEL in conjunction with this If PHONES LEVEL LINK is ON the cue signal level when monitoring through headphones can be adjusted in three ways the CUE LEVEL knob the MONITOR FADER and the PHONES LEVEL knob NOTE To adjust the level to the cue out port you specified in step 5 adjust the gain of the output port that is patched to it To defeat cue press the currently on CUE key once again You can press the CLEAR CUE button in the Meter field of the CUE popup window to clear all cue selections NOTE f you press the CUE meter in the Function Access Area all cue selections will be cleared All cue selections will be cleared if you switch between MIX CUE mode and LAST CUE mode in the CUE MODE section You can also assign the function of the CLEAR CUE button to a USER DEFINED key see page 169 105 Monitor and Cue functions CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual Talkback and Oscillator About the Talkback and Oscillator functions Talkback is a function that s
32. the STEREO bus 0 L Cc R TO ST BALANCE knob CU 5 UL 3 V Reference Manual If the CSR knob is set to 100 operating the INPUT TO ST PAN knob will change the level of signals sent to the STEREO L R bus and MONO C bus as shown in the following diagram Signal level Operating the TO ST BALANCE knob of an ST IN channel will change the level of signals sent from the STEREO L R channels to the STEREO L R bus and MONO C bus as shown in the N Signal sent to the MONO C bus Signal sent to the STEREO L bus Signal sent to the STEREO bus PAN knob following diagram Signal level Signal level the STEREO L bus oe Signal sent from the ST IN L channel to N the MONO C bus lt v 3 Signal sent from the ST IN L channel to TO ST BALANCE knob FO Oe Signal sent from the ST IN channel to the bus Signal sent from the ST IN R channel to the STEREO R bus TO ST BALANCE knob Input channels Sending a signal from an input channel to a MIX MATRIX bus This section explains how to send a signal from an input channel to MIX buses 1 24 and MATRIX buses 1 8 The MIX buses are used mainly for the purpose of sending signals to foldback speakers on stage or to effect processors The M
33. 1 Category select list Selects the category of output port shown in the popup window The categories correspond to the following output ports They vary depending on the channel type OMNI REC OMNII OMNIS REC IN L REC IN R E O a SLOT1 1 SLOT1 16 2 SLOT2 1 SLOT2 16 s SLOT3 1 SLOT3 16 DANTEI 322 DANTEI DANTE32 e 64 DANTE33 DANTE64 2 Output port select buttons These buttons assign the output port used for direct output of the currently selected INPUT channel 5 Use the output port select tabs and the output port select buttons to specify the output port that will be used for direct output and press the CLOSE button You will return to the INSERT DIRECT OUT popup window 24 CU 5 3 A Reference Manual Press the DIRECT OUT ON OFF button to turn it ON In this state direct output is enabled Adjust the input level of your external device as necessary NOTE With the factory settings all are turned off 7 If you want to change the position of the direct output access the one channel INSERT DIRECT OUT popup button and press one of the DIRECT OUT fields The DIRECT OUT field you pressed will be enabled 8 If you want to adjust the level of the direct output access either the one channel or the eight channel INSERT DIRECT OUT popup window and operate the DIRE
34. 31 Input channels e Gain compensation meter Indicates the level of the signal output to the audio network after gain compensation 3 INPUT PORT button Indicates the port that is assigned to the channel Press the button to display the PATCH popup window in which you can select a port to patch 4 Icon Channel name button Indicates the channel number icon and name Press this button to access the PATCH NAME popup window in which you can patch the input port and specify the channel name 5 Phase button Switches between normal and reverse phase settings of signals input 6 D GAIN digital gain knob Indicates the digital gain value Use the multifunction knob to adjust the level 7 Digital gain meter Indicates the level after digital gain GC ALL ON button GC ALL OFF button Switch Gain Compensation on or off for all input channels simultaneously CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual GAIN PATCH popup window 8ch GAIN PATCH x GC GC ALL ON ALL OFF CH2 CH8 ch 1 ch 2 ch 3 ch 4 ch 5 ch 6 7 8 DANTE DANTE2 DANTES DANTE4 DANTES 6 DANTE DANTES 001 001 001 002 001 003 Yoo1 004 Y001 005 YOO1 O006 001 007 001 008 rao 6 6 Se 6 6 cL A GAIN A GAIN A GAIN A GAIN A GAIN A GAIN A GAIN A GAIN L31 1 O X amp 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D GRIN D GRIN D GRIN D GRIN D D GR
35. 4 CUT button Press this button to delete the selected scene and copy it to buffer memory The numbers of the subsequent scenes will be decremented by one 5 INSERT button Press this button to insert the scene copied to buffer memory into the selected scene number The numbers of the subsequent scenes will be incremented by one 6 UNDO button 2 Cancels the most recent scene memory paste clear cut or insert operation and restores the previous state Perform the desired editing operation For more information about the procedure refer to the corresponding explanations that follow Copying and pasting a scene You can copy a scene into buffer memory and then paste it to a different scene number 1 3 NOTE The Global Paste function enables you to copy any channel or any parameter settings for the current scene then paste the data into any single or multiple scenes in memory see page 85 Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area The SCENE LIST window will appear Rotate one of the multifunction knobs to select the copy source scene number and then press the COPY button A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Copy operation CONFIRMATION 2 Copy Selected Scene CANCEL To execute the copy press the OK button The scene you selected in step 2 will be saved in buffer memory NOTE e Be aware that if you copy or cut another scene before you paste the newly copied or cut scene
36. CASCADE SLOT OUTPUT MIDI GPI PORT MAIN 0 sus BATTERY POWER SUPPLY DANTE NETWORK CONSOLE CONTRAST BRIGHTNESS LOCK NAME CH COLOR SCREEN RECO CD MEC PANEL 3 Press the SAVE KEY button MO _ CH1 ch 1 0 00 00 UserO1 Send To MIXI foe 000 Initial Data 165 User settings Security The SAVE KEY popup window will appear SAVE KEY on ri Select Destination to Save Current User Key SAVE TO INTERNAL STORAGE g User 01 g User 02 SAVE TO USB STORAGE PATH d User 01 CLU CANCEL SAVE TO 4 Press the save destination button and then press the SAVE TO button authentication key press OK button CtCtU 3 C 1 3 5 Adialog box will ask you to confirm that you want to overwrite that user Reference Manual Changing the user level You can view or change the user level e Administrator The Administrator does not have a user level setting but can change the user level setting of the Guest account The Guest can view the user level setting of the Guest account but cannot change it A normal user can view the user level setting of his or her User account but cannot change it e Power User A power user can view and change his or her User account In the Function Access Area press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen _ CH1 ch 1 0 00 00 ADMIN Send To MIX1 CURRENT USER STORAGE e ue CREATE
37. CU 5 6 VL 3 V Reference Manual Setting the network address This section explains how to set the network address that will be required when you use the NETWORK connector on the CL series console to connect it to a computer NOTE Only the Administrator can change network settings 1 In the Function Access Area press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen 2 Inthe center of the SETUP screen press the NETWORK button to access the NETWORK popup window NETWORK IP ADDRESS SUBNET MASK D 9 168 0 255 255 255 0 GATEWAY ADDRESS 2 168 0 1 CANCEL MAC ADDRESS 00 00 00 00 00 00 OK 1 IP ADDRESS Specifies an address that identifies an individual device on the Internet or LAN network 2 GATEWAY ADDRESS Specifies an address that identifies a device gateway that converts data between different media or protocols to allow communication within the network 3 SUBNET MASK Within the IP address used in the network this defines the bits that are used for the network address that distinguishes the network 4 MAC ADDRESS Indicates the MAC Machine Access Control address which identifies a host in a network This address is for display only and cannot be edited NOTE The NETWORK connector on the CL series console transmits data via either 100BASE TX transmission speed maximum 100 Mbps or 10BASE T transmission speed max 10 Mbps 205 3 6 Other functions Press
38. Console Lock You can temporarily prohibit console operations in order to prevent unwanted operation This setting completely disables operations of the panel and touch screen so that controllers cannot be operated by an accidental touch or by an unauthorized third party while the operator is taking a break If a password is set for the currently logged in user that password will be used for the Console Lock function NOTE f you have forgotten the password refer to Initializing the unit to the factory default settings in the separate Owner s Manual The Guest cannot set a password Even while the console is locked you can operate the console from an external device via MIDI or CL Editor as usual Locking the console 1 In the Function Access Area press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen _ CHI ch 1 CURRENT USER STORAGE 0 00 00 ADMIN ae CREATE SAVE LOAD Administrator USER KEY PASSWORD CHANGE How all operations are permitted SYSTEM SETUP 48V MASTER BUS SETUP MIXER SETUP WORD CLOCK CASCADE OUTPUT MIDI GPI SLOT PORT BATTERY MAIN NETWORK POWER SUPPLY SUB DANTE Tee CONTRAST BRIGHTNESS P NAME COLOR SCREEN PANEL LAMP N Initial Data 2 Press the CONSOLE LOCK button CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual If you are logged in as a user for whom a password is set a keyboard window will appear allowing
39. MONO C CUE L R NOTE In the case of the CL3 CL1 channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown 2 Channel select buttons R Select the channel to be assigned to the output port you selected in step 3 c Ta ero en as one SUE E 2 In the top part of the screen press the channel number channel name field to access the PATCH NAME popup window 1 9 CU 5 UL 3 A Reference Manual Input and output patching In the PATCH NAME popup window you can view and change the channel name icon channel e EFFECT FXIL A FXSR B color and input port assigned to each input channel e PREMIUM RACK PRIL A PR2R B 5 Input port select buttons PATCH NAME Assign an input port to the currently selected input channel PATCH 6 Tabs Enable you to switch between items DANTE gt 7001 001 3 Access the input port selection screen of the PATCH NAME popup window and then use the input port select tabs and input port select buttons to select an input port NOTE If PATCH CONFIRMATION is ON a confirmation dialog box will appear when you attempt to change the patch settings If STEAL PATCH CONFIRMATION is ON a confirmation dialog box will appear when you attempt to change a location that is already patched elsewhere 4 When you have finished making settings press the x symbol located in the upper right to close the window You will return to
40. Output Patch MATRIX OUTPUT PATCH GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH OUTPUT PATCH eee Insert MV Gain Gain Compensation _O_ MATRIXINSERT PATCH GLOBALHA MAINXPROCESSING T MMNKMOCBSNG _ m u fre cana enis Dynamics omms WSWXDmN _ Bae MWRXSA TOSHBALGIOALPATEONU MATRIX FADERON _ I WITH MATRIX SEND WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs WITH MATRIX SEND 4 RR WITH MATRIX SEND WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs WITH MATRIX SENDS From Mix From Stereo Mono Pan Balance o 0 WITH MATRIX SEND WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs WITH MATRIX mu A Appendices 4 These parameters are available if FADER ON or PROCESSING for the Send source channel is set to ON At that time WITH SEND for the Send destination channel must also be set to ON 5 Applicable to parameters that function only when ALL is selected 6 Applicable only to On Off 7 Valid when they are set for either the Send source channel or Send destination channel 8 Settings marked GLOBAL in this table apply to all channels these settings are GLOBAL RECALL SAFE FOCUS PARAMETER and GLOBAL PASTE for PATCH NAME 9 Applies to ALL only when using GLOBAL PASTE and only to ON OFF 11 Balance only 12 For GLOBAL PASTE the MIX MATRIX STEREO and MONO setti
41. PLAY REC INPUT OUTPUT NO ASSIGN STINIL STINIR L RIL RtIR 1 PLAY button 2 REC button 3 Progress bar NOTE As an alternative to switching the effect type you can also recall the FREEZE effect type from the effect library T 29 CU 5 C UL 3 1 Reference Manual 5 To begin recording sampling press the REC button and then press the PLAY button The signal being input to the effect will be recorded The bar reflects the current recording progress When a fixed time has elapsed the buttons will automatically turn off NOTE You can adjust the parameters in the window to make detailed settings for recording time the way in which recording will begin and the way in which the sample will play back For details on the parameters refer to the Appendices see page 242 To play back the recorded sample press the PLAY button NOTE The sampled content will be erased if you record another sample change the effect or turn off the power to the CL unit Using the Premium Rack About the Premium Rack The CL series console features processors that faithfully emulate meticulously selected vintage analog processors and a newly developed Premium Rack as well as graphic EQs and built in effects The Premium Rack employs VCM technology which models analog circuitry on a component level to faithfully reproduce and fine tune amazing analog sounds The Premium Rack offers six types of
42. POST METER METER METER METER GR METER LEVEL BAL oy S INSERT arr H AND COMPAND D INSERT A LRMONO C tooureurearcu EQ EXPAND To MONITOR SELECT PRE FADER EQ POSTEQ INSERT OUT WIPRE FADER POST ON PRE EQ Keyin POST ON Self PRE EQ Self POST EQ MIX21 24 INSERT OUT INSERT OUT ST L R MONO C POST EQ CUE ON PRE FADER PFL POST ON AFL p P Q lt MATRIX1 3 7 LEVEL jj ON PRE FADER POST MATRIX MATRIX2 4 8 LEVEL ON VARI 4 LEVEL of ONS o Gilly PRE FADER TOMATRIA PAN BAL STEREO m MATRIX channel These channels process the signals sent from input channels MIX channels and STEREO MONO channels to MATRIX buses and send them to the corresponding output ports MIX 12 2324 M N ST MATRIX CUE R C 12 78 LR E MATRIX 1 8 INSERT POINT ToRACKIN PATCH p POSTON INSERT OUT ToOUTPUTPATCH MATRIX Bm PRE FADER INSERT OUT INSERT OUT 1 8 i PREEQ INSERT OUT MATRIX INSERT IN 1 8 PRE EQ EQOUT DYNAOU PREFADER POST ON METER METER METER METER GR METER LEVEL BAL Qu MATRIX OUT 1 8 INSERT ar
43. and Quick Guide sections in the separate Owner s Manual 2 Inthe function access area press the I O DEVICE button to access the I O DEVICE screen _ CH1 ch 1 20 30 34 ADMIN Send To MIXI I O device and external head amp Inthe upper part of the I O DEVICE screen press the DANTE PATCH tab to access the DANTE PATCH field The DANTE PATCH field includes the following items DAN EXTERNAL HA DANTE SETUP 2 DEVICE OUTPUT 4 PORT SETUP D VO device list This shows the ID number and model name of the I O devices Press here to access the OUTPUT PATCH popup window where you can specify patching from the consoles output ports to the I O devices 2 DANTE SETUP button Press this button to open the DANTE SETUP popup window in which you can make settings for the audio network 3 DANTE INPUT PATCH button Press this button to open the DANTE INPUT PATCH popup window in which you can select any of 64 channels that will be input from the I O devices to the console 4 OUTPUT PORT SETUP button Press this button to access the PATCH VIEW 1 tab ofthe OUTPUT PORT popup window where you can choose the 64 channels that will be output from the consoles output ports to I O devices 4 To specify the 64 channels that will be input from the I O devices to the console press the DANTE INPUT PATCH button The DANTE INPUT PATCH popup window will appear This popup window includes the following items
44. 2 Press the USER SETUP button to access the USER SETUP popup window In the Function Access Area press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen CUSTOM FADER BANK MASTER FADER for Administrator MASTER FADER CHANNEL ASSIGN 5 USTOM FADER 3 Press the CUSTOM FADER tab to access the CUSTOM FADER BANK MASTER FADER page If you are logged in as the Administrator you can also turn on the FOR GUEST button in the lower right of the screen to access the CUSTOM FADER BANK MASTER FADER for Guest page and make custom fader bank settings for the Guest account This page includes the following items 1 CUSTOM FADER BANK field Bank select buttons Enable you to select a custom fader bank to which you want to assign a group of channels The number and name of the custom fader banks vary depending on the console model CL5 Al A2 B1 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 Al A2 B1 B2 Al B1 B2 B3 B4 173 User settings Security 2 MASTER FADER field e MASTER button Press this button to set channels that will be controlled by the faders in the Master fader section 3 Block indicators Display the graphics of the block and faders that are the current target for editing The graphics vary depending on the console model CL5 A 16 faders B C MASTER CL3 A 16 faders MASTER 8 faders MASTER 4 Fader select button Selects the target fader Press this button to s
45. 8 18 8 18 8 8 USER DEFINED KEYS 60 41 48 MATRIX STEREO ok 49 5 o 57 64 a ST IN 65 72 e BE E oo 0 8 8 el CUSTOM B1 Centralogic m Bank Select keys If you press one of the Bank Select keys the channels or DCA groups corresponding to that key will be assigned to the Centralogic section and can be controlled using the faders ON keys and CUE keys in the Centralogic section 11 Centralogic section Operations in the Centralogic section Follow the steps below to perform operations in the Centralogic section 1 Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to select the channels or DCA groups that you want to control When you press a Bank Select key the LED of that key will light The touch screen will display the OVERVIEW screen and the parameters of the eight channels you selected will appear NOTE When the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen is displayed you can switch to the OVERVIEW screen by pressing any of the multifunction knobs 1 8 This is convenient if you want to quickly switch to the OVERVIEW screen while leaving the same channels or DCA groups selected for control Use the faders and ON keys in the Centralog
46. Appendices RING MOD Two input two output ring modulator FFM FREQ 0 05 40 00Hz Oscilator frequency modulation seed FM DEPTH 0 100 Oscillator frequency modulation depth SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off FM NOTE Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FM FREQ 1 fF ddd d de d dea MOD FILTER Two input two output modulation filter rea Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ n GS B d de d d DYNA FILTER Two input two output dynamically controlled filter DR ur Down or downward frequency change Filter frequency change decay speed 1 6 0 ms 46 0 fs 44 1 kHz 5 0 ms 42 3 s fs 48 kHz CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual REV CHORUS One input two output reverb and chorus effects in parallel p HPF TARU High passfiter cutoff frequeny U U U Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ fF BIS ddd ded J d d REV CHORUS One input two output reverb and chorus effects in series _ Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ Un fF Be ddd ded J d d 239 Appendices REV FLANGE One input two output reverb and flanger effects in parallel pk wea HPF THRU 21 2 H2 B 00 Wie High pas
47. COLOR SCREEN PANEL LAMP ni O scx ond Initial Data 2 Inthe upper left of the screen press the USER SETUP button to access the USER SETUP popup window This popup window enables you to limit available functionality by user and also to make system wide settings This window includes several pages which you can switch between using the tabs located at the bottom of the window CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual 3 Press the USER DEFINED KEYS tab to select the USER DEFINED KEYS page The USER DEFINED KEYS page enables you to assign functions to USER DEFINED keys 1 16 USER DEFINED key popup button USER DEFINED YS for Administrator SEHDS OH FADER SEHDS OH FADER MIX FADER MATRIX FADER PREFERENCE 4 Press the popup button for the USER DEFINED key to which you want to assign the UHNLATCH PAGE CHANGE BOOKMARK PAGE CHANGE BOOKMARK PAGE CHANGE BOOKMARK PAGE CHANGE BOOKMARK MUTE MASTER MUTE GROUP 1 TALKBACK TALKBACK OH UHLATCH NED USER DEFINED KNOBS Mute On Off function The USER DEFINED KEY SETUP popup window will appear 5 Choose MUTE MASTER in the FUNCTION column and choose MUTE GROUP x where x is the mute group number in the PARAMETER 1 column Then press the OK button To select an item in each column use buttons or the multifunction knobs When you press the OK button the Mute On Off function for the specified mute g
48. INPUT PORT TRIM Centralogic T OUTPUT PORT 1 8 TRIM MASTER OUTPUT TRIM FADER CALIBRATION COLOR CALIBRATION SLOT Select faders with SEL and Press START Button EXIT a MODE SELECT STORE BIN Press a SEL key to specify the faders that you want to calibrate Faders for which a problem was detected at start up will already be selected Press the START button A confirmation dialog box will appear Press the OK button in the dialog box Each of the specified faders will move to the target positions in the following sequence Manually adjust the faders to the correct positions 1 dB all the way down 2 20 dB 3 0 dB 4 10 dB all the way up After you adjust the fader position press the NEXT button The process will proceed to the next fader position CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual 8 Repeat steps 6 7 to adjust the faders for positions 1 through 4 After the positions are corrected automatic motorized calibration will start 9 When calibration is complete and if the RESTART button has not appeared press the APPLY button The calibration settings will be saved in internal memory If the RESTART button appears calibration has failed Press the RESTART button to execute calibration once again 10 Press the EXIT button The CL unit will start up in normal operating mode NOTE Alternatively you can continue operation by selecting a diff
49. Initial Data 3 Press the TO MATRIX SEND LEVEL knob for the desired send destination MATRIX bus A bold frame will appear around all TO MATRIX SEND LEVEL knobs for that MATRIX bus 52 Output channels 4 Use multifunction knobs 1 8 to adjust the send level of the signals sent from up to eight MIX channels or the STEREO MONO channels to the selected MATRIX bus If necessary you can use the Bank Select keys and the SEL keys in the Centralogic section to switch the send source channel NOTE f you want to monitor signals being sent to a specific MATRIX bus use the Bank Select keys to access the corresponding MATRIX channel in the Centralogic section and then press the CUE key for that MATRIX channel f you again press the currently selected MATRIX bus select button cue monitoring will be turned on for the related MATRIX channel This method is convenient if you want to monitor a signal that is being sent to the selected MATRIX bus 5 If you want to make detailed settings for MATRIX sends press the TO MATRIX SEND LEVEL knob inside the bold frame once again When you press the currently selected TO MATRIX SEND LEVEL knob a second time the MATRIX SEND popup window will appear The window includes the following items 7 MATRIX SEND to MATRIX1 NEM 8 cae X TSEND TO set HIX17 MIX18 19 HIX20 MIX21 MIX22 MIX23 HIX24 6 1 Fx 2 Fx 3 Fx 4 Fx 5 Fx 6 7 Fx 8 7
50. NOTE Alternatively you can continue operation by selecting a different menu instead of pressing the EXIT button 212 Other functions Adjusting the brightness of the channel name display If necessary you can adjust the brightness of the channel name display 1 While holding down the SCENE MEMORY STORE key of the panel turn on the power After the welcome screen the following startup menu screen will appear Press the CHANNEL COLOR CALIBRATION button The CHANNEL COLOR CALIBRATION MODE screen will appear allowing you to adjust the channel color Press the CUE key or ON key of the channel whose brightness you want to adjust Pressing the CUE key will increase the brightness and pressing the ON key will decrease the brightness When you have finished adjusting the brightness press the APPLY button located in the right of the screen to confirm the change APPLY Press the EXIT button The CL will start up in normal operating mode NOTE Alternatively you can continue operation by selecting a different menu instead of pressing the EXIT button CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual Adjusting the contrast of the channel name display If necessary you can adjust the contrast of the channel name display 1 While holding down the SCENE MEMORY STORE key of the panel turn on the power After the welcome screen the following startup menu screen will appear 2 Press the CHANNEL
51. NOTE For the CL3 CL1 the INPUT PATCH OUTPUT PATCH fields will be shown crossed out if a channel that does not exist on that model has been specified 6 Rack container Indicates the contents of the rack This container varies depending on the rack type you selected in the RACK MOUNTER popup window CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual If nothing is mounted Press this area to open the RACK MOUNTER popup window in which you can select the GEQ or effect that will be mounted in the rack e If 31BandGEQ is mounted 8 This area indicates the settings for each on off status and input output level Press this area to open the GEQ EDIT popup window in which you can modify the GEQ settings e If Flex15GEQ is mounted This area indicates the settings for each band the GEQ on off status and the input and output levels for A and B respectively Press this area to open the GEQ EDIT popup window in which you can modify the GEQ settings for A and B If an effect is mounted EFFECT rack only This area indicates the effect type number of inputs and outputs bypass on off status and the input output level Press this area to open the EFFECT EDIT popup window in which you can modify the effect settings 7 Link indicator Indicates that an odd numbered rack and even numbered rack of the 31BandGEQ or and B of the Flex15GEQ are linked each other Graphic EQ effe
52. O LEVEL 1 100 100 phase PAN 1 L63 to R63 Channel 1 pan DELAY 1 0 0 1000 0 ms Channel 1 delay time iio Pwh iipmdin _ Channel 2 level plus values for normal phase minus values for reverse O LEVEL 2 100 to 100 phase PAN 2 L63 to R63 Channel 2 pan DELAY 2 0 0 1000 0 ms Channel 2 delay time FB G2 99 to 19996 Channel 2 feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off NOTE 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine Channel 1 delay NOTE 2 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine Channel 2 delay 1 H bh ddd JD d da d d oa Maximum value depends on the tempo setting TREMOLO Two input two output tremolo effect Modulation speed NOTE 1 Used ea with TEMPO to determine FREQ tar EQ peaking SSS 20104120dB 100910 t pekngbpobadwdh sua D d daed d on CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual AUTOPAN Two input two output autopanner FREQ 008 4000 Tz m 00 00 FQ peaking type frequency Qpeaking type bandwidth 1 LOR LOR LR Turn L Turn R 2 Hd B III B gh ddd PD 4 da d d ROTARY One input two output rotary speaker simulator 238
53. 0 00 0 00 SLOT 3 OUTPUT 4 5 D La v MODE SELECT 9 9 La v MODE SELECT e OUTPUT PORT TRIM Fine adjustment of the output port gain i i i Access the OUTPUT PORT TRIM window and make fine adjustments to the gain of the specified analog output port in 0 01 dB steps 3 Press on screen knob to select it and then use the corresponding multifunction ane POH EAE knob to adjust the value If you press the RESET ALL button provided in each screen all settings in the screen will be reset to 0 dB The factory settings are also 0 dB 4 Press the EXIT button RESET ALL The CL unit will start up in normal operating mode 1 2 3 vu reais 6 7 8 Q Q Q Q Q Q Alternatively you can continue operation by selecting a different menu instead of pressing the 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 EXIT button DIGITAL OUT L 5c 0 00 0 00 la v MODE SELECT 21 CU 5 6 UL 3 1 1 Reference Manual Adjusting the channel color Calibration function If necessary you can adjust the channel color 1 While holding down the SCENE MEMORY STORE key on the panel turn on the power to the CL unit After the welcome screen the following startup menu screen will appear MODE SELECT IHITIALIZE ALL MEMORIES INITIALIZE ALL MEMORIES INITIALIZE amp v BM INITIALIZE 211 2 5 Other functions Press the CHANNEL C
54. 3 DIRECT OUT ON button Switches the Direct Out on or off 4 DIRECT OUT LEVEL knob Indicates the output level of the Direct Out Press this knob to control the level using the multifunction knob 5 APPLY TO ALL INPUT button input channels only Specifies whether the insert point Direct Out point settings will be applied to all input channels INSERT DIRECT OUT popup window 8ch INSERT DIRECT OUT CH 1 CH 2 CH 5 ch 1 ch 4 ch 5 INSERT OUT ul IN c IN Z EC TOUT 1 DIRECT OUT ON button Switches the Direct Out on or off The currently selected Direct Output point is indicated above the button 2 DIRECT OUT PATCH button Press this button to open the PORT SELECT popup window in which you can select a Direct Out output port The name of the currently selected port will appear on the button 3 DIRECT OUT LEVEL knob Indicates the output level of the Direct Out Press this knob to control the level using the multifunction knob Input and output patching 4 Access either the one channel or the eight channel INSERT DIRECT OUT popup window and press the DIRECT OUT popup button The PORT SELECT popup window will appear allowing you to select the output port used for direct output The window includes the following items PORT SELECT El Select candidate OMNI REC
55. 4 To execute the Insert operation press the OK button The scene stored in buffer memory will be inserted at the scene number you selected in step 3 If you selected multiple scenes as the insert destination the same scene will be inserted multiple times starting at the scene number you selected Scenes that were stored in subsequent numbers following that location will be updated and increase by the number of scenes that were inserted 85 Scene memory Using the Global Paste function Global Paste is a function that lets you copy and paste settings for the desired channel or parameter from the current scene to scene data in memory multiple selections are allowed This can be convenient if you want to apply changes that you made to the current scene to multiple scenes that have already been stored NOTE The Global Paste function will be available for a user if the SCENE LIST STORE SORT parameter is turned on in his or her user level settings 1 In the Function Access Area press the SCENE field to access the SCENE LIST window 2 Press the GLOBAL PASTE button located in the upper part of the SCENE LIST window to open the GLOBAL PASTE window This window enables you to select the copy source channels parameters and specify the paste destination scene number CH17 32 DESTINATION SCENE FROM NO TITLE CH33 48 CH49 64 CH65 72 ST IN Initial Data 1 SET BY SEL Initial Data FROM TO Y SEND PARAMETER
56. 8B PANEL SNAPSHOT A B CH 17 32 CH33 48 CH49 64 MIX 9 16 CH65 72 1 CLEAR ALL button SET ALL button Turns off or on all focus channel selections and global focus parameter settings Focus channel display field Indicates the target channel for a Recall operation The view of this field is the same as that in the RECALL SAFE popup window To add channels as the target turn the SET BY SEL button 2 on and then press the corresponding SEL keys for the desired channels 2 SET BY SEL button Turn on this button to add a channel by using the corresponding SEL key When you press the SEL key of a channel the on screen fader of the corresponding channel will turn green all parameters will be recalled or blue only some parameters will be recalled Press the same SEL key once again to de select the channel NOTE In the case of the CL3 CL1 channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual Channel focus parameter display field Enables you to select parameters for each channel that will be affected by Recall operations You can use the same procedure as that in the RECALL SAFE popup window 3 FOCUS button Switches the Focus Recall function on or off GLOBAL FOCUS PARAMETER field Indicates the parameters and racks that will be affected by Recall operations for any scene Procedures and contents are the same as those in the RECALL SAFE
57. EN 77000 O gt CH 1 8 9 16 17 24 25 32 33 4041 48 POSTEQ CLT POSTPANL POST PAN R Z PRE EQ PRE FADER POST ON PLEVEL XN axo pr LEVEL 1 4 PRE EQ PRE FADER POST ON PAL eer IE I ES To MATRIX PRE EQ PRE FADER POST ON MON SPN A LEVEL MATRIX 3 7 Roe oN Pel le gt gt mx 22 2 o x Ps Pin 5 A s 2 1 VARI SON SONG LEVEL MATRIX2 4 8 IE EB f 0 1 MATRIX PRE EQ PRE FADER POST ON aal o ohPN NP LEVEL t STEREO i 1 d 4 PRE FADERJPFL POST POST CUEL N PRE FADER PFL POST ONJAFL POST R ON CUER i ll UC Input channels STEREO channel These channels are used to process stereo signals When the CL series console is in the default state the input signal from the EFFECT RACK 1 8 is assigned M MX ST MATRIX CUE 12 2324 LR C 12 78 LR IN 1L 8R POST PAN L DYNA1OUT POST ON EQ OUT DYNA2OUT PRE FADER mm MONO ST RU MODE af 9e i S zm CSR ee M db uu ccu lt gPAN LINK oe ee Self PRE EQ aerate eee hea eee Self POST EQ Tomix TS EE 5 i All parameters for Land Rare MIX21 24 OUT SAME as INPUT
58. MIDI This page includes the following items MIDI GPI PROGRAM CHANGE SING oi TOLL BAHK NO PROGRAM CHANGE EVENT SCENE 001 SCENE 01 SCENE 002 SCENE 02 SCENE 003 SCENE 03 SCENE 004 SCENE 04 CLEAR SCENE 005 ALL gt INITIALIZE SCENE 006 1 ALL 1 PROGRAM CHANGE Switches Program Change transmission and reception on or off This setting is linked with the PROGRAM CHANGE section on the MIDI SETUP page Meo cavern Turn this button on to transmit corresponding Program Change messages when events on the list are executed os Turn this button on to execute corresponding events when Program Change messages are received v ECHO seit Turn this button on to transmit Program Change messages that are received from an external device 2 PROGRAM CHANGE MODE field Enables you to select the Program Change transmit receive mode This setting is linked with the PROGRAM CHANGE MODE section on the MIDI SETUP page 3 List Shows the event scene recall or library recall assigned to each MIDI channel and MIDI Program Change number The list shows the following items If CH appears as the column heading instead of BANK the column indicates the MIDI channel 1 16 on which Program Changes are transmitted received If Program Change transmission and reception is in Single mode and the BANK button is on this will be labeled BANK and the numerical value in
59. MONO EQ 3894 3899 MATRIXS 8 ON 389A 389F 3825 38AB 38B1 38B7 38BD 38C3 38C9 38CF 38D5 38DB 38E1 38E7 38ED 38F3 38F9 38FF 3905 390B 3911 3969 39 1 3A01 3A41 3A4D 3A59 3A61 3B05 INSERT MIX21 24 MONO 2F46 2F4A GAINT5 38AC GEQ RACK4A 6B MIX1 SEND 2FAC 2F8B een nee ON 3538 3535 GAIN16 38B2 MIX2 SEND 2F8C 2FCB GAINT7 38B8 MIX3 SEND 2FCC 300B MATRIX5 SEND 3540 354F GAINT8 38BE INPUT1 56 STIN1 4 MIX4 SEND 300C 304 29990 GAIN19 38C4 MIX1 8 PRE POST MIX5 SEND 304 308B i MATRIX7 SEND 3560 356F GAIN20 38CA MIX6 SEND 308C 30CB MATRIX8 SEND 3570 357F GAIN21 38D0 MIX7 SEND 30CC 310B MATRIXS SEND 3580 358F GAIN22 38D6 MIX8 SEND 310C 314 INPUT65 72 STIN5 8 to MATRIX6 SEND 3590 359F GAIN23 38DC MATRIX5 SEND 314C 318B MATRIX7 SEND 35A0 35AF GAIN24 38E2 INPUT1 56 STIN1 4 MATRIX6 SEND 318C 31CB 2900 GAIN25 38E8 MATRIX5 8 PRE POST MATRIX7 SEND 31CC 320B MATRIXS SEND 35C0 35CF GAIN26 38EE MATRIX8 SEND 320C 324B INPUT65 72 STINS 8 to MATRIX6 SEND 3500 35DF GAIN27 38F4 a sar MATRIX5 8 PRE POST MATRIX7 SEND 35E0 35EF CAINDS ENSEM 8 SEND 35F0 FADER 3252 3285 MATRIX8 SEND 35F0 35FF GAIN29 3900 BALANCE MIX21 24 MONO 3258 325C INPUT65 72 STINS 8 to 5 6 oy 2608 GAIN30 3906 MATRIX5 6 7 8 PAN MATRIX7 8 3610 361F CN sone INPUT1 56 STIN1 4 HPF FREQ 3640 367F LCRINPUT1 64 STIN1 4 3912 3680 3684 MIX1 16 396A
60. Microsoft Windows create a text file file extension txt and save it on your USB flash drive By default the character code set of the text file will be detected as UTF 8 However by adding a line consisting of ISO 8859 1 or Shift JIS at the beginning of the file you can force recognition of the file using that character code set You can specify the desired character code set when using your text editor to save the text file The Help function is able to display the following text files character code sets languages Text files written in the ISO 8859 1 character code set English German French Spanish etc Text files written in the Shift JIS character code set Japanese e Text files of the above languages written in the UTF 8 character code set The maximum size of the text file is 1024 Kbytes 2 In the Function Access Area press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen Press the SAVE LOAD button to access the SAVE LOAD popup window 4 To select the text file you want to load press one of the text files in the file list or turn the multifunction knob on the panel 5 Press the LOAD button A confirmation dialog box will appear Press the OK button to load the file 1 93 CU 5 6 3 1 Reference Manual Viewing Help 1 2 Inthe Function Access Area press the Help button to access the HELP popup window Before you proceed load the Help file or text file from your USB fl
61. NETWORK BATTERY MAIN BRIGHTNESS NAME CH COLOR SCREEN PANEL LAMP Q GT Q Q Q PT Initial Data 3 Press the CREATE USER KEY button 1 59 CU 5 6 UL 3 1 1 Reference Manual The CREATE USER KEY popup window will appear USER NAME COMMENT PASSWORD ACCESS PERMISSION CH OPERATION CURRENT SCENE CH17 32 INPUT INPUT PATCH NAME gus OUTPUT ouTPUT SETUP CH33 48 CH49 64 MIX 9 16 PATCH NAME GEQ RACK CH65 72 ST IN MIX 17 24 RACK 1 RACK 2 RACKS RACK 4 RACKS RACK 6 RACK RACK S STEREO RACK 9 RRCK10 RACKI1 12 MATRIX MONO RRCK13 RACKI RACKIS RACKIB EFFECT RACK RACK 1 RACK 2 RACK 3 RACK 4 RACKS RACK 6 RACK RACKS PREMIUM RACK CH1 RACK 1 RACK 2 RACK RACK 4 RACKS RACK 6 RACK RACK 8 FADER OH ch 1 Lu rocessins ranesvon MUTE GROUP MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MASTER SCENE LIST FILE LOAD STORE SYSTEM SETUP SORT USER SETUP MONITOR SETUP LIBRARY LIST SYSTEM SETUP STORE RECALL CURRENT X SCENE LIBRARY MIXER OUTPUT MIDI CLEAR SCENE LIST LIST SETUP PORT GPI MONITOR SETUP OSCILLATOR TALKBACK CANCEL 1 USER NAME Indicates the user name of up to eight characters Press this area to access a keyboard window in which you can enter the user name 2 COMMENT Enables you to specify and view a comment of up to 32 characters about the user Press this area to access a keyboard window in which y
62. Q RATIO ATTACK RELEASE 1 1 2 THRESHOLD 30 4 1 OOST 3 8 5 00 2 1 00 1 30 OdB 1 BAND ON OFF button Turns each band on or off CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual 2 SIDECHAIN CUE button Press this button on to monitor the sidechain signal sent to the CUE bus At this time the graph indicates the filter response for the sidechain 3 SIDECHAIN LISTEN button Turn this button on to output the sidechain signal linked to the dynamics to the bus such as a STEREO bus or MIX MATRIX bus to which the insert channel signal is sent At this time the graph indicates the response of the sidechain filters 4 FILTER TYPE buttons Switch the type of the main bus equalizers and sidechain filters Main bus EQ and sidechain filter will link as follows FILTER TYPE Low Shelf Bell Hi Shelf Manta Sidechain filter LPF BPF HPF 5 FREQUENCY knob Sets the frequency band that will be controlled by the equalizer and sidechain filter 6 knob Sets the Q value steepness of the equalizer and sidechain filter As you rotate this knob clockwise the frequency range to which the equalizer or sidechain filter is applied will become wider 7 THRESHOLD knob Specifies the threshold at which the processor will begin taking an effect RATIO knob Sets the boost cut ratio relative to the input signal Rotating the knob clockwise will set the ratio for boost and
63. REWIND TORRE FORWARD So TO NEXT MARKER TRANSPORT PROJECT END TO PROJECT END END the transport functions of Nuendo NUENDO Live LIVE S RECORDING PEAK CLEAR FUR Clear the peak indicators of the Nuendo Live screen OSCILLATOR ON PS Switch the OSC on off While holding down this key press a SEL key of a channel to switch the assignment on off During this time the SEL LED will be lit if assign is ON or dark if OFF DIRECT ASSIGN O to the channel selected SOURCE SELECT Switch MUTE GROUP MASTER on off OSCILLATOR SELECTED CH ASSIGN CU 5 6 VL 3 V Reference Manual FUNCTION PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2 Explanation Memorize the currently selected screen hold down the key for two seconds or longer or display the last memorized screen press and BOOKMARK release the key within two seconds Popup screens can also be memorized In the case of a rack the number of that rack is also PAGE memorized CHANGE TP Memorize the above BOOKMARK with the BOOKMARK with SEL s addition of the SEL status PREVIOUS PAGE isplay the previous next page NEXT PAGE did i CLOSE POPUP Close the displayed popup window PLAY PAUSE STOP FF NEXT Display the previous next page REW PREVIOUS REC Shortcut function for STOP gt REC gt PLAY Recording will be initiated in a single action If this is executed du
64. Recording audio to a USB flash drive You can record the signal of the desired output channels as an audio file MP3 onto the USB flash drive inserted in the USB connector located to the right of the display 1 Inthe Function Access Area press the RECORDER button to access the RECORDER screen 2 Press the USB tab in the upper right of the screen FI DELETE MAKE DIR PATH VOLUME CRST RKI0 2 AYPEASONGSA RECORDER FREE SIZE 1 868 92 NO FILE M ARTIST gt TIME Artist 00 00 13 SONGO02 MP3 Artist 00 00 07 MOVE MOVE FILE SAVE P 4 4 NAME LIST RELOAD Omm al 01 soncoo1 mp3 PLAY MODE NAA _ 45 I Pil 192kbps EX REQORDER PLAYBACK OWT a OD amp Q9 Q QA TRANSPORT field This field enables you to control recording and playback of a song 1 Current song Indicates the currently selected songs track number title and artist name The following indicators will appear during playback or recording Playing Recording PLAY MODE PLAY MODE 001 00 00 00 a 00 03 14 SINGLE SINGLE REC RATE REC RATE I lI 192kbps 2 Elapsed time display Indicates the elapsed playback time of the current song during playback and the elapsed recording time during recording CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual 3 Remaining time display Indicates the remaining pla
65. These messages are echoed to MIDI OUT if OTHER COMMAND ECHO is ON They are received if Rx CH matches and used to control effects STATUS 1001nnnn 9n Note on message DATA Onnnnnnn nn Note number Ovvvvvvw vv Velocity 1 127 on 0 off 1 3 CONTROL CHANGE Bn Two types of CONTROL CHANGE can be transmitted and received NRPN Non Registered Parameter Numbers and freely assigned TABLE 1CH x 110 messages Select either TABLE or NRPN Reception These messages are echoed to MIDI OUT if CONTROL CHANGE ECHO is ON If TABLE is selected these messages are received when CONTROL CHANGE Rx is ON and Rx CH matches and will control parameters according to the settings of the CONTROL CHANGE EVENT LIST For the parameters that can be assigned refer to Parameters that can be assigned to control changes on page 248 If NRPN is selected these messages are received when CONTROL CHANGE Rx is ON and the CH matches the four messages NRPN control number 62h 63h and DATA ENTRY control number 06h 26h are used to control the specified parameter Transmission If TABLE is selected and if CONTROL CHANGE Tx is ON when you operate a parameter that is assigned in the CONTROL CHANGE EVENT LIST these messages will be transmitted on the Tx CH channel For the parameters that can be assigned refer to Parameters that can be assigned to control changes on page 248 If NRPN is selected and if CONTROL CHANGE T
66. This graph displays real time parameter values for the EQ and filter 5 EQ IN OUT level meters Indicate the peak level of signals before and after the EQ For a stereo channel these meters indicate the level of both the L and R channels ATT knob Indicates an attenuation amount before the signal enters the EQ You can use the multifunction knobs to adjust this 7 HPF ON OFF button input channels only Switches the HPF on or off HPF FREQUENCY knob input channels only Indicates the cutoff frequency of the HPF You can use the multifunction knobs to adjust this HPF type select button Switches the HPF attenuation per octave between 12 dB oct and 6 dB oct 00 EQ parameter setting knobs Indicate the Q FREQUENCY and GAIN parameters for the LOW LOW MID HIGH MID and HIGH bands Press these knobs to control the parameter values using the multifunction knobs NOTE f shelving type has been selected for the LOW band or if HPF is selected for the output channels the LOW band Q parameter will not appear f shelving type has been selected for the HIGH band or if LPF is selected the HIGH band parameter will not appear EQ and Dynamics HPF EQ popup window 8ch This window displays the input channel or output channel EQ settings in groups of eight channels simultaneously Use the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to edit the EQ settings You can adjust the HPF settings of all eight channels display
67. Use SLOT1 NOTE Control signals for cascade link and MIDI messages cannot share the same port If you select a port that is already specified for transmission reception of MIDI messages a dialog box will ask whether it is OK to cancel the existing settings 7 2 Use the CASCADE LINK MODE buttons to select the item that you want to link You can choose from the following items e OFF No link operation e CUE The following cue related parameters and events will be linked e Cue enable disable Cue mode MIX CUE or LAST CUE Cue point settings for input channels and output channels ALL All linkable parameters and events including cue related parameters will be linked e Cue related parameters and events see above Scene recall operations e Scene store operations e DIMMER MONITOR screen operations e Panel LED and display brightness SETUP screen operations e Master mute group operations 8 To close the CASCADE popup window press the CLOSE button CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual Operations on the cascade master CL unit 1 In the Function Access Area press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen 2 Inthe SYSTEM SETUP field located in the center of the SETUP screen press the CASCADE button to open the CASCADE popup window 3 Press the CASCADE IN PATCH tab to access the CASCADE IN PATCH page 4 Press the port select popup button for the bus to which you want to assign a port The PORT SEL
68. VIEW screen INPUT DELAY field DYNAMICS 1 over _ CH1 1 0 00 00 ADMIN DYNAMICS 2 ovER Send MIXI OVER ON 20 100 INSERT c 4 HIGH METER gt QUER H SHELF 10 0k 3 HIGH MID DIRECT OUT 7 4 00k RECALL SAFE 0 70 LOW MID 4 Cy 0 70 1 00k a FE 000 CH3 s CHE CHT CHS s nn ch 3 ch 8 Initial Data 3 Press the INPUT DELAY field to access the INPUT DELAY popup window In the INPUT DELAY popup window you can set the on off status and the value of the input channel delay This popup window features three types of view Use the tabs near the bottom of the window to select one of four views Each window view includes the following items 44 Input channels INPUT DELAY 8ch INPUT DELAY DELAYS sample 1 DELAY SCALE button Press the button to display the DELAY SCALE popup window in which you can select the unit for the delay time DELAY SCALE Select Delay Scale 343 59 1127 26 m s ft s You can select one of the four delay scales meter meter sec feet feet sec sample number of samples and ms millisecond 2 Channel select button Lights to indicate the currently selected input channel Press the button to select the channel 3 Delay setting knob input channels only Indicates the channel delay value You can use the multifunction knob to adjust it You can view the current value immediately above the k
69. YAMAHA DIGITAL MIXING CONSOLE gt The CL5 CL3 CL1 Reference Manual this document allows you to search for terms and take advantage of links in the text _ Searching for terms To search for a term use the search function of the software youre using to view this document If you re using Adobe Reader enter the term in the search box and press the lt Enter gt key of your computer keyboard to search for occurrences of that term Displaying the next previous view If you re using Adobe Reader you can jump to the previous next view in your viewing history This is a convenient way to jump back to the previous page after you ve used a link to jump to a different page Refe rence Man ual Using the Function Tree A function tree for the CL5 CL3 CLI is provided on page 4 and following You can use this function tree to find the page that explains an on screen display or function Contents How to Use This Reference 1 Function Tree 00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 0 4 SELECTED CHANNEL section cccccccccccccsccccccccccccccccccccsssses About the SELECTED CHANNEL enne 6 Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section 6 SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW
70. and GPI General Purpose Interface functions The Playback Link function plays a desired song in a specified time duration after a scene is recalled 4 TIME STAMP sort button Sorts scenes in chronological order based on the date and time in the TIME STAMP field Each time you press this button the list will alternate between ascending and descending order 5 TIME STAMP field Indicates the date and time the scene was stored For details on the TIME STAMP display format refer to Setting the date and time ofthe internal clock on page 204 6 CURRENT SETTING field Specifies the content that will be saved by the next scene store operation Changes made here are immediately reflected on the CL series console 3 To select a scene number rotate one of the multifunction knobs on the top panel The line highlighted in blue in the scene list indicates the scene currently selected for operations 4 To sort the list press one of the column headers NO TITLE COMMENT or TIME STAMP at the top of the scene list and COMMENT field The list will be sorted as follows according to the column title you press 1 NO Sorts the list in order of scene number 2 TITLE Sorts the list in numerical alphabetical order of title 3 COMMENT Sorts the list in numerical alphabetical order of comments CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual 4 TIME STAMP Sorts the list in order of date of c
71. file after turning the power on it will take a while for the help file to be loaded from internal memory It is not possible to read from internal memory while the USB flash drive is being accessed including while the recorder is recording or playing back and therefore Help cannot be displayed during this time Once the data has finished loading subsequently pressing the HELP button will display the help file instantly 1 Before you proceed save the Help file file extension xml provided by Yamaha on your USB flash drive For the latest information on help files refer to the Yamaha Pro Audio website http www yamahaproaudio com 2 Inthe Function Access Area press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen 3 Press the SAVE LOAD button to access the SAVE LOAD popup window _ CH1 ch 1 0 00 00 VOLUME HIDE FREE SIZE 498 0MB 99 Send READ TIME FILE NAME COMMENT ONLY STAMP 7 USERO1 CLU m T m B B CREATE USER KEV FORMAT R 000 Initial Data Help function 4 To select the Help file file extension xml that you want to load press one of the Help files in the file list or turn the multifunction knob on the panel 5 Press the LOAD button A confirmation dialog box will appear Press the OK button to load the file Loading a text file from a USB flash drive 1 Using a commercially available text editor or the Notepad included with
72. is displayed instead of the TO MIX SEND LEVEL knob In this case you cannot adjust the send level HIXx1 16 If the send destination MIX bus is a VARI type or if the send destination is a MATRIX bus the TO MIX SEND LEVEL knob will be displayed in the same color as the corresponding knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section In this case you can use the corresponding knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to adjust the send level 40 Input channels HIx 1 16 If necessary you can specify two adjacent odd even numbered MIX MATRIX buses as a stereo bus and link the main parameters If the send destination MIX MATRIX bus is assigned as stereo the left knob of the two adjacent TO MIX MATRIX SEND LEVEL knobs will operate as the TO MIX MATRIX PAN knob If BALANCE mode is selected in the TO STEREO MONO popup window it will operate as a BALANCE knob 911 16 LIBRARY For a MONO channel the right knob will adjust the common send level to the two MIX MATRIX buses and the left knob will adjust the panning between the two MIX MATRIX buses Rotating the left TO MIX MATRIX SEND PAN knob counter clockwise will increase the amount of signal sent to the odd numbered MIX MATRIX bus and rotating it clockwise will increase the amount sent to the even numbered MIX MATRIX bus For a STEREO channel if BALANCE mode has been selected on the TO STEREO MONO popup window 8ch the right knob adjusts the common send level for the two MIX MATRIX bu
73. keys CUE KEY IN CUE buttons to successively restore the CUE key status of the previously selected group Monitor and Cue functions Operating the Cue function This section explains how to use the CUE key for a channel or DCA group to monitor cue signals NOTE Be aware that if you turn CUE INTERRUPTION off in the MONITOR popup window the cue signal will not be sent to the connected monitor speakers However the front panel PHONES jack will always output the cue signal regardless of the Monitor on off setting See Using the Monitor function on page 98 for details about the Monitor function 1 In the Function Access Area press the MONITOR button to access the MONITOR screen The CUE field on the MONITOR screen enables you to check the current cue settings and turn Cue on or off INPUT DCA ouTPUT LEVEL OUTPUT 4 1 PFL PRE PAN PFL 0 0 0 SOURCE SELECT STEREO T LZR i C OMNI PB O 20 0 00 DIMMER MONITOR FADE CHEN OUTPUT OVER 5 LEVEL LINK i 0 T ASSIGN 5 6 7 8 ON PINK NOISE SINE WAVE H1 48 ASSIGN BURST NOISE b 8 8 ST MONO TALKBACK IN INPUT TO TALKBACK MIX 2 1 CUE popup display button Enables you to access the CUE popup window in which you can make detailed cue settings 2 CUE MODE buttons Select the cue mode You can select MIX CU
74. or if no card is installed no SRC button will appear 3 FREQUENCY display Indicates the sampling frequency of input signals if the installed card can detect the substatus of input signals such as an AES EBU card If another type of card is installed or if no card is installed will appear 4 EMPHASIS STATUS display Indicates the emphasis information of input signals if the installed card can detect the substatus of input signals such as an AES EBU card If another type of card is installed or if no card is installed will appear 3 In the MASTER CLOCK SELECT field select a clock source 4 To close the WORD CLOCK SLOT popup window press the x symbol located in the upper right You will return to the SETUP screen 5 Toclose the SETUP screen press the SETUP button in the Function Access Area CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual Using cascade connections Using multiple CL series consoles or a CL console and an external mixing console such as a Yamaha 5 in a cascade connection enable buses to be shared among the devices This can be convenient if you want to use an external mixer to increase the number of inputs This section explains cascade connections and operation using an example in which two CL units are connected in a cascade configuration About cascade connections To cascade two CL series consoles you must first install digital I O cards in the appropriate slots a
75. ouT ST IN Sc Reverb Room gt RESL MERE ST IN Reverb Plate P LFINP2O0UTA ST IN WF Echo gt REAL CS IN 20UT1 RUR AF ST IN Mono Delay gt Rt8L 1 Rack tabs Selects the type of rack you want to display on the screen Choose from GEQ 1 8 and GEQ 9 16 GEQ rack EFFECT effect rack and PREMIUM Premium Rack Graphic EQ effects and Premium Rack 2 Rack mount popup button Press this button to open the RACK MOUNTER popup window in which you can select the type of the rack you want to mount Fx 1 GEG MOUNT MOUNT 3 SAFE toggle button Switches Recall Safe on or off for the rack Racks with Recall Safe on will be excluded from Recall operations 4 INPUT PATCH button Press this button to open the CH SELECT popup window in which you can select the path of the signal patched to the rack input The selected path will appear on the button If the type is EFFECT two buttons L R will appear If the type is Flex15GEQ two buttons A B will appear If the type is 31 BandGEQ one button will appear 5 OUTPUT PATCH button Press this button to open the CH SELECT popup window in which you can select the path of the signal patched to the rack output The selected path will appear on the button If the type is EFFECT two buttons L R will appear If the type is Flex15GEQ two buttons A B will appear If the type is 31 BandGEQ one button will appear
76. qpwam 1 In Cue Recall Safe Focus Recall Global Paste 1 These parameters can be linked between L and R of ST IN channels 1 8 2 to parameters for which the MIX channel 1 24 individual Send Parameter setting and the item in the table are both enabled 8 Applies to parameters for which the MATRIX channel 1 8 individual Send Parameter setting and the item in the table are both enabled 4 These parameters are available if FADER ON or PROCESSING for the Send source channel is set to ON At that time WITH SEND for the Send destination channel must also be set to ON 5 Applicable to parameters that function only when ALL is selected 6 Applicable only to On Off 7 Valid when assigned to either a Send source channel or a Send destination channel 8 Settings marked GLOBAL in this table apply to all channels these settings are GLOBAL RECALL SAFE FOCUS PARAMETER and GLOBAL PASTE for PATCH NAME 9 Applies to ALL only when using GLOBAL PASTE and only to ON OFF 10 Operates differentially 11 Balance only 255 CU 5 C UL 3 1 Reference Manual Appendices MIX Channels ibtd cd iat INamekonCoor MXNAME GLOBALOUTPUTNAME _ MMUNSERTPAICH GLOBALOUTPUTPATCH OUTFUTPAICH MPONSTPATICH GLOBALOUTPUTPATCH OUTPUTPATCH __ m o MXNt o CO
77. will overwrite the scene in the buffer memory You cannot select multiple scenes as the copy source CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual 4 Rotate one of the multifunction knobs to select the paste destination scene number and then press the PASTE button A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Paste operation CONFIRMATION El Paste Scene CANCEL NOTE e You can select multiple paste destination scenes To do so press the MULTI SELECT button to turn it on and then rotate a multifunction knob Alternatively rotate the multifunction knob while pressing and holding it down In this case the same content will be pasted to all selected scenes e A copied scene can also be inserted see page 85 f nothing has been stored in the buffer memory the PASTE button will be unavailable 5 To execute the paste operation press the OK button The scene stored in the buffer memory will be pasted to the scene number you selected in step 4 If you want to cancel the Paste operation press the CANCEL button instead of the OK button Clearing a scene 1 Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area The SCENE LIST window will appear 2 Rotate one of the multifunction knobs to select the scene number that you want to clear and then press the CLEAR button A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Clear operation CONFIRMATION 2 Clear Selected Scene CANCEL NOTE You may select multiple scenes to
78. 1 4 8 SELECTED CH CL5 CH1 CH72 CH1 CH64 SELECTED CH CL5 CH1 CH72 CH1 CH64 5 SELECTED CL5 CH1 CH72 CL3 CH1 CH64 CL1 SELECTED CH CL5 CH1 CH72 CH1 CH64 CH1 CHA8 ST IN 1 ST IN 8 MIX1 MIX24 CH1 CHA8 ST IN 1L ST IN 8R CH1 CHA8 ST IN 1 ST IN 8 CH1 CHA8 ST IN 1L ST IN 8R MIX1 MIX24 CH1 CHA8 ST IN 1L ST IN 8R MIX1 MIX24 12 DANTE 1 DANTE64 OMNI 1 OMNI 8 SLOT1 1 SLOT1 16 SLOT2 1 SLOT2 16 SLOT3 1 SLOT3 16 DIGITAL OUT L DIGITAL OUT R 13 SELECTED CH MIX1 MIX24 MTRX1 MTRX8 STEREO MONO CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual Functions that be assigned to the assignable encoders PAN ASSIGN FUNCTION PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2 w iri Ga nei a BIGTALGAN GAIN D O SELECTED SEND MTRX8 Depends on status HM _ NENNEN Me Lew _ Le a _ ME _ gt ME 1 LTEM _ LT ee ee 7e _ a L1 ewe MEME Ue MW L1 mc LAUS e
79. 1441 kHz 44 1 kHz 40 196 Fs 44 0559 kHz 44 1 kHz 0 196 Frequency Fs 42 336 kHz 44 1 kHz 4 0 Range Fs 48 kHz Fs 50 kHz 48 kHz 44 166796 DIGITAL IN Fs 44 1 kHz DIGITAL IN Fs 48 kHz is Word Clock Int 44 1 kHz 44 1 m u Word Clock Int 48 kHz 48 Word Clock Int 44 1 kHz Internal Clock Accuracy 50 S 50 ppm Word Clock Int 48 kHz Word Clock Int 44 1 kHz 4429 ter ns Word Clock Int 48 kHz 4 069 CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual Mixer Basic Parameters Libraries Name Number Preset 1 User 300 Preset 1 User 199 Preset 1 User 199 Preset 40 User 159 Preset 3 User 196 Preset 41 User 158 Preset 27 User 172 Preset 1 User 199 Scene Memory Input CH Library Output CH Library Input EQ Library Output EQ Library Dynamics Library Effect Library GEQ Library Premium Rack Library Portico5033 Portico5043 U76 Preset 1 User 199 Opt 2A EQ 1A DynamicEQ Dante Input Patch Library Preset 1 User 10 Input Function Total 301 200 200 199 199 199 199 200 200 11 Function Parameter Phase Normal Reverse Digital Gain 96 dB to 24 dB Slope 12 dB Oct Frequency 20 Hz to 600 Hz Attenuator 96 dB to 0 dB Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Gain 18 dB to 18 dB 4 Band 0 10 to 10 0 Equalizer Low Shelving Low Band High Shelving LPF High Band Type II Insert Insert Point Pre Fader Post On Direc
80. 16 SLOT 2 SLOT2 1 SLOT2 16 SLOT3 1 SLOT3 16 GEQIL A GEQIG6R B MIX MATRIX STEREO and MONO channels only EFFECT 8 PREMIUM PRIL A PR8R B 2 Output port select buttons These buttons assign the output port that will be used as insert out for the currently selected channel NOTE If a rack in which a GEQ or Premium Rack is mounted is specified as the insert out or insert in the other patch point will automatically be assigned to the same rack Also insert mode will automatically be switched on Additionally if you defeat the insert out or insert in of a rack in which a GEQ or Premium Rack is mounted the other patch point will automatically be defeated and at the same time insert mode will automatically be switched off CU 5 VL 3 V Reference Manual Use the category and the output port select buttons to specify the output port that will be used as insert out and press the CLOSE button You will return to the INSERT DIRECT OUT popup window Press the INSERT IN button The PORT SELECT popup window will appear allowing you to select the input port used for insert in The categories correspond to the following input ports CINE OMNII OMNIS v SECO ener SLOTI1 1 SLOT1 16 e SLOLD2 eerte rennes SLOT2 1 SLOT2 16 e SLOTS
81. 180 3 WITH DANTE SETUP AND I O DEVICE button If this is off the DANTE SETUP and I O device settings will be omitted when a settings file is loaded 179 User settings Security NOTE The DANTE SETUP settings SECONDARY PORT and CONSOLE ID will not be changed even if the WITH DANTE SETUP AND DEVICE button is on 3 Perform the desired editing operation For details on the procedure refer to the explanations that follow B Sorting files and editing file names comments 1 To sort the files press one of the headings FILE NAME COMMENT READ ONLY TYPE or TIME STAMP at the top of each column on the file list The list will be sorted as follows according to the column heading you press L Twp UE J READ ONLY 1 FILE NAME Sort the list in numerical alphabetical order of the file names 2 COMMENT Sort the list in numerical alphabetical order of the comment 3 READ ONLY Sort the list by Write Protect on off status 4 TYPE Sort the list by file type 5 TIME STAMP Sort the list by date and time of update NOTE By pressing the same location again you can change the direction ascending order or descending order in which the list is sorted If you want to edit the file name or comment press the FILE NAME field or COMMENT field of each file to access the keyboard window Enter a file name or comment and press the RENAME button or SET button To turn the
82. 188 O Oscillator OD Re eI EUER RUE 106 108 Output channels 46 Channel liDLary 55 Channel name and 47 Output Delay sospes Wat t EUG 55 OB MS os oer tit 16 OVERVIEW Screen 12 P Parameter sn ipi ere pns 157 Parameters that be assigned to control CHANCES dcuessanstiuscnsretancadehecensheueserts 248 Pake Og nenta l5 Pink frame TOUCH AND TURN 171 Prei tene DU 168 Premium eee eese enean 130 Lees EBENEN EFI 137 Premium Rack Processor Parameters 245 Preview MOU dern SPUMA PECIA 96 Program Changes eese 152 276 Appendices R Recall Safe TURCO cce tior rte 88 Recall gt 80 152 S SCENE eer sere C M 82 DIS CUI stasis bees ER 158 SELECTED CHANNEL section 6 SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen 7 196 v 198 STEREO MONO buses 35 48 STEREO MONO channels Sending to MATRIX buses i T jill re C 106 Tie SER 187 TURN 171 Tou D eie trit 204 U USB flash drive oii pui ear 180 Loading 178 Loading a 193 Loading a text fi
83. 4 CU 5 6 VL 3 V 3 Reference Manual Function Tree SETUP USER LEVEL CREATE USER KEY SAVE KEY MUTE GROUP ASSIGN CASCADE IN OUT PATCH CH DEFAULT MODE OUTPUT PORT 1 MIDI GPI 149 221 MIDI SETUP 22 24 100 104 PROGRAM CHANGE PORT SELECT 139 201 8 CONTROL CHANGE 19 117 174 22 22 20 20 0 The explanations in this reference manual will use the CL5 e n the case of the CL3 CL1 some screens will not show channels and faders that do not exist on those models 5 CU 5 6 VL 3 V Reference Manual SELECTED CHANNEL section This chapter explains how to use the SELECTED CHANNEL section and the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen to control the selected channel About the SELECTED CHANNEL section The SELECTED CHANNEL section located to the left of the display corresponds to the mixer module on a conventional analog mixer and enables you to manually adjust all the major parameters of the currently selected channel Operations in this section will affect the channel that was most recently selected by its SEL key If you have assigned an ST IN channel or STEREO channel to a single channel strip either the L or the R channel will be selected and the major parameters for L and R channels will be linked You can use the knobs on the panel to control mix parameters such as head amp gain HPF EQ settings the threshold setting of the dynamics processors pan balance settings and send levels to the
84. 7 nn 00 0 D S1 HUEHDO Live LIHI 01 02 09 270 00 00 00 00 11 j EASY REC IK db 2 O 8 REC 1949 6 7 8 9 O The screen shows the following items 1 Nuendo meter display field This shows the channel levels of Nuendo Live 2 PEAK CLEAR button Clears the peak levels indicated by the peak hold function 3 Marker list field Lists the marker information recorded in the current Nuendo Live project The markers can be selected by pressing the on screen list or by using the multifunction knobs 4 Nuendo Live SETUP button Specify the device that the console will use for communication when working with Nuendo Live see page 190 5 DANTE INPUT PATCH button Press this to access the DANTE INPUT PATCH screen see page 138 189 Recorder 6 Location information display This displays information for the current location of the Nuendo Live project You can press the button at the right to switch the time display format 7 GO TO PROJECT START button Returns the location to the start of the project GO TO PREVIOUS MARKER button Returns the location to the previous marker 9 GO TO NEXT MARKER button Advances the location to the next marker GO TO PROJECT END button Advances the location to the end of the project 10 CYCLE button Turns repeat on off for the project 12 STOP button Stops playback recording of the project 3 PLAY
85. ASSIGH DEVICE LIST SUPPORTED DEVICE DYS or MANUAL CANCEL 1 Setup method selection buttons Choose one of the following methods for mounting the I O device NO ASSIGN Not mounted DEVICELIST Select and mount from the device list e SUPPORTED DEVICE Select and mount a supported device E DV S LL serate ME Enter a device label and mount only for DVS v MANUAL Enter a device label and mount 218 Other functions When the setup method select button is DEVICE LIST To mount by choosing from a list of the I O devices on the Dante audio network press the DEVICE LIST button to display the DEVICE LIST field DEVICE SELECT 1 Assign Device to Device Label OL OF INE DEVICE LIST 001 Yamaha Rio3224 D xxxxxx This screen contains the following items 1 DEVICE LIST Shows a list of the I O devices on the Dante audio network From the list choose the I O device that you want to mount 2 DEVICE LIST select knob Use the multi function knob to select the I O device that you want to mount 3 INPUT OUTPUT knobs Use the multi function knobs to specify the number of inputs and outputs on the Dante audio network If the selected I O device is supported by the CL series the number of inputs and outputs will be entered automatically CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual When the set
86. ATTACK 3686 368A DIRECT OUT INPUT1 64 39C2 THRESHOLD 368C 3690 55 SR ON DYNAMICS1 RELEASE 3692 3696 STEREO ON RATIO 3698 369C ON 3A42 ON ON MIX9 24 to STEREO MIX TO ST 2F36 2F45 INPUT65 72 STINS 8 P 537 GAIN14 38A6 HPF gt pue FADER Sha MUTE MASTER 345A RECALSARE ON 366 INPUTI 56 STINI 4 to MIX 2 7 8 PAN 252 CU 5 C Ul 3 6 1 1 Reference Manual Appendices From HEX To HEX From HEX To HEX From HEX To HEX EXTERNAL 3B06 3BOB ON 3D05 MIX MATRIX STEREO X INPUT GAIN 1 3BOF 3B15 SLOT OUT DELAY NE HIGH 3D06 3D35 LR MONO EQ ON 306 3065 3D8D CRASS HINES T MIX17 24 DIGITAL OUT DELAY 3099 3098 INPUT6S 72 STINS 8 3DD3 DYNAMICS SED stb 3E0B INPUT65 72 STINS 8 DYNAMICS2 7 DYNAMICS2 383 387 SEF EG 7 3ED3 3ED7 3EDE 3EEB BEEF 7 3EFB 3EFF 3F03 3 07 3FOB 17 3723 3727 328 GAIN30 3F2C 3F2F GAIN31 3F30 3F33 3EDF 3EF3 INPUT HPF6 3C5F 3C65 EXTERNAL HPF7 3C66 3C6B INPUT HPF7 3C6F 3C75 EXTERNAL HPF8 3C76 3C7B INPUT HPF8 3C7F 3C85 INPUT1 56 STIN1 4 TO MIX1 16 TO MONO 3CC6 3CD5 253 CU 5 C UL 3 1 Reference Manual Appendices Mixing parameter operation applicability This table ind
87. Area press the CH JOB button to access the CH JOB menu CH JOB CH ASSIGN 2 Press the DEFAULT button to access the CH CH LINK DEFAULT MODE popup window GROUP This popup window enables you to initialize parameters MUTE GROUP RECALL SAFE CH SORT COPY MOVE DEFAULT button DEFAULT CH DEFAULT MODE Select TARGET CHs with SEL J and press DEFAULT button TARGET CHs Multiple Selection CH 1 16 CH 17 32 MIX 1 8 CH33 48 CH49 64 MIX 9 16 CH65 72 ST IN MIX 17 24 STEREO MATRIX MONO 1 TARGET CHs field This field indicates the channel selected for initialization While this window is displayed press a SEL key on the top panel to select an input channel multiple selection is allowed The field will indicate the selected channel s Press the same SEL key once again to de select the channel s NOTE In the case of the CL3 CL1 faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown 2 DEFAULT button After selecting the channel press this button to execute the initialization operation 3 CLOSE button Press this button to close the popup window and return to the previous screen 76 3 5 Grouping and linking To select the channel s to be initialized press the corresponding SEL key to make it light multiple selections are allowed The corresponding channel s are highlighted in the TARGET CHs field of the window If you want to de select all o
88. CH Switch the CH ON OFF PREMIUM RACK PATCH EDITOR CERE EE Access the corresponding screen of CL Editor RACK 1 16 EFFECT 1 8 PREMIUM 1A RACK EDITOR PREMIUM 1B PREMIUM 8A PREMIUM 8B INPUT METER METER OUTPUT METER DCA GROUP GROUP LINK MUTE GROUP CHANNEL LINK SCENE MEMORY RECALL SAFE SCENE FADE TIME FOCUS RECALL OUTPUT Switch CUE on off SPECIFIC CH CUE the channel selected from list 2 Increment or decrement the selected channel SPECIFIC CH Select a channel from list 1 CH17 32 CL5 CL3 CL1 A1 CL5 CL3 CL1 Access the corresponding screen of CL Editor A2 CL5 CL3 A3 CL3 B1 CL5 CL3 CL1 B2 CL3 CL1 B3 CL1 CUSTOM FADER BANK B4 CL1 C1 CL5 C2 CL5 C3 CL5 C4 CL5 C5 CL5 C6 CL5 SELECTED CHANNEL CL EDITOR CONTROL 259 CU 5 C UL 3 1 Reference Manual S Toggle the function of the GAIN knob LATCH ANALOG GAIN DIGITAL GAIN Lit when DIGITAL GAIN is selected Assign the function of the GAIN knob GAIN KNOB ANALOG GAIN DIGITAL to DIGITAL GAIN FUNCTION only while held down UNLATCH However if the GAIN KNOB FUNCTION is switched to DIGITAL GAIN in the PREFERENCE screen etc this will remain lit until the next time it is pressed GEQ FREQ C E Adds or removes a bank in the GEQ LATCH isa tone the OUT function Lit when active FUNLATCH o O Make GPI OUT a
89. CU 5 C UL 3 1 Reference Manual 4 8 FUNCTION CALL CHANNEL 4 8 1 Pair ON OFF Trigger Format PARAMETER CHANGE Receive Data will be received when PARAMETER CHANGE Rx is on and the Device number of both Rx CH and SUB STATUS are matched The data will be echoed when PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO is on STATUS 11110000 System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS O001nnnn 1n n20 15 Device numberzMIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 3E Digital mixer MODEL ID 00010010 19 CLSeries DATA CATEGORY 00000000 00 OTHER DATA FUNCTION NAME 01000011 C 01101000 h 01101100 1 01010000 01101001 i 01110010 01000011 C 01110000 p MODULE NAME Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE DATA Osssssss sh Source Channel Number H 1 Osssssss sl Source Channel Number L 1 dh Destination Channel Number 1 Oddddddd dl Destination Channel Number L 1 EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 4 8 2 Module Name Module Name Pair On with Copy PAIRONCP Pair On with Reset Both PAIRONRS Pair Off PAIROFF_ 1 0 CH1 71 CH72 256 MIX 1 279 MIX 24 512 MATRIX 1 519 MATRIX 8 4 9 LEVEL METER DATA 4 9 1 Format PARAMETER CHANGE When transmission is enabled by receiving Re
90. DANTE32 YOO1 032 DANTE40 2E 002 008 DANTE48 002 016 DANTE56 002 024 DANTE64 UU YOO2 032 In the list at the left select the DVS you re using with Nuendo Live and select the port that you want to assign to DANTET Press the button located in the upper part of the screen to switch to DANTE2 and assign a DVS port to it in the same way When you have finished making settings press the CLOSE button to exit the screen Press the X symbol in the upper right of the DANTE INPUT PATCH window to close it NOTE If you ve saved the DANTE INPUT PATCH settings in the library it will be easy to switch the settings on the CL series console see page 139 In the Nuendo Live screen press the START button Operate the channels so that sound is output To stop playback press the STOP button 192 CtCtU 3 C 1 3 Recorder Reference Manual Help function You can view Help files provided by Yamaha or display any user created text file We accept no responsibility for any damage that may occur as a result of using Help files created by a third party other than Yamaha Loading a Help file from a USB flash drive NOTE A help file for only one language is stored in the console s internal memory Once you load the help file it will be preserved in internal memory even if the power is turned off The first time you press the HELP button to view the
91. ES 1 64 Output channels 1 64 to audio network omn OMN OUT jacks 1 8 DIGI OUT L R DIGITAL OUT jack on the CL unit SLOT1 1 SLOT3 16 Output channels 1 16 of an I O card installed in slots 1 3 When you have selected an output port press the CLOSE button to close the popup window In the same way specify the output ports for MONITOR OUT L R and C NOTE f desired you can specify output ports only for MONITOR OUT L and to monitor through two speakers f you have not specified an output port for MONITOR OUT C selecting the MONO C button or LCR button as the monitor source will automatically cause the MONO channel signal to be distributed to MONITOR OUT L R To enable monitoring press the OUTPUT button to turn it on The monitor source you selected in step 4 will be sent to the output destination you specified in step 5 NOTE The PHONES Out jack will always output the monitor signal regardless of whether the OUTPUT button is on or off To control the monitor fader press the Bank Select STEREO key in the Centralogic section and then operate the monitor fader CU 5 VL 3 V Reference Manual 8 To adjust the monitor level use the MONITOR LEVEL knob located the SCENE MEMORY MONITOR section of the top panel If PHONES LEVEL LINK is ON use the MONITOR LEVEL knob and the monitor fader as well as the PHONES LEVEL knob to adjust the monitor level when monitoring
92. Flex15GEQ 800 1 25k 2k 3 15k 1k 1 6k 2 5k 4 0 FADER ASSIGN AVAILABLE BANDS 5 This window is the same as that for the 31BandGEQ except that the AVAILABLE BANDS parameter box indicates the real time number of additional bands maximum 15 that can be controlled in the current GEQ For a rack in which a Flex15GEQ is mounted the rack switch tabs will be split as xA and xB x is the rack number Press the GEQ ON OFF button to turn the Flex15GEQ on Press one of the buttons in the FADER ASSIGN field to select the group of bands you will control using the Centralogic section s faders For details on the bands corresponding to each button in the FADER ASSIGN field refer to step 4 of Using the 31BandGEQ on page 120 121 Graphic EQ effects and Premium Rack When you press one of these buttons the faders for the bands selected on the touch screen will turn white and the numbers of the corresponding faders in the Centralogic section will be displayed Now you can use the faders in the Centralogic section to control the band NOTE The above operation is possible even if the Centralogic section is locked When you turn off the button in the FADER ASSIGN field the faders will return to the locked state Operate the faders in the Centralogic section For each of a Flex15GEQ s two units and B a maximum of fifteen bands can be controlled The AVAILABLE BANDS parameter box in the FADER ASSIGN field ind
93. For the premium rack there are six library items for each module type You ll use the library of each module type to store and recall Premium Rack settings The libraries are numbered 000 100 and 000 is read only data for initialization All library items other than 000 can be freely read and written To recall an item from the Premium Rack library press the LIBRARY button located at the top of the popup window for the corresponding Premium Rack PREMIUM 1B INPUT ASSIGN Por tico5033 NO ASSIGN Portico5033 Dual CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual I O device and external head amp This chapter explains how to use an I O device or an external head amp that is connected to the CL series console Before you proceed use DANTE SETUP to specify the I O devices that will be mounted For details refer to Mounting an I O device on the Dante audio network on page 217 Using 1 0 device CL series consoles enable you to remotely control channel parameters of an I O device such as an Rio series product connected to the Dante connector For details on connecting the CL series console to an I O device refer to the Connecting to I O devices section in the separate Owner s Manual 1 0 device patching Heres how an I O device connected to the Dante connector can be patched to the Dante audio network 1 Connect the CL series console to an I O device For details refer to the Connecting to I O devices
94. HOLD mo dB dB mo dB mo dB mo dB mo dB mo dB CH2 ch 2 111 5 6 amp Meters _ CH1 ch 1 0 00 00 ADMIN Send To MIXI METER OVER R scene 000 Initial Data In the case of the CL3 CL1 channels that do not exist on those models will be shown S _ CH1 ch 1 0 00 00 ADMIN Send To 1 METER OVER PE 000 Initial Data Reference Manual INPUT OUTPUT tabs Use these tabs to switch between the INPUT METER screen and OUTPUT METER screen INPUT Fader level and meter display This area displays the meter fader and level value for each channel 1 Channel number Indicates the channel number 2 gt clipping indicator Lights to indicate that a signal is clipping at some point in the channel 3 OVER indicator This indicator will light if the signal clips at the METERING POINT 4 Meter This meter indicates the input or output level of the channel 5 Fader The channel level is indicated by the fader position and by a numeric value in dB that appears immediately below the fader NOTE Press any part of the meter area to assign the corresponding fader bank to the Centralogic section Meters Centralogic fader display This area displays the level of the faders currently set in the Centralogic section dB co dB co dB 00 dB 00 dB 00 dB 00 dB co dB CH 1 CH 2 CH 3 CH 4 5 CH 6 CH 7 c
95. MIX channels you want to control are recalled to the Centralogic section 7 Make sure that the ON keys for those channels are on and use the fader in the Centralogic section to raise the master level of the MIX channel to an appropriate position The subsequent steps will differ depending on whether ST MONO mode or LCR mode was selected for the channel in step 4 B Channels for which ST MONO mode is selected In the TO STEREO MONO popup window use the STEREO MONO button to turn a signal sent from the MIX channel to the STEREO bus MONO bus on or off For a channel that is set to ST MONO mode signals sent to the STEREO bus and to the MONO bus can be switched on off individually 9 Inthe TO STEREO MONO popup window use the TO ST PAN knob to set the panning of a signal sent from the MIX channel to the STEREO bus B Channels for which LCR mode is selected 8 Make sure that the LCR button is turned on in the TO STEREO MONO popup window Channels for which the LCR button is off will not send a signal to the STEREO bus or MONO bus 9 the TO STEREO MONO popup window press the CSR knob to select it and use multifunction knobs 1 8 to adjust the level difference between signals sent from that channel to the STEREO L R bus and to the MONO C bus The CSR knob settings are the same as for input channels 10 in the TO STEREO MONO popup window press the TO ST PAN knob to select it and use multifunction knobs 1 8 to adjust t
96. OFF C1 C6 ALL PLAY button can be triggered by using MIDI Note on off messages START E SAMPLE 0 131000 Playback start point in samples ee 0 131000 Playback end point in samples SAMPLE LOOP SAMPLE 0 131000 Loop start point in samples 1 0 0 5941 0 ms fs 44 1 kHz 0 0 ms 5458 3 ms fs 48 kHz PLY MODE DISTORTION One input two output distortion effect DSTI DST2 OVD1 a _ DST OVD2 CRUNCH Distortion type DST distortion OVD overdrive CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual AMP SIMULATE One input two output guitar amp simulator AMP TYPE Guitar amp simulation type DST1 DST2 OVD1 m _ DST TYPE OVD2 CRUNCH Distortion type DST distortion OVD overdrive 100 H B00 We EQ peaking ype frequency _ 100 010 80 peaking ype bandwidth SSCS 1 STK M1 STK M2 THRASH MIDBST CMB PG CMB VR CMB DX CMB TW MINI FLAT COMP276 This effect emulates the characteristics of analog compressors that are widely used in recording studios It will produce a thick strong frame sound suitable for drums and bass You can control two monaural channels independently Automatically corrects output gain reduction when CH1 compressor is OFF ON applied omon When the HPF in the side chain of the CH1 compressor is turned on the OFF ON compression applied to the low range will be weakened thus emphasizing 180 to 0 dB Adjusts the CH2 input level
97. Q 000 amp Initial Data 161 User settings Security 2 Press the log in button to open the LOGIN popup window LOGIN Select User to Login GUEST 2 LOAD FROM INTERNAL STORAGE User 01 ADMINISTRATOR 2 User 02 g User 03 LOAD FROM USB STORAGE LOAD CLU FILE CANCEL 3 Press the ADMINISTRATOR button and then press the LOGIN button If no Administrator password has been set you will simply be logged in If a password has been set a keyboard window will appear allowing you to enter the password AUTHORIZATION USER NAME Administrator PASSWORD SHIFT LOCK SPACE CANCEL 4 Enter the password and press the OK button If the password was incorrect a message of Wrong Password will appear near the bottom of the screen CU 5 6 VL 3 V Reference Manual User settings Security Logging in as Guest Logging in as a User To log in as a User you will use a user authentication key saved in the console or on a USB flash drive 1 In the Function Access Area press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen If using a USB flash drive you may also log in using a user authentication key created on a different CL series console 2 Press the log in button to open the LOGIN window LOGIN With a user authentication key stored in the console 1 In the Function Access Area press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen 2
98. RECALL operations 4 LIBRARY LIST Specifies the operations that can be performed on libraries e STORE CLEAR operations e RECALL operations 167 User settings Security 5 FILE LOAD Specifies the settings that will be applied when a file is loaded from a USB flash drive The user authentication key contains settings such as the user level preferences and the USER DEFINED key settings USER SETUP settings Other data is saved in an file The ALP file also includes the USER SETUP settings of the Administrator and the Guest e USER SETUP Preference and USER DEFINED keys settings e SYSTEM SETUP MONITOR SETUP e CURRENT SCENE e SCENE LIST e LIBRARY LIST 6 MONITOR SETUP Specifies the monitor setup operations that can be performed e OSCILLATOR e TALKBACK 7 SYSTEM SETUP Specifies the system setup operations that can be performed e MIXER SETUP e OUTPUT PORT e MIDI GPI SET ALL CLEAR ALL button Permits clears all items 4 Specify the user level by pressing the button for each item that will be permitted 5 When you have finished making settings close the popup window and press the SETUP button in the Function Access Area CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual Preferences Follow the steps below to make various settings for the CL console operating environment such as how popup windows appear and whether SEL key operations will be linked These settings are changed for the user who
99. Rack select tabs Enable you to select the rack displayed in the EXTERNAL HA popup window NOTE e f you connect an additional AD8HR the setting for this AD8HR will be used These knobs buttons are displayed in the EXTERNAL HA popup window even if an AD8HR is not connected allowing you to create and store a scene even while the AD8HR is not connected e Error messages related to the SB168 ES will not be displayed In addition you will be unable to set the EtherSound parameters Use the AVS ESMonitor software application for these functions CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual 147 I O device and external head amp 8 Toremotely control the external HA from an input channel of the CL series console use the Bank Select keys to access the OVERVIEW screen that includes the channel on which you want to control the HA GAIN PATCH field 9 Press the GAIN PATCH field of the channel on which you want to control the external HA The GAIN PATCH popup window will appear GC GAIN PATCH ALL ON ALL OFF CH 7 ch 4 ch 5 DANTE DANTE DANTE DANTE 4 5 6 7 8 6 x 6 6 E ae GAIN A GAIN R A GAIN A GAIN A GAIN OHOBOHOHORBC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 GAIN 0 GAIN D GAIN 0 GAIN 0 GAIN 10 Press the PATCH button and select the input port assigned to the external HA With these settings you will be able to use the external HA in the same way as the head amp on
100. SAVE LOAD Administrator USER KEY PASSWORD CHANGE ons are permitted SYSTEM SETUP 48V MASTER BUS SETUP OH MIXER SETUP WORD CLOCK CASCADE SLOT METER ue up OUTPUT MIDI GPI PORT Me eee dks CONTRAST BRIGHTNESS L Y VP us NAME NAME CH COLOR SCREEN PANEL LAMP C 3 Q QT Q Q Q Initial Data OVER BATTERY POWER SUPPLY DANTE OK NETWORK SUB CONSOLE LOCK 166 User settings Security Press the USER SETUP button to access the USER SETUP popup window USER LEVEL for Guest ACCESS PERMISSION CH OPERATION CH17 32 CURRENT SCENE INPUT INPUT PATCH pus ouTPUT ouTPUT SETUP 9 16 PATCH NAME CH33 48 GEQ RACK RACK 1 RACK 2 RACK 3 RACK 4 RACKS 6 RACK RACK 8 RACK 9 RRCK10 RRCK11 RRCK12 RRCK13 RRCK14 RACKIS RRCK16 EFFECT RACK RRCK 1 RACK 2 RRCK 3 RACK 4 RACKS RRCK 6 RACK RACK 8 PREMIUM RACK RRCK 1 RACK 2 RACK 3 RACKS RRCK 6 RRCK 7 MIX 17 24 CH65 72 ST IN MATRIX RACK 4 RACK 8 DICT FILE LOAD _ SYSTEM SETUP SCENE LIST 6 STORE 7SORT MONITOR SETUP LIBRARY LIST SYSTEM SETUP STORE LIBRARY MIXER OUTPUT MIDI CLEAR LIST SETUP PORT GPI D SCENE LIST USER DEFINED USER DEFINED OR KEYS KNOBS USER LEVEL MUTE GROUP MUTE GROUP A MASTER SSIGN MONITOR SETUP USER SETUP OSCILLATOR TALKBACK CURRENT SCE
101. SEND LEVEL knob inside the bold frame once again When you press the currently selected TO MIX MATRIX SEND LEVEL knob a second time the MIX SEND popup window or the MATRIX SEND popup window will appear This window includes the following items MIX SEND to MIX 1 1 ALL PRE button Sets the send point to The send point is the point at which signals are sent from all send source channels including the input and output channels to the selected send destination At this time the PRE POST button will light 2 ALL POST button Sets the send point to POST The send point is the point at which signals are sent from all send source channels including the input and output channels to the selected send destination At this time the PRE POST button will turn off 3 SEND FROM MODE button Press this button to switch to the SEND from 8ch popup window 4 Send destination indicator Indicates the currently selected send destination 5 Send destination select buttons Select MIX MATRIX buses as the send destination CU 5 VL 3 V Reference Manual 6 Channel select button Selects the send source channel that you wish to control The current channel icon number and color appear on the button and the channel name appears immediately below the button 7 PRE POST button Switches the send point of each send source channel between PRE and POST If the button is on the send p
102. SLOT x input port Too much data is being received at the SLOT x input port Too much data is being sent from the SLOT x output port Some songs were not identified Songs that have not been specified might be used for DIRECT PLAY or PLAY BACK LINK The file specified for SCENE LINK or DIRECT PLAY assigned to a USER DEFINED key does not exist Invalid signals are being exchanged with StageMix Too much data is being received at the StageMix input port 272 Message STAGEMIX Tx Buffer Full Storage Full Storage Not Found Storage Not Ready Sync Error xxx Tap Operation Ignored This Operation is Not Allowed Too Large Files Loading Failed Too Many Bands Used Cannot Compare Too Many Bands Used Cannot Paste to Flex15GEQ Total Slot Power Capability Exceeded Unassigned Encoder Unsupported File Format USB Currently Active for Recorder function USB Currently Active for SAVE or LOAD USB Memory Busy Recorder Stopped USB Memory Full USB Memory Full Recorder Stopped USB Memory is Protected USB Memory Unmounted Recorder Stopped USB over current Error Disconnect USB device Word Clock Error Recorder Stopped Wrong Audio File Format Wrong Password Wrong Word Clock You Cannot Create User Key Appendices Meaning Too much data is being transmitted from the StageMix output port The file could not be saved because there is insufficient space on the USB flash drive
103. Status HH Dante Receivers Filter Transmitters Y001 Yamaha CL5 060bee VE Y001 Yamaha Rio3224 D 062 EH HyHIEHENHENHENEHHEEHHEHEEHENHENNE Master Clock Y 001 Yamaha CL5 060bee Filter Receivers HH itiDante Transmitters In this case the DANTE INPUT PATCH settings of the CL series console must be switched when changing between multi track recording and multi track playback Switching will be easy if you ve stored the respective settings in the DANTE INPUT PATCH LIBRARY see page 139 Setting up Nuendo Live When you start Nuendo Live and create a new project a track for each channel specified for DVS will be created automatically In addition the tracks will automatically use the channel names and color information as specified on the CL series console Make the following settings in Nuendo Live In Setup button gt Audio System select DVS or DANTE ACCEL as the driver NOTE For details on the settings of each software program refer to the manual for that software CU 5 C VUL 3 C V Reference Manual Recording into project 1 Inthe Function Access Area press the RECORDER button to access the RECORDER screen 2 Press the Nuendo Live tab in the upper right of the screen The Nuendo Live screen will appear RECORDER NUENDO ID POSITION DESCRIPTION 2 gt S 0 00 arene 00 00 01 SETUP 4 iio
104. The CL series consoles can operate in an integrated manner with Steinbergs Nuendo Live DAW software In addition to the equipment and software mentioned in Recording or playing back using DAW ona computer on page 25 the CL Extension software which integrates the CL series and Nuendo Live can be installed in your computer allowing you to operate Nuendo Live from the CL series console to easily perform multi track recording operations Here we explain how to operate Nuendo Live from the CL series console Preparing the project Make the following settings as described in Recording or playing back using DAW on a computer on page 25 1 Setting up Dante Virtual Soundcard or Dante Accelerator Specify the audio format network settings and ASIO driver settings so that Dante Virtual Soundcard DVS or Dante Accelerator DANTE ACCEL can be used 2 Setting up Dante Controller Use Dante Controller to patch between the I O device and DVS and between DVS and the CL series console Assign the signals from the I O device to the various input ports of DVS Patching can also be specified from the CL series console NOTE Separately route the signals from I O devices to the channels on the CL series console see page 138 Recorder The following example shows Dante Controller settings for patching I O device channels 1 16 to DVS Bn 9 Dante Controller Network et x File Device Help Sows Ing Device Status Clock
105. The USER DEFINED KEYS page enables you to assign functions to USER DEFINED keys 1 16 USER DEFINED KEYS for_Administrator SEHDS OH FADER 4 Press the popup button for the USER DEFINED key to which you want to assign function The USER DEFINED KEY SETUP popup window will appear USER DEFINED KEY SETUP 2 Select Parameters for USER DEFINED KEY No 15 FUNCTION PAGE CHANGE BOOKMARK PAGE CHANGE BOOKMARK PAGE CHANGE BOOKMARK MUTE MASTER MUTE GROUP 1 HOME TOGGLE CANCEL PARAMETER 1 SEHDS FADER MTRX2 PAGE CHANGE BOOKMARK PAGE CHANGE BOOKMARK ALTERNATE FUNCTION MUTE MASTER MUTE GROUP 2 TALKBACK TALKBACK OH UHLATCH PARAMETER 2 81 Scene memory 5 In the FUNCTION column select SCENE Proceed as follows depending on the function you want to assign To assign INC RECALL or DEC RECALL Choose INC RECALL or DEC RECALL in the PARAMETER 1 column To assign DIRECT RECALL Choose DIRECT RECALL in the PARAMETER 1 column and choose SCENE xxx is the scene number in the PARAMETER 2 column 6 When you have finished making settings press the OK button to close the popup window If desired assign scene recall functions to other USER DEFINED keys in the same way 7 Press the USER DEFINED key to which you want to assign a recall function The corresponding scene will be recalled CU 5 6 U
106. You can select the following parameters All output channel parameters OUTPUT PATCH Output patch settings NAME Channel name icon and channel color Q FQsetings Scene memory DYNA 1 Dynamics 1 settings including KEY IN SOURCE INSERT Insert on off status and insert point INSERT PATCH Insert in out patch settings head amp settings for insert in ES Mono TO MONO on off status MIX 24 only lt WITH SEND FROM SEND parameters of the send source signal that will be sent to a SOURCE CHs channel e RACK tab Enables you to choose from GEQ RACK EFFECT RACK or PREMIUM RACK You can individually select an GEQ for a Flex15GEQ or an effect used in dual mode PATCH NAME tab You can select the following parameters INPUT PATCH All input channel patches insert in out patches Direct Out patches OUTPUT PATCH All output channel patches insert in out patches INPUT NAME Channel names icons and colors for all input channels OUTPUT NAME Channel names icons and colors for all output channels Analog gain phantom power on off status Gain Compensation phase id settings CH LINK Channel link settings e DCA tab You can select either ALL or LEVEL ON If ALL is selected all parameters will be copied If LEVEL ON is selected the master level and DCA channel on off status will be copied You can select copy source items for each DCA group 1 16 individually In the DESTINATION SCENE area select the range of
107. a USER DEFINED key CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual Relationship between analog and digital while Gain Compensation 1 on If Gain Compensation is on adjusting the analog gain by a specific amount will cause the I O device to output to the audio network a signal that is attenuated by the same amount Therefore the signals on the audio network will maintain a constant corrected level in the digital domain For example assume that the analog gain value has been set to 30 dB and Gain Compensation is now turned on Under this condition if you raise the analog gain value to 45 dB the level of the signal sent to the audio network will stay at 30 dB that is attenuated by 15 dB At this time the gain of each signal input to the CL series unit will be adjusted by the digital gain parameter of the CL series console If the FOH console and the monitoring console are sharing one I O device adjusting the analog gain on the FOH console will not affect the input level on the monitoring console because the level of the signal on the audio network is maintained at a constant level However please note that if the signal is distorted due to a high level of analog gain you must first turn the Gain Compensation function off set the gain to an appropriate input level and then turn the function back on If you try to lower the analog gain level while the Gain Compensation function is on the signal on the audio network will be
108. a different CL series console a keyboard window will appear allowing you to enter the Administrator password of the CL series console that you will be using If the Administrator passwords are identical this window will not appear When you enter the correct Administrator password another keyboard window will appear allowing you to enter the password for the selected user f you re save the user authentication key you will not be asked for the Administrator password the next time For details on re saving the user authentication key refer to Editing a user authentication key on page 165 AUTHORIZATION USER PASSWORD User 01 SHIFT LOCK CANCEL 7 Enter the password and press the OK button If the password was incorrect a message of Wrong Password will appear near the bottom of the screen User settings Security Changing the password Follow the steps below to change the password of the logged in user A change in the Administrator password is updated immediately A change in a User password is also updated immediately but will be discarded if the user simply logs out after changing it The change must be saved by overwriting the old authentication key before the user logs out The Guest account does not have a password 1 In the Function Access Area press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen 2 Press the PASSWORD CHANGE button keyboard window will appear allowing you to enter
109. a password AUTHORIZATION USER PASSWORD Administrator SHIFT LOCK CANCEL 3 Enter the current password and press the OK button When you enter the correct password a keyboard window will appear allowing you to enter the new password 4 Enter the new password in the NEW PASSWORD field then enter the same password in the RE ENTER PASSWORD field for verification and finally press the OK button If the two passwords that were entered match the new password will be set CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual Editing user authentication key If you are logged in as a user you can edit your preference settings USER DEFINED keys USER DEFINED knobs assignable encoders custom fader banks master fader comments and password and save overwrite them onto your user authentication key If you are logged in as a Power User you can also change the user level 1 Log in as a user and edit the Preference settings page 168 USER DEFINED keys page 169 USER DEFINED knobs page 171 assignable encoders page 172 custom fader bank page 173 and master fader page 174 settings If you are logged in as a Power User you can also change the user level 2 In the Function Access Area press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen CURRENT USER STORAGE CREATE SAVE LOAD USER KEY User 01 COMMENT PASSWOR EDIT CHANGE SYSTEM SETUP 48V MASTER BUS SETUP ON MIXER SETUP WORD CLOCK
110. amplified by the same amount due to the Gain Compensation function and the signal will remain distorted NOTE You can perform this operation rapidly if you ve assigned Gain Compensation on off for the SET BY SEL function to one of the USER DEFINED keys Input channels Sending a signal from an input channel to the STEREO MONO buses This section explains how to send a signal from an input channel to the STEREO bus or MONO bus The STEREO bus and MONO bus are used mainly to send signals to the main speakers There are two ways to send signals to the STEREO bus or MONO bus ST MONO mode and LCR mode You can select the mode individually for each channel These two modes differ as follows ST MONO mode This mode sends signals from the input channel to the STEREO bus and to the MONO bus independently Signals sent from an input channel to the STEREO bus and to the MONO bus can be switched on or off individually The panning of a signal sent from an input channel to the STEREO bus L R is controlled by the TO ST PAN knob Signals sent to the MONO bus are not affected by this knob The left right volume balance of a signal sent from an ST IN channel to the STEREO bus is controlled by this knob Signals sent to the MONO bus are not affected by this knob If PAN BALANCE mode is set to PAN you will be able to adjust the pan position of signals sent to the STEREO bus L R individually see page 37 LCR mode This mode
111. an input channel COMPRESSOR COMPANDER H COMPANDER S DE ESSER COMPRESSOR Dynamics 1 for an output channel COMPRESSOR EXPANDER COMPANDER H COMPANDER S COMPRESSOR Dynamics graph This graph displays the input output response of the dynamics processors 9 Dynamics parameter setting knobs Indicate the dynamics parameter values You can adjust the values by using the multifunction knobs The type of parameters will vary depending on the currently selected dynamics type 60 EQ and Dynamics e GATE or DUCKING OMONMONONGO 304m 26 THRESHOLD RANGE ATTACK HOLD DECAY COMPRESSOR or EXPANDER QRO THRES HOLD 223m RELEASE 30 0 0 EE ATTACKE OUTGAIH COMPANDER H or COMPANDER S OMOMONOMCONO zzm THRES HOLD RATIO ATTACK RELEASE DUTGRIN WIDTH DE ESSER OMONO 2 b THRES HOLD FREQ Dynamics IN OUT level meters GR meter These meters indicate the peak level of the signals before and after the dynamics processing and the amount of gain reduction For a stereo channel these meters indicate the level of both the L and R channels 17 KEY IN SOURCE select button Press this button to display the KEY IN SOURCE popup window in which you can select a key in signal that will trigger the dynamics 2 KEY IN FILTER parameter area Displayed only for GATE or DUCKING Enables you to make various settings for a filter that lets the key in signal pass Filter select butto
112. and FREQ is relevant only for modulation type effects How the parameters are related Tempo synchronization calculates the DELAY or FREQ value from the TEMPO and NOTE Turn SYNC ON Change NOTE gt DELAY or FREQ will be set In this case the DELAY or FREQ value is calculated as follows DELAY or FREQ NOTE x 4 x 60 TEMPO Change TEMPO gt DELAY or FREQ will be set In this case the DELAY or FREQ value is calculated as follows DELAY NOTE x 4 x 60 TEMPO sec FREQ TEMPO 60 NOTE x 4 Hz Example 1 When SYNC ON DELAY 250 ms TEMPO 120 you change NOTE from 8th note to quarter note DELAY new NOTE x 4 x 60 TEMPO 1 4 x 4 x 60 120 0 5 sec 500 ms Thus the DELAY will change from 250 ms to 500 ms Appendices Example 2 When SYNC ON DELAY 250 ms NOTE 8th note you change TEMPO from 120 to 121 DELAY NOTE x 4x 60 new TEMPO 1 8 x 4 x 60 121 0 2479 sec 247 9 ms Thus the TEMPO will change from 250 ms to 247 9 ms a Rounded values are used for the calculation results Ranges of the NOTE and TEMPO values The ranges of the NOTE and TEMPO values are limited by the ranges of the DELAY or FREQ values You cannot set NOTE or TEMPO values that would cause DELAY or FREQ to exceed their maximum possible values when synchronized to tempo This limitation also applies even when SYNC is OFF Special characteristics of the TEMPO parameter The TEMPO parameter has the
113. and the SEL keys in the Centralogic section If you switch buses by pressing the SEL keys the setting of the MIX 1 16 and MIX 17 24 MATRIX ON FADER switch buttons will also be change automatically If you press the currently selected MIX MATRIX bus select button again cue monitoring will be turned on for the corresponding MIX MATRIX channel This method is convenient if you want to monitor the signal that is being sent to the selected MIX MATRIX bus Use the faders in the top panel Centralogic section to adjust the send level from the MIX and STEREO MONO channels to the selected MATRIX bus NOTE You can assign the SENDS ON FADER function to a USER DEFINED key This lets you quickly switch to SENDS ON FADER mode for a specific MIX MATRIX bus and quickly switch back again Repeat steps 4 5 to adjust the send level for other MATRIX buses in the same way When you re finished adjusting the MATRIX send levels press the X symbol in the function access area The Function Access Area display will return to its prior state and the CL console will exit SENDS ON FADER mode and return to normal mode CtCtU 3 C 1 3 Reference Manual Correcting delay between channels Output Delay This section explains how to correct delay between output channels by using the Output Delay function This Output Delay function is useful when you want to correct the timing of output signals sent to speakers that are located at a distance from
114. be cleared To do so press the MULTI SELECT button to turn it on and then rotate a multifunction knob Alternatively rotate the multifunction knob while pressing and holding it down 3 To execute the Clear operation press the OK button The scene number s you selected in step 2 will be cleared If you want to cancel the Clear operation press the CANCEL button instead of the OK button NOTE Read only scenes or write protected scenes cannot be cleared Scene memory Cutting a scene This section explains how to cut a scene When you cut a scene the numbers of the subsequent scenes will be decremented accordingly You can paste or insert a cut scene at the desired location 1 Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area The SCENE LIST window will appear 2 Rotate one of the multifunction knobs to select the scene number that you want to cut and then press the CUT button A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Cut operation CONFIRMATION 2 Cut Selected Scene CANCEL NOTE If the scene list has been sorted in any other way than by number in the column the CUT button will be unavailable 3 To execute the Cut operation press the OK button The scene s you selected in step 2 will be cut and the numbers of the subsequent scenes will be decremented accordingly At this time the scene that was cut will be stored in buffer memory NOTE Read only scenes or write protected scenes cannot be cu
115. being sent to a specific MATRIX bus use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to access the corresponding MIX MATRIX channel and then press the appropriate CUE key in the Centralogic section 7 Usethe Bank Select keys and the SEL keys in the Centralogic section to switch channels and adjust the send level from other channels to the MATRIX buses in the same way CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual Using the Centralogic section This method lets you use the multifunction knobs in the Centralogic section to simultaneously adjust the send levels from the eight channels selected in the Centralogic section to the desired MATRIX bus 1 sure that an output port is assigned to the MATRIX bus to which you want to send signals and that your external device is connected to the corresponding output port 2 Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to access the OVERVIEW screen that includes the channels MIX channels or STEREO MONO channels that you want to control In the OVERVIEW screen you can use the TO MATRIX field to adjust the send levels to the MATRIX bus 1 MIX8 MX 8 MIX 7 MIXS MX 5 MIX6 MX 6 3 MIx4 4 MIx2 2 DANTES 001 008 DANTES 001 005 DANTE6 001 006 DANTE 001 007 DANTES 001 003 DANTE4 001 004 DANTE 001 001 DAHTE2 001 002 000
116. bottom of the screen The PORT SELECT popup window will appear enabling you to select the network and port 2 Channel icon button Indicates the icon and color that are currently selected for the corresponding channel Press this button to enable the ICON tab at the bottom of the screen The CH COLOR ICON popup window will appear enabling you to select the color icon and channel name 3 Channel name edit box Indicates the currently specified channel Press the inside of this box to enable the NAME tab at the bottom of the screen The SOFT KEYBOARD popup window will appear enabling you to edit the channel name 4 Tabs Use these tabs to switch between items 29 COLOR p WTE TET Input channels Press the desired channel icon button The lower part of the popup window will change as follows PATCH PATCH CH1 Dynamic DAHTE1 gt ch 1 001 001 ICON Drumk it Str inss A Guitar Guitar BassRmr Gui tarAme Trumret Condenser Keyboard Wireless Effector Medial Audi ence Dynamic Talkback 1 Channel color select buttons Select a channel color Pressing the button will immediately apply the change 2 Icon select buttons Select a channel icon Pressing the button will immediately apply the change 3 Sample name setup buttons 4 Select a preset sample name You can edit the name the NAME tab later Use the icon select buttons to select the icon you
117. brightness after setting the name display brightness use the CH COLOR knob CH COLOR Adjusts the brightness of the channel colors on the top panel This lets you apply a relative adjustment to only the channel color brightness without changing the channel name display brightness s SCREEN cociros Adjusts the brightness of the touch screen If the brightness is set to lower than level 2 the CL will start up next time with a brightness setting of 2 so that you will be able to see the screen PANEL eene Adjusts the brightness of the top panel LEDs If the optional MBCL meter bridge is installed on the CL3 CL1 this knob setting will also affect the LEDs on the meter bridge NOTE If the AD8HR is connected the brightness of the AD8HR s LEDs will also change t LAM S ooh Adjusts the brightness of the lamps connected to the rear panel LAMP jacks If desired switch between banks A and B and make settings for the other bank in the same way Now you can switch between the BANK A and BANK B buttons to change the brightness of the touch screen LCD channel name displays and lamps in a single operation You can also assign this parameter to a USER DEFINED key and press that key to switch between banks A and B 204 Other functions Setting the date and time of the internal clock This section explains how to set the date and time of the CL consoles internal clock and how to select the date and time display for
118. button Starts playback of the project RECORD button Starts stops recording of the project 5 EASY RECORDING button Immediately starts recording all tracks Pressing this button will reset the current location to the end point of the latest recording place all tracks in recording mode start recording and then display and lock the recording panel Recording will start retroactively by the specified time duration default 10 seconds Record lock button Turns recording status lock on off This prevents recording from being accidentally stopped during recording 7 DVS information display Shows the device label of the selected DVS ADD MARKER button Adds a marker to the project at the current location RECALL LINK button Specifies whether a marker will be created when you recall a scene If this function is turned on the button will be lit NOTE Transport functions can also be controlled from USER DEFINED keys see page 169 CU 5 6 VL 3 V 13 Reference Manual 3 Press the EASY RECORDING button to start recording 4 Whenyou have finished recording press the record lock button and then the STOP button Specifying DVS or DANTE ACCEL 1 In the Nuendo Live screen press the NUENDO Live SETUP button The NUENDO LIVE SETUP popup window will appear NOTE e Even if the CLs CONSOLE ID is set to something other than 1 you can still specify DVS or DANTE ACCEL in the NUENDO Live SETUP screen However you
119. can adjust the gain by using the multifunction knobs HA Displays the level of the HA input signal 4 TALKBACK ASSIGN field An indicator lights to indicate the currently selected output destination of the talkback signal 5 TALKBACK ON button Switches talkback on or off 2 Press the TALKBACK popup display button or the ASSIGN field to open the TALKBACK popup window In this popup window you can make detailed settings for talkback INPUT TO TALKBACK 001 001 6 R GRIN ASSIGN MIX MIXS 5 HX13 21 2 3 4 MATRIX MTRX2 MTRX3 MTRXS HT 2 MT 3 HT 5 STEREO MONO STR STR 1 TALKBACK IN field e 48V button Switches on or off the phantom power 48V supplied to the TALKBACK jack TALKBACK level meter Indicates the input level of the mic connected to the TALKBACK jack Talkback and Oscillator 2 INPUT TO TALKBACK field This field allows a mic connected to a conventional input port to be used as a talkback input INPUT TO TALKBACK patch button Press the button to open the PORT SELECT popup window in which you can patch a desired input port to talkback The selected port name will appear on the button 48V button This is an on off switch for the phantom power 48V supplied to the selected input port ANALOG GAIN knob Adjusts the analog gain setting for the selected input port Press this k
120. can also select the desired event scene or library in this field by pressing it f you press an item in the field to highlight it you will be able to rotate any of the multifunction knobs to select the event scene or library Assign events to other program numbers in the same way With these settings executing the specified event on the CL series console will cause the corresponding Program Change or Bank Select and Program Change messages to be transmitted to an external device When an external device transmits Program Change or Bank Select and Program Change messages on the appropriate channel the event assigned to that program number of the corresponding MIDI channel or bank number will be executed NOTE You can use the CLEAR ALL button to erase all assignments to program numbers The INITIALIZE ALL button will return all program number assignments to their default state Assignments to program numbers are maintained as settings for the entire system rather than for individual scenes In Single mode if the same event is assigned to more than one program number on a Tx channel only the lowest program number will be transmitted If the BANK button is on only the program number of the lowest bank number will be transmitted In Multi mode if the same event is assigned to more than one MIDI channel and more than one program number only the lowest program number on each MIDI channel will be transmitted CU 5 6 UL
121. ch10 CH18 18 CH26 ch26 CH34 ch34 CH42 ch42 CHSO ch50 frr ch58 CHEE ch66 ST IN 2L Rt2L 6 7 button NOTE 8 9 ch CHS ch 5 ch 4 CH3 ch 3 CH14 ch14 chi3 ch12 chil ETA ch22 CH21 ch21 CH20 ch20 CHI ch19 CH30 ch30 CH29 ch29 CH28 ch28 CH27 ch27 frc ch38 CH37 ch37 CH36 ch36 forc ch35 Ero ch46 rt ch45 CH44 ch44 CH43 ch43 CHS4 ch54 CHS3 ch53 52 ch52 CHS1 ch51 fry ch62 ch61 CHEO ch60 CHS9 ch59 CH70 ch70 CHES ch69 CHES ch68 CHET ch67 ST IN 3L ST IN 4L ST IN 5L ST IN 6L Rt3L Rt4L Rt5L Rt6L Select a channel that you want to link To confirm the link press the LINK button in the lower left of the screen An alphabetical character that indicates the link group will appear on the selected channel You can also perform the operations from step 5 on screen 5 Tolink channels press the channel display field The CH LINK SET popup window will appear CH LINK SET EJ Hold down SEL of Defining CH and press SEL of additional CHs after choosing PARAMETERs to link CHT ch 7 ch15 CH23 ch23 CH31 ch31 CH39 ch39 CH47 ch47 55 ch55 CH63 ch63 CHT1 ST
122. changing this setup Network Audio Module will be rebooted automatically audio will mute for about 30 seconds CANCEL 3 To execute the change press the OK button The network audio module will be rebooted in order to change the settings When the Dante audio network settings have been applied the button you selected will return to its original appearance NOTE f you change the SECONDARY PORT you must also change the method of connection between the CL series console and the I O devices For example if the connections used for the REDUNDANT setting are left as they are when you change the setting to DAISY CHAIN it will become impossible to send and receive audio Be sure to disconnect the cables before you change the setting The CONSOLE ID and SECONDARY PORT settings will not be changed even if you initialize the CL series console Other functions Setting the Dante audio network latency An appropriate latency setting for signals sent and received via a Dante audio network varies depending on the network connection method and size This section explains how to set an appropriate latency setting depending on the connection method of Dante enabled devices that are connected to the CL series console B Relationship between the switches and the number of hops An appropriate latency setting on a Dante audio network varies depending on the number of hops in the network One hop is the step from one router switch to
123. cutoff frequency 234 Appendices GATE REVERB REVERSE GATE One input two output early reflections with gate and early reflections with reverse gate rg ono Reflection diffusion left right election spread 1 19 Number of eariy reflections OoOo o y dr THRU 21 2 H2 8 00 Wie High pass feque SSS MONO DELAY One input one output basic repeat delay DELAY 0027300 ms Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for 0 PBe GIRIN reverse phase feedback wer THRU 21 2 He 6 00 Wie High passfter cutoff frequency SSS NOTE Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY 1 FR FM ddd u d da d d aa value depends on tempo setting STEREO DELAY Two input two output basic stereo delay DELAY L 0 0 1350 0 ms Left channel delay time DELAY R 0 0 1350 0 ms Right channel delay time FB GL 99 to 9996 Left channel feedback plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback FB GR _99 to 99 Right channel feedback plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio HPF THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off SYNC NOTE L Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DE
124. display Indicates the status of synchronization with the master clock for each clock source Each indicator is explained below e LOCK light blue Indicates that a clock synchronized with the selected clock source is being input If an external device is connected to the corresponding connector or slot input output is occurring properly between that device and the CL series console If the sampling frequency is close this status may be displayed even if not synchronized e LOCK BUT NOT SYNC ED yellow A valid clock is being input but is not synchronized with the selected clock source If an external device is connected to the corresponding connector input output cannot occur correctly between that device and the CL series console e SRC ON green This is a special status applied only to SLOT 1 3 indicating that the corresponding channels SRC Sampling Rate Converter is enabled This means that even if the signal is not synchronized normal input output with the CL series console is occurring e UNLOCK red A valid clock is being input but the CL series console is not synchronized to the selected clock If an external device is connected to the corresponding connector it will be unable to communicate properly with the CL console UNKNOWN black This indicates that the clock status cannot be detected because no external device is connected or because there is no valid clock input You will be able to select this connector slo
125. e Channel link settings e Panel assignment status PANEL SNAPSHOT 77 Scene memory Using scene memories Storing and recalling scenes To store the current mix settings as a scene in memory and recall it later you can use the keys in the SCENE MEMORY MONITOR section on the top panel or you can use the SCENE LIST window Using the keys in the SCENE MEMORY MONITOR section 1 Usethe controllers on the top panel or the buttons on the touch screen to set the mix parameters as desired 2 Use the SCENE MEMORY INC DEC keys to SCENE MEMORY select the store destination scene number The number of the currently selected scene appears in the SCENE field in the Function Access Area When you select a new scene number the number will blink This blinking indicates that the displayed scene number is different from the currently loaded scene number 001 000 Initial Data Initial Data This field always displays general information about the scene You can press this field to access the SCENE LIST window in which you can view and edit additional settings for the scene 1 Scene number Indicates the number of the currently selected scene 2 R symbol READ ONLY Protect symbol Read only scenes are indicated by an R symbol READ ONLY displayed here Write protected scenes are indicated by a Protect symbol 3 Scene title Indicates the title of the currently selected scene 4 E
126. each other Output delay settings are made in the OUTPUT PORT popup window which will appear when you press the OUTPUT PORT button from the SETUP screen For details on operations in the OUTPUT PORT screen refer to Selecting the output channel for each output port on page 17 Channel library operations Channel libraries include OUTPUT CHANNEL LIBRARY button LIBRARY which enables you to store and recall various parameters including the head amp settings for output SSL channels MATRIX To recall the library while an output channel is selected press the LIBRARY button on the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen For details on using the library refer to the Using libraries section in the separate Owner s Manual 55 Output channels CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual and Dynamics This chapter explains the EQ equalizer and dynamics that are provided on each channel of the CL series console About EQ and dynamics Each input channel and output channel on a CL series console provides a four band EQ and dynamics EQ can be used on all input channels and all output channels An attenuator is provided immediately before the EQ allowing you to attenuate the level of the input signal so that the GAIN setting for EQ will not cause the signal to clip Input channels also provide a high pass filter that is independent of the EQ Input channels provide two dynamics processors Dynamics 1 can be
127. field of the window The You can move settings between monaural input channels or between ST IN channels channels that can be selected will depend on the channel you selected in step 3 DESTINATION CH field If you want to defeat the selected move destination channel press the DESTINATION CH field This field indicates the move destination channel After you select the move source if you select 5 To execute the move press the MOVE button a move destination input channel by pressing its SEL key this field will display the selected The settings of all channels between the move source and move destination will shift toward the channel move source by one channel and the channel settings will move from the move source to the CH MOVE MODE move destination When the Move has been executed the SOURCE CH field and DESTINATION CH field will be empty EJ Select SOURCE CH and DESTINATION CH with SEL and press MOVE button SOURCE CH DESTINATION CH 6 To close the CH MOVE MODE popup window press the CLOSE button 1 16 CH17 32 CH 1 16 CH17 32 CH33 48 CH49 64 CH33 48 CH49 64 CH65 72 CH65 72 NOTE In the case of the CL3 CL1 faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown 75 CU s gt Cu_ 3 A 1 Reference Manual Initializing the parameters of channel You can restore the parameters of a channel to an initialized state This operation can be performed on any channel s 1 In the Function Access
128. files in the YPE SONGS folder You can select an audio file by pressing the audio file name Scene memory 7 OFFSET knob You can use the multifunction knob to set the time duration from scene recall until the start of audio file playback Scroll knob Use the multifunction to scroll the list 5 Press the screen or use the multifunction knobs to select a file that you want to link to a scene If desired use the corresponding multifunction knobs to set the offset the time duration until the start of audio file playback The offset value can be adjusted in the range of 0 0 99 0 in 0 5 sec steps 7 Press the OK button The title of the selected song will appear in the center of the song list If you select the CANCEL button instead of the OK button your settings will be discarded and the unit will return to the SCENE LIST popup window 8 Press the PLAY button to turn on the link to the audio file The PLAY button will light in the LINK field The PLAY indicator will appear in the STATUS field on the COMMENT tab Repeat steps 4 8 to link audio files to other scenes 10 Recall a scene to which an audio file has been linked After the offset time duration has elapsed the specified audio file will play one time NOTE e After a scene has been recalled and until the offset time has elapsed a countdown will appear in the Function Access Area f another song is playing during a scene recall the song playb
129. following characteristics that are unlike other parameters e It isa common value shared by all effects e You cannot stored it to or recall it from the Effects Library You can store it to and recall it from a Scene This means that the TEMPO value may not necessarily be the same when an effect is recalled as when that effect was stored Here is an example Store the effect TEMPO 120 Change TEMPO to 60 Recall the effect TEMPO 60 Normally when you change the TEMPO the DELAY or FREQ will be re set accordingly However if the DELAY or FREQ were changed the effect would sound differently when recalled than when it was stored To prevent the effect from changing in this way between store and recall the CL series does not update the DELAY or FREQ value when an effect is recalled even if the TEMPO is no longer the same as when that effect was stored The NOTE parameter is calculated based on the following values 1 48 2 1 24 1 16 ddd 1 12 3 32 1 8 ddd 1 6 J a 3 16 1 1 4 J 3 8 d 1 2 4 3 4 m 1 1 ma 2 1 CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual Appendices Parameters that can be assigned to control changes Parameter Parameter2 MATRIX 1 POINT MATRIX 8 POINT j Parameter MATRIX 1 ON MATRIX 8 ON NO ASSIGN Se 0 S MIX TO MATRIX MATRIX 1 LEVEL MATRIX 8 LEVEL H MIX 1 24 RIBUS CH 1 CH 72 MATRIX 1 LEVEL MATRIX 8 LEVEL L S
130. for MIX buses and MATRIX 202 Switching the entire phantom power supply 203 Specifying the brightness of the touch screen LEDs channel name displays zijn 204 Setting the date and time of the internal clock esee 204 Setting the network address 205 Initializing the unit to factory default settings 206 Adjusting the detection point of the touch screen Calibration function 207 Adjusting the faders Calibration function 208 Fine tuning the input and output gain Calibration function 209 Adjusting the channel color Calibration 211 Adjusting the brightness of the channel name display 212 Adjusting the contrast of the channel name 213 Dante audio network 213 Using GPI General Purpose Interface 221 EIS 227 ENING SEAN Ay LIS tices
131. for the input that you want to use for talkback to turn the button indicator on You can select only one input at a time 4 3 Press the CLOSE button to close the popup window Use the INPUT TO TALKBACK field GAIN knob and level meter to adjust the input level of the connected mic NOTE The PAD will be switched on or off internally when the HA gain is adjusted between 17 dB and 18 dB Keep in mind that noise may be generated when using phantom power if there is a difference between the Hot and Cold output impedance of an external device connected to the INPUT jack Press a button in the ASSIGN field to specify the bus es to which the talkback signal will be sent multiple selections are allowed NOTE You can press the CLEAR ALL button to defeat all selections To enable talkback press the TALKBACK ON button to turn it on The TALKBACK ON button will alternately turn on or off each time you press the button Latch operation While talkback is on signals from the TALKBACK jack and the selected INPUT jack will be output to the destination buses NOTE e You can also assign talkback on off or an ASSIGN change to a USER DEFINED key In this case you can select either a Latch operation or an Unlatch operation the function will be enabled only while you continue holding down the key see page 169 e When talkback is you can use the talkback dimmer to lower the monitor levels other than the talkback signal see page 99
132. functions that enable you to control the level or muting of multiple channels together the Channel Link function that links the parameters of multiple channels and the operations that enable you to copy or move parameters between channels About DCA groups and Mute groups CL series consoles feature sixteen DCA groups and eight mute groups that enable you to control the level of multiple channels simultaneously DCA groups enable you to assign input channels to sixteen groups so that the Centralogic section faders 1 8 can be used to control the level of all channels in each group A single DCA fader will control the level of all input channels belonging to the same DCA group while maintaining the level difference between the channels This provides a convenient way in which drum mics for example can be grouped Mute groups enable you to use USER DEFINED keys 1 16 to mute or unmute multiple channels in a single operation You can use this to cut out multiple channels simultaneously Mute groups 1 8 can be used with both input channels and output channels Both types of channels can exist in the same group Using DCA groups This section explains how to assign input channels to the sixteen DCA groups and use the faders in the Centralogic section to control them Assigning channels to a DCA group There are two ways to assign a channel to a DCA group e You can select a specific DCA group first and then specify the channels to be assi
133. groups Using the faders in the Channel Strip section or Master section on the top panel adjust the relative balance between the input channels that belong to the DCA group you want to use In the Centralogic section press the DCA 1 8 or DCA 9 16 Bank Select key to make it light so that you will be able to control the desired DCA groups in the Centralogic section Operate the Centralogic section fader corresponding to the DCA group that you want to use The level of the channels assigned to that DCA group will change while preserving the level differences you established in step 2 NOTE Operating a DCA fader will not cause the input faders to move in tandem To switch a DCA group on mute press the ON key for that DCA group in the Centralogic section When you press an ON key in the Centralogic section to make the key indicator go dark the channels assigned to that DCA group will be muted the same state as when the faders are lowered to the dB position To cue monitor a DCA group press the CUE key for that DCA group in the Centralogic section When you press the CUE key in the Centralogic section to make the key indicator light the CUE keys for the channels assigned to that DCA group will blink and cue monitoring will be enabled For more information about cue refer to Using the Cue function on page 101 NOTE You can also press the DCA DCA 1 8 or DCA 9 16 key in the Channel Strip section to s
134. how to use these buttons refer to Using the tool buttons in the separate Owner s Manual NOTE EQ settings can be saved and recalled at any time using the dedicated library You can also take advantage of a wide variety of presets suitable for various instruments or situations You can also access the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen and use the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to edit the EQ and high pass filter see page 8 e Even when the HPF EQ popup window is displayed you can use the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to control the EQ CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual e e Using dynamics Input channels feature two dynamics processors output channels feature one dynamics processor 1 Usethe Bank Select keys to access the OVERVIEW screen that includes the channel for which you want to control the dynamics The DYNAMICS 1 2 field displays the dynamics on off status and the amount of gain reduction Dynamics 1 field Dynamics 2 field In the OVERVIEW screen press the DYNAMICS 1 2 field to access the DYNAMICS 1 2 popup window In the DYNAMICS 1 2 popup window you can edit the dynamics settings and turn the processor on or off This popup window features five types of views Each window view includes the following items 59 EQ and Dynamics DYNAMICS 1 2 popup window 1ch This window displays only the currently selected channel All dynamics parameters can be viewed and edite
135. in point you can choose immediately before the EQ immediately before the fader or immediately after the ON key DIRECT OUT MONO channels only You can patch this to any output port to send out the input signal directly from the corresponding output port For the position of the direct output you can choose immediately before the HPF immediately before the EQ immediately before the fader or immediately after the ON key METER Meters the input channel level You can switch the position at which the level is detected see page 112 Input channels Specifying the channel name icon and channel color On the CL series unit you can specify the on screen name and icon for each input channel This section explains how to specify the channel name icon and channel color 1 Access the OVERVIEW screen that includes the input channel for which you want to specify the channel name icon and channel color Channel number Channel name field mem 000 Initial Data 2 Access the PATCH NAME popup window by pressing the channel number channel name field of the channel to which you want to assign the channel name icon and channel color CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual This popup window contains the following items PATCH NAME PATCH DANTE gt 001 001 DANTE 001 001 DANTE 1 001 001 1 PATCH button Indicates the currently patched port Press this button to enable the PATCH tab at the
136. internal signals to a USB flash drive or play back audio files recorded on a USB flash drive As the file format for recording the CL series console supports MP3 MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 For playback it supports MP3 as well as WMA Windows Media Audio and AAC MPEG 4 AAC files However DRM Digital Rights Management is not supported By using the USB memory recorder the output from the STEREO bus or a MIX bus can be recorded to a USB flash drive or background music or sound effects saved on a USB flash drive can be played back via an assigned input channel Signal flow for the USB memory recorder MIX1 24 RECORDER PLAYBACK MATRIX1 8 INPUT OUT STEREO L R USB memory INPUT1 72 MONO ST IN 1L1R 8L8R INPUT1 72 DIRECT OUT INPUT1 64 INPUT 1 48 NOTE Recording and playback cannot be done simultaneously The signal being recorded cannot be input to an INPUT channel 181 Recorder Assigning channels to the input and output of the recorder Follow the steps below to patch the desired channels to the input and output of the USB memory recorder You can patch any desired output channel or the direct output of an INPUT channel to the recorder input and you can patch the recorder output to any desired input channel 1 Inthe Function Access Area press the RECORDER button to access the RECORDER screen 2 Press the USB tab in the upper right of the screen On this screen you can as
137. its current state and will not be recalled e Similarly if the UNIT ID is different than when the data was stored the settings will not be recalled the current state will be maintained 2 AUTO SETUP button The current I O device connection status will be ascertained and input patching to the console will be performed automatically according to the order in which they are registered in the I O device list 1 7001 Rio3224 D When you press this button a confirmation popup dialog will appear asking you to confirm the execution of auto patching Press the OK button to execute auto patching Otherwise press CANCEL to return to the previous screen 3 Port select buttons DANTE Press one of the buttons to open the PORT SELECT popup window The Dante Device ID number hexadecimal and channel number decimal are shown in the upper row on the button The first eight characters of the channel label Dante Audio Channel Label for each port are shown in the lower row on the button 1 Category select list Enables you to select the I O device containing the input port that you want to assign 2 Port select buttons Select the input port 3 CLOSE button Completes the settings and closes the popup window 001 001 gt If no patch has been assigned the upper row will indicate and the lower row will indicate nothing CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual 139 7 assign the ou
138. monaural signal x 2 2 Bus type send point select buttons MIX bus only For every adjacent pair of buses you can select the bus type and for vari type the send point These buttons correspond to the following parameters Pre fader send point VARI PRE EQ VARI Immediately before the EQ VARI PRE FADER VARI Immediately before the fader CU 5 6 VL 3 V Reference Manual 3 Send point select buttons MATRIX bus only Select the pre fader send point from the input channel These buttons correspond to the following parameters Pre fader send point PRE EQ Immediately before the EQ PRE FADER Immediately before the fader 4 PAN LINK button This button appears only if two adjacent buses are paired in stereo and the bus type is set to VARI If the button is on the pan setting of signals sent from input channels to the corresponding two buses will link with the STEREO bus pan setting Use the MIX1 16 tab and MIX17 24 MATRIX tab to access the buses whose settings you want to edit 4 Usethe buttons in the SIGNAL TYPE field to specify whether each bus will function as STEREO main parameters will be linked for two adjacent odd numbered even numbered buses or MONOx2 use as two monaural channels D Usethe buttons of the PRE FADER SEND POINT BUS TYPE field to select the position from which the signal of the input channel will be sent In the case of a MIX bus you can use this field to switch the type of b
139. must not select the same DVS or DANTE ACCEL from more than one CL console NUENDO LIVE SETUP E Select to NO ASSIGN DVS or SPECIFIED IP ADDRESS CANCEL 1 Setup method selection buttons Use these buttons to select one of the following methods to specify DVS or DANTE ACCEL NO ASSIGN Not assigned oou Select a DVS from the device list e SPECIFIED IP ADDRESS When using DANTE ACCEL specify the IP address of the PC 190 Recorder When setup method selection button DVS To choose from a list of the I O devices on the Dante audio network press the DVS button to display the DEVICE LIST field NUENDO LIVE SETUP Choose DEVICE from DEVICE LIST DEVICE LIST 5 DVSI HUEHDO Live DYS Q CANCEL This screen contains the following items 1 DEVICE LIST Shows a list of the I O devices on the Dante audio network From the list choose the DVS that you want to use with Nuendo Live 2 DEVICE LIST select knob Operate the multi function knob to choose the DVS that you want to select CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual When setup method selection button SPECIFIED IP ADDRESS NOTE If you re using DANTE ACCEL use the SPECIFIED IP ADDRESS field to specify the IP address of the Depending on the firmware version DANTE ACCEL might not support redundant networking PC Since the IP address of DANTE ACCEL will differ from th
140. o ES go 9 2 0 1 ALL PRE button Sets the send point to The send point is the point at which signals are sent from all send source channels including the input and output channels to the selected send destination 2 ALL POST button Sets the send point to POST The send point is the point at which signals are sent from all send source channels including the input and output channels to the selected send destination 3 SEND FROM MODE button Press this button to switch to the SEND from 8ch popup window 4 Send destination indicator Indicates the currently selected send destination CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual Output channels 5 Send destination select buttons The knob for the mode selected here will appear Select MIX MATRIX buses as the send destination MIX SEND to MIX 1 6 Channel select button Selects the send source channel that you wish to control The current channel icon number and color appear on the button and the channel name appears immediately below the button 7 PRE POST button Switches the send point of each send source channel between PRE and POST If the button is on the send point is set to PRE SEND ON OFF button Switches the send of each send source channel on or off 9 SEND PAN BALANCE knob Sets the panning or balance of signals sent to the stereo send destination If the send desti
141. off simultaneously Graph Indicates the graphical EQ response Portico 5043 Portico 5043 like Portico 5033 is a processor that emulates analog compressor The actual 5043 Compressor is equipped with the same input output transformer as that of the 5033 EQ delivering a natural analog like tonality and effect It enables you to obtain a range of results from hard compression to natural sound and is suitable for a broad range of audio sources ranging from drums to vocals The most notable feature of this model is that you can switch the gain reduction type You can choose either an FF Feed Forward circuit type which is the current mainstream or an FB Feed Back circuit which was typically used in vintage compressors This allows you to create sounds with various characteristics as appropriate for your applications ASSIST OUTPUT INS CH 1 5 Ponit 5043 ch 1 PoriticoS043 Dual FB GAIN REDUCTION 22 18 14 10 6 4 2 0 25 0 2 50 1 button Turns the compressor s bypass on or off When the compressor is bypassed the button indicator will turn off However even if the compressor is bypassed the signal will pass through the input output transformer and amp circuits 2 INPUT meter Indicates the input signal level One meter appears in DUAL mode and two meters appear in STEREO mode 133 Graphic EQ effects and Premium Rack 3 FB button Switches
142. on your USB flash drive In addition to files that were recorded on the CL series console you can also play files that were copied from your computer to the USB flash drive The three types of file format that can be played are MP3 MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 WMA Windows Media Audio and AAC MPEG 4 AAC The playable sampling rates are 44 1 kHz and 48 kHz The supported bit rate ranges from 64 kbps to 320 kbps 1 Connect a USB flash drive that contains the audio files to the USB connector NOTE If you want to play back an audio file you must save it in the SONGS folder within the YPE folder or in a folder you have created below the SONGS folder Files located in other folders and files of unsupported formats will not be recognized 2 Inthe Function Access Area press the RECORDER button to access the RECORDER screen CRST RKI0 2 DELETE DIR VOLUME FREE SIZE 1 86B 92 FILE NAME ARTIST SONG JH o 00 00 13 7 SONGO02 MP3 Artist 00 00 07 SAVE List D 10 PLAY MODE smars Co 192kbps 00 00 13 PLAYBACK OUT Q Title list This list shows the playable audio files and the folders that are saved in the selected folder of USB flash drive The row with the blue background in the center of the list indicates the song file folder that is selected for operations gt cu Reference Manual 2 Status indicator A symbol indicating whether the file i
143. on your location and needs REV X HALL REV X ROOM and REV X PLATE p Jono reverb diffusion efright reve spread SSS HPF THRU 22 0 Wie titer cutoff frequency SSS 1 00 kHz 18 0 kHz Low pass filter cutoff frequency 1 THRU 1 These values are for when the effect type is REV X HALL and the ROOM SIZE 28 The range will differ depending on the effect type and ROOM SIZE setting REVERB HALL REVERB ROOM REVERB STAGE REVERB PLATE One input two output hall room stage and plate reverb simulations all with gates pg Rwebdf sondetrghtrvebsyead Wr TARU 21 2 He 6 00 We High pasfiter cutoff frequency OOO U y DECAY Gate closing speed 1 0 02 ms 2 13 fs 44 1 kHz 0 02 ms 1 96 fs 48 kHz 2 6 0 ms 46 0 s fs 44 1 kHz 5 0 ms 42 3 s fs 48 kHz CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual STEREO REVERB Two input two output stereo reverb DIF 0 10 sd Reverb diffusion left right reverb spread DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density E R BAL 0 100 Balance of early reflections and reverb 0 all reverb 100 all early reflections HPF THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency EARLY REF One input two output early reflections pr 0 10 Reeciondifusondefightrelecionspren Iis Numbeofemyrfedim O HPF THRU 27 2 He B 00 Kia High pass fiter
144. or if you forget the password and cannot operate the unit you can use the following procedure to initialize the internal memory 4 Press the OK button in the confirmation dialog box NOTICE The Initialization operation starts The entire memory will be deleted if you initialize the internal memory NOTE Do not press any buttons until initialization is complete Proceed with the following operation only if you are very sure you want to delete the entire memory D message indicates that the initialization process is complete Press the EXIT 1 While holding down the SCENE MEMORY STORE key on the panel turn on the button power to the CL unit The CL unit will start up in normal operating mode NOTE INITIALIZE ALL MEMORIES MOVE SELELT Alternatively you can continue operation by selecting a different menu instead of pressing the EXIT button ALL MEMORIES After the opening screen the following startup menu screen will appear 2 Initialize All Memories INITIALIZE v MODE SELECT STORE MI LE Naz 2 Press one of the following buttons depending on the type of initialization you want to perform INITIALIZE ALL MEMORIES The entire memory including scene memories and libraries will be returned to factory default settings INITIALIZE CURRENT MEMORIES The contents of memory except for scene memories and libraries will be returned to its factory default settings 206 CU 5 6 UL 3 1 1 Reference
145. panel to select the function you want to assign For details on the assignable functions and their parameters refer to Functions that can be assigned to the assignable encoders on page 263 NOTE SELECTED SEND is the default setting It functions as the send to the MIX MATRIX channel that is selected for SENDS ON FADER in the Function Access Area Press the OK button to close the ASSIGNABLE ENCODER SETUP window Press the GAIN PAN ASSIGN key on the top panel repeatedly to select ASSIGN The and feature one GAIN PAN ASSIGN key Therefore the function of all GAIN PAN ASSIGN knobs will change simultaneously _ GAIN _ On the CL5 you can switch the knob function in block A left side and ASSIGN block C Master fader section right side independently by using the corresponding GAIN PAN ASSIGN keys 51 NOTE This assignment does not apply to the multifunction knobs in the Centralogic section since these knobs are used to control on screen parameters Operate the GAIN PAN ASSIGN knob on each fader strip CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual Custom fader bank Groups that organize channels routed to the top panel faders are called fader banks There are input and output channel banks as well as custom fader banks Custom fader banks enable you to select various combinations of channels regardless of channel types This section explains how to set up a custom fader bank 1
146. processors Name ting Opt 2A Models a classic vacuum tube optical type compressor EQ 1A Models a classic vacuum tube passive type vintage EQ Dynamic EQ Newly developed EQ that features a dynamically changing gain and enables you to y control the cut boost amount in relation to the input level Graphic EQ effects and Premium Rack Using the Premium Rack The procedure to set up the I O patches for the rack are the same as those for the effect rack see page 122 For the premium rack only racks 1 2 can be used via send return Racks 3 8 are only for patching as inserts Refer to steps 5 and 6 of Virtual rack operations on page 115 1 In the Function Access Area press the RACK button to access the VIRTUAL RACK window 2 Inthe upper part of the VIRTUAL RACK window press the PREMIUM tab to display the PREMIUM RACK field VIRTUAL RACK GEQ 9 16 EFFECT PREMIUM _ CH1 E ch 1 Ln Lc Send MIXI E 000 Initial Data CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual mount a Premium Rack in the rack press the RACK MOUNT button for that rack The PREMIUM RACK MOUNTER popup window will appear PREMIUM 1 MODULE SELECT 2 Portico5033 Portico5043 ded EQ 1A Dynamic EQ CANCEL 4 Use the MODULE SELECT buttons to select the type you want to mount and press the OK button There are two ways to mount each processor e DUAL The processor is used on two mono
147. section explains how to assign the desired functions to the USER DEFINED knobs in the USER DEFINED KNOBS section on the top panel and press these knobs to execute the defined function This assignment procedure will define the USER DEFINED knobs for the user who is currently logged in but if you are logged in as the Administrator you can also make USER DEFINED knob settings for the Guest account 1 In the Function Access Area press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen 2 Press the USER SETUP button to access the USER SETUP popup window USER DEFINED KNOBS and ASSIGNABLE ENCODER for Administrator USER DEFINED KNOBS ASSIGNABLE ENCODER 4m T BRIGHTHESS SELECTED SEND e BRIGHTHESS BRIGHTHESS C TOUCH AND TURH D 3 Press the USER DEFINED KNOBS tab to select the USER DEFINED KNOBS page If you are logged in as the Administrator you can also turn on the FOR GUEST button in the lower right of the screen to access the USER DEFINED KNOBS for Guest page and make USER DEFINED knob settings for the Guest account The four on screen buttons correspond to USER DEFINED knobs 1 4 on the top panel The name of function or parameter assigned to each key appears to the right of the corresponding on screen button If nothing is assigned to the knob an indication of will appear next to the button 4 Press the button corresponding to the USER DEFINED knob to which you
148. sends input channel signals to three buses STEREO L R and MONO C simultaneously Signals sent from an input channel to the STEREO bus MONO bus will be switched on or off collectively The CSR Center Side Ratio knob specifies the level ratio between signals sent from an input channel to the STEREO L R bus and to the MONO C bus The TO ST PAN knob BALANCE knob specifies the level of signals sent from an input channel to the STEREO L R bus and MONO C bus NOTE If you want to monitor the signal of the STEREO bus or MONO bus through headphones or similar devices press the MONITOR button in the Function Access Area to select LCR as the monitor source before you continue with the following procedure CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual 1 sure that an input source is connected to the input channel you are adjusting Set the phantom power gain and phase of the head amp to obtain the optimum input signal 2 Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to access the OVERVIEW screen that includes the input channel from which you want to send the signal to the STEREO MONO bus CH2 CH3 CH4 CHS CH CH7 CHS ch 2 ch 3 ch 4 ch 5 ch 6 ch ch 8 ea 000 Initial Data STEREO MONO field 3 Inthe STEREO MONO field press a knob to select the channel you want to adjust and then press the knob once again to access the TO STEREO MONO popup window In the TO STEREO M
149. settings console ID setting SECONDARY PORT functionality setting audio bit rate latency setting selections for devices controlled via the I O DEVICE screen BUS SETUP field This field enables you to make bus related settings BUS SETUP popup button Press this button to open the BUS SETUP popup window in which you can make MIX bus MATRIX bus related settings DATE TIME popup button Press this button to open the DATE TIME popup window in which you can set the date and time NETWORK popup button Press this button to open the NETWORK popup window in which you can set the network address B indicator field This field displays various information about the consoles status 5 BATTERY indicator Indicates the status of the internal battery NOTE The LOW or NO indication will appear if the battery runs down In this case immediately contact your Yamaha dealer or a Yamaha service center listed at the end of the operating manual separate document to have the backup battery replaced POWER SUPPLY indicator Indicates the currently running power supply INT internal or EXT PW800 7 Version indicator Indicates the version number of the main CPU sub CPU and DANTE module CONSOLE LOCK button This button executes the Console Lock function If the console password has been set pressing this button will open the AUTHORIZATION popup window Enter the correct password to execute Console Lock If the console
150. sources simultaneously Pressing the CLEAR ALL button will clear all selections 3 DIMMER field Enables you to make settings for the Dimmer function which temporarily attenuates monitor signals e DIMMER LEVEL knob Adjusts the amount by which the monitor signals will be attenuated when the dimmer is on Monitor and Cue functions e DIMMER ON button Switches the Dimmer function on or off The monitor signal will be attenuated if this button is on 4 TALKBACK DIMMER field Enables you to make settings for the Dimmer function which temporarily attenuates monitor signals when TALKBACK is on e TALKBACK DIMMER LEVEL knob Adjusts the amount by which monitor signals will be attenuated when talkback is on e TALKBACK DIMMER ON indicator Indicates the on off status of the dimmer function for talkback 5 PHONES LEVEL LINK button Enables you to link the signal level at the PHONES Out jack to the monitor signal level If this button is on the MONITOR LEVEL knob and monitor fader knob will adjust the level of the signal sent to the PHONES OUT jack 6 CUE INTERRUPTION button Press this button to interrupt the cue signal with the monitor signal If this button is on and the cue is enabled the cue signal will be sent to the monitor output With the factory default settings this function is turned on If you do not wish to send the cue signal to the monitor output switch this button off 7 MONO MONITOR button Turn on this
151. symbol EDIT symbol This symbol appears when you edit the mix parameters for the currently loaded scene This symbol indicates that you must execute the Store operation if you want to keep the changes you made CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual e f you press and hold down either the SCENE MEMORY INC DEC keys the scene number will count up or down continuously e f you press the SCENE MEMORY INC and DEC keys simultaneously the SCENE field indication will return to the number of the currently loaded scene e You cannot store data to a scene number for which the Protect symbol symbol is displayed 3 Press the SCENE MEMORY STORE key The SCENE STORE popup window will appear allowing you to assign a title or comment to the scene SCENE STORE SCENE TITLE 001 Initial Data COMMENT SHIFT LOCK CANCEL 1 SCENE TITLE field Press this field to select it and then enter a title for the scene maximum 16 characters 2 COMMENT field Press this field to select it and then enter a comment for the scene You can use this as a memorandum for each scene maximum 32 characters 4 Assign a title or comment to the scene as desired For details on entering text refer to Entering names in the separate Owner s Manual Scene memory Press the SCENE MEMORY STORE key or the STORE button located in the lower part of the SCENE STORE popup window The SCENE STORE popup w
152. the I O device or the CL unit For details about the GAIN PATCH popup window refer to Making HA Head Amp settings on page 30 148 CU 5 66 3 C 1 Reference Manual This chapter explains how to transmit MIDI messages from an external device to the CL series console to control the CL consoles parameters and how to send out MIDI messages from the CL console as you operate the unit MIDI functionality on the CL series console The CL series console can use MIDI to perform the following operations Program Change transmission and reception When you execute a specific event scene effect library recall on the CL series console a Program Change message a number that is assigned to the event can be transmitted to an external device Conversely the corresponding event can be executed when a Program Change message is received from an external device Control Change transmission and reception When you execute a specific event fader knob or key operation on the CL series console the corresponding Control Change message can be transmitted to an external device Conversely events can be executed when Control Change messages are received from an external device This allows you to record fader and key operations on a MIDI sequencer or other external device and play them back later B Parameter Change SysEx transmission and reception When specific events fader knob or key operations changes in system settings or u
153. the MIDI input port To much data is being transmitted from the MIDI output port In the RECORDER screen it is not possible to move to a level higher than YPE SONGS A copy source channel was not selected in the GLOBAL PASTE screen In the Global Paste screen you attempted to paste without having selected an item to paste The corresponding section was not found in the Hlep file The music file cannot be edited because it has no ID3 tag No response from an external AD8HR The devices not responding CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual Message Page Bookmarked Password Changed PLAYBACK OUT CUE Turned Off PlayBack Failed Recorder is Busy Please wait Dante patch is proceeding now Power Supply Fan has Malfunctioned Processing Aborted PREVIEW Mode Cannot Use This Function PREVIEW Mode Disabled PREVIEW Mode Enabled Re Enter Password RECORDER CODEC Error 0x 08X Recorder Busy Operation Aborted RECORDER IN CUE Turned Off Removed from the Channel Link group Saving Aborted Saving Finished SCENE xxx is Empty SCENE xxx is Protected SCENE xxx is Read Only Scene Playback Link Canceled SLOT x Data Framing Error SLOT x Data Overrun SLOT x Rx Buffer Full SLOT x Tx Buffer Full Some Song Files Are Unidentified Song File Not Found STAGEMIX Data Framing Error STAGEMIX Data Overrun STAGEMIX Rx Buffer Full Meaning The current screen o
154. the Rio series it is possible for devices of differing models to be assigned to the same ID as an Rio series unit or the same ID as a different model of device However since the I O device input output port screen shows the UNIT ID this will make it difficult to distinguish between the units so we recommend that whenever possible you avoid allowing the ID numbers to overlap If you have a device whose UNIT ID or device label cannot be changed from its panel or its edit screen etc such as the Dante MY 16 AUD card or DANTE ACCEL and you want to use that device as a SUPPORTED DEVICE you must change its device label via Dante Controller The Dante MY 16 AUD and DANTE ACCEL will be recognized as a SUPPORTED DEVICE if you assign the device label as follows Dante MY16 AUD Y Audinate DANTE MY16 DANTE ACCEL Y Yamaha DANTE ACCEL is a three digit hexadecimal number containing the digits 0 9 and uppercase A F 000 FFF indicates any desired character alphabetical uppercase or lowercase numerals or hyphen may be used If you are controlling the CL console from an Rio series unit we recommend that you set the Rio units START UP MODE to REFRESH Operation will be safer with the HEFRESH setting since mute will be cleared after synchronization has been completed with CL units whose system setting for REMOTE HA ASSIGN is set to WITH RECALL With the RESUME setting mute will be cleared and the unit
155. the cue out Use the multifunction knob to adjust the level ACTIVE CUE indicator Lights to indicate the type of cue currently being monitored input blue DCA yellow output orange 9 CLEAR CUE button Press this button to clear all cue selections simultaneously CU 5 6 VL 3 V Reference Manual 3 Use the CUE MODE button to select either the mode in which channels are mixed for auditioning or the mode in which only the last selected channel is auditioned Select the MIX CUE button or LAST CUE button NOTE In MIX CUE mode it s not possible to simultaneously turn on Cue for different Cue groups The Cue group to which the last cued signal belongs will be turned on allowing only the signals of that Cue group to be monitored Use the buttons and knobs of the INPUT CUE field DCA CUE field and OUTPUT CUE field to specify the output position and output level for each CUE group Refer to the explanation for each item in step 2 and make the desired settings To specify a port as the output destination for cue signals L and R press one of the CUE OUTPUT buttons L R in the meter field to open the PORT SELECT popup window and choose from the following cue signal output destinations multiple selections are allowed PORT SELECT Select candidate gt DANTE si 3 7 DANTE 39 OMNIS When you have selected an output port press the CLOSE button to close the popup window
156. the next You count the number of hops starting from the master device to the most distant device assuming that all devices are connected in series Switches mean network switches and routers as well as the switches that are built into CL series consoles and I O devices Set the latency value based on the number of hops The following table shows typical latency settings based on the number of hops Number of hops Latency ms 0103 5 Up to 10 1 0 11 or more or if a problem occurs NOTE e Depending on network conditions you may need to raise the latency value even if the number of hops is small e f a problem occurs select 5 0 ms so that you will be able to identify whether the latency setting is the cause of the problem Connection examples and latency settings Daisy chain connections Simple 64 in 48 out Rio3224 1 8103224 1 Rio3224 2 3 hops 0 25 lt 3 hops 0 25 ms CU 5 6 UL 3 V 13 Reference Manual Daisy chain connections FOH and monitor consoles are sharing 64 in 48 out 4 hops 0 5 ms Redundant connections Simple 64 in 48 out 4 hops 0 5 ms 3 hops 0 25 ms 216 Redundant connections FOH and monitor consoles are sharing 64 in 48 out Bel 4 hops 0 5 ms Daisy chain connections 256 ch HA remote maximum size 9 hops 1 0 ms 4 hops 0 5 ms Other functions CU 5 VUL 3 6 V Re
157. the password in the NEW PASSWORD field then enter the same password in the RE ENTER PASSWORD field for verification and finally press the OK button The password can be up to eight characters If the two passwords that were entered match the Administrator password will be set For details on entering a password refer to Entering names in the separate Owner s Manual User settings Security Creating a user authentication key You can create a user authentication key and save it on a USB flash drive or in the consoles internal memory user authentication key can be created only by an Administrator or Power User The user level is specified when the authentication key is created but USER SETUP settings other than the user level such as preferences and the USER DEFINED keys will be carried over from the user who is currently logged in 1 To create a user authentication key a USB flash drive connect a USB flash drive to the USB connector If you want to save the user authentication key in internal memory simply proceed to step 2 2 Inthe Function Access Area press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen _ CH1 ch 1 CURRENT USER 0 00 00 ADMIN ini CREATE Send To MIX1 Administrator PASSWORD CHANGE How all operations are permitted SYSTEM SETUP 48V MASTER BUS SETUP OH MIXER SETUP METER E WORD CLOCK CASCADE OUTPUT 5 MIDI ZGPI iI SLOT PORT OVER POWER SUPPLY SUB DANTE
158. they will be converted into 16 bit for display CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual Saving and loading setup data to and from USB flash drive This section explains how to connect a commercially available USB flash drive to the USB connector located to the right of the display and save the internal settings and user authentication keys of the CL series console to the USB flash drive or load them from the USB flash drive NOTE e Operation is guaranteed only for USB flash drives e The operation of USB flash drives with capacities of up to 32GB has been verified However this does not necessarily guarantee the operation of all USB flash drives The FAT16 and FAT32 formats are supported A USB flash drive with a capacity of 4GB or larger will be formatted in FAT32 and a USB flash drive with a capacity of 2GB or smaller will be formatted in FAT16 NOTICE An ACCESS indicator appears in the Function Access Area while data is being accessed saved loaded or deleted During this time do not disconnect the USB plug or power off the CL unit Doing so may damage the data in the flash drive Saving the CL console s internal data on a USB flash drive All of the CL series consoles internal data can be saved on a USB flash drive as a setting file The saved file will have an extension of CLF 1 In the Function Access Area press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen _ CH1 ch 1 0 00 00 ADMIN Send To MIXI CURR
159. uc cx PEAKING PEAKING PF Toone 475 Hz 236z 10 0 kez rat so 109 90 PEAKING PEAKING PF 4 25 a 19 63 22 FEARING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PF 190 400 Hz 670 nie 5 60 knz a 19 63 22 010 C PEAKING PEAKING ISHED 75 0 Hz 4 00 ehz 125 kez ro PEAKING PEAKING PF Tom 2 50 Ke ray 4o 79 95 Ld H SHELF 0 0 dB 10 0 kHz DYNAMICS Library List Ducking Compander H Compander S 9 rattack ms 9 Threshold Threshold dB 5 LLL Tema gain dB 99 _ gain dB 99 _ Wd 6 _ Threshold gain 99 _ 228 DUCKING DE ESSER COMPRESSOR EXPANDER COMPANDER H COMPANDER S Appendices Finger 9 Aum 8 ms 9 Threshold 8 8 gain dB 99 _ Release ms 470 COMPRESSOR COMPANDER H COMPRESSOR EXPANDER COMPANDER S EXPANDER COMPANDER S COMPRESSOR CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual Appendices Threshold companpers 8 Threshold BJ Chorus COMPRESSOR Threshold dB dB 33 Ratio 1 Click Erase EXPANDER 29 5 lingP Out g
160. unexpected HA changes DEVICE LIST NO ASSIGN WITH RECALL E Recall HA setting from this console CANCEL This screen contains the following items 1 DEVICE LIST Shows a list of the HA devices on the Dante audio network 2 with RECALL button If this button is on the settings saved in the CL series console will be applied to the HA device when the CL series console starts up and when a scene is recalled 3 DEVICE LIST select knob Use the multi function knob to select the HA device that you want to mount NOTE e Do not specify with RECALL if an HA device is shared by multiple CL series consoles and settings have already been made on a different CL series console The HA device can also be operated from a CL series console that is not set to with RECALL After you ve selected the HA device to mount press the OK button to close the REMOTE HA SELECT popup window If you ve changed the setting by pressing the with RECALL button a confirmation dialog box will appear EE make the setting press the OK button 221 Other functions Using GPI General Purpose Interface The rear panel GPI General Purpose Interface connector can be used as an input output connector This connector provides five GPI IN ports and five GPI OUT ports For example you can use an external switch to control internal parameters of the CL series console or to switch scenes C
161. user authentication key 7 SAVE LOAD popup button Press this button to open the SAVE LOAD popup window in which you can save or load user authentication keys and console files SYSTEM SETUP field This field enables you to make various settings that globally apply to the CL console 48V MASTER button Switches the consoles master 48V master phantom power on or off If this button is off phantom power will not be supplied even if the 48V button of an OMNI jack input channel TALKBACK IN is on NOTE This 48V MASTER setting does not affect the inputs of external racks such as DANTE inputs I O devices Each rack has a 48V MASTER switch and will operate according to its setting 9 WORD CLOCK SLOT popup button Press this button to open the WORD CLOCK SLOT popup window in which you can make word clock settings and various settings for each slot CASCADE popup button Press this button to open the CASCADE popup window in which you can make patch settings for cascade connections 17 OUTPUT PORT popup button Press this button to open the OUTPUT PORT popup window in which you can make output port settings T 96 CU 5 C UL 3 1 Reference Manual 2 MIDI GPI popup button Press this button to open the MIDI GPI popup window in which you can make MIDI and GPI related settings 3 DANTE SETUP button Press this button to open the DANTE SETUP popup window This window enables you to make various audio network
162. which you want to send signals and that your monitor system external effect processor or other device is connected to the corresponding output port 2 Usethe SEL keys on the top panel to select the input channels that will send signals to the MIX MATRIX buses CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual Press knob the SELECTED CHANNEL section to access the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen DYNAMICS 1 OVER ZMATRIX DANTE1 YOO1 001 P 10 20 00 c 10k 100 INSERT m P 0 0 MUTE SHELF 10 0k j HIGH MID DIRECT OUT 2 E ON 0 70 4 00k 7 LOW MID z 0 70 LOW S lt SHELF 125 1 CH CH4 ch 4 pu 000 CHS 6 1 CHS e FU ch 5 Initial Data 4 In the TO MIX MATRIX field on screen make sure that the 1 16 button or MIX17 24 MATRIX button is turned on The TO MIX TO MATRIX field displays the corresponding knobs and buttons If this button is off press the button to turn it on MIX buses can be either a FIXED type that features a fixed send level or a VARI type that features a variable send level The MATRIX buses are all VARI type You can switch between FIXED and VARI types for each two adjacent odd even numbered MIX buses To do so press the SETUP button the USER SETUP button and then the BUS SETUP button to open the BUS SETUP popup window If the send destination MIX bus is a FIXED type a circle O
163. will be subject to Recall Safe you can select either or LEVEL ON fader position and on off status of the ON key Recall Safe will be enabled when you make this selection If you want all parameters of the DCA group to be subject to Recall Safe turn on the ALL button Unlike when a channel is selected Recall Safe will be enabled for that DCA group the moment you turn on either the LEVEL ON button or the ALL button CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual 5 To enable Recall Safe for the selected channel turn on the SAFE button the SAFE PARAMETER SELECT field If you have selected a DCA group turn on either the LEVEL ON button or the ALL button Channels or DCA groups for which Recall Safe is enabled will be highlighted in the CH RECALL SAFE field To turn on Recall Safe for global parameters press the GLOBAL RECALL SAFE field to access the GLOBAL RECALL SAFE popup window and turn on the appropriate buttons These buttons correspond to the following parameters All input channel patching including INSERT IN OUT and DIRECT OUT INPUT PATCH patching CH LINK All channel link group settings GEQ RACK EFFECT RACK PREMIUM RACK PANEL SNAPSHOT Fader bank selections GAIN PAN ASSIGN knob selection status set in units of blocks NOTE If a dual type GEQ rack or Premium Rack has been selected you can apply Recall Safe to rack A and B individually For other racks the Recall Safe setting for r
164. will operate for recalling the current scene If cascade connected both master and slave units will operate independently Link will not occur while in Preview mode The following functions will not operate in Preview mode e Synchronization with CL Editor e Switching users e Changing the User Level e Load Save functions e Cue changes e USER DEFINED KEYS operations e USER DEFINED KNOB operations e Monitor MONITOR CUE OSCILLATOR TALKBACK changes or display e Changing or viewing Nuendo Live settings e Changing or viewing the recorder e Changing DANTE SETUP or DANTE PATCH settings e FADE TIME e EFFECT FREEZE playback or recording e MIDI clock and tap tempo for effects Internal metering for Premium Effects GR for DynamicEQ and Portico 5043 VU for Opt 2A and U76 In addition you cannot enter Preview mode while performing the following operations e While pasting scene or EQ settings e While executing Global Paste e While synchronizing with CL Editor e While saving loading a file CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual Monitor and Cue functions This chapter explains the Monitor and Cue functions of CL series consoles About the Monitor and Cue functions The Monitor function lets you audition various outputs through your nearfield monitors or headphones On the front panel of the CL series console is a PHONES Out jack for monitoring which enables you to monitor the monitoring source signal at any time By assigning
165. will start operating with the settings that were backed up by the Rio series unit itself which could allow unexpected audio to be output A single CL console can control the HA of up to eight Rio series units If nine or more Rio series units are connected you can either divide the HA control between multiple CL consoles or you can omit specifying REMOTE HA ASSIGN for the Rio series units whose HA does not need to be controlled and use them with START UP MODE set to RESUME CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual When setup method selection button DVS When setup method selection button MANUAL If you want to enter the device label of an I O device and mount it press the DVS or MANUAL button to access the DVS MANUAL field DEVICE SELECT 1 EJ Input the Device Label via the keyboad and assign the number of Dante Inputs and Outputs ONLINE OFFLINE DEVICE LABEL INPUT OUTPUT 1 Q D 1 2 0 SHIFT LOCK CANCEL This screen contains the following items 1 DEVICE LABEL Displays the device label of the I O device which you entered from the keyboard 2 INPUT OUTPUT knobs Use the multi function knobs to specify the number of inputs and outputs on the Dante audio network 3 Device label entry keyboard Use this keyboard to enter the device label of the I O device NOTE f the I O device is a DVS mount it by pressing the DVS button f the device label you entered is detected automatic
166. you to enter the password AUTHORIZATION USER NAME Administrator PASSWORD SHIFT LOCK CANCEL 3 Enter the password for the logged in user and press the OK button The CONSOLE LOCK screen will appear the Console Lock function will be enabled and all controllers excluding the MONITOR LEVEL knob will become inoperable CONSOLE LOCK All console operations have been suspended Touch the screen to Unlock the console 176 User settings Security Unlocking the console 1 Press the CONSOLE LOCK screen If you are logged in as a user for whom no password is set the console will be unlocked If you are logged in as a user for whom a password is set a keyboard window will appear allowing you to enter the password Enter the password for the logged in user or for the Administrator and press the OK button The console will be unlocked you will return to the SETUP screen and the controllers will be operable once again Specifying the CONSOLE LOCK screen image If an image file has been saved on the USB flash drive you can view that image on the CONSOLE LOCK screen In the SAVE LOAD popup window specify the image file that you want to display and then load it from the USB flash drive For details about loading files from the USB flash drive refer to Loading a file from the USB flash drive on page 178 NOTE Supported image file format is BMP in 800 x 600 pixels and 16 24 32 bit but
167. 0 00 Hz 0 100 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency NOTE Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ 1 Fa 4445 Pa d 4 d DEPTH 240 Appendices REV PAN This is 1 in 2 out series connected reverb and auto pan effect DK foo Reverb an nned rever lan HPF THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 khz High passfiter cutofffrequency O Oooo ModWainsped O OSSOS pm Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ 1 LoR L amp R Turn L R 2 HE u d de d DELAY ER One input two output delay and early reflections effects in parallel 99 to 49996 Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio Delay an rly reflections balance 100 all early reflections HPF THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutofFfrequency OO OoOo o ow fono SSS RNUM Numberofeariyreflecions SSCS NOTE L Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY L NOTE Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY R NOTE FB Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB DLY 1 FR FJ bh ddd JD d da d d oa Maximum value depends on the tempo setting CU 5 UL 3 V Reference Manual DELAYER
168. 0x80 b 0 1 6 I b I 1 d I amp 0x7F Recovery from bulk data to actual data d 0 6 actual data b 0 7 bulk data for 1 0 I lt 7 1 b 0 lt lt 1 d I b I 1 0x80 amp b 0 3 3 PARAMETER CHANGE Reception This message is echoed if PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO is ON This message is received if PARAMETER CHANGE Rx is ON and Rx CH matches the Device number included in the SUB STATUS When a PARAMETER CHANGE is received the specified parameter will be controlled When a PARAMETER REQUEST is received the current value of the specified parameter will be transmitted as a PARAMETER CHANGE with its Device Number as the Rx CH Transmission If PARAMETER CHANGE Tx is ON and you edit a parameter for which CONTROL CHANGE transmission has not been enabled a PARAMETER CHANGE will be transmitted with the Tx CH as its device number In response to a PARAMETER REQUEST a PARAMETER CHANGE will be transmitted with Rx CH as its device number Command rx tx Function FO 43 1n 3E 19 F7 RARAMETER CHANGE FO 43 3n 3E 19 F7 PARAMETER REQUEST rx tx CLseries native parameter change rx tx CL series native parameter request 4 PARAMETER CHANGE details 4 1 CURRENT SCENE SETUP BACKUP USER SETUP 4 1 1 Format PARAMETER CHANGE Receive Data will be received when PARAMETER CHANGE Rx is on and the Device number of both Rx CH and SUB STATUS are matched The data will be echoed when P
169. 1 Channel Copying moving initializing 73 Channel COME 29 204 211 Channel lDraty 45 55 Channel EI 70 Channel name displays 204 Console LOCK eiecti bomi cine 175 Control Changes Control 155 Cue 97 101 IPETO 102 Custom fader Dank 173 D Dante audio network 15 213 ipt 25 Iba wu 64 Directly OUP UI IDE REC iP 23 56 59 E aes 63 DYNAMICS Library List 228 Dynamics 230 114 137 Ru 232 Effects and tempo synchronization 247 Effects Parameters ies tvm ri S 233 Electrical characteristics 273 E E E E E 56 DADE ATES MR 63 EQ Library 166 227 Extertial 21 External head amp 138 144 r Factory SOU MN 206 Pade 91 Focas 87 Function 4 G Cr M 30 PO MC 30 Na dE 34 Gain Compensation 34 35 Global Paste function sss 85 11 221 Graphic M M 114 137 occisos iios 118 64 HA Head A
170. 1 In the Function Access Area press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen 2 Press the USER SETUP button to access the USER SETUP popup window USER DEFINED KEYS for_Administrator SEHDS FADER f SEHDS OH FADER MTRX1 2 MTRX2 PAGE CHANGE PAGE CHANGE BOOKMARK BOOKMARK PAGE CHANGE PAGE CHANGE BOOKMARK BOOKMARK PAGE CHANGE y ALTERHATE FUHCTIOH BOOKMARK UHLATCH MUTE MASTER MUTE MASTER MUTE GROUP 1 MUTE GROUP 2 HOME TALKBACK TOGGLE TALKBACK OH 3 Press the USER DEFINED KEYS tab to select the USER DEFINED KEYS page If you are logged in as the Administrator you can also turn on the FOR GUEST button in the lower right of the screen to access the USER DEFINED KEYS for Guest page and make USER DEFINED key settings for the Guest account The sixteen buttons on screen corresponds to USER DEFINED keys 1 16 on the top panel The name of function or parameter assigned to each key appears to the right of the corresponding on screen button If nothing is assigned to the key an indication of will appear next to the button CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual 4 Press the button corresponding to the USER DEFINED key to which you want to assign a function The USER DEFINED KEY SETUP window will appear In this window you can select a function to assign to the USER DEFINED key and select the parameters USER DEFINED KEY SETUP 2 Select Paramete
171. 1 63 NRPN MSB Ovvvvvvv vv Parameter number MSB STATUS 1011nnnn Bn Control change DATA 00000110 06 Data entry MSB Ovvvvvvv vv Parameter data MSB STATUS 1011nnnn Bn Control change DATA 00100110 26 Data entry LSB Ovvvvvvv vv Parameter data LSB The STATUS byte of the second and subsequent messages need not be added during transmission Reception must occur correctly whether or not the status byte is omitted 1 4 PROGRAM CHANGE Cn Reception If PROGRAM CHANGE ECHO is ON bank select messages will also be echoed from MIDI OUT If SINGLE CH is selected these messages are received if PROGRAM CHANGE Rx is ON and the CH matches However if OMNI is ON these messages are received regardless of the channel When these messages are received scene memory effect librarya nd premium rack library are recalled according to the settings of the PROGRAM CHANGE EVENT LIST Transmission If PROGRAM CHANGE Tx is ON these messages are transmitted according to the PROGRAM CHANGE Table settings when scene memory effect library and premium rack library are recalled If SINGLE CH is selected these messages are transmitted on the Tx CH channel Ifthe recalled scene memory effect library and premium rack library has been assigned to more than one PROGRAM NUMBER the lowest numbered PROGRAM NUMBER for each MIDI channel will be transmitted PROGRAM CHANGE messages are not used for transmission to CL Editor because there is no guarant
172. 1 72 64 48 2 4 24 1 linked to each other except for STIN 1L 4R POST EQ 2 2 i phase Digital GAIN Delay i 172 227 4 and PAN To MATRIX MATRIX1 3 7 P SAME as INPUT1 72 64 48 i MATRIX2 4 8 TES PRE FADER PFL POST ON AFL POST PAN L agli ON CUEL PRE FADERJPFL POST ONJAFL POST PAN R B i ON CUER LE E TEE EE NU LLLA INPUT PATCH Assigns input signals to the input channels phase Switches the phase of the input signal e DIGITAL GAIN Attenuates boosts the level of the input signal HPF High Pass Filter This is a high pass filter that cuts the region below the specified frequency 4 BAND EQ 4 band equalizer A parametric EQ with four bands HIGH HIGH MID LOW MID and LOW DYNAMICS 1 This is dynamics processor that be used for gating ducking expander compressor e DYNAMICS 2 This is a dynamics processor that can be used as a compressor compander or de esser e INPUT DELAY Corrects input signal delay You can specify up to 1000ms e LEVEL DCA 1 16 Adjusts the input level of the channel ON on off Turns the input channel on or off If this is off the corresponding channel will be muted e Adjusts the panning of signals sent from the input channel to the STEREO bus For the STEREO channel you can switch between PAN and BALANCE The BALANCE parameter adjusts t
173. 3 V Reference Manual Using Control Changes to control parameters You can use MIDI Control Change messages to control specified events fader knob operations ON key on off operations etc on the CL series console This capability can be used to record fader and key operations on a MIDI sequencer or other external device and play back this data later You can use Control Changes to control events in either of the following two ways Using Control Changes This method uses typical Control Changes control numbers 1 31 33 95 102 119 You can freely assign an event to each control number Using NRPN Non Registered Parameter Number This method uses a special type of Control Change messages called NRPN NRPN uses Control Change numbers 99 and 98 to specify the MSB Most Significant Byte and LSB Least Significant Byte of the parameter number and subsequently transmitted Control Change messages of Control Change number 6 or 6 and 38 to specify the value of that parameter The event assigned to each combination of MSB and LSB is pre defined and cannot be changed NOTE For details on the events assigned to NRPN messages refer to the Appendices see page 250 Connect the CL series console to an external device In the Function Access Area press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen In the center of the screen press the MIDI GPI button to access the MIDI GPI popup window Press the MIDI SETUP tab to ac
174. 48 7753 INPUT65 72 STIN5 8 to 275B MIX1 8 LEVEL 2763 ae 7775 2778 CE 5793 INPUT65 72 STIN5 8 to 279B MIX1 8 ON E 2E 7783 PARAM32 27BC 27 63 GAIN4 27DC 27E1 GAIN5 27E2 27E7 6 27 8 27ED 27 27 GAIN8 27F4 27F9 GAIN9 27FA 27FF GAIN10 2800 2805 GAIN11 2806 280B GAIN12 280C 2811 GAIN13 2812 2817 GAIN14 2818 281D GAIN15 281E 2823 GAIN16 2824 2829 GAIN17 282A 282F GAIN18 2830 2835 GAIN19 2836 283B GAIN20 283C 2841 GAIN21 2842 2847 GAIN22 2848 284D GAIN23 284E 2853 GAIN24 2854 2859 GAIN25 285A 285F GAIN26 2860 2865 GAIN27 2866 286B GAIN28 286C 2871 GAIN29 2872 2877 GAIN30 2878 287D GAIN31 287E 2883 MIX21 24 MONO 28E4 28E8 MIX1 SEND 28EA 2929 MIX2 SEND 292A 2969 MIX3 SEND 296A 29A9 INPUT1 56 STIN1 4 to MIX4 SEND 29 9 MIX1 8 LEVEL MIX5 SEND 29EA 2A29 MIX6 SEND 2A2A 2A69 MIX7 SEND 2A6A 2AA9 MIX8 SEND 2AE9 MATRIX5 SEND 2AEA 2B29 INPUT1 56 STIN1 4 to MATRIX6 SEND 2B2A 2B69 MATRIX5 8 LEVEL MATRIX7 SEND 2B6A 2BA9 MATRIX8 SEND 2BE9 GEQ RACK1A 3B 25 1 CU 5 C Ul 3 6 1 1 Reference Manual Appendices INPUTI 56 STINT to MATRIXS 6 7 8 PAN MIX21 24 MONO to MIX21 24 MONO to MATRIX LEVEL MATRIK1 2 7 8 PAN MIX21 24 MONO EQ ON 385 3857 3858 3850 38st 3863 3864 3869 386A 386 INPUTI 56 STINT 4 to 3870 3875 MIX1 8 ON 3876 3878 387C 388 3882 3887 3888 3880 MATRIX STEREO 388E 3893 INPUTI 56 STIN1 4 to LR
175. 4BAND E INSERT y To OUTPUT PATCH I E ee e a EQ EXPAND B To MONITOR SELECT PRE FADER POSTEQW INSERT OUT MPRE FADER PRE EQ Keyin POST ON INSERT OUT Self PRE EQ Self POST EQ MIX21 24 OUT INSERT OUT MATRIX1 8 POST EQ CUE ON PRE FADER PFL POST ONJAFL V 6 4 BAND 4 band equalizer A parametric EQ with four bands HIGH HIGH MID LOW MID LOW DYNAMICS 1 This is a dynamics processor that can be used as a compressor expander or compander LEVEL Adjusts the output level of the channel ON on off Turns the output channel on or off If this is off the corresponding channel will be muted CU 5 6 VL 3 V Reference Manual MATRIX ON OFF MATRIX send on off This is an on off switch for signals sent from the MIX channels STEREO L R channel or MONO C channel to each MATRIX bus MATRIX MATRIX send level Adjusts the send level of signals sent from the MIX channels STEREO L R channel or MONO C channel to each MATRIX bus 1 8 For the position from which the signal will be sent to the MATRIX bus you can choose either immediately before the fader or immediately after the ON key If the send destination MATRIX bus is set to stereo you can use the PAN knob to adjust the panning between the two MATRIX buses If the send source is a stereo MIX channel or the STEREO channel use the BALANCE knob to adjust the volume balance of the left and rig
176. 5 INPUT to MIX9 16 PRE MIX12 SEND OD6A ODC1 MIX7 8 121A 1221 MIX11 SEND 013E 0195 POST MIX13 SEND ODCA 21 INPUT5 7 64 to MATRIX5 6 1222 1229 MIX12 SEND 019E 01F5 MIX14 SEND 2 81 MATRIX5 6 7 8 PAN MATRIX7 8 122A 1231 INPUT to MIX9 16 LEVEL MIX13 SEND 0255 MIX15 SEND OE8A OEE1 INPUT57 64 to STEREO 1232 1239 MIX14 SEND 025 0285 MIX16 SEND OEEA OF41 INPUT57 64 RECALL ON 123A 1241 MIX15 SEND O2BE 0315 MATRIX1 SEND OF4A 1 INPUT to MATRIX1 4 PREJPOST xam INPUT to MATRIXI 4 LEVEL DYNAMICS MATRIX2 SEND 0514 0529 INPUT57 64 to MIX1 8 MIX4 SEND 10E2 10E9 INPUT65 72 STIN5 8 ON 129A 12A9 RECALL SAFE MATRIX3 SEND 052A 053F LEVEL MIX5 SEND 10EA 10F1 MIX1 20 STEREO LR MATRIX4 SEND 0540 0555 MIX6 SEND 10F2 10F9 1304 1381 MATRIX LEVEL 57 64 to STEREO LR EQ INPUT MIX1 20 INPUTS7 64 to MIX1 8 ON INPUTS7 64 to MATRIXS 8 ON INPUT DYNAMICS1 INPUTS7 64 to MIX1 8 MIX1 20 STEREO LR to PRE POST MATRIX ON 20 MATRIX INPUTS7 64 to MATRIX5 8 PRE POST 250 CU 5 6 UL 3 1 Reference Manual Appendices INPUT to MIX9 10 15 16 PAN INPUTS 72 STINS 8 to INPUT to MATRIXT 2 MIX1 8 PRE POST 3 4 PAN MIX1 20 STEREO LR to MATRIX PAN INPUTS 72 STINS 8 to MIX1 2 7 8 PAN STEREO LR 2663 ae 2603 MIX STEREO LR MONO 2608 to MATRIX PRE POST 2683 2 2663 2 2703 2s T MIX21 24 MONO to 2718 MATRIX ON 2723 2733 2 2743 27
177. ADMINISTRATOR e 2 Press the log in button to open the LOGIN window LOAD FROM INTERNAL STORAGE Z User 01 LOGIN User 02 kd Select User to Login 2 Las 2 ADMINISTRATOR 2 GUEST User 03 3 LOAD FROM INTERNAL STORAGE User 01 T User 02 LOAD FROM USB STORAGE e LOAD CLU FILE g 3 User 03 CANCEL LOAD FROM USB STORAGE 3 Press the GUEST button and then press the LOGIN button dq LOAD CLU FILE CANCEL In the LOAD FROM INTERNAL STORAGE field choose the user authentication key with which you want to log in and press the LOAD button 1 62 CU 5 6 UL 3 1 1 Reference Manual If no password has been set you will simply be logged in If a password has been set a keyboard window will appear allowing you to enter the password AUTHORIZATION USER NAME PASSWORD User 01 SHIFT LOCK CANCEL 4 Enter the password and press the OK button If the password was incorrect a message of Wrong Password will appear near the bottom of the screen With a user authentication key stored in a USB flash drive 1 Connect the USB flash drive to the USB connector 2 Inthe Function Access Area press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen User settings Security 3 Press the log in button to open the LOGIN window LOGIN Select User to Login A ADMINISTRATOR LOAD FROM INTERNAL STORAGE g 1 User 01 g 2 User 02 g 3 User 03 LOAD
178. ARAMETER CHANGE ECHO is on The corresponding parameter will be changed immediately the data is received Transmission Data will be transmitted with the Device Number in Tx CH when PARAMETER CHANGE Tx is on and the parameter is not registered on the CONTROL CHANGE EVENT LIST Appendices 4 1 3 Data category Data Category Name Current Scene Setup Backup User Setup Data 0x01 00000001 4 2 FUNCTION CALL LIBRARY STORE RECALL 4 2 1 Format PARAMETER CHANGE Receive Data will be received when PARAMETER CHANGE Rx is on and the Device number of both Rx CH and SUB STATUS are matched The data will be echoed when PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO is on The corresponding parameter will be changed immediately the data is received Transmission Data will be transmitted with the Device Number MIDI CH in Tx CH when PARAMETER CHANGE Tx is on STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID 0001nnnn 00111110 00010010 1n 3E 19 n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel Digital mixer CL Series STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS O001nnnn 1n n20 15 Device numberzMIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 3E Digital mixer MODEL ID 00010010 19 CLSeries DATA Category Occccocco DATA eh Element no High Oeeeeeee el Element no Low 01111111 ih
179. ATRIX buses are used to produce a mix that is independent of the STEREO bus or MIX buses and is typically sent to a master recorder or to a backstage monitoring system You can send a signal from an input channel to a MIX MATRIX bus in the following three ways Using the SELECTED CHANNEL section With this method you use the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to adjust the send levels to the MIX MATRIX buses When using this method signals sent from a specific input channel to all MIX MATRIX buses can be adjusted collectively Using the Centralogic section With this method you use the multifunction knobs in the Centralogic section to adjust the level of signals sent to the MIX MATRIX buses When using this method the signals sent from eight consecutive input channels to a specific MIX MATRIX bus can be adjusted simultaneously Using the faders SENDS ON FADER mode With this method you switch the CL series unit to SENDS ON FADER mode and use the faders on the top panel to adjust the level of signals sent to the MIX MATRIX buses When using this method signals sent from all input channels to a specific MIX MATRIX bus can be adjusted simultaneously Using the SELECTED CHANNEL section This section explains how to use the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to adjust the send levels of signals sent from a specific input channel to all MIX MATRIX buses 1 Make sure that an output port is assigned to each MIX MATRIX bus to
180. B h ddd 4 d J d d E MULTI FILTER Two input two output 3 band multi filter 24 dB octave 2 0 242 FREEZE One input two output basic sampler In MANUAL mode recording is started by pressing the REC and PLAY REC MODE MANUAL INPUT buttons In INPUT mode Record Ready mode is engaged by pressing the REC DLY 1000 to 1000 ms REC button and actual recording is triggered by the input signal MOMENT CONTI INPUT Recording delay For plus values recording starts after the trigger is received For minus values recording starts before the trigger is received In MOMENT mode the sample plays only while the that the PLAY button is pressed In CONT mode playback continues once the PLAY button has been pressed The number of times the sample plays is set using the LOOP NUM parameter In INPUT mode playback is triggered by the input signal Input trigger level i e the signal level required to trigger recording or TRG LVL 60 to 0 dB playback Once playback has been triggered subsequent triggers are ignored for the duration of the TRG MASK time START Playback start point in milliseconds END Playback end point in milliseconds LOOP Loop start point in milliseconds LOOP 0 100 Number of times the sample plays PITCH 12 to 12 semitones Playback pitch shift FINE 50 to 50 cents Playback pitch shift fine MIDI TRG
181. CH SELECT popup window and select the L input of the desired ST IN channel as the output destination for the rack For details on the CH SELECT popup window refer to step 6 of Virtual rack operations on page 115 The L input of the ST IN channel used as the effect return channel is now assigned to the L output of the effect If you are using the output of the effect in stereo assign the R input of the same ST IN channel to the R output of the rack in the same way NOTE You can select more than one output destination for the effect 4 Press the rack in which you mounted the effect The EFFECT popup window will appear allowing you to edit the effect parameters EFFECT 1 EFFECT 1 TITLE REV X Hall TYPE HALL HALL C2IN 20UTI 5 60kHz LPF INPUT PATCH buttons Press these buttons to open the CH SELECT popup window The operating procedure is the same as for the INPUT button in the GEQ field 123 Graphic EQ effects and Premium Rack 2 OUTPUT PATCH buttons Press these buttons to open the CH SELECT popup window The operating procedure is the same as for the OUTPUT button in the GEQ field 3 Input output meters Indicate the level of the signals before and after the effect 4 MIX BAL knob This knob adjusts the balance between the original sound and the effect sound included in the output signal from the effect If you press this knob to select it you will be able to adjust it using the c
182. CHANNEL section on the panel Use the Centralogic multifunction knobs to adjust the send level for each bus Touch the knob of the bus you want to operate it will be assigned to the Centralogic multifunction knobs If it is assigned to the multifunction knobs touching that knob once again will display the SEND 8ch popup screen This field varies depending on the type of the destination bus If the destination bus is VARI mono The knob color and scale color indicate the send on off and pre post status If the send is off the knob color turns gray With the post setting the knob scale color turns black MEM 4 00 40 00 If the destination bus is VARI stereo If a pair of buses odd numbered and even numbered are in stereo the left hand knob will function as the PAN knob and the right hand knob will function as the SEND knob 40 00 d0 00 If the destination bus is set to FIXED The SEND ON OFF button will appear instead of each knob 5 6 amp Centralogic section 40 00 oo b oo M oo oo M oo oo ai 00 iw ou M oo M ou oo ou M oo b ou ai 00 Reference Manual TO STEREO MONO field This field displays the on off status and pan balance setting of the signal sent to the STEREO MONO bus If you press this field the knob will be assigned to the corresponding knob in the Centralogic section If you press the fiel
183. CILLATOR MODE is set to SINE WAVE the frequency of the oscillator is shown Press the LEVEL knob to adjust the oscillator level using the multifunction knob 3 OSCILLATOR MODE field Indicates the currently selected oscillator mode Pressing the MODE button repeatedly will switch modes CU 5 6 VL 3 V Reference Manual 4 OSCILLATOR ASSIGN field An indicator lights to indicate the currently selected oscillator output destination input channels or buses Use the tabs on the left to select channels or buses to display NOTE In the case of the CL3 CL1 channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown 5 OSCILLATOR OUTPUT button Turns the oscillator output on or off 2 Press the popup button or the ASSIGN field to open the OSCILLATOR popup window In this popup window you can make detailed settings for the oscillator D 2 MODE mL 1 00k ASSIGN MIX MIX 4 MIX 5 4 MX 5 12 MX13 20 21 4 5 MATRIX 4 5 4 MT 5 STEREO MONO MONO MOHO 1 OSCILLATOR MODE buttons Select one of the following three oscillator operating modes SINE WAVE When the oscillator is turned on a sine wave will be output continuously PINK NOISE When the oscillator is turned on pink noise will be output continuously BURST NOISE When the oscillator is turned on pink noise will be output intermittently 2 Parameter fiel
184. COLOR CALIBRATION button The CHANNEL COLOR CALIBRATION MODE screen will appear allowing you to adjust the channel color 3 Hold down a SEL key on the panel and turn multi function knob 1 in the Centralogic section Turning the knob toward the left will lighten the contrast of all channels turning it toward the right will darken the contrast of all channels 4 If you want to adjust a channel whose contrast differs from that of the other channels hold down the SEL key of the desired channel and press its CUE key or key Pressing the CUE key will darken the contrast and pressing the ON key will lighten the contrast 5 When you have finished adjusting the contrast press the APPLY button located in the right of the screen to confirm the change APPLY NOTE The APPLY button appears only if you change the setting Press the EXIT button The CL will start up in normal operating mode NOTE Alternatively you can continue operation by selecting a different menu instead of pressing the EXIT button Other functions Dante audio network settings You will use the CL series console to make Dante audio network settings for the console itself and the I O devices connected to the Dante connector of the CL series console This section explains how to make Dante audio network settings Setting up a Dante audio network 1 In the function access area press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen CURR
185. CT OUT LEVEL knob 9 when you have finished making all settings click the x symbol located in the upper right to close the window You will return to the OVERVIEW screen 10 As desired make direct output settings for other channels as well Input and output patching Recording or playing back using DAW on a computer If you plan to add DAW software such as Steinberg Nuendo to an audio network that includes a CL console and I O devices you must use Dante Virtual Soundcard DVS driver software DVS works as an audio interface making it possible to transmit signals between a DAW and an audio network that includes a CL series console and I O devices In this way you will be able to make multi track recordings of live performances or use live recordings that were made a day earlier for a virtual sound check This section explains how to perform the setup to add DAW software to an audio network Required devices and software e CL series console I O device e computer Windows or Mac equipped with an Ethernet port that supports a Giga bit Ethernet GbE network DAW software GbE compatible network switch e CAT5e cable e Dante Virtual Soundcard driver software e Dante Controller control software NOTE You must have a license ID to use Dante Virtual Soundcard The license ID is included in the CL unit package The latest information about the Dante Virtual Soundcard and the Dante Controller is available at the
186. CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual Using the Mute Safe function Specific channels that belong to a mute group can be temporarily excluded from mute group operations Mute Safe 1 2 Press the MUTE GROUP button to access the DCA MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE popup window In the Function Access Area press the CH JOB button 3 Press the MUTE SAFE button Press a SEL key to select the channel s that you want to exclude from mute groups multiple selections are allowed The SEL key will light and the corresponding channel in the mute group assign field of the window will be highlighted in green You can cancel the Mute Safe status by pressing a lit SEL key once again to make it go dark Channels that are set to Mute Safe will not be affected when you mute a mute group to which that channel belongs 70 Grouping and linking Channel Link function Channel Link is a function that links the operation of parameters such as fader and EQ between input channels The parameters to be linked can be selected from the following choices Head amp settings Digital gain settings HPF settings EQ settings Dynamics 1 settings Dynamics 2 settings Insert on and insert point settings Direct Out on Direct Out level and Direct Out point settings Send levels and PRE POST settings of signals sent to MIX buses On off status of signals sent to MIX buses Send levels and PRE POST settings of signals sent to MATRIX buses
187. Changes of the transmit Tx and receive Rx channels specified in the MIDI SETUP page will be transmitted and received When a Program Change on the Rx channel is received the event assigned to that program number of the corresponding channel in the list will be executed When you execute the specified event on the CL series console the Program Change of the corresponding program number will be transmitted on the Tx channel shown in the list If an event is assigned to more than one program number on the same channel the lowest numbered program number will be transmitted If you turn on the OMNI button BANK button in Single mode operation will change as follows When the OMNI button is on Program changes of all MIDI channels will be received However regardless of the MIDI channel that is received the event assigned to the corresponding program number of the Rx channel will be executed Turning on the OMNI button will not change the operation for Program Change transmission 153 MIDI e When the BANK button is on The CH indication in the list will change to BANK bank number and Bank Select Control Change 0 32 and Program Change messages can be transmitted and received This can be convenient if you want to control more than 128 events on a single MIDI channel When Bank Select and then Program Change messages in that order are received on the Rx channel the event assigned to that bank number and program numb
188. E bus for monitoring If this is on the sidechain signal that is linked to the dynamics will be output to the bus such as the STEREO bus or a MIX MATRIX bus to which the inserted channel is being sent lt 1500050 Qoteequigrandsdehanfier Specifies whether the processor will operate when the BELOW ABOVE sidechain signal exceeds the threshold setting ABOVE or ATTACK RELEASE FAST SLOW AUTO o ees time for when compression or boost is SIDECHAIN LISTEN when it falls below the threshold setting BELOW CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual Effects and tempo synchronization Some effects of the CL series can be synchronized with the tempo There are two such types of effect delay type effects and modulation type effects For delay type effects the delay time will change according to the tempo For modulation type effects the frequency of the modulation signal will change according to the tempo Parameters related to tempo synchronization The following five parameters are related to tempo synchronization 1 SYNC 2 NOTE 3 4 DELAY 5 FREQ SNU HM This is the on off switch for tempo synchronization NOTE and TEMPO These are the basic parameters for tempo synchronization DELAY and FREQ DELAY is the delay time and FREQ is the frequency of the modulation signal These directly affect the way in which the effect sound will change DELAY is relevant only for delay type effects
189. E mode all selected channels will be cued or LAST CUE mode only the channel selected most recently will be cued 3 INPUT DCA OUTPUT CUE field Indicates the settings for input cue DCA cue and output cue Press this field to open the CUE popup window CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual 4 CUE OUTPUT button Switches the cue out on or off 5 CLEAR CUE button Cancels all cue selections simultaneously If the CUE MODE setting is MIX CUE all of the selected channels will be cleared 2 Press the CUE popup display button or the INPUT DCA OUTPUT CUE field to open the CUE popup window The popup window includes the following items CUE MODE OUTPUT 6 LEVEL LAST CUE dioi POST S E 8 0 00 PFL TRIM DCA TRIN 30 30 ACTIVE CUE HRO 5 0 DUTPUT CLEAR UNIT CUE 9 1 CUE MODE buttons Select one of the following two cue modes e MIX CUE All selected channels will be mixed and auditioned LAST CUE Only the most recently selected channel will be auditioned 2 INPUT CUE field This field enables you to make settings related to the input channel cue e Cue point select button Sets the cue point to PFL before fader immediately before INPUT DELAY AFL immediately after fader or POST PAN immediately after PAN NOTE Be aware that if you turn on the POST PAN button you will be unable to monitor signals sent to the M
190. ECAY RELEASE L RATIO KNEE WIDTH GAIN H GAIN L CH 1 CH 72 STIN1L STIN8R INPUT DYNAMICS1 ATTACK THRESHOLD RELEASE H RELEASE L CH 1 CH 72 RATIO STIN1L STIN8R GAIN H GAIN L KNEE WIDTH FILTER FREQ INPUT DYNAMICS2 ATTACK THRESHOLD RELEASE H MIX 1 MIX 24 RELEASE L MATRIX 1 MATRIX 8 RATIO STEREO L MONO C GAIN H GAIN L KNEE WIDTH BYPASS MIX BALANCE PARAM 1 PARAM 32 L OUTPUT DYNAMICS1 EFFECT Rack1 8 249 Appendices 1 Parameter Parameter 2 GEQ Rack1 16 GAIN A 1 GAIN A 31 GAIN B 1 GAIN 31 BYPASS PREMIUM RACK A Rack1 8 PARAM 1 PARAM 64 L BYPASS PREMIUM RACK B Rack1 8 PARAM 1 PARAM 64 L DCA FADER H DCA 1 DCA 16 FADER L MUTE MASTER MASTER I MASTER CH 1 CH 72 STIN1L STIN8R MIX 1 MIX 24 MATRIX 1 MATRIX 8 RECALL SAFE ON STEREO L MONO C GEQ RACK 1A 16B EFFECT RACK 1A 8B PREMIUM RACK 1A 8B DCA 1 DCA16 1 CH1 CH64 CH1 CH48 CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual Appendices NRPN parameter assignments INPUT OBCC 0C13 LOW TYPE 11EA 11F1 LL NEN Ler INPUTS7 64 EQ Cn From HEX To HEX hea ee i 0C2C 0C49 ee THES INPUT 0000 0057 INPUT57 64 HPF FREQ 11FA 1201 FADER Er MIX9 SEND 4 MIX1 20 MATRIX MIX1 2 1202 1209 STEREO LR ddl um MIX10 SEND 0001 INPUT57 64 to MIX1 2 MIX3 4 120A 1211 MIX9 SEND 007 0005 MIX11 SEND ODOA 0061 7 8 MIX5 6 1212 1219 MIX10 SEND OODE 013
191. ECT popup window will appear D Use the category select list and port select buttons to select the desired slot and input ports and then press the CLOSE button The port will be assigned to the selected bus 6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to assign ports to other buses If desired you can assign two or more buses to the same input port 7 If you want to link specific parameters or events between two CL series consoles proceed as follows 7 1 Use the CASCADE COMM PORT field to select the port that will transmit and receive control signals for cascade link The items you can select are the same as in the CASCADE OUT PATCH popup window see page 200 NOTE Control signals for the cascade link and MIDI messages cannot share the same port If you select a port that is already specified for transmission reception of MIDI messages a dialog box will ask whether it is OK to cancel the existing settings 7 2 Use the CASCADE LINK MODE buttons to select the item that you want to link The items you can select are the same as in the CASCADE OUT PATCH popup window see page 200 8 To close the CASCADE popup window press the CLOSE button In this state the bus signals of the cascade slave will be sent via the slot to the buses of the cascade master and the combined signals of both buses will be output from the cascade master If the Cascade Link function is enabled the specified operations or parameter changes performed on either CL series c
192. EFAULT button 3 COPY button 4 PASTE button 5 COMPARE button These buttons are the same as those in the DYNAMICS Ich popup window 6 Channel select button Selects the channel that you want to control The current channel icon number threshold and color appear on the button 7 Dynamics parameter area This area displays the dynamics type and various meters Press the area to access the DYNAMICS Ich popup window of that channel If DUCKING EXPANDER COMPANDER H S or DE ESSER has been selected as the dynamics type the type appears near the top of this area The lower part of this area displays meters that indicate the levels of signals after dynamics processing the GR meter and the threshold a numeric value If the dynamics processor is any type other than GATE the threshold setting is indicated as a vertical line Tabs Use these tabs to select a channel that you want to view on the screen 3 4 and Dynamics Access the DYNAMICS 1 2 popup window 1ch and press the DYNAMICS ON button to enable the dynamics processor To select a key in signal proceed as follows 4 1 In the DYNAMICS 1 2 popup window 1ch press the KEY IN SOURCE button to access the KEY IN SOURCE SELECT popup window KEY IN SOURCE SELECT pop up window KEY IN SOURCE SELECT E Please select KEY IN source 4 2 Select the key in signal You can choose one of the following signals e SELF PRE EQ eee The pre EQ signal
193. ENE 03 SCENE 04 PORT2 CURRENT SETTING PORT4 PORTS RECALL 93 Scene memory D GPI OUT CONTROL buttons These specify the control signal will be output from each GPI OUT Pressing a button repeatedly will switch between the following functions e OFF Nothing will be output o TRIGGER A trigger will be output when the scene is recalled gt A tally will be output when the scene is recalled 2 CURRENT SETTING field Specifies the content that will be saved by the next scene store operation 3 For each scene specify the control signal that you want to output to each GPI OUT port Recall the scene for which you want to output GPI OUT signals When you recall the scene the control signals will be output to the external device connected to the GPI OUT connector CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual Playing back an audio file that links to a scene recall You can also specify an audio file that you want to play back from a USB flash drive when a specific scene is recalled This can be convenient if you want an effect sound or BGM to be played automatically in a specific scene Follow the steps below to link a scene recall with audio file playback NOTE Save audio files for playback in the SONGS folder within the folder If you save them in the root directory or in other folders you will b
194. ENT USER Administrator SAVE 1 PASSWORD CHANGE USER KEY How all operations are permitted SYSTEM SETUP 48V MASTER BUS SETUP OFI OH MIXER SETUP METER WORD CLOCK OUTPUT MIDI Z GPI I SLOT PORT OVER CASCADE OK Bie SUB BRTTERY POMER SUPPLY NETWORK 40 50 CONTRAST BRIGHTNESS Bae NAME NAME COLOR SCREEN PANEL LAMP Q lt O 1 scene 000 a Initial Data CONSOLE LOCK 177 User settings Security 2 Press the SAVE LOAD button to access the SAVE LOAD popup window 3 _ CH1 ch 1 0 00 00 ADMIN Send To MIX1 HIDE 498 0MB 99 VOLUME NAME FREE SIZE READ ONLY 0 TIME COMMENT STAMP 7 METER PISTE useERO1 cLU 06 06 2012 E oqseme pA 05 06 2072 11 02 2011 JAXML rt esso 06 06 2012 00159327bmp Lee 10 24 2011 WALL BMP DANTE SETUP CREATE AND 1 0 RACK 60 IE dab SETUP sears 000 Initial Data USER KEY If necessary press the directory icon and change the directory To move to the next higher level press the arrow button in the PATH field Press the SAVE button A keyboard window will appear allowing you to enter a file name and comment Enter a file name or comment and press the SAVE button When the file has been saved the PROCESSING popup window that shows the progres
195. ENT USER STORAGE Administrator CREATE LOAD PASSWORD CHANGE How all operations are permitted SYSTEM SETUP 48V MASTER BUS SETUP ON MIXER SETUP WORD CLOCK CASCADE OUTPUT iI SLOT PORT 2 MIDI GPI BATTERY MAIN NETWORK POWER SUPPLY m sue DANTE 60 IE dab du CONSOLE guum CONTRAST BRIGHTNESS IE CH COLOR SCREEN PANEL LAMP 7 B Q Q Q Q Ou scene 000 000 Initial Data 2 Inthe DANTE field at the center of the screen press the DANTE SETUP button to open the DANTE SETUP popup window CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual 3 Inthe upper part of the DANTE SETUP popup screen press the SETUP tab to access the SETUP field CONSOLE ID SECONDARY PORT After changing this setup Network Audio Module will be rebooted automatically audio will mute for about 30 seconds DANTE PATCH BY BIT LATENCY ms Latency Maximum Network Size _ In the case of Daisy Chain Switches _ 0 25 ms Gigabit network with one switch Three devices 0 5 ms Gigabit network with three switches Five devices 1 0 ms Gigabit network with eight switches Ten devices 5 0 ms Safe value Safe value REMOTE HA SETUP DEVICE MOUNT ASSIGN This screen contains the following items 1 CONSOLE ID select buttons Set the IDs for the CL series consoles If five or more CL units are connected to a network and you plan not to assign IDs to some of the units press the OFF b
196. EO MONO channels to a specific MIX MATRIX bus can be adjusted simultaneously Using the SELECTED CHANNEL section Use the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to adjust the send level of signals sent from the desired MIX STEREO L R or MONO C channel to all MATRIX buses 1 Make sure that an output port is assigned to the MATRIX bus to which you want to send signals and that an external device is connected 2 Using the Bank Select keys of the Centralogic section assign MIX channels or STEREO MONO channels to the Centralogic section Use the SEL keys in the Centralogic section to select the channels that will send signals to the MATRIX buses You can also use the SEL key in the MASTER section to directly select the STEREO MONO channels Output channels 4 Pressaknob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to access the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen LEM n E m a i p DANTE33 ST L A LA 5 0 00 01 ADMIN BAL Send To MIXI IE 20 10 Ok HIGH MID 0 70 4 00k Fa LOW MID 1 7 R scene 000 STR MONO MONITOR nm STR MOHO Initial Data 5 Make sure that the TO MATRIX SEND ON OFF button is turned on for the send destination MATRIX bus If this button is off press the button on screen to turn it on In the SELECTED CHANNEL section use the MIX MATRIX SEND LEVEL knobs to adjust the send levels to the MATRIX buses NOTE If you want to monitor the signal
197. EQ units You will be able to use the GEQ LINK button if you have selected a 31BandGEQ or Flex15GEQ for adjacent odd numbered even numbered racks When you turn this button on the following popup window will appear To enable linking press any button other than CANCEL The popup window contains the following items GEQ LINK El Make Link GEQ 1 2 GEQ 2 1 RESET BOTH CANCEL 1 GEQ xy button and are the rack number or the rack number and alphabetical character A or B cc gt gt x will be copied to gt gt The parameters of y and then linked 2 GEQ yx button gt gt The parameters of will be copied to x and then linked 3 RESET BOTH button The parameters of both will be initialized and then linked 4 CANCEL button Cancels the link and closes the popup window When you link GEQ units a symbol will appear in the GEQ field to indicate the linked status Press the GEQ ON OFF button to turn the GEQ on After you have turned the GEQ on adjust the bands of the GEQ For details on GEQ operations refer to the following section Using the 31BandGEQ on page 120 or Using the Flex15GEQ on page 121 NOTE You can view the input and output levels of the GEQ in the rack in the GEQ field CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual Using the 31BandGEQ You will use the Centralogic section s faders 1 8 and ON keys to control the 31BandGE
198. EREO bus For STEREO channels this acts as a PAN knob and also as a BALANCE knob that adjusts the volume of the left and right signals sent to the STEREO bus To adjust the value press the knob to select it and then operate the corresponding multifunction knob CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual PAN BALANCE MODE 7 PAN BALANCE MODE button Switches the knob function of the TO ST PAN TO ST BALANCE knob on the STEREO channel If the ST MONO LCR mode select button is set to LCR mode the following button and knob are displayed instead of the ST MONO button 4 LCR button This button is an overall on off button for signals sent from a channel to the STEREO bus and MONO bus If this button is off no signal will be sent from the corresponding input channel to the STEREO bus or MONO bus 9 CSR knob Adjusts the relative level of signals sent from the channel to the STEREO L R bus and to the bus in the range of 0 100 To adjust the value press the knob to select it and then operate the corresponding multifunction knob see page 38 37 Input channels TO STEREO MONO popup window CH1 48 CH49 72 ST IN CL5 CH49 64 ST IN CL3 ST IN CL1 Adjusts the status of a signal sent from the corresponding input channel to the STEREO MONO bus You can also adjust the pan or balance setting in groups of eight selected channels TO STEREO MONO x CH 2 CH 3 j CH 4 CH 5 CH 6 CH 7 CH 8
199. F z REV CHORUS REU CHORUS REVU FLANGE gt REV gt SYMPHO REV gt PAN DELAY ER oa gt 69654 3 red hid lt gt DELAY gt ER DELRY REU DELAY gt REU DIST gt DELAY MULTI FILTER FREEZE DISTORTION AMP SIMULATE SOLO DYNAMICS amp EQ This field appears if M BAND DYNA or M BAND COMB is selected 2 aT s s STe H D 2 c as the effect type COMP276 COMP276S COMP260 COMP260S EQUAL ZER601 OPENDECK M BRND DYNA COMP 1 HIGH MID LOW buttons MOTE Allow only the selected frequency band to pass multiple e You can also change the effect type by recalling a library setting e Effect types HQ PITCH and FREEZE can be used only rack 1 3 5 or 7 Also even if you eae eus copy these two effect types you will not be able to paste them to rack 2 4 6 or 8 2 Gain reduction meters Indicate the amount of gain reduction for each band LOW MID HIGH 4 To edit the effect parameters press a knob in the effect parameter field to select it and turn the corresponding multifunction knob NOTE Gain reduction meter For details on the parameters of each effect type refer to the Appendices see page 233 This field appears if Comp276 276S or Comp260 2608 is selected as D Edit the settings in the special parameter field as necessary For some effect types parameters such as the following will
200. FADER LEVEL knob or MONITOR FADER will adjust the level of signals sent to the PHONES Out jack MONO MONITOR button Turn on this button to switch monitor signals to mono CU 5 6 VL 3 V Reference Manual 3 Press the popup button the meter field to open the MONITOR popup window In the MONITOR popup window you can make detailed settings for monitoring The popup window includes the following items OUTPUT STEREO L R MONITOR MONITOR FADER DELAY f AUTO D BYPASS DANTE DANTE DANTE ane 36 37 38 ASSIGN MIX MIX 2 MIX 5 MIX 7 MX 2 MX 4 MX 5 MX 7 MIx10 LUTEA MX10 MX12 TAE 15 MIX20 21 23 2 2 4 5 7 MATRIX 2 4 5 MTRXT HT 2 4 HT 5 7 STEREO MONO OMNI IN _ RECORDER OMNI OMNI OMNI 1 2 3 4 PB OUT CLEAR 1 SOURCE SELECT field Select one of the following as the signal source that will be output to the MONITOR bus STEREO L R STEREO L R channel signals MONO C MONO channel signal LCR STEREO L R MONO channel signals OMNI 1 2 7 8 OMNI IN jacks 1 8 signals per two channels PB OUT Recorder s PLAYBACK OUT signals DEFINE The signal s selected in the ASSIGN field 2 ASSIGN field If you selected DEFINE in the SOURCE SELECT field use this field to specify the monitor source You can select up to eight monitor
201. FROM USB STORAGE LOAD CLU FILE CANCEL 4 In the LOAD FROM USB STORAGE field click the LOAD CLU FILE popup button The SAVE LOAD popup window will appear and the files and directories saved on the USB flash drive will be displayed The user authentication key file has a CLU file name extension SSS zx CH1 SAVE LOAD E x ch 1 0 00 00 VOLUME NAME HIDE HEIN FREE SIZE 498 0 99 Send To MIXI FILE NAME TIME 4 METER 0 OVER 3 LAL 25 5 w O o e ax Ea cn m USERO1 CLU c e 1 02 2011 HELP_JA XML 19 52 00 5 m i n a e Dx 06163327 bmp 16 33 26 55 S 2 I N gt ALL BMP 5 56 42 TE TT SETUP CREATE L SAVE LOAD USER KEY pn 000 Initial Data Em E E m a B B j CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual 5 Rotate the multifunction knob to select the user authentication key for the user as whom you want to log in For details about loading files from the USB flash drive refer to Loading a file from the USB flash drive on page 178 Press the LOAD button If no password has been set you will simply be logged in If a password has been set a keyboard window will appear allowing you to enter the password NOTE f you have selected a user authentication key that was created on
202. IDI GPI screen will appear 4 Press the GPI tab The GPI page will appear MIDI 7 GPI 76543 ail H1 15141312 1110 9 umm 000 Initial Data 1 OUT status indicator This indicates the status of the voltage that is being output from each GPI OUT port 2 POLARITY MODE select button This button selects the polarity of the GPI OUT port Low active Grounded when the GPI OUT port is active Low active Open when the GPI OUT port is active CU 5 6 VL 3 V Reference Manual 3 GPI OUT SETUP popup button Press this button to open the GPI OUT SETUP popup window The button shows the name of the currently selected function or parameter 4 TEST button While this is on the corresponding GPI OUT port will be active and will output a control signal 5 Specify the POLARITY MODE for each port For each port select either low active or high active as appropriate for the specifications of the external device youre using assign a function or parameter press the GPI OUT SETUP popup button GPI OUT SETUP 2 Select Parameters for GPI OUT 1 FUNCTION PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2 GPI IN ACTIVE IND CANCEL You can assign the following functions I No No assignment CUE ACTIVE OUTPUT ONLY Turn on the CUE key of an output channel GPI IN ACTIVE IND PORT 1 PORT 5 The function assigned to GPI IN port 1 5 becomes active POWERON ON T
203. IF CUD Tack Virtualrack ene pde MOENIA Graphic E ADOUE COU cie tT Tem Using the graphic EQ effect and Premium Rack libraries 1 0 device and external head amp c E S Remotely controlling Rio Remotely controlling an Using extemal head MIDI functionality on the CL series console eese Basic MIDESSEUTICS E UNUM UPS Using Program Changes to recall scenes and library items Using Control Changes to control parameters Using Parameter Changes to control parameters User settings Security eene ne FST m USER DEFINED Keys X SER DEFINED i dino ee a DATE eena E T CONCE EO K
204. IN D GRIN D GRIN CH 49 72 Ih CH 1 48 OUTPUT 1 Channel select button Indicates the channel icon number and name When you press this button the corresponding channel will become a target for operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section and the corresponding SEL key will light 2 PATCH button Press this button to display the PORT SELECT popup window to patch the input port to the input channel 3 48V button This button will appear for the input channel to which the head amp has been patched Press the button to switch phantom power 48V on or off NOTE If the slot for which the connection to the head amp is not recognized is patched the type of the mini YGDAI card will be displayed 4 A GAIN analog gain knob Indicates the analog gain of the head amp Press this knob so that you will be able to use the multifunction knob to adjust the gain If the Gain Compensation function is turned on an indicator will appear showing the position of the analog gain when the function is turned on 5 Level meter Indicates the input signal level Input channels 6 GC Gain Compensation button Switches the Gain Compensation function on or off for that channel 7 Phase button Switches the phase of the input signal D GAIN digital gain knob Indicates the digital gain value Press this knob so that you will be able to use the multifunction knob to adjust the gain 9 Digital
205. IRMATION STEAL PATCH CONFIRMATION LOCALE SETUP ERROR MESSAGE DIGITAL ERROR MIDI ERROR PANEL OPERATION AUTO CHANNEL Poa OUTPUT LINK INPUT LINK OUTPUT LINK CUSTOM CUE gt SEL LINK FADER BANK gt SEL LINK IDENTIFY 1 0 RACK PORT BY SEL POPUP APPEARS WHEN KNOB S PRESSED ANALOG GAIN SCENE TP NORMAL ONLY GAIN KNOB FUNCTION SCENE UP DOWN LIST ORDER NAME DISPLAY 3 Press the USER DEFINED KEYS tab to select the USER DEFINED KEYS page The USER DEFINED KEYS page enables you to assign functions to USER DEFINED keys 1 16 USER SETUP USER DEFINED KEYS for_Administrator SENDS FADER MTRX1 PAGE CHANGE BOOKMARK PAGE CHANGE BOOKMARK PAGE CHANGE BOOKMARK MUTE MASTER MUTE GROUP 1 HOME TOGGLE Lx i SENDS FADER MTRX2 PAGE CHANGE BOOKMARK PAGE CHANGE BOOKMARK ALTERNATE FUNCTION UHLATCH MUTE MASTER MUTE GROUP 2 TALKBACK TALKBACK ON UNLATCH 4 5 Graphic EQ effects and Premium Rack Press the popup button for the USER DEFINED key to which you want to assign the Tap Tempo function The USER DEFINED KEY SETUP popup window will appear Select TAP TEMPO in the FUNCTION column select CURRENT PAGE in the PARAMETER 1 column and press the OK button Use the buttons or multifunction knobs to select an item in each column Press the OK button The Tap Tempo function wi
206. IX MONO CANCEL 1 Channel display field The channels or DCA groups to which Fade is applied are highlighted 2 FADE TIME knob Sets the fade time You can adjust the fade time using the corresponding multifunction knob 3 SET ALL button Press this button to apply the Fade effect to all faders of that scene 4 CLEAR ALL button Press this button to cancel the Fade effect for all faders of that scene NOTE In the case of the CL3 CL1 faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown 92 4 Scene memory Press the SEL keys for the desired channels or DCA groups to select the channels or DCA groups to which the Fade effect will be applied multiple selections are allowed The SEL keys for the selected channels or DCA groups will light and those channels or DCA groups will be highlighted green in the channel display field of the popup window You can cancel the selection by pressing the lit SEL key once again to turn it off Use the multifunction knob that corresponds to the FADE TIME knob to adjust the fade time The range is 0 0 sec 60 0 sec When you have finished setting the fade time press the OK button to close the FADE TIME popup window NOTE The fade time you specify here is used for all channels and DCA groups selected in step 4 To enable the Fade function press the FADE button You can turn the Fade function on or off individually for each scene NOTE Scenes for which Fade s
207. IX 1 24 10 1024 1031 MATRIX 1 8 11 1280 1282 STEREO L C 12 512 530 GEQ 1 19 531 538 EFFECT GEQ 1 8 13 512 519 EFFECT 1 8 14 512 Current Data 15 768 Current Data with Recall Safe 16 8192 Store Undo Data 8193 Recall Undo Data 8194 Clear Undo Data 17 0 199 Input CH Library Number 0 Request Only 18 0 199 Output CH Library Number 0 Request Only 19 512 527 Premium Rack 1B 2A 8A 8B 20 0 100 Each Premium Effect Library Number 0 Request Only 21 1536 1607 Input 1 72 for Dynamics2 22 1608 1623 STIN 1L 8R for Dunamics2 23 0 10 Dante Input Patch Library Number 0 Request Only Data is lost when you write to the preset library The unique header Model ID identifies whether the device is a CL series To calculate the check sum add the bytes starting with the byte after BYTE COUNT LOW and ending with the byte before CHECK SUM take the binary complement and set bit 7 to 0 CHECK SUM amp 0 7 Bulk Dumps can be received at any time and can be transmitted at any time when a Bulk Dump Request is received A Bulk Dump is transmitted on the Rx CH channel in response to a Bulk Dump Request In the data portion seven words of 8 bit data are converted into eight words of 7 bit data CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual Conversion from actual data to bulk data d 0 6 actual data b 0 7 bulk data b 0 0 for I0 I lt 7 1 if d I amp
208. IX 17 24 Selected channel module parameters SEND parameters of signals sent to the selected channel coii na _ MODULE PARAMETERS WITH MIX SEND DESTINATION CHs Multiple Selection This field displays the copy destination channel After you select the copy source if you select a copy destination channel by pressing its SEL key multiple selections are allowed this field will display the selected channel NOTE In the case of the CL3 CL1 faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown CH 1 16 CH 17 32 CH 33 48 CH 49 64 CH65 72 ST IN 3 COPY button Executes the copy operation After selecting the copy source channel and copy destination channel s press this button to execute the copy operation 4 CLOSE button Press this button to close the popup window and return to the previous screen CU 5 C VUL 3 C V 3 Reference Manual 3 To select the copy source channel press the corresponding SEL key to make light The corresponding channel is highlighted in the SOURCE CH field of the window When you choose the copy source channel the DESTINATION CHs field is automatically bolded allowing you to select the copy destination If you want to re select the copy source channel press the SOURCE CH field NOTE Copy settings can be made only the order of gt copy destination To select the copy destination channel s press the correspond
209. Index no High 01111111 il Index no Low ch Channel no High cl Channel Low Oddddddd Data 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 4 1 2 Format PARAMETER REQUEST Receive Data will be received when PARAMETER CHANGE Rx is on and the Device number of both Rx CH and SUB STATUS are matched The data will be echoed when PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO is on The corresponding parameter will be changed via PARAMETER CHANGE immediately the data is received STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0001nnnn n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 Digital mixer MODEL ID 00010010 19 CL Series DATA Category Ocecccce DATA eh Element no High el Element no Low 01111111 ih Index no High 01111111 il Index no Low ch Channel High cl Channel Low EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 266 DATA CATEGORY 00000000 00 OTHER DATA FUNCTION 01001100 L ASCII CODE 01101001 i ASCII CODE 01100010 b ASCII CODE Offfffff ff ASCII CODE Offfffff ff ASCII CODE Offfffff ASCII CODE Offfffff ASCII CODE Offfffff ASCII CODE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Ommmm
210. K MOUNTER popup window by pressing a vacant rack in the GEQ EFFECT field CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual 4 Use the MODULE SELECT buttons to select the item you want to mount and press the OK button 5 To select the input source for a rack press the INPUT PATCH button for that rack The CH SELECT popup window will appear allowing you to select the input source for the rack Switch the list as necessary and select the input source channel that you want to patch When you select an input source in the CH SELECT popup window a dialog box will ask you for confirmation To confirm the operation press the OK button NOTE You have the option of making settings so that the confirmation dialog box will not appear see page 169 Normally you can specify two channels of input for each rack However if you have selected 31BandGEQ only one channel can be used CH SELECT E Select candidate GEQ 1A gt 31BandGEQ INSERT OUT MIX MATRIX 1 Category select list Selects the category of channel shown in the popup window MIX 1 24 MATRIX 1 8 nnne STEREO L R MONO 2 INSERT OUT 1 32 CH 1 32 INSERT OUT 33 64 CH 33 64 1 INSERT OUT 65 72 65 72 INSERT OUT MIX MATRIX MIX 1 24 MATRIX 1 8 INSERT OUT ST MONO
211. L 3 V Reference Manual Editing scene memories This section explains how to sort the scenes stored in scene memory edit their titles and copy and paste them Sorting scene memories 1 Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area The SCENE LIST window will appear in which you can perform various operations related to scene memory You can use tabs to switch the view of the right half of the SCENE LIST window between five different fields COMMENT FOCUS FADE TIME GPI OUT PLAYBACK LINK CURRENT SETTING m Focus Initial Settina Data 2 Press the COMMENT tab at the bottom of the SCENE LIST window The COMMENT field will appear in the right half of the SCENE LIST window SCENE LIST GLOBAL AS NO TITLE SCENE 01 Initial Settings Data PLAY 01 01 2000 SCENE 02 z A Initial Setting Data 01 01 2000 01 01 2000 Initial Settins Data PLAY 0 00 00 YOO CURRENT SETTING Initial Settins Data 6 UNDO OMMENT RECALL Scene memory 1 COMMENT sort button Sorts scenes in alphabetical order of the comments in the COMMENT field Each time you press this button the list will alternate between ascending and descending order 2 COMMENT field Press this field to open the SCENE COMMENT EDIT popup window in which you can enter comments for the scene 3 STATUS field Indicators in this field indicate the setting status of the FOCUS FADE TIME PLAYBACK playback link
212. L CHANGE Tx gt SIGNAL MIDI PARAMETER CHANGE OTHER COMMAND MIDI SETUP PROGRAM CHANGE Rx SIGNAL MIDI CONTROL CHANGE ADMIN Send To MIXI Initial Data 222 Other functions 4 Press the GPI tab The GPI page will appear MIDI GP 1 i 0 00 00 ADMIN Send To MIX1 gl E e e e 15141312 1110 9 METER OVER 12 E E 18 24 30 40 en 3U 60 E du Test PROGRAM CONTROL MIDI SETUP FADER START scene 000 Initial Data 1 GPI IN status indicator This indicates the status of the voltage being input to the GPI IN port 2 POLARITY MODE select button This button selects the polarity of the GPI IN port Low active When operating an on off type parameter it will become active when the switch is grounded High active When operating an on off type parameter it will become active when the switch is opened or when a high level voltage is input 3 GPI IN SETUP popup button Press this button to open the GPI IN SETUP popup window The button shows the name of the currently selected function or parameter 5 Specify the POLARITY MODE for each port For each port select either low active or high active as appropriate for the specifications of the external device youre using CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual assign the function parameter that you want to c
213. L LIBRARY which enables you to store and recall various parameters including the head amp settings for input channels To recall a library press the corresponding LIBRARY button in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen LIBRARY button OF TAB 001 0091 1 16 For details on using the library refer to the Using the library section in the separate Owner s Manual CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual Output channels This chapter explains output channels MIX channels MATRIX channels STEREO channels MONO channels Signal flow for output channels The output channel section takes the signals sent from the input channels to the various buses processes them with EQ and dynamics and sends them to output ports or other buses The following types of output channels are provided MIX channels These channels process signals sent from input channels to MIX buses and output them to the corresponding output port MATRIX bus STEREO bus or MONO C bus M MIX ST MATRIX CUE 12 2324 LR CO 12 78 LR MX124 RACKIN PATCH POSTON INSERT OUT To OUTPUT PATCH lt Big FADER INSERT OUT INSERT OUT 1 24 PREEQ INSERT OUT MIX INSERT IN 1 24 1 PREEQ EQ OUT DYNAO POST ON PRE FADER METER METER METER METER GR METER LEVEL BAL COME 21 24 KEYIN INSERT 4BAND INSERT H To RACKIN PATCH
214. LAY NOTE Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY 1 FR Hat F Je d da d d Maximum value depends on the tempo setting CU 5 UL 3 V Reference Manual MOD DELAY One input two output basic repeat delay with modulation DELAY 0027250 ms E Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth HPF THRU 212 fiter cotf fregueny DLY NOTE Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY MOD NOTE Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ 1 FR JJ Pu d da d Jd oa Maximum value depends on the tempo setting 2 Hd B ddd ode d 4 d d a on DELAY LCR One input two output 3 tap delay left center right Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for 0 is reverse phase feedback PPE 21 2 H2 B 00 KHz High pasfiter cutoff frequency SSS 1 PR H4 F JJ F bh ddd Ja d da d da Maximum value depends on the tempo setting 235 Appendices ECHO Two input two output stereo delay with crossed feedback loop HPF THRU 21 2 28 00 We High pas fiter cutoff frequeny SSS 1 FR FJ bh ddd JD d da d d oa Maxim
215. METER 2 Explanation SET TO STEREO If SET PRE SEND is selected SEND ON FADER mode is engaged while you are SET TO MONO holding down the SEL key SET TO LCR SET GAIN COMPENSATION While holding down this key press a knob in url the Selected Channel or Centralogic section to reset it to the default value SET While holding down this key press a SEL key NOMINAL to set the fader of that channel to nominal VALUE level Switch TALKBACK on off LATCH TALKBACK ON UNLATCH Turn TALKBACK on while pressed While holding down this key press a SEL key of an OUTPUT channel to switch the assignment on off During this time the SEL LED will be lit if assign is ON or dark if OFF SELECTED CH ASSIGN The assignment setting made while holding down this key will be stored Pressing the key again will recall the stored setting Settings can be stored in multiple keys to facilitate rapid assignment switching DIRECT ASSIGN PE TALKBACK to the channel selected from Use the tap tempo function in the displayed screen Use the tap tempo function for the specified effect 1 CL5 CH1 CH72 CL3 CH1 CH64 CL1 CH1 CH48 ST IN 1L ST IN 8R MIX1 MIX24 MTRX1 MTRX amp 8 ST L ST R MONO C 2 CL5 CH1 CH72 CH1 CH64 CH1 CH48 ST IN 1 ST IN 8 MIX1 MIX24 MTRX1 MTRX amp 8 STEREO MONO C 3 MIX1 MIX24 MTRX1 MTRX amp 8 ST L ST MONO C 4 CL5 CH1 CH72 CH1 CH64 CL1 CH1 CH48 ST IN 1 S
216. MIX MATRIX buses Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section Follow the steps below to perform operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section 1 Usea SEL key to select the channel you want to control To select a channel press a SEL key in the top panel channel strip section the Centralogic section or the master section Press the appropriate bank select key so that the channels you want to control are assigned to the top panel Channel number Channel name The number and name of the currently selected channel is shown in the channel select field located in the Function Access Area of the touch screen NOTE f an ST IN channel or STEREO channel has been assigned to a single channel strip you can switch between L and R by repeatedly pressing the same SEL key You can also switch channels by pressing the channel select field located in the Function Access Area Press the left side of the field to select the preceding channel Press the right side of the field to select the next channel Send To SELECTED CHANNEL section 2 Press one of the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section Press a knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to display the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen for the currently selected channel If you leave this screen displayed you will always be able to view the settings in the screen while operating the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section NOTE If you have turned on the option POPUP APPEA
217. MODE popup window 4 Follow the procedure starting with step 2 in the Using the Recall Safe function section to make settings 5 If you want only specific parameters to be recalled for the selected channel DCA group use the buttons other than ALL in the channel focus parameter display field to select the parameters that will be recalled multiple selections are allowed If you want all parameters to be recalled turn on the ALL button this is the default setting If the ALL button is on all other buttons for that scene will be turned off Turning on any other button will turn off the ALL button Recall a scene for which you have made Focus settings Only the channels DCA groups parameters selected in the FOCUS RECALL popup window will be recalled Bus settings will always reproduce the state of the recalled scene regardless of the Focus Recall settings NOTE e Scenes for which Focus settings are made are marked by a FOCUS indicator in the STATUS field of the SCENE LIST window COMMENT tab e You can use the Focus function in conjunction with the Recall Safe function Channels or parameters that are excluded from Recall operations by either Focus or Recall Safe will not be recalled Scene memory Using the Recall Safe function Recall Safe is a function that excludes only specific parameters channels DCA groups from Recall operations Unlike the Focus settings see page 87 which you can apply
218. MONO bus MIX buses or MATRIX buses There are two types of input channels as follows MONO channel These channels are used to process monaural signals When the CL series console is in the default state the input signal from the Dante connector is assigned M MIX STO MATRIX CUE 12 2324 LR C 12 78 LR i PAN POST PAN L CH 1 72 64 48 N ToRACKINPATCH INSERT POINT OUTPUT PATCH is POSTON _ INSERT OUT CH INSERT our lt gta PRE FADER INSERT OUT PRE HPF PRE EQ PRE FADER POST ON geod ON oy LEVEL DIRECT OUT 1 72 64 48 S15 ourpur PATCH 72464 48 un PREEQ INSERT OUT igh rf we s ST PAN R aour DYNAIOUT DYNA2OUT FADER POSTON TOMONO JOST PAN MODE PRE HPF METER METER METER AT METER LRMONO MON Qro STL Digia pr 9 NSERT E re O INSERT DELAY y 9 INSERT E 9 S GAIN EXPAND DE ESSER 1000ms TER 64 1 I ps PRE HPF PREEQ EOMP PRE FADER POSTON i PRE EQ 22 PRE FADER POSTON Nb d IT OSCILLATOR INSERT OUT Keyin Filter INSERT OUT INSERT OUT O ser PRLS MR NE UNE e SelfPOSTEQ 1 ToMIX POSTON NENON i MIX1 3 23 MIX21 240UT 1 MIX24 24 0 CH 1 8 9 16 17 24 25 32 33 40 41 48 49 56 57 64 65 72 EQ cL5 x FIXED 9 00 CH 1 8 9 16 17 24 25 32 33 40 41 48 49 56 57 64 POST
219. MP 30 o tri dia 193 194 E 194 138 TANT OE 206 Input Chantel nece roin per 27 Channel library 45 Channel name and 28 Sending to MIX MATRIX bus 39 Sending to STEREO MONO buses 35 oeste hn bim de 44 DIU P 19 ERE A al 204 elfe CUS 122 L CAND 204 HR 204 IE d E 64 M Master FAG CL Ss careret tod apa aD aa 174 MATRIX 39 51 202 MBCL meter bridge optional 113 METER SCP CC Ua tio p 111 111 UE scan E E SE MARI ENS 149 MIDI Data 264 MIDI Implementation Chart 275 MIX 39 202 MIX channels Sending to MATRIX buses 51 Sending to STEREO MONO 48 Mixer Basic Parameters 274 Mixing parameter operation applicability 254 Monitor function eee 97 98 Mue OUPS 64 66 N Network address eene 205 NRPN parameter assignments 250 INuendo LIV oos teu tiv OR E ev
220. Manual Adjusting the detection point of the touch screen Calibration function Follow the steps below to correctly align the positions of the LCD display and the touch screen 1 While holding down the SCENE MEMORY STORE key on the panel turn on the power to the CL unit After the opening screen the following startup menu screen will appear MODE SELECT IHITIALIZE ALL MEMORIES INITIALIZE ALL MEMORIES E Initialize All Memories INITIALIZE lA INITIALIZE 207 Other functions 2 Press the TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION button The TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION MODE screen will appear allowing you to calibrate the touch screen TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION MODE Press START Button or STORE key to start calibration for the touch screen and follow the messages TOUCH TEST AREA Cross hair cursor indicates the last touch position NOTE If you are unable to access the calibration screen by pressing the TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION button you can use the SCENE MEMORY INC DEC keys to select TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION and then press the STORE key to start Press the START button A confirmation dialog box will appear Press the OK button in the dialog box A cross shaped cursor will appear in the screen a total of three times Press each location at which it appears NOTE To set the detection points accurately press the cross shaped cursor from the position and posture in which
221. Meter field Meters Indicates the output level of the monitor L R C channels e MONITOR OUT PATCH button Press this button to open the PORT SELECT popup window in which you can select an output port to patch to the monitor out L R C channels 4 Use the buttons of the SOURCE SELECT field to select a monitor source In the SOURCE SELECT field you can select only one monitor source However if you have selected DEFINE you can use the ASSIGN field to specify multiple monitor sources The following table shows the monitor sources that you can select in the ASSIGN field MIX 1 24 Output signals of MIX channels 1 24 MTRX 1 8 MATRIX buses 1 8 output signals STEREO STEREO L R channel output signals MONO C MONO channel output signal OMNI 1 2 OMNI 7 8 OMNI IN jacks 1 8 input signals per two channels PB OUT Recorders PLAYBACK OUT signals NOTE You can select a maximum of eight monitor sources in the ASSIGN field If you select eight monitor sources no further selections will be possible Please turn off the buttons for unneeded Sources 100 Monitor and Cue functions 5 specify a port as the output destination for monitor signals L C and press one of the MONITOR OUT PATCH buttons L R C in the meter field to open the PORT SELECT popup window In this window choose from the following monitor signal output destinations multiple selections are allowed PORT SELECT Select candidate MONITOR L E3
222. N1 8 OMNI OUT 1 8 6000 LT 4 dBu 20 Hz 20 kHz GAIN 6dB 0 05 OMNI OUT 1 8 600 Full Scale Output 1 kHz 002 PHONES 80 Full Scale Output 91 kHz PHONES Level Control Max Total Harmonic Distortion is measured with a 18 dB octave filter 80 kHz B Frequency Response B Gain Error Internal OSC Internal OSC Hum amp Noise Fs 44 1 kHz or 48 kHz EIN Equivalent Input Noise Rs 150 66dB Master fader at nominal level and one Ch fader at nominal level OMNI IN 1 8 OMNI OUT 1 8 6000 Rs 150 GAIN 6dB Master fader at nominal level and one Ch fader at nominal level di u All INPUTS Rs 150 GAIN OMNI OUT 1 8 600 O Master fader at nominal level and all OMNI IN 1 8 in faders at nominal level OMNI OUT 1 8 600 Residual Output Noise ST Master Off 88 80 Residual Output Noise PHONES Level ET Control Min Hum amp Noise are measured with A weight filter Appendices Fs 44 1 kHz or 48 kHz Dynamic Range OMNI IN 1 8 OMNI OUT 1 8 6000 AD DA GAIN 6dB fioj dB fomnrourr 8 6000 Daconverer m e Dynamic Range are measured with A weight filter Sampling Frequency Parameter External Clock Fs 48 048 kHz 48 kHz 0 1 Fs 47 952 kHz 48 kHz 0 1 Fs 44 1 kHz 200 200 ppm Fs 46 080 kHz 48 kHz 4 0 Fs 45 9375 kHz 44 1 kHz 44 166790 Fs 44
223. NE PREFERENCE cn 3 Press the USER LEVEL tab to access the USER LEVEL page If you are logged in as the Administrator you can switch to the USER LEVEL for GUEST page and view or change the user level of the Guest account This page includes the following items 1 CH OPERATION Here you can specify for each channel the operations that will be permitted for input channels output channels and DCA groups The settings will apply to the currently selected channel Settings for currently selected channels will be displayed below the CH OPERATION section Use the panel SEL keys or the Selected Channel field in the Function Access Area to select the channel for which you want to make settings The type of buttons shown will depend on the selected channel or group INPUT channel HA PROCESSING FADER ON MIX MATRIX channel WITH SEND PROCESSING FADER ON STEREO MONO channel PROCESSING FADER ON DCA group DCA MASTER DCA GROUP ASSIGN CU 5 6 VL 3 V Reference Manual Restricts operation of the HA Head Amp patched to that channel Restricts operation of all signal processing parameters for that channel excluding the fader channel on off and send level Restricts operation of that channel s fader channel on off and send level o WITH Re
224. NO bus on or off collectively For a channel that is set to LCR mode signals sent to the STEREO bus and to the MONO bus are switched on or off collectively 9 Inthe TO STEREO MONO popup window use the CSR knob to adjust the level difference between signals sent from that channel to the STEREO L R bus and to the MONO C bus Input channels 10 in the TO STEREO MONO popup window use the TO ST PAN knob to set the panning of signals sent from the input channel to the STEREO bus and MONO C bus If the CSR knob is set to 096 operating the TO ST PAN knob of an INPUT channel will change the level of signals sent to the STEREO L R bus and MONO C bus as shown in the following diagram In this case the TO ST PAN knob operates as a conventional PAN knob and no signal is sent to the MONO C bus Signal sent to the STEREO L bus Signal level Signal sent to the STEREO R bus TO ST PAN knob Operating the TO ST BALANCE knob of a STEREO channel will change the level of signals sent from the STEREO L R channels to the STEREO L R bus and MONO C bus as shown in the following diagram In this case the TO ST PAN knob operates as a conventional BALANCE knob and no signal is sent to the MONO C bus PS E d S Signal sent from the STEREO L channel to S the STEREO L bus D gt j Y TO ST BALANCE knob Signal sent from the STEREO R channel to
225. NTE33 YOO2 001 DANTE41 YOO2 009 DANTE49 002 017 DANTES UE YOO2 025 DANTE2 Yoo1 002 DANTE10 YOO1 010 DANTE18 001 018 DANTE26 7001 026 DANTE34 Vvnno nno 002 002 DANTE42 YOO2 010 DANTE40 002 018 DANTE58 8 002 026 DANTES YOO1 003 DANTE11 001 011 DANTE19 001 019 DANTE2 001 027 DANTE35 Yoo2 003 DANTE43 002 011 DANTE41 002 019 DANTES9 YOO2 027 DANTE4 YOO1 004 DANTE12 001 012 DANTE20 YOO1 020 DANTE28 001 028 DANTE36 YOO2 004 DANTE44 002 012 DANTE42 ynna i YOO2 020 DANTE60 002 028 DANTES DANTE13 YOO1 013 DANTE21 yoo1 021 DANTE29 001 029 DANTE3 002 005 DANTE45 002 013 DANTE53 002 021 DANTE61 002 029 DANTE6 YOO1 006 DANTE14 001 014 DANTE22 vni 022 001 022 DANTE38 002 006 DANTE46 yoo2 014 DANTE54 002 022 DANTE62 n n n Y002 030 DANTE YOO1 007 DANTE15 001 015 DANTE23 001 023 DANTE31 YOO1 031 DANTE39 cu 002 007 DANTE4 002 015 DANTE55 TT 002 023 DANTE63 YOO2 031 DANTES YOO1 008 DANTE16 001 016 DANTE24 001 024
226. Number Low Top Number High Top Number Low End Number High End Number Low End of exclusive CU 5 VL 3 V Reference Manual Appendices 4 5 2 Format PARAMETER REQUEST 4 6 FUNCTION CALL COLLECTION STORE Module Name Receive 4 6 1 Format PARAMETER CHANGE User Defined Keys Admin UDEF ADM The PARAMETER CHANGE will be sent with Device number Rx CH immediately User Defined Keys Guest UDEF GST the data is received Trans e ten 1 ae Custom Fader Bank Current CFAD CUR STATUS 11110000 System exclusive message 2 E wate Device Number un 1x CHI when PARAME LER Custom Fader Bank Admin Mii ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA Custom Fader Bank Guest CFAD_GST SUB STATUS 0011nnnn 3n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel SEATUD 11110000 System exclusive message User Level Current UKEY_CUR GROUP ID 00111110 3E Digital mixer ID No 01000011 43 Manutacture s ID number YAMAHA User Level Guest UKEY_GST MODEL ID 00010010 19 Series SUB STATUS 0001nnnn in ind JUGE numberzMIDI Channel DATA CATEGORY 00000000 00 OTHERDATA 4 7 FUNCTION CALL MODULE FUNCTION NAME 01001100 L ASCII CODE E 4 7 1 01101001 ASCII CODE DATA CATEGORY 00000000 00 OTHER DATA 01100010 b ASCII CODE FUNCTION 01001100 ASCII CODE 01101001 ASCII CODE Data will be rec
227. O c Function 5 512 be used if the recalling or storing data is only one Copy LibCpy Dante Inpot Paten DANTEN 6 0 1 2 GEQ2A 36 GEQ19A 37 GEQ19B Paste 38 EFFECT 39 EFFECT GEQ1B Clear ibClr Function Number Channel 1 tx rx 40 EFFECT GEQ2A 52 EFFECT GEQ8A 53 EFFECT GEQ8B A v Cut LibCut__ libStr SCENE 1 300 5 tx rx 7 O Effect1 7 Effect8 M 8 1280 CH1 1351 72 ens 1352 STIN1L 1367 STIN8R OUTPUT EQ LIB 4 199 2 3 4 tx rx 9 0 Premium Rack 1A 1 Premium Rack 1B Dynamics LIB 42 199 1 2 3 4 8 tx rx 2 Premium Rack 2A 14 Premium Rack 8A 15 Premium Rack 8B 4 3 3 Module Name INPUT CH LIB 1 199 1 tx rx OUTPUT CH LIB 1 199 2 3 4 tx rx 4 3 FUNCTION CALL LIBRARY EDIT mg NAmE nisl PMMME SCENE LIB SCENE Copy Paste Clear Cut Insert EditUndo GEQ LIB tel 6 tx rx 4 3 1 Format PARAMETER CHANGE INPUT EQ LIB INEQ Z Clear Only a 7 tx rx Receive OUTPUT EQ LIB OUTEQ__ Clear Only prenin ENEG EIE pa 2 tx rx Data will be received when PARAMETER CHANGE Rx is on and the Device number Dynamics LIB DYNA Clear Only Dante Input Patch LIB 1 10 5 tx rx of both Rx CH and SUB STATUS are matched The data will be echoed when INPUT CH LIB INCHNNL Clear Only LibUnStr SCENE 1 300 0 tx PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO is on The corresponding memory
228. ODE Premium Effect LIB 0 100 9 tx rx offfffff ff ASCII CODE Dante Input Patch LIB 0 10 5 tx rx MODULE NAME Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE LibUnRcl SCENE 0 5 tx Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE INPUT EQ LIB 0 1 tx Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE OUTPUT EQ LIB 0 2 3 4 cx Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE 267 CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual 4 4 FUNCTION CALL LIBRARY ATTRIBUTE 4 4 1 Format PARAMETER CHANGE Receive Data will be received when PARAMETER CHANGE Rx is on and the Device number of both Rx CH and SUB STATUS are matched The data will be echoed when PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO is on The corresponding memory library title will be changed immediately the data is received Transmission PARAMETER CHANGE will be sent in reply to Request If PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO is on the message will be sent as it is STATUS ID No SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID DATA CATEGORY FUNCTION NAME MODULE NAME DATA EOX 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 00010010 00000000 01001100 01101001 01100010 01000001 01110100 01110010 01100010 01110100 Ommmmmmm Ommmmmmm Ommmmmmm Ommmmmmm Ommmmmmm Ommmmmmm Ommmmmmm Ommmmmmm Onnnnnnn Onnnnnnn Cececcce 0000dddd 11110111 FO 43 1 19 00 I 1 b cn py mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm n
229. OLOR CALIBRATION button The CHANNEL COLOR CALIBRATION MODE screen will appear allowing you to adjust the channel color CHANNEL COLOR CALIBRATION MODE MODE SELECT Centralogic 1 8 1 8 MASTER RGB ADJUSTMENT CHAHHEL COLOR CALIBRATION l a v MODE SELECT NOTE In the case of the CL3 CL1 channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown Press a SEL key on the top panel to select the indicator for which you want to adjust the color NOTE Only one can be selected Multiple selections are not possible Press one of the color buttons on screen to select the desired color All channel color indicators turn the selected color The currently selected color button on screen will be surrounded by a white frame While comparing the color of the selected channel s indicator with the color of the other channel indicators for which the SEL keys are turned off use the three right most multifunction knobs to adjust the color The RGB values in the RGB ADJUSTMENT field change accordingly CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual When you have finished adjusting the color press the APPLY button located on the right of the window to confirm the change MASTER NOTE The APPLY button appears only if you change the RGB values To reset all channel color indicators to the factory default setting press the RESET ALL button Press the EXIT button The CL unit will start up in normal operating mode
230. ONO bus from an input channel in LCR mode e TRIM knob Indicates the monitor levels when PFL is selected Use the multifunction knob to adjust the level 103 Monitor and Cue functions 3 DCA CUE field This section enables you to make settings related to DCA cue Cue point select button Sets the cue point for the DCA group to PRE PAN immediately before PAN or POST PAN immediately after PAN DCA TRIM knob Indicates the monitor level of cue signals from a DCA group Use the multifunction knob to adjust the level UNITY button Turn on this button to monitor signals at the same volume level that was obtained when the master level for each DCA group was set to 0 dB unity gain 4 OUTPUT CUE field This section enables you to make settings related to output channel cue e Cue point select button Sets the cue point for the output channel to PFL immediately before fader or AFL immediately after fader e PFL TRIM knob Indicates the monitor levels when PFL is selected Press this knob so that you will be able to use the multifunction knob to adjust the level 5 Meter field e Meter This field indicates the output level of the cue L R channels e CUE OUT PATCH button Press this button to open the PORT SELECT popup window in which you can select an output port to patch to the cue out L R channels 6 CUE OUTPUT button Switches cue out on or off 7 CUE LEVEL knob Indicates the output level of
231. ONO popup window you can control signals that is sent from an input channel to the STEREO MONO bus This popup window features four views Use the tabs near the bottom of the window to select one of the four views Each window view includes the following items 36 Input channels TO STEREO MONO popup window 8ch Here you can control the on off and pan balance settings of signals sent from input channels to the STEREO L R bus and MONO C bus in groups of eight channels TO STEREO MONO E CH2 ch 1 ch 2 ch 3 ch 4 ch 5 ch 6 ch 7 8 ST MONO ST MONO ST MONO ST MONO ST MONO ST MONO ST MONO LCR LCR LCR LCR LCR LCR LCR MODE MODE MODE MODE MODE MODE 1 Channel select button Selects the channel You can select multiple channels simultaneously 2 Mode LEDs 3 MODE ST MONO LCR mode select button Press this button repeatedly to toggle between ST MONO and LCR The LED of the currently selected mode will light 4 ST MONO buttons These buttons are individual on off switches for signals sent from each channel to the STEREO bus MONO bus when the MONO button is set to ST MONO mode 5 gt clipping indicator Lights to indicate a signal is clipping at some point in the channel 6 TO ST PAN TO ST BALANCE knob For MONO channels this acts as a PAN knob that adjusts the left right panning of signals sent to the ST
232. OOKUP 0 0 100 0 ms Lookup delay MAKE UP OFF ON Automatically adjusts the output level 1 6 0 ms 46 0 s fs 44 1 kHz 5 0 ms 42 3 s fs 48 kHz M BAND COMP Two input two output 3 band compressor with individual solo and gain reduction metering for each band MID KNEE os knee ofthe mid band Jos ofthe high band compressor SSS 1 6 0 ms 46 0 s fs 44 1 kHz 5 0 ms 42 3 s fs 48 kHz 245 Appendices Premium Rack Processor Parameters Portico5033 This models an analog 5 band EQ made by the RND company wQ 0759 MF FREQ 33000025009 Center frequency oftheMFband Switches the HMF bandon o 0159 HMF FREQ VS0kto 16 0K He Center frequency ofthe HMFband PHF FREQ 2500 250K He Center frequency ofthe HFband Portico5043 This models an analog compressor limiter made by the RND company ML M Turns bypass on off for the compressor When bypassed the button will OFF ON be unlit However even in the bypassed state the signal will pass through FBO OFF ON Switches between feed forward type and feed back type the input output transformers and the amp circuit CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual 076 This models a well known vintage compressor limiter used in wide range of situations INPUT 96 0 to 0 0 dB Input level OUTPUT 96 0 to 0 0 dB Output
233. ORY INC DEC keys will do when pressed in the SCENE popup windows When the SCENE 1 1 button is lit pressing the INC or DEC key will increment or decrement the scene number When the LIST UP DOWN button is lit pressing the INC or DEC key will scroll the list upward or downward LIST ORDER Specifies the order in which scene memories and library items will appear on the list When the NORMAL button is lit the list appears in ascending numerical order When the REVERSE button is lit the list appears in descending numerical order NAME DISPLAY Specifies the content of the channel name display on the top panel When the NAME ONLY button is lit only the channel name appears When the FULL FUNCTION button is lit the channel name display also indicates knob assignment information and fader level Use the buttons on screen to make Preference settings When you have finished making settings close the popup window and press the SETUP button in the Function Access Area 169 User settings Security USER DEFINED keys This section explains how to assign the desired functions to the USER DEFINED keys in the USER DEFINED KEYS section on the top panel and press these keys to execute the defined function This assignment procedure will define the USER DEFINED keys for the user who is currently logged in but if you are logged in as the Administrator you can also make USER DEFINED key settings for the Guest account
234. On off status of signals sent to MATRIX buses Fader operations ON key operations TO STEREO MONO setting DELAY setting DCA GROUP ASSIGN setting MUTE GROUP ASSIGN and MUTE SAFE settings Two or more input channels that are linked are called a link group There is no limit on the number of link groups you can create or on the number or combination of input channels that can be included in these link groups You can select the types of parameters to be linked for each link group CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual Linking the desired input channels This section explains how to link specific parameters of input channels NOTE Channel link settings are saved as part of the scene 1 In the Function Access Area press the CH JOB CH JOB x button CH ASSIGN 2 Press the CH LINK button to open the CH LINK CH LINK __ MODE popup window CH LINK button In this popup window you can view the channels that are DCA GROUP linked and specify the parameters that will be linked The window includes the following items NOTE You can also access this window by simultaneously s CH SORT pressing and then releasing the SEL keys of two or more channels that will be linked COPY MOVE MUTE GROUP RECALL SAFE DEFAULT CH LINK MODE Hold down SEL of Defining CH and press SEL of additional CHs J Then choose PARAMETERs to link CH17 32 CH33 48 CH49 64 CH65 72 ST IN LINK PARAMETER MATRI
235. One input two output delay and early reflections effects in series aut Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio DLY BAL 0 10096 Delay and early reflected delay balance 0 all early reflected delay 100 all delay HPF THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency wk NOTEL Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY L NOTER Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY R NOTE FB Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB DLY 1 FR bh ddd Dh d da d 4 oa Maximum value depends on the tempo setting 241 Appendices DELAY REV One input two output delay and reverb effects in parallel Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for 0 Reon reverse phase feedback HP THRU 21 2 He B 00KHe High pass fiter cutoff REV TIME OFFION NOTE L Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY L NOTER Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY R NOTE FB Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB DLY 1 FR bh ddd JD d da d d oa Maximum value depends on the tempo setting DELAY REV One input two output delay and reverb effects in series
236. P Q MIX MATRIX 7 7 001 001 PASTE 1 SET BY SEL button Turn on this button to add a channel by using the corresponding SEL key 2 CLEAR ALL button SET ALL button The CLEAR ALL button clears all of the selected channels The SET ALL button selects all channels simultaneously NOTE In the case of the CL3 CL1 faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual 3 Use the tabs to select one of the following as the type of item you want to copy INPUT Input channel and its parameters OUTPUT Output channel and its parameters RACK GEQ effect Premium rack PATCH NAME Input output patch channel name DCA group 4 Select the copy source channel or parameter The view will vary depending on the tab you select You cannot select different parameters from different channels To select a channel press the corresponding SEL key on the top panel e INPUT tab Select an input channel in the upper left area and select its parameter in the lower left area You can select the following parameters All input channel parameters INPUT PATCH Input patch settings NAME Channel name icon and channel color HA Settings for the head amp assigned to the corresponding input channel and phase TOMONOowofsaus OUTPUT tab Select an output channel in the upper left area and select its parameter in the lower left area
237. Portico5033 LIB P5033 20 Portico5043 LIB P5043 20 U76 LIB 076 20 Opt 2A LIB OPT 2A 20 265 Appendices Module Name mm Data Number dd EQP 1A LIB EQ TA 20 DynamicEQ LIB DYNAEQ 20 Dante Input Patch LIB DANTEIN 23 Mixer Setup MIXERSET Fix 512 Outport Setup OUT PORT Fix 512 Monitor Setup MONITOR Fix 512 MIDI Setup MIDI SET Fix 512 Lib Number LIB NUM Fix 512 Program Change Table PRGMCHG Fix 512 Control Change Table CTRLCHG Fix 512 Preference Current PREF CUR Fix 512 Preference Admin PREF ADM Fix 512 Preference Guest PREF GST Fix 512 User Defined Keys Current UDEF CUR Fix 512 include Knob Encoder User Defined Keys Admin UDEF ADM Fix 512 include Knob Encoder User Defined Keys Guest UDEF GST Fix 512 include Knob Encoder Custom Fader Bank Current CFAD CUR Fix 512 Custom Fader Bank Admin CFAD ADM Fix 512 Custom Fader Bank Guest CFAD GST Fix 512 User Level Current UKEY CUR Fix 512 User Level Guest UKEY GST Fix 512 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 20 0 300 Scene Number 0 Request Only 1 199 Input EQ Library Number 1 40 Request Only 1 199 Output EQ Library Number 1 3 Request Only 1 199 Dynamics Library Number 1 41 Request Only 0 199 GEQ Library Number 0 Request Only 1 199 Effect Library Number 1 27 Request Only 512 583 Input 1 72 584 599 STIN 1L 8R 768 791 M
238. Q 1 Refer to steps 1 6 in the Virtual rack operations section page 115 to mount a 31BandGEQ in a rack and set its input source and output destination The rack in which the 31BandGEQ is mounted will show the approximate settings and input and output levels In the GEQ field or the EFFECT field press the rack in which you mounted the 31BandGEQ The GEQ popup window will appear In the GEQ popup window you can use the tabs to switch among the racks INPUT OUTPUT GEQ 1 NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN 4 GEQ 2 GEQ 1 31BandGEQ poe 1 25k 2k 3 15k 12 5k k 1 6k 2 5k 4k Ok 1 20k 6k FADER ASSIGN 1 EQ graph Indicates the approximate response of the current 31BandGEQ 2 Faders Indicate the amount of boost and cut for each band of the 31BandGEQ The actual values are shown in the numerical boxes below 3 FADER ASSIGN field In this field you can select the group of bands that will be controlled by the Centralogic section s faders Press the GEQ ON OFF button to turn the 31BandGEQ on 4 Press one of the buttons in the FADER ASSIGN field to select the group of bands you will control using the Centralogic section s faders 120 Graphic EQ effects and Premium Rack The buttons in the FADER ASSIGN field correspond to the following groups of bands 20 100 Eight bands 20 0 Hz 100 Hz 63 315 Eight bands 63 0 Hz 315 Hz 200 1k Eight bands 200 Hz 1 00 kHz 630 3 15k Eight bands 630 Hz 3 15 kH
239. RELEASE1 MAKE UP1 SIDEHPF1 INPUT 2 OUTPUT 2 RATIO 2 the low range 180 to 0 dB Adjusts the CH2 output gain Ratio of CH2 compressor ATTACK 2 0 022 50 4 ms Attack time of CH2 compressor RELEASE2 10 88 544 22 ms Release time of CH2 compressor MAKE UP2 OFF ON Automatically corrects output gain reduction when the CH2 compressor is applied bmw When the HPF in the side chain of the CH2 compressor is turned on the OFF ON 2 1 4 1 8 1 12 1 20 1 SIDEHPF2 compression applied to the low range will be weakened thus emphasizing the low range 243 Appendices COMP276S This effect emulates the characteristics of analog compressors that are widely used in recording studios It produces a thick strong frame sound suitable for drums and bass You can link and control the L and R channel parameters ATTACK 0 022 50 4 ms Attack time of the compressor RELEASE 10 88 544 22 ms Release time of the compressor MAKEUP OFF ON i corrects output gain reduction when the compressor is When the HPF in the side chain of the compressor is turned on the compression applied to the low range will be weakened thus emphasizing the low range SIDE HPF COMP260 This effect emulates the characteristics of mid 70 s compressors limiters that are the standard for live SR You can control two monaural channels independently You can also link several parameters via stereo links KNEET SOFT MEDIUM HARD Knee of CH
240. RIX bus This setting is made in the BUS SETUP popup window see page 202 e The PRE button is not displayed for FIXED type MIX buses CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual Using the faders SENDS ON FADER mode You can use the faders on the top panel to adjust signals that are sent from all input channels to a specific MIX MATRIX bus 1 sure that an output port is assigned to each MIX MATRIX bus to which you want to send signals and that your monitor system external effect or other device is connected to the corresponding output port 2 In the Function Access Area press the SENDS ON FADER button The CL series unit will switch to SENDS ON FADER mode The faders in the Channel Strip section and Master section will move to the send levels of the signals that are routed from each channel to the currently selected MIX MATRIX bus The ON keys will also change to the SEND ON status If you ve used the bank select keys to assign input channels to the Centralogic section the corresponding channels will change to indicating the send levels and ON settings for the signals sent from those channels to the currently selected MIX MATRIX bus If the Centralogic section has been assigned to output channels and the send destination bus is MIX each channel will still show the fader value and ON setting If the send destination bus is MATRIX the Centralogic section will change to show the send level and ON setting for the signals se
241. RS WHEN KNOB S PRESSED on the PREFERENCE tab accessed by pressing the SETUP button then the USER SETUP button pressing a knob repeatedly will open or close the popup window 1ch Even if a different screen is selected the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section will always affect the currently selected channel In this case a window indicating the value of that parameter will appear on screen when you operate a knob METER 12345678 _ 9 101 1213 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 ch VEF jg i 0 00 00 ADMIN Send To MIXI METER OVER 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 EF METERING POINT PRE PEAK HOLD m m mM M WM LES EM M EM M M E 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 2 30 dB 0 90 1 80 dB 3 85 4 35 2 40 aB 4 85 4 95 aB R scene 000 CHI CH3 CHS CH7 gt CH2 CHS ch 1 ch 2 ch 3 ch 4 ch 5 ch 8 Initial Data Use the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section and the buttons on the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen to edit the parameters of the selected channel CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen A GAIN DYNAMICS Q DANTE 001 001 Fd DYNAMICS 2 oVER HIGH LS H SHELF 10 Ok DIRECT OUT 181 ON D 0 00 4 00k RECALL SAFE i LOW MID HIGH MID F GH MID 1 0 70 0 70 1 00k
242. Recall Safe function that is currently set for individual channels and the Global Recall Safe function simultaneously The SET ALL button turns on enables these functions simultaneously NOTE The selection of parameters that would be affected by the Recall Safe function will not change 88 CU s gt Cu_ 3 A Reference Manual 2 CH RECALL SAFE field Indicates the channels currently specified for the Recall Safe function 3 SET BY SEL button Enables you to use the SEL keys on the panel to select channels that will be affected by the Recall Safe function Turn this button on and then press the SEL key for the channel to which you want to apply Recall Safe The on screen fader of the corresponding channel will turn green all parameters for the channel will be affected by the Recall Safe function or turn blue some parameters for the channel will be affected by the Recall Safe function Press the same SEL key once again to de select the channel i All parameters are affected by Recall Safe on these channels Some parameters affected by Recall Safe on these channels i Recall Safe has been canceled on these channels 4 GLOBAL RECALL SAFE field Indicates the state of Recall Safe settings that are not made in units of channels and the Recall Safe settings for racks Press this field to open the GLOBAL RECALL SAFE popup window 5 Channel select button Selects the channel for which you want to set
243. Reference Manual EQ parameter field This field displays the 4 band EQ parameter settings D knob Specifies the Q for each band If the HIGH band filter type is set to LPF or H SHELF high shelving or the LOW band filter type is set to L SHELF low shelving the Q knob will not be displayed Only the filter type name will be displayed 10 HIGH MID 4 00 LOW MID P 1 00k NOTE Fully rotating the HIGH band knob on the panel counter clockwise while pressing and holding it down will set the filter type to LPF Fully rotating the Q knob clockwise while pressing and holding it down will set the filter type to high shelving Fully rotating the LOW band Q knob on the panel clockwise while pressing and holding it down will set the filter type to low shelving If an output channel has been selected fully rotating the LOW band Q knob on the panel counter clockwise while pressing and holding it down will set the filter type to HPF e You can also switch the filter type on the HPF EQ 1ch popup window 2 FREQUENCY knob Sets the center frequency or cutoff frequency for each band 3 GAIN knob Sets the amount of cut boost for each band NOTE e Ifthe HIGH band filter type is set to LPF you can switch LPF on or off using the HIGH band GAIN knob on the panel e If the LOW band filter type is set to HPF you can switch HPF on or off using the LOW band GAIN knob on the panel e Press each knob to o
244. T IN 8 MIX1 MIX24 MTRX1 MTRX amp 8 STEREO MONO C DCA1 DCA16 SET 48V SET 6 SEFUPSERT OMI Hold down this key and press SEL to switch it SET DIRECT OUT ON on off During this time the SEL LED will be lit if on SET BY SEL 2I L PRT SEN or dark if off TALKBACK CURRENT PAGE TAP TEMPO EFFECT RACK1 8 CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual Functions that be assigned to USER DEFINED knobs FUNCTION PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2 AMP S THRESHOLD RANGE RATIO ATTACK HOLD DYNAMICS1 DECAY RELEASE OUTGAIN KNEE WIDTH esa RESHOLD RATIO FREQUENCY ATTACK DYNAMICS2 RELEASE OUTGAIN KNEE WIDTH LN EQ HIGH FREQUENCY HIGH GAIN FUNCTION PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2 EXTERNAL HA GAIN1 GAIN8 I O DEVICE GAIN1 GAIN32 INPUT DELAY DELAY TIME ANALOG GAIN INPUT GAIN 4 DIGITAL GAIN MIDI CONTROL CHANGE CTRL 33 CTRL 95 CTRL 102 CTRL 119 TALKBACK DIMMER LEVEL MEE MONITOR MONITOR DELAY I MONITOR FADER EE LEVEL SINE WAVE FREQUENCY EE HPF 0 0 0 S O OSCILLATOR WIDTH Do DELAY TIME OUTPUT PORT 12 GAIN TO MIX LEVEL MIX1 MIX24 TO MATRIX LEVEL MATRIX1 MATRIX8 TO MIX PAN MIX1 2 MIX23 24 TO MATRIX PAN MATRIX 1 2 MATRIX7 8 Appendices 2 SELECTED CL5 CH1 CH72 CH1 CH64 CL1 MTRX1 MTRX8 STEREO MONO C 3 4 7 ST L ST R MONO 10 4 1 4 6 11 REMOTE
245. T MONO button Switches the on off status of a signal sent from the channel to the STEREO MONO bus If an INPUT MIX channel is set to LCR mode the LCR button appears in location 2 The LCR button is an overall on off switch for the signals sent from the channel to the STEREO MONO bus When a MATRIX STEREO or MONO channel is selected 1 BALANCE knob If the signal on the selected channel is stereo the BALANCE knob will appear enabling you to adjust the volume balance for the left and right channels If the channel signal is monaural a gray circle will appear in this location Press the knob to open the TO STEREO 8ch popup window INPUT DELAY field This field enables you to view the delay settings 1 ON indicator Indicates the on off status of the delay If the delay is off 2 0 66ms the indicator will not be displayed 2 Delay time The delay value is displayed by milliseconds ms and also by currently selected scale If the scale uses units of ms the value in the bottom row will not be displayed Only the ms value appears in the middle row Press this field to open the INPUT DELAY 8ch popup window B HPF field input channels only This field enables you to set the CD HPF knob Sets the HPF cutoff frequency 2 ON button Switches the HPF on or off If an output channel is selected a gray circle will appear in location 1 and button 2 will be hidden CU 5 6 UL 3 V
246. T OUT PRE HPF PRE HPF PRE HPF PRE HPF PRE HPF PRE HPF PRE HPF PRE HPF DANTE RENE 00 LEVEL 00 LEVEL 1 Channel select button Selects the channel to set The channel icon color and number appear on the button 2 INSERT OUT button Press this button to open the PORT SELECT popup window in which you can select an output port The name of the currently selected port appears on the button 3 INSERT ON OFF button Switches the insert on or off The currently specified insert point setting appears above the button 4 INSERT IN button Press this button to open the PORT SELECT popup window in which you can select an input port The name of the currently selected port appears on the button You can also view the insert in level by checking the indicator located to the right of the port button that is displayed as an option 22 Input and output patching 4 Access either the one channel or the eight channel INSERT DIRECT OUT popup window and then press the INSERT OUT button The PORT SELECT popup window will appear allowing you to select the output port used for insert out The window includes the following items PORT SELECT El Select candidate 1 Category select list Selects the category of output port shown in the popup window The categories correspond to the following output ports They vary depending on the channel type OMNI1 OMNI8 SLOTI se SLOT1 1 SLOT1
247. T compressor O o ST LINK OFF ON Links CH1 and CH2 as a stereo pair THRE KNEE ATTACK RELEASE and RATIO parameters are linked OUTPUT parameter is not linked COMP260S This effect emulates the characteristics of mid 70 compressors limiters that are the standard for live SR You can link and control the L and R channel parameters KNEE SOFT MEDIUM HARD knee ofthe compressor SSCS CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual EQUALIZER601 This effect emulates the characteristics of 70 analog equalizers Re creating the distortion of typical analog circuits will add drive to the sound fosso Mioi 200 HIF _ 160Hzto200kHz Cut off frequency of EQ6 Selects the equalizer type The CLEAN equalizer provides non distorted PE CLEAN DRIVE clear typical digital sound emulating variations in frequency response in the analog circuits The DRIVE equalizer provides distorted driven sound 16 0 Hz to 20 0 kHz LPF 1 LPF 2 1 0 kHz to 20 0 kHz HSH 1 HSH 2 that enhances analog flavor emulating changes in frequency response in the analog circuits TY 1 244 Appendices OPENDECK It emulates the tape compression created by two open reel tape recorders a recording deck and a playback deck You can change the sound quality by adjusting various elements such as the deck type tape quality playback speed etc Swss7O Swss78 Swss85
248. T jack OUTPUT jack or to an I O card installed in slot 1 3 NOTE If you install a digital I O card in a slot and digitally connect an external device you must synchronize the word clock of the CL console and the external device see page 198 2 Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to access the OVERVIEW screen that includes the input channel that you want to output directly 3 Press the INSERT DIRECT OUT field to access the INSERT DIRECT OUT popup window There are two variations of this popup window one channel and eight channel Each window view includes the following items INSERT DIRECT OUT popup window 1ch INSERT DIRECT OUT 9 CHI INSERT IN Q ch 1 OUT IN INSERT OMNI 1 2 IGITAL HPF je DYHA1 H DYHA2 1 DELAY H FADER HOH OFF DIRECT DANTET OUT INSERT POINT amp DIRECT OUT POINT DIRECT OUT 4 LEVEL 0 00 1 DIRECT OUT field Enables you to make settings for direct output Press one of four fields to choose PRE HPF immediately before the HPF PRE EQ immediately before the EQ or PRE FADER immediately before the fader or POST ON immediately after the ON key as the direct output position CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual 2 DIRECT OUT PATCH button Press this button to open the PORT SELECT popup window in which you can select a Direct Out output port The name of the currently selected port appears on the button
249. TE GROUP RECALL SAFE CH SORT move MOVE button DEFAULT CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual Grouping and linking This popup window lets you move channel settings 3 MOVE button Executes a move operation After selecting the move source channel and move destination channel press this button to execute the move CH MOVE MODE Select SOURCE CH and DESTINATION CH with SEL and press MOVE button 4 CLOSE button SOURCE CH DESTINATION CH Press this button to close popup window and return to the previous screen 3 To select the move source channel press the corresponding SEL key to make it light The corresponding channel is highlighted in the SOURCE CH field of the window When you select the move source channel the DESTINATION CH field will automatically be bolded allowing you to select the move destination Select SOURCE CH with SEL If you want to re select the move source channel press the SOURCE CH field NOTE Settings for the Move operation can be made only in the order of move source gt move destination D SOURCE CH field 4 To select the move destination channel press the corresponding SEL key to make This field indicates the move source channel While this window is displayed press a SEL key it light on the top panel to select an input channel This field will indicate the selected channel The corresponding channel is highlighted in the DESTINATION CH
250. TIN1L STIN8R MATRIX 1 2 PAN MATRIX 7 8 PAN FADER H MIX 1 MIX 24 MATRIX 1 POINT MATRIX 8 POINT OUTPUT MATRIX 1 MATRIX 8 MATRIX 1 ON _ MATRIX 8 ON STEREO L MONO C STEREO TO MATRIX MATRIX 1 LEVEL MATRIX 8 LEVEL STEREO L MONO C CH 1 CH 72 INPUT FADER L MIX 1 MIX 24 MATRIX 1 2 MATRIX 7 8 PAN OUTPUT MATRIX 1 MATRIX 8 STEREO L MONO C LOW Q INPUT CH 1 72 LOW FREQ STINTL STIN8R LOW GAIN CH ON MIX 1 MIX 24 LOW MID Q LOWMIDFRQ STEREO L MONO C LON MIREG IC LOW MID GAIN PHASE INPUT LANCE STINTL STINSR INPUT EQ CH 1 CH 72 HIGH MID FRE STIN1L STIN8R INPUT CH 1 CH 72 Q HIGH MID GAIN INSERT MIX 1 MIX 24 HIGH Q OUTPUT MATRIX 1 MATRIX 8 STEREO L MONO C HIGH FREQ DIRECT OUT cH 1 CH 72 n LPF ON HOPES PAN BALANCE INPUT MIX 1 MIX 24 HIGH TYPE BALANCE OUTPUT MATRIX 1 MATRIX 8 m CH 1 CH 72 STEREO L STEREO R STINTL STIN8R 1 CH 72 1 STINTL STIN8R INPUT HPF CH 1 CH 72 FREQ STIN1L STIN8R CH 1 CH 72 TO MON N STIN1L STIN8R STINTL STIN8R ON CH 1 CH 72 LCR MIX 1 ON MIX24 ON MIX 1 MIX 24 CH1 CH 72 elc STIN1L STIN8R HIGH MID GAIN MIX TO STEREO MIX 1 MIX 24 248 CU 2 60 3 C 1 1 Reference Manual Parameter 2 MIX1 MIX24 MATRIX1 MATRIX8 STEREO L MONO C OUTPUT ATT OUTPUT ATTACK THRESHOLD RANGE HOLD H HOLD L DECAY RELEASE H D
251. USB flash drive The highlighted line indicates the file selected for operations The file list contains the following items When you press the item name at the top of each column it will turn orange and the list will be sorted by that item Each time you press the item name the sorting order will alternate between ascending and descending order e FILE NAME Indicates the file name or directory name and shows an icon indicating its type o The comment added to the CL console setting file is displayed here READ A lock symbol in this column indicates that the corresponding file is protected You can press this area to enable or disable the protect setting EY PE ALL indicates a file containing CL internal settings KEY indicates a user authentication key XML indicates a Help file BMP indicates a bitmap image file MP3 indicates an MP3 file and DIR indicates a directory TIME STAMP Indicates the date and time at which the file was modified most recently File selection knob Selects a file on the file list You can operate this knob using the multifunction knob 9 SAVE button Saves all of the CL console internal settings together see page 177 LOAD button Loads the selected CL setting file see page 178 1 CREATE USER KEY button Creates a user authentication key see page 158 12 FORMAT button Initializes the USB flash drive see page
252. UT INS CH 1 Por tico5043 INS CH 1 ch 1 PorticoS5043 Dual ch 1 IN INPUT FB GAIN REDUCTION Q 22 18 14 10 6 4 2 0 22 18 14 10 6 4 2 0 4 2043 3 1 50 250 1 50 0 8 V Compressor 5 Jr m 50 1 1 1 _ 20 5 5 100ms 5s EJ THRESHOLD 5 RELEASE 6 GAIN RELEASE G 25 0 dB 2 50 1 45 ms 186 ms 4 0 dB 1 ASSIST button Press this button to open a window in which you can assign the parameters to the multifunction knobs for control 2 LIBRARY button Press the button to open the Library popup window for Premium Rack For each module type 3 DEFAULT button Restores the default parameter setting 4 Multifunction knob access field Indicates the name and value of the parameters that are assigned to the multifunction knobs To switch the parameter to control press the knob in the window NOTE e f the ASSIST button is on you will be able to easily identify the parameters that are currently available for editing and the parameters that will be available for editing after you select them e You can adjust the parameter in finer steps by turning a multifunction knob while pressing and holding it down 132 Graphic EQ effects and Premium Rack Portico 5033 Portico 5033 is a processor that emulates a 5 band analog EQ developed by Rupert Neve Designs RND 5033EQ features a unique tone c
253. UT or 2 IN 2 OUT of this effect is also shown 2 Input output meters Indicate the level of the signals before and after the effect 2 Press the rack in which the effect you want to edit is mounted The EFFECT popup window will appear allowing you to edit the effect parameters In the EFFECT popup window you can use the tabs to switch among the eight racks EFFECT 1 EFFECT 8 12dB M H XOVR SLOPE MIX BAL j o E 125 Graphic EQ effects and Premium Rack 1 INPUT PATCH buttons Press these buttons to open the CH SELECT popup window 2 OUTPUT PATCH buttons Press these buttons to open the CH SELECT popup window 3 Effect type field Displays the effect title the name of the type that is used and a graphic The number of input and output channels 1 IN 2 OUT or 2 IN 2 OUT of this effect is also shown Press this field to open the EFFECT TYPE popup window in which you can select the effect type 4 EFFECT CUE button Enables you to cue monitor the output of the currently displayed effect This Cue function is valid only while this screen is displayed The cue will be canceled automatically when you switch to a different screen 5 Special parameter field Indicates special parameters that are specific to some effect types 6 BYPASS button Temporarily bypasses the effect 7 input output meters Indicate the level of the signals before and after the effect Effect parameter field This are
254. X 71 Grouping and linking 1 Channel display field When you create a link group the corresponding channels will be highlighted If there are two or more link groups each group is shown in a different color NOTE Left and right of the ST IN channel are always linked 2 LINK PARAMETER field Use the buttons in this field to select the parameters that you want to link You can do this independently for each link group 3 SEND PARAMETER field If you have turned on the MIX ON MIX SEND MATRIX ON or MATRIX send buttons in the LINK PARAMETER field use the buttons in this field to specify the send destination bus es NOTE In the case of the CL3 CL1 faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown 3 Use the buttons in the LINK PARAMETER field to select the parameter s that will be linked multiple selections are allowed The table below lists the parameters you can select in the LINK PARAMETER field C G MIX On off status of signals sent to MIX buses NOTE f you link Dynamics 1 or 2 for two or more input channels the parameter values will be linked but the key in signals are not linked For details about dynamics see EG and Dynamics on page 56 e f you turn on the EQ button or DYNAMICS 1 2 button library recall operations will also be linked The HA analog gain setting and the fader operation will be linked and will maintain the same relative level difference between the chan
255. _IN 7L Rt7L Grouping and linking CHS ch 8 CH16 ch16 CH24 ch24 CH32 ch32 CH40 ch40 CH48 ch48 ch56 CH 4 ch64 CHT2 ch72 ST IN SL Rt8L UHSELECT In the same way link other channels as you wish g ps after choosing PARAMETERs to link CH4 ch 4 ch CH ch 2 ch12 EH11 chil chi Hold down SEL of Defining after choosing PARAMETERs CH and pre to link ch 4 CH3 ch 3 chit CHI 1 chil If you use CL5 settings data on the CL3 CL1 or settings data on the CL1 buttons will be shown crossed out if they are assigned to a channel that does not exist on that model When you have finished linking channels press the CLOSE button CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual Copying moving or initializing a channel You can copy or move mix parameters between channels or restore the parameters of a specific channel to their default settings Copying the parameters of a channel You can copy the mix parameter settings of a channel to another channel When you execute the copy operation the settings will overwrite the parameters of the copy destination You can copy between the following combinations of channels e Between input channels e Between the STEREO L R channel and MONO channel e Between MIX channels Between MATRIX channels 1 Inthe Function Access Area press the CH JOB b
256. a desired channel Insert out of a desired channel The internal effects are categorized into two groups STEREO type 2 in 2 out effects that process the L R channel input signals independently and MIX type 1 in 2 out effects that mix the two channels before processing them If signals are assigned to both the L and R inputs of an effect the way in which the L R channels are processed will depend on whether a Stereo effect type or a Mix effect type is selected as follows 122 Graphic EQ effects and Premium Rack STEREO type effects INPUTL EFFECTL L RETURN INPUT R EFFECT R RETURN MIX type effects po EFFECT If a signal is assigned to only one input of a two input effect it will be processed as mono in stereo out regardless of whether a Stereo effect type or Mix effect type is selected However please note that this will not apply to COMP276 COMP276S COMP260 COMP260S EQUALIZER601 OPENDECK EFFECT Using an internal effect via send and return This section explains how to use a MIX bus as an effect send bus and a ST IN channelas an effect return channel so that the effect can be used in a send and return configuration NOTE f you want to use a MIX bus as an effect send bus select VARI as the bus type This will allow you to adjust the send level separately for each input channel f you want to use the input to an effect in stereo it can be convenient to assign t
257. a indicates parameters for the currently selected effect type When you press a knob in this field you will be able to use the multifunction knobs to control the corresponding horizontal row of knobs You can also make fine adjustments by rotating a knob while pressing and holding it down 9 Rack select tabs Use these tabs to switch among EFFECT 1 8 CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual Graphic EQ effects and Premium Rack To change the effect type press the effect type field to open the EFFECT TYPE TEMPO popup window This field appears if a tempo type or modulation type effect is selected 1 MIDI CLK button If you turn this button on the BPM parameter of that effect will be set to match the tempo of the MIDI timing clock being input Press a new effect type to select it from the MIDI port HALL ROOM REV X PLATE REVERB HALL REVERB ROOM REVERB STAGE REVERB PLATE ST REVERB I AMD ND NCC NECEM EARLY REF GATE REVERB REVERSE GATE MONO DELAY STEREO DELAY DELAY LCR CHO PLAY REC y NS pho ef A eo This field appears if FREEZE is selected as the effect type SYMPHONIC DYNA FLANGE DYNA PHASER HQ PITCH DUAL PITCH D PLAY button REC button Enable you to record sample and play back when using the freeze effect For detailed operations see Using the Freeze effect on page 129 TREMOLO AUTO PAN DYNA FILTER had had 3 zi
258. ack will stop when the scene is recalled regardless of the offset time setting CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual Using Preview mode Preview mode lets you view or edit the settings of a scene stored in memory without affecting the signal processing of the current scene When you recall a scene in this mode the settings of the newly recalled scene will appear on the panel of the CL series console but the signal processing of the current scene will remain as it was prior to the recall Even if you modify the settings and save them as a new scene or by overwriting the signal processing of the current scene will remain as it was prior to the recall During an actual performance it can be convenient to use this to check the content of the scene you intend to recall next or to make minor changes to a scene and then store it 1 Press the PREVIEW button on the panel or the PREVIEW button in the SCENE LIST window The PREVIEW button will light and the console will be in Preview mode In this state operating controllers such as the knobs and faders will not affect the signal processing of the current scene 2 Usethe SCENE MEMORY INC DEC keys to select the scene number that you want to recall 3 Press the SCENE MEMORY RECALL key To execute the Recall operation press the OK button The scene will be recalled However the internal signal processing of the current scene will remain unchanged as it was prior to the Recall o
259. acks A and B will be linked Apply Recall Safe to GEQ racks 1 16 Effect racks 1 8 Premium Racks 1 8 individually 7 When you have finished making settings press the CLOSE button to close the popup window Then perform a Recall operation Only the selected DCA group channels and parameters will be excluded from Recall operations Bus settings are not subject to Recall Safe They will always be reproduced in the recalled scene This means that if Recall Safe is enabled for one of several channels included in a link group or one of two channels set to stereo the parameter settings of that channel may differ from those of the other channel s In such cases the applicable parameter will be automatically re linked the next time it is operated You can globally apply Recall Safe to channel links by using the global parameter NOTE e You can use the Recall Safe function along with the Focus function see page 87 Channels or parameters that are excluded from Recall operations by either Focus or Recall Safe will not be recalled f you hold down the SEL key while performing a recall operation all parameters of that channel will be treated as Recall Safe regardless of the state of the SAFE PARAMETER SELECT selections Scene memory Using the Fade function Fade is a function that smoothly changes the faders of specified channels and DCA groups to their new values over a specified duration when you recall a scene The
260. age and if stopped starts recording STATUS 11110000 System exclusive message ID No 01111111 7F Realtime System exclusive Device ID Oddddddd Destination 00 7E 7F all call COMMAND 00000110 06 Machine Control Command MCC sub id 00000110 06 Record strobe EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive lt MMC PAUSE gt Reception If the DEVICE NO matches or is 7F receives this message and if playing pauses STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01111111 7F Realtime System exclusive Device ID Oddddddd dd Destination 00 7E 7F all call COMMAND 00000110 06 Machine Control Command MCC sub id 00001001 09 Pause MCS EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 3 2 BULK DUMP This message is used to send or receive the contents of various memories stored within the unit The basic format is as follows rx tx Function rx tx BULK DUMP DATA Command FO 43 On 19 dd ee F7 FO 43 2n 19 mm mm dd mm dd dd F7 rx BULK DUMP REQUEST The CL series uses the following data types for a bulk dump Module Name mm Data Number dd SCENE LIB SCENE 1 14 15 16 INPUT EQ LIB INEQ 2 7 8 OUTPUT EQ LIB OUTEQ 3 9 10 11 Dynamics LIB DYNA 4 7 8 9 10 11 21 22 INPUT CH LIB INCHNNL 17 7 8 OUTPUT CH LIB OUTCHNNL 18 9 10 11 GEQ LIB GEQ 5 12 EFFECT LIB EFFECT 6 13 Premium Effect PEFFECT 19
261. ain dB 60 amplingFerc Out gain dB Release ms Threshold dB dB 14 1 1 CN Attack 1 Announcer 29909 Out dB Width dB Width dB Threshold dB Threshold dB 9 38 8 8 99 Threshold dB 0 Rad Owgan d 80 00 Threshold dB 23 Threshold dB dB 18 8 1 1 35 Attack 94 Total Compt compressor 9 22 E Guitar COMPRESSOR 23 A Guitar COMPRESSOR 24 Strings COMPRESSOR Ratio 1 Hip Com COMPANDER s Attack ms nos Out gain 00 Out gain dB Width Release ms Release ms Threshold dB Threshold dB Threshold dB Ratio 1 Ratio 1 Ratio 1 Total Comp2 23 5 n Strings2 COMPRESSOR RES ERE Solo Vocal COMPRESSOR Bec um COMPRESSOR Out dB Out gain dB Out gain dB 6 0 Release ms 1 35 Release ms Release ms 342 At fs 44 1 kHz 229 CU 5 6 3 A 1 Reference Manual Dynamics Parameters Input channels provide DYNAMICS section 1 and DYNAMICS section 2 Output channels provide DYNAMICS section 1 An input channels DYNAMICS section 1 provides the following four types GATE DUCKING COMPRESSOR and EXPANDER An input channels DYNAMICS section 2 provides the following four types COMPRESSOR COMPANDER H Compander H
262. ain of the head amp Press this field to assign the GAIN knob to the corresponding knob in the Centralogic section which enables you to adjust the gain If the Gain Compensation function is turned on an indicator appears showing the level of the signal output to the audio network e Ifthe GAIN knob has been assigned to a knob in the Centralogic section press the knob to open the GAIN PATCH 8ch popup window 2 OVER indicator Lights when the signal at the input port or from the rack output exceeds the full scale level This indicator is available only if an input channel is selected 3 48V indicator Indicates the phantom power 48V on or off status for the head amp This indicator is not displayed unless the head amp is patched to the channel 4 Phase indicator Indicates the input phase setting for the head amp This indicator is available only if an input channel is selected NOTE f the slot is not connected to the head amp the patch and the type of the MY card will be displayed e If GAIN KNOB FUNCTION is set to DIGITAL GAIN in the PREFERENCE screen the digital GAIN knob will appear instead of knob 1 and indicator 3 will not be displayed If the Gain Compensation function is turned on an indicator appears showing the level of the signal output to the audio network If the slot is patched The slot name will appear SLOTI 1 If the rack is connected D SIN Y The patch and module name will
263. ally the INPUT OUTPUT knob settings will be ignored and the rated number of inputs and outputs will be specified 3 After you ve selected the I O device to mount press the OK button to close the DEVICE SELECT popup window 220 Other functions REMOTE HA settings Heres how to select which of the multiple HA devices on the Dante audio network will be mounted so that they can be used Up to 8 units can be mounted for one CL series console 1 Inthe lower part of the DANTE SETUP popup screen press the REMOTE HA tab to access the REMOTE HA field DANTE SETUP CLEAR ALL REFRESH REMOTE HA ASSIGN This screen contains the following items 1 CLEAR ALL button Clears all HA devices in the list to an unmounted state 2 REFRESH button Updates the displayed list of HA devices on the Dante audio network 3 HA device select buttons Press one of these buttons to open the REMOTE HA SELECT popup window The upper line of the button shows the device label The lower line of the button shows the product name and the number of inputs and outputs If no device has been mounted the upper row will indicate and the lower row will show nothing CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual 2 Press HA device select button to access the REMOTE SELECT popup window DANTE REMOTE HA SELECT 1 Recall HA Setting to Rio with scene recalls It is recommended to only enable this for one console per RIO device to avoid
264. ance setting in groups of eight selected channels TO STEREO MONO MATRIX 5 STEREO MONO MONO OUTPUT 1 Channel select button Selects the channel You can select multiple channels simultaneously 2 gt clipping indicator Lights to indicate a signal is clipping at some point in the channel 3 TO ST PAN TO ST BALANCE knob Adjusts the panning and balance To adjust the value press the knob to select it and then operate the corresponding multifunction knob If the signal level reaches the overload point at any meter detection point in that channel the clipping indicator to the right of the knob will light 4 ST MONO indicator If a channel is set to ST MONO mode these indicators will individually indicate the on off status of signals sent from the channel to the STEREO bus MONO bus If a channel is set to LCR mode the LCR indicator is displayed in this location The LCR indicator indicates the on off status of all signals sent from that channel to the STEREO bus MONO bus Output channels 3 Access the eight channel TO STEREO MONO popup window 4 Usethe MODE button to select either ST MONO mode or LCR mode for each channel 5 the MASTER section on the top panel make sure that the ON key for the STEREO channel MONO channel is turned on and then raise the fader to an appropriate level Press one of the Output Bank Select Keys in the Centralogic section so that the
265. and that value will be applied to the BPM parameter The average interval will be input to the parameter the average of a b and c gt C 70 R First tap Second tap Third tap Fourth tap NOTE e f the average value is outside the range of 20 300 BPM it will be ignored e f you turn on the MIDI CLK button in the special parameter field the BPM parameter value will change in relation to the tempo of the MIDI timing clock received from the MIDI port Graphic EQ effects and Premium Rack Using the Freeze effect This section explains how to use the FREEZE effect type which provides the functionality of a simple sampler When this effect type is selected you can perform operations on screen to record sample and play back a sound 1 In the Function Access Area press the RACK button to access the VIRTUAL RACK window and then use the EFFECT tab to display the EFFECT field 2 Mountan effect in rack 1 3 5 or 7 NOTE Effect types FREEZE and HQ PITCH can be used only in rack 1 3 5 or 7 3 Press the rack in which the effect you want to control is mounted The EFFECT popup window will appear 4 Press the effect type field to open the EFFECT TYPE popup window and select FREEZE If the FREEZE effect type is selected a PLAY button REC button and progress bar will appear in the special parameter field EFFECT 1 EFFECT 1 TITLE Freeze TYPE FREEZE 1 14120072
266. ange by 6 dB OUT GAIN dB 18 0 to 0 0 181 points This sets the compander s output signal level This determines how far below the threshold expansion will be applied The expander is activated when the level drops below the threshold and width 44 1kHz 6 ms 46 0 sec RELEASE ms 48kHz 5 ms 42 3 sec 160 points WIDTH dB 1 90 90 points DE ESSER This detects and compresses only the sibilants and other high frequency consonants of the vocal Qo 10 0 0 10 41 points Q steepness of the filter when TYPE is BPF 232 Appendices Effect Type List REV X Hall REV X HALL New reverb algorithm that delivers dense and rich reverberation smooth decay REV X Room REV X ROOM and provides a spaciousness and depth that enhances the original sound Choose from three types depending on your location and needs REV X HALL REV X Plate REV X PLATE REV X ROOM and REV X PLATE Fame o E Symphonic SYMPHONIC Proprietary Yamaha effect that produces a richer and more complex modulation than normal chorus Phaser CU 5 6 VL 3 V Reference Manual freeze me 233 Appendices Effects Parameters REV X HALL REV X ROOM REV X PLATE Newly developed two input two output reverb algorithm Delivers dense and rich reverberation smooth decay and provides a spaciousness and depth that enhances the original sound Choose from three types depending
267. appear EHE If th i the output is connected DANTE Only the patch will appear CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual INPUT DELAY field This field displays the delay status for the input channel If an output channel has been selected this field will be blank Press this field to open the INPUT DELAY 8ch popup window 1 DELAY ON OFF indicator Indicates the on off status of the delay INSERT DIRECT OUT field This field enables you to make insert and Direct Out settings Press this field to open the INSERT DIRECT OUT 8ch popup window IHS D INSERT ON OFF indicator Indicates the insert on off status 2 DIRECT OUT ON OFF indicator input channels only Indicates the Direct Out on off status EQ field This field graphically indicates the approximate response of the EQ Press this field to open the HPF EQ Ich popup window in which you can set the HPF and EQ NOTE If DCA or monitor has been selected this field will be blank DYNAMICS 1 2 field This field displays the threshold value and meter for Dynamics 1 2 Press this field to open the DYNAMICS 1 2 Ich popup window NOTE If DCA or monitor has been selected this field will be blank 13 SEND field This field displays the send level send on off status and pre post settings for 16 buses To select the 16 destination buses use the MIX 1 16 or MIX 17 24 MATRIX key in the SELECTED
268. appear in the special parameter field 1 Gain reduction meters Indicate the amount of gain reduction applied by the compressor 1 26 CU 5 6 UL 3 1 1 Reference Manual 1 DRIVE button CLEAN button This field is displayed when Equalizer601 is selected as the effect type Select one of two equalizer types that feature different effects DRIVE emulates changes in frequency response of analog circuits creating a driven sound that enhances analog characteristics by adding some distortion CLEAN emulates changes in frequency response that are typical of analog circuits creating a clear non distorted sound that is inherently digital 2 FLAT button 6 This button resets the gain of all bands to OdB If you want to monitor the output signal of the currently displayed effect press the EFFECT CUE button to turn it on NOTE If the Cue mode is set to MIX CUE all channels for which the CUE key is turned on will be monitored However only the output signal of the effect will be monitored if you turn on the EFFECT CUE button The CUE keys that had been turned on until then will be temporarily defeated If you want to bypass the currently displayed effect press the BYPASS button to turn it on If you want to copy the currently displayed effect settings to the effect of another rack or to initialize the settings you can do so using the tool buttons at the top of the popup window For details on how
269. ard COMPANDER S Compander Soft and DE ESSER An output channel s DYNAMICS section 1 provides the following four types COMPRESSOR EXPANDER COMPANDER H Compander Hard and COMPANDER S Compander Soft GATE A gate attenuates signals below a set THRESHOLD level by a specified amount RANGE THRESHOLD dB 72 to 0 73 points d es the level at which the gate effect is RANGE dB 69 to 0 71 points This determines the amount of attenuation when the gate closes This determines how fast the gate opens when the signal exceeds the threshold level HOLD ms 44 1kHz 0 02 ms 2 13 sec This determines how long the gate stays open once 48kHz 0 02 ms 1 96 sec 160 points the trigger signal has fallen below the threshold 6 wis Osee This determines how fast the gate closes once the 48kHz 5 ms 42 3 sec 160 points hold time has expired The value is expressed as the I O Characteristics duration required for the level to change by 6 dB Time Series Analysis Input Signal Output Signal HOLD THRESHOLD ATTACK Input Level TN Vi Output Level Output Level THRESHOLD ir RANGE gt Input Level Time Time 230 Appendices DUCKING Ducking is commonly used for voice over applications in which the background music level is reduced automatically when an announcer speaks When the KEY IN source
270. ary popup window 2 DEFAULT button Press this button to reset all EQ filter parameters to the initial values 3 COPY button All EQ parameter settings will be stored in buffer memory 4 PASTE button Press this button to paste the setting in buffer memory to the current EQ If no valid data has been stored in the buffer memory nothing will happen 5 COMPARE button Press this button to swap between the current EQ settings and the data stored in buffer memory If no valid data has been stored in the buffer memory nothing will happen 6 Channel icon Channel number Channel name This area indicates the icon number and name of the currently selected channel 7 LOW SHELVING ON OFF button Turn on this button to select the shelving type filter for the LOW band HPF ON OFF button input channels only Turn on this button to select the high pass filter for the LOW band CU 5 6 VL 3 V Reference Manual 9 EQ FLAT button Press this button to reset the GAIN parameters of all EQ band to 0 dB HIGH SHELVING ON OFF button Turn on this button to select the shelving type filter for the HIGH band 10 LPF ON OFF button Turn on this button to select the low pass filter for the HIGH band 42 EQ ON OFF button Switches the EQ on or off 3 EQ type select button Switches between TYPE I an algorithm used in previous Yamaha digital mixers and TYPE II an algorithm that reduces interference between bands EQ graph
271. ash drive SERIES TOP T CONTENTS NN 1 Parts and their function YAMAHA ITAL MDONG C CL5 CL3 HELP DATA Jan 31st 2013 English Version Top panel Channel Strip section Copyright 2012 2013 YAMAHA CORPORATION All rights reserved SELECTED CHANNEL Section Centralogic section This Reprodut opyright of Yamaha Corporation of this orbidden without the written coi content is the exclusive ontent in whole or in part by a SCENE MEMORY MONITOR secti tion and redistrib on ny means are expressly f sent of Yam aha Corporation USER DEFINED KEYS s ection Master section CONTENTS USB Connecto 1 Parts and their functions section for CL5 only Front Panel 2 Touchscreen Teens 3 Connections and setup gt 4 SELECTED CHANNEL Section 5 Centralogic section 6 Input output patching Basic touch screen operations essing the touch screen turning multifunction knobs 1 2 you can scroll the index area at the left turning multifunction knobs 3 8 you can scroll the main area at the right By pressing a link underlined text in the text you can scroll to the linked destination By pressing a window link a location with an gt symbol and underlined text you can close the HELP popup window and open the corresponding window You can also scroll by using the buttons in the tool bar as need
272. ated as GEQ and effects processors to modify signals You can use two types of GEQ 31BandGEQ which enables you to freely adjust thirty one bands frequency regions and Flex15GEQ which enables you to adjust any RACK IN n MIX INSERT IN 1 24 To MX INSERT IN fifteen of thirty one bands You can also use 54 different effect types The CL series consoles feature MIX OUT 2 STEREO INSERT IN LR MONO C Premium Rack which employs technology This technology models analog circuitry scan ain METER HCKNA RAOKOUTA S EE MATRIX INSERT IN 1 8 component level to faithfully reproduce amazing analog sounds The Premium Rack offers six types of 18 7 Hext5GEQ 5 SLOTS 1 16 poco REA uU ES In order to use a GEQ effect or Premium Rack you must mount the GEQ effect or Premium Rack in INSERT OUT each virtual rack and patch the input and output of that rack to the desired signal route In other words sso the operation is just as though you had installed a signal processor or effect device in an actual rack and used patch cords to connect it You can mount a GEQ instance in each of the sixteen racks 1 16 an effect rack instance in each of the eight racks 1 8 and a Premium Rack instance in each of the eight racks 1 8 Up to two channels of input and output can be used for each rack However if the 31 BandGEQ is mounted in a rack there will be only one channel each for input and output The figure below shows th
273. atrix Send Point Pre EQ Pre Fader Post On Level 1024 steps 138 dB to 10 dB CSR 096 to 10096 ms to 1000 274 Appendices Output Function Function Attenuator 4Band Equalizer Insert Dynamics 1 Fader On Pan Balance Mute Group Mix to Matrix Stereo to Matrix Oscillator Parameter 96 dB to 0 dB Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz 18 dB to 18 dB 0 10 to 10 0 Low Shelving Low Band High Shelving LPF High Band Type 1 II Insert Point Pre Fader Post On Type Comp Expander Compander H Compander S Threshold 54 dB to 0 dB Ratio 1 1 to 1 Compander 1 1 to 20 1 Attacke 0 msec to 120 msec Release 48 kHz 5 msec to 42 3 sec 44 1 kHz 6msec to 46 1 sec 18 dB to 0 dB O dB to 18 dB Knee Hard to 5 soft Key In Self Pre EQ Self Post EQ Mix Out21 24 MIX24 MTRX1 8 STIN LR MONO C 8ch block Width 1 dB to 90 dB Level 1024 steps co 138 dB to 10 dB On Off Position L63 to R63 8 Groups Matrix Send Point Pre Fader Post On Level 1024 steps co 138 dB to 10 dB Level 0 to 96dB 1 dB step On Off Software control Output Port Function Out Port Delay Out Port Phase Gain B Processor Function GEQ Effects Premium Rack Parameter Parameter msec to 1000 msec Normal Reverse 96 to 24 dB Parameter 31 bands x 16 24 or 15 bands x 32 48 systems Stereo In Stereo Out multi effector x 8 systems Stere
274. be able to specify two channels of output for a rack but if the 31BandGEQ is selected only one channel can be used CH SELECT El Select candidate GEQ 1 31BandGEG LI INSERT IN MIX MATRIX 1 Category select list Selects the category of channel shown in the popup window 1 32 33 64 CU 5 VL 3 V Reference Manual CH 65 72 65 72 gt INSERT IN 1 32 CH 1 32 INSERT IN 33 64 CH 33 64 INSERT IN 65 72 65 72 INSERT IN MIX MATRIX MIX 1 24 MATRIX 1 8 INSERT IN ST MONO STEREO L R MONO 1 Not displayed for GEQ 1 16 RACK 2 Not displayed for PREMIUM 3 8 RACK Displayed only for PREMIUM 1 2 RACK NOTE n the case of the CL3 CL1 channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown e f you use CL5 settings data on the CL3 CL 1 or settings data on the CL 1 buttons will be shown crossed out if they are assigned to a channel that does not exist on that model 2 Channel select buttons Use these buttons to select the output destination 3 CLOSE button 7 Closes the popup window To switch Recall Safe on off for each rack press the SAFE button for that rack If Recall Safe is turned on for a rack the contents and parameters of that rack will not change when a scene is re
275. bles you to adjust the gain for any fifteen of the same bands as the thirty one bands of the 31bandGEQ Once you have used up fifteen bands of adjustment you will not be able to adjust the gain of another band until you reset a previously adjusted band to the flat setting A rack for which the Flex15GEQ is selected will have two Flex15GEQ units shown as A and respectively mounted in that rack and will allow two channels of input and output If you mount a Flex15GEQ in each rack you will be able to use up to 48 GEQ units simultaneously Flex15GEQ A Flex15GEQ Inserting a GEQ in a channel This section explains how to insert a GEQ into the selected channel for use 1 Refer to steps 1 6 in the Virtual rack operations on page 115 section to mount a in a rack and set its input source and output destination The rack shown in the GEQ field indicates the approximate GEQ settings and the input and output levels A rack in which a Flex15GEQ is mounted will show information for two GEQ units A and NOTE If you are using a stereo source you can mount a Flex15GEQ or mount two 31BandGEQ units in adjacent odd numbered even numbered racks This will let you link the two GEQ units in a later step CU 5 6 VL 3 V Reference Manual 2 The GEQ popup window will appear allowing you to edit the GEQ parameters NOTE The popup windows for the 31BandGEQ and the Flex15GEQ are nearly identical Howev
276. board window will appear allowing you to enter a directory name 3 Enter the name of the directory you want to create then press the MAKE button NOTE You cannot create a directory using a directory name that already exists User settings Security Formatting a USB flash drive Follow the steps below to format a USB flash drive A USB flash drive with a capacity of 4GB or larger will be formatted in FAT32 and a USB flash drive with a capacity of 2GB or smaller will be formatted in FAT16 1 In the Function Access Area press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen 2 Press the SAVE LOAD button to access the SAVE LOAD popup window _ CH1 ch 1 0 00 00 VOLUME NAME HIDE ADMIN FREE SIZE 498 0MB 99 Send To MIXI READ TIME FILE NAME COMMENT ONLY TYPE 7 USERO1 CLU CREATE Me DAMIE SET USER KEY scene 000 Initial Data 3 Press the FORMAT button A keyboard window will appear allowing you to enter the volume name that will be applied after formatting 4 Enter a volume name and press the FORMAT button A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Format operation 5 execute the Format operation press the OK button T 80 CU 5 C UL 3 1 Reference Manual Recorder This chapter explains the functionality and operation of the recorder About the USB memory recorder The CL series console features a USB memory recorder function that lets you easily record
277. button to switch the monitor output signal to mono MONITOR OUTPUT button Switches the monitor output on or off 9 MONITOR FADER field Enables you to set and view the monitor fader that adjusts the monitor level e MONITOR FADER LEVEL knob Adjusts the monitor fader level Pressing this knob will enable you to use the multifunction knobs in the Centralogic section to adjust the level FADER ASSIGN indicator This area displays the faders that are currently assigned as MONITOR FADER Indicator assignments are as follows qWemsgme S MASTER B MASTER B as well as Custom fader bank CUSTOM One of the Custom fader bank faders CUSTOMs Multiple Custom fader bank faders CU 5 UL 3 V 1 Reference Manual MONITOR DELAY field This field enables you to specify the monitor delay setting by which the monitor out signal is delayed AUTO BYPASS button Turn this on to automatically bypass monitor delay when the cue is on e MONITOR DELAY knob Adjusts the delay time for the monitor signal The delay time is shown above the knob in ms units and below the knob in units of the currently selected scale However if the scale is set to ms the delay time value is not shown above the knob Press this knob and you will be able to use the multifunction knob to adjust the value e MONITOR DELAY ON button If this button is on the monitor signal will be delayed according to the setting of the MONITOR DELAY knob 17
278. by the LOW FREQUENCY knob 5 BAND WIDTH knob Sets the width of the frequency band controlled by the high range filter As you rotate the knob toward the right Broad the band will become wider and the peak level will decrease This affects only the response of the boost 6 HIGH FREQUENCY knob Sets the frequency of the high range filter This affects only the response of the boost 9 HIGH ATTEN SEL knob Switches the frequency region attenuated by the ATTEN knob Dynamic EQ Dynamic EQ is a newly developed equalizer that does not emulate any specific model of equalizer The sidechain has a filter that extracts the same frequency band as the EQ This allows you to apply EQ in the same way as you might apply a compressor or expander to a specific frequency region causing the EQ gain to vary dynamically only when a specific frequency region ofthe input signal becomes too high or too low For example you could use this on a vocal sound as a de esser so that EQ is applied to a specific frequency band only when sibilance or high frequency consonants reach an unpleasant level thus preserving a natural sound that does not impair the original tonal character Two full band Dynamic EGs are provided enabling you to process a wide range of audio sources PREMIUM 5 INPUT NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN 3 YAMAHA OUTPUT Dynamic EQ NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN Dynamic EQ St L DYNAMIC EQ FILTER TYPE FREQUENCY IN THRESH
279. called For more information on Recall Safe Using the Recall Safe function on page 88 Be aware that the Recall Safe settings of each rack will not preserve the input output patching to that rack Recall Safe settings for patching must be made on the input source or output destination channel NOTE The type of GEQ effect or premium rack mounted in each rack its parameter settings and the input source and output destination patch settings are saved as part of the scene Graphic EQ effects and Premium Rack Graphic EQ operations About the graphic EQ The CL series console enables you to mount a GEQ in GEQ racks 1 16 and patch it to the insert out and insert in of a MIX MATRIX channel or STEREO MONO channel You can also mount it in EFFECT racks 1 8 FX 1 8 and patch it to the insert out in of an input channel MIX MATRIX channel or STEREO MONO channel The gain of each band can be adjusted using the faders and ON keys in the Centralogic section The following two types of GEQ are provided 31BandGEQ This is a monaural 31 band GEQ Each band is 1 3 octave INPUT OUTPUT wide the adjustable gain range is 15 dB and the gain of all thirty one bands can be adjusted Ifa31BandGEQ is mounted in a rack one channel of input and output can be used for that rack B Flex15GEQ This is a monaural 15 band GEQ Each band is 1 3 octave INPUT Back OUTPUT wide and the adjustable gain range is 15 dB The Flex15GEQ ena
280. cally this is the default setting Dante Latency 10s gl Before you start DVS select the desired audio UNE gt format e g 48kHz 24 bit and Dante latency MAC 00 19 09 0d 7 0 Select a higher latency value to maintain network ASIO Application Disconnected aso Advanced stability during the use of many channels For Advanced settings select the number of channels to be used for recording and playback the default is 8 x 8 Please refer to the Dante Virtual Soundcard User s Guide for more information on the ASIO setting Windows Input and output patching Setting up Dante Controller Connect the network port on the computer to a GbE compatible network switch Configure the computer to obtain an IP address automatically this is the default setting The following settings can be made via Dante Controller e For multi track recording Patch audio signals from the I O device to DVS for multi track recording e For virtual sound check Patch audio signals in such a way that they will be output from the computer to the Dante audio network then routed to the channels on the CL console Please refer to the Dante Controller manual for more information about operations and settings of the Dante Controller Setting up DAW software You must make driver settings in your DAW software In the device setting window select Dante Virtual Soundcard ASIO for Windows PC or Dante for Mac Some DAW software may requ
281. can use the STORE UNDO button to undo cancel the scene store operation that was executed most recently When you press the STORE UNDO button a dialog box will ask you to confirm the Undo operation Press the OK button if you want to execute the Undo operation After executing the Undo operation you can press the STORE UNDO button once again to Redo re execute the Store operation NOTE e The STORE UNDO button is available only immediately after overwrite storing You can also assign the function of the STORE UNDO button to a USER DEFINED key see page 169 9 To recall a scene rotate one of the multifunction knobs to select the store source scene number 10 Press the RECALL button A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Recall operation 11 To execute the Recall operation press the OK button The scene you selected in step 9 will be recalled If you want to cancel the Recall operation press the CANCEL button instead of the OK button Scene memory 12 if you want to cancel the Recall operation that you just performed press the RECALL UNDO button A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Undo operation Press the OK button if you want to execute the operation After undoing the recall you can press the RECALL UNDO button once again to Redo re execute NOTE e You can also assign the function of the RECALL UNDO button to a USER DEFINED key see page 169 You can also use MIDI messages Program Changes to recall s
282. ccess the OVERVIEW screen for the channel into which you want to insert the processor Press the INSERT DIRECT OUT field to access the INSERT DIRECT OUT popup window Make sure that the rack you inserted in the input and output ports is selected For details on Insert Out In refer to Inserting an external device into a channel on page 21 Turn on the INSERT ON OFF button for the channel into which you inserted the processor If it is off press the button to turn it on In this state processor insertion is enabled for the corresponding channel In the Function Access Area press the RACK button to access the VIRTUAL RACK window and use the PREMIUM tab to display the PREMIUM RACK field Press the processor rack that you inserted into the channel to open the Premium Rack popup window In this popup window you can edit the processor parameters CU 5 6 VL 3 V Reference Manual 12 Adjust the parameters For details on editing the parameters refer to the next section Editing the Premium Rack parameters NOTE Adjust the digital gain and the processor parameters so that the signal does not reach the overload point at the input or output stage of the processor 13 Using the fader of the channel you selected as the rack s output destination in step 6 adjust the level as appropriate Editing the Premium Rack parameters Each Premium Rack window includes the following items PREMIUM 1 m INPUT OUTP
283. cenes see page 152 Using USER DEFINED keys to recall You can use the USER DEFINED keys to recall a selected scene with a single keystroke or to step through the scenes To do this you must first assign a scene recall operation to a USER DEFINED key The following recall operations can be assigned to a USER DEFINED key INC RECALL Immediately recalls the scene for the number that follows the currently loaded scene e DEC RECALL Immediately recalls the scene for the number that precedes the currently loaded scene NOTE If no scene is stored in the number that precedes or follows the currently loaded scene the closest scene number in which a scene is stored will be recalled DIRECT RECALL Directly recalls the scene number that you assigned to the USER DEFINED key When you press a USER DEFINED key to which this function is assigned the assigned scene will be recalled immediately To assign one of these functions to a USER DEFINED key so that a scene can be recalled in a single keystroke proceed as follows 1 In the Function Access Area press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen 2 Inthe upper left of the screen press the USER SETUP button to access the USER SETUP popup window This window includes several pages which you can switch between using the tabs located at the bottom of the window CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual 3 Press the USER DEFINED KEYS tab to select the USER DEFINED KEYS page
284. ception When this message is received MIDI communication will be initialized e g Running Status will be cleared This message is not subject to echoing STATUS 11111111 FF System reset 3 SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE 3 1 MMC lt MMC STOP gt Reception If the DEVICE NO matches or is 7F receives this message and stops STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01111111 7F Realtime System exclusive Device ID dd Destination 00 7E 7F all call COMMAND 00000110 06 Machine Control Command MCC sub id 00000001 01 Stop MCS EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive lt MMC PLAY gt Reception If the DEVICE NO matches or is 7F receives this message and starts playback STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01111111 7F Realtime System exclusive Device ID Oddddddd dd Destination 00 7E 7F all call COMMAND 00000110 06 Machine Control Command MCC sub id 00000010 02 Play MCS EOX 11110111 F7 End ofexclusive lt MMC DEFERED PLAY gt Reception If the DEVICE NO matches or is 7F receives this message and starts playback STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01111111 7F Realtime System exclusive Device ID Oddddddd dd Destination 00 7E 7F all call COMMAND 00000110 06 Machine Control Command MCC sub id 00000011 03 Deferred Play MCS EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive MMC RECORD STROBE Reception If the DEVICE NO matches or is 7F receives this mess
285. cess the MIDI SETUP page then select the port and MIDI channel on which Control Changes will be transmitted and received as described in Basic MIDI settings on page 149 Press the CONTROL CHANGE tab to access the CONTROL CHANGE page On the CONTROL CHANGE page you can specify how Control Changes will be transmitted and received and specify the event fader knob operation ON key on off operation etc assigned to each control number This page includes the following items 155 MIDI MIDI GPI CONTROL CHANGE NO CONTROL CHANGE EVENT IHPUT IHPUT INPUT INPUT CLEAR INPUT ALL INITIALIZE INPUT ALL CONTROL CHANGE field Enables you to switch Control Change transmission reception on or off and specify whether Control Changes will be echoed out This setting is linked with the CONTROL CHANGE field on the MIDI SETUP page 2 CONTROL CHANGE MODE field Enables you to select the Control Change transmission reception mode This setting is linked with the CONTROL CHANGE MODE field on the MIDI SETUP page 3 List Shows the event fader knob pattern ON key on off operation etc assigned to each control number Indicates the Control number You can use Control numbers 1 31 33 95 and 102 119 e CONTROL CHANGE EVENT Indicates and enables you to select the type of event assigned to each control number When you press an event the MIDI CONTROL CHANGE pop
286. channels 6 The processor is used on one stereo channel The DUAL button and STEREO button indicate how many rack space units are occupied by the Premium Rack processor The U76 occupies two rack spaces Other processors occupy one rack space If you mount a two space Premium Rack processor in the rack you will be unable to mount any more processors below those rack spaces Also you cannot mount a two space processor in an even numbered rack Graphic EQ effects and Premium Rack GEQ 9 16 EFFECT IM OUT U 6 1 St 21H 20UTJ Press the L side or the A side of the INPUT PATCH button to open the CH SELECT popup window and select the insert out of a channel as the input source For details on the CH SELECT popup window refer to step 5 of Virtual rack operations on page 115 Insert out is now assigned to the L input of the processor Press the L side or the A side of the OUTPUT PATCH button to open the CH SELECT popup window and select the insert in of the same channel as the output destination For details on the CH SELECT popup window refer to step 6 of Virtual rack operations on page 115 Insert in is now assigned to the L output of the processor If you are inserting a processor into a channel that handles a stereo source assign the R channel insert out and insert in to the R input and output of the processor Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to a
287. channels and an OUTPUT EQ LIBRARY that lets you store and recall EQ settings for output channels To recall settings from a library press the LIBRARY tool button in the HPF EQ popup window NOTE You can recall 199 different settings from both the input EQ library and output EQ library Forty 40 of the input library items are read only presets and three 3 of the output library items are read only presets For details on how to access the HPF EQ popup window refer to Using EQ on page 56 LIBRARY DEFA Dynamics library Use the Dynamics Library to store or recall dynamics settings All of the dynamics processors on CL series units use this dynamics library However the available types will differ between an input channels Dynamics 1 and Dynamics 2 and an output channel s Dynamics 1 You cannot recall a type that cannot be selected To recall an item from the dynamics library press the LIBRARY tool button in the DYNAMICS 1 2 popup window NOTE You can recall 199 different settings from the library Forty one 41 of these are read only presets For details on how to access the DYNAMICS 1 2 popup window refer to Using dynamics on page 59 For details on using the EQ and dynamics libraries refer to the Using the library section in the separate Owners Manual 63 EQ and Dynamics CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual Grouping and linking This chapter explains the DCA Group and Mute Group
288. counter clockwise for cut Fully rotating the knob in either direction will create the maximum effect 9 ATTACK RELEASE buttons Enable you to select one of the three settings as the attack release time for compression or boost Select FAST for a faster attack and faster release Select SLOW for a faster attack and slower release Select AUTO to automatically adjust the attack release time depending on the frequency ranges MODE buttons Specify whether the processor is triggered when the sidechain signal level exceeds the threshold value ABOVE or when the level does not reach the threshold value BELOW 1 EQ GAIN meter Indicates the dynamically changing EQ gain 136 Graphic EQ effects and Premium Rack 12 THRESHOLD meter Indicates the sidechain signal level in relation to the threshold level 3 Graph area Displays the equalizer response In most cases this area displays the reference EQ graph that indicates the frequency and intensity and the dynamic EQ graph that indicates the dynamically changing EQ responses Dynamic EQ graph Reference EQ graph If SIDECHAIN CUE or SIDECHAIN LISTEN is on this area displays the sidechain filter response Sidechain filter graph CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual Using the graphic EQ effect and Premium Rack libraries GEQ library Use the GEQ library to store and recall GEQ settings All GEQ units used in the CL series console can referenc
289. ct the number of inputs and outputs and the levels before and after the effect 124 10 Graphic EQ effects and Premium Rack Press the L side of the INPUT PATCH button to open the CH SELECT popup window and select the insert out of a channel as the input source For details on the CH SELECT popup window refer to step 5 of Virtual rack operations on page 115 Insert out is now assigned to the L input of the effect Press the L side of the OUTPUT PATCH button to open the CH SELECT popup window and select the insert in of the same channel as the output destination For details on the CH SELECT popup window refer to step 6 of Virtual rack operations on page 115 Insert in is now assigned to the L output of the effect If you are inserting an effect into a channel that handles a stereo source assign the R channel insert out insert in to the R input and output Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to access the OVERVIEW screen for the channel into which you inserted the effect Press the INSERT DIRECT OUT field to access the INSERT DIRECT OUT popup window Make sure that the rack you inserted into the input and output ports is selected For more information on insert out in see Inserting an external device into a channel on page 21 Turn on the INSERT ON OFF button for the channel into which you inserted the effect If it is off press the button to turn it on In this state effect insertion is enabl
290. cted in this field access the MONITOR popup window to specify the source channel 3 DIMMER field Enables you to make settings for the Dimmer function which temporarily attenuates monitor signals e DIMMER LEVEL knob Adjusts the amount by which the monitor signals will be attenuated when the dimmer is on DIMMER ON button Turn on this button to enable the dimmer and attenuate the monitor signal 4 MONITOR FADER field Enables you to set and view the monitor fader that adjusts the monitor level e MONITOR FADER LEVEL knob Adjusts the monitor fader level Pressing this knob will enable you to use the multifunction knob in the Centralogic section to adjust the level e FADER ASSIGN display This area displays the type of faders that are currently assigned to the monitor fader Indicator assignments are as follows M No assignment o MASTER Master A only o MASTER A Master A Master B Custom Fader bank o MASTER Master B only o MASTER Master B Custom fader bank e CUSTOM A single fader in the Custom fader bank CUSTOMS Multiple faders in the Custom fader bank 5 Meter field Indicates the output level of Monitor Out channels L R and C Press this field to open the MONITOR popup window 6 MONITOR OUTPUT button Switches Monitor Out on or off T PHONES LEVEL LINK button If this is on the MONITOR
291. ctive only while pressed Opens and closes the HELP pop up window Operating the controllers on the panel HELP excluding faders or controllers on the screen while holding down this key will display the related information SELECTED CH VIEW Displays the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen OVERVIEW Displays the OVERVIEW screen ee Each press of the key will alternately display the TOGGLE SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen and the OVERVIEW screen METER PEAK HOLD ON s Turns the meter s peak hold function on off Lit when on PROGRAM CHANGE PGM 0 128 CC 1 31 33 95 CONTROL CHANGE 102 119 INOIEONC20 ON C2 INOIEONC20 Transmit the corresponding MIDI message NOTE ON NOTE ON G 8 127 Appendices OUTPUT Gg Switch MONITOR on off While holding down this key press the SEL key of a MIX or MATRIX channel to switch the assignment on off During this time the SEL LED will be lit if assign is ON or dark if OFF The assignment setting made while holding down this key will be stored Pressing the key again will recall the stored setting Settings can be stored in multiple keys to facilitate rapid assignment switching STEREO L R MONO C SELECTED CH ASSIGN MONITOR PB OUT Recall the selected signal to the monitor MASTER MUTEGROUP8 GROUP 8 ALL MUTE Turns all MUTE GROUP MASTER settings on off together TO PROJECT START TO TO PROJECT START START
292. cts and Premium Rack 3 To mount a GEQ or effect in the rack press the rack mount button for that rack The RACK MOUNTER popup window will appear MODULE SELECT CANCEL 1 Rack number This indicates the number of the selected rack 2 Virtual rack This area indicates the GEQ or effect selected via the MODULE SELECT buttons 3 MODULE SELECT Use these buttons to select the GEQ or effect that will be mounted in the rack Each button has the following function BLANK button Removes the GEQ or effect currently mounted in the rack the rack will be empty 31 BandGEQ button Mounts a 31BandGEQ in the rack 15 button Mounts a Flex15GEQ in the rack EFFECT button Mounts an effect in the rack NOTE Input output patching will be defeated if you change the item mounted in a rack 4 CANCEL button Cancels the changes you made in the RACK MOUNTER popup window and closes the window 5 OK button Applies the changes you made in the RACK MOUNTER popup window and closes the window NOTE Be aware that if you remove a GEQ or effect that was mounted in a rack and close the window all edits to the parameter settings for that GEQ or effect will be discarded If you have not yet closed the window you can recover the parameter settings by mounting the same GEQ or effect once again e You can also display the RAC
293. d Enables you to set the oscillator parameters The controllers and their functions in this field vary depending on the selected mode You can adjust the values by using the multifunction knobs Talkback and Oscillator Mode SINE WAVE LEYEL FREQ uL 1 00k LEVEL knob Indicates the output level of the sine wave FREQ knob Indicates the frequency of the sine wave Mode PINK NOISE e LEVEL knob Indicates the output level of the pink noise HPF knob Indicates the cutoff frequency of the HPF that processes pink noise Use the button below the knob to switch the HPF on or off e LPF knob Indicates the cutoff frequency of the LPF that processes pink noise Use the button below the knob to switch the LPF on or off Mode BURST NOISE LEVEL LIU INTERVAL e LEVEL knob HPF knob and LPF knob Same as in PINK NOISE mode 6 Indicates the length of noise being output intermittently INTERVAL Indicates the length of silence between noise bursts Level l l INTERVAL Pink noise output gt a Time Turn BURST NOISE button is on CU 5 6 VL 3 V Reference Manual 3 ASSIGN section Enables you to select a channel to which the oscillator signal will be sent Press one of the three tabs located at the bottom of the screen then press the b
294. d This is convenient if you want to make detailed dynamics settings for a specific channel 4 A El DYNAMICS 1 LIBRARY DEFAULT COPY 18 GR ou o 79 ui TA 6 d 20 z as mi HB 30 m Leif n 60 60 44 4 y 60 40 20 18 PARAMETER CH 1 ch 1 GATE 6 POST EQ A P 0 70 0 0 Q FREQUENCY Fd 26 33M THRESHOLD RANGE ATTACK HOLD SOURCE 1 LIBRARY button Press this button to open the DYNAMICS Library popup window 2 DEFAULT button Press this button to reset all dynamics parameters to the initial values 3 COPY button All dynamics parameter settings will be stored in buffer memory 4 PASTE button Press this button to apply the settings in buffer memory to the current dynamics If no valid data has been stored in the buffer memory nothing will happen 5 COMPARE button Press this button to swap between the current dynamics settings and the data stored in buffer memory If no valid data has been stored in the buffer memory nothing will happen 6 Channel icon Channel number Channel name This area indicates the icon number and name of the currently selected channel CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual 7 Dynamics type buttons Enable you to select the dynamics type You can choose from the following dynamics types Dynamics 1 for an input channel GATE DUCKING COMPRESSOR EXPANDER GATE Dynamics 2 for
295. d once again the TO STEREO MONO 8ch popup window will appear This field varies depending on the type of the selected channel When an input channel or MIX channel is selected 1 TO STEREO PAN knob Sets the pan position of a signal routed to the STEREO bus Press the knob to open the STEREO MONO 8ch popup window If the ST IN channel is selected you can specify whether to view the PAN knob or the BALANCE knob in this window For a MIX channel the PAN knob will appear if the signal is mono and the BALANCE knob will appear if the signal is stereo 2 ST MONO indicator Indicates the status of a signal sent to the STEREO MONO bus If an input or MIX channel is set to LCR mode the LCR indicator will be displayed in location 2 When a MATRIX channel monaural or MONO channel is selected The XCLIP indicator appears indicating that the signal is clipping at some point in the channel For a stereo MATRIX channel or STEREO channel the BALANCE knob appears indicating the balance of the left right channels 14 Centralogic section group field group 1 16 to which the channel is assigned is displayed on the first or second row in this field Press this field to open the DCA MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE popup window Mute group field A mute group 1 8 to which the channel is assigned is displayed on the third row in this field If the channel has been temporarily removed from the mu
296. data is being transmitted from the CL Editor output port CUE was defeated because you switched from the EFFECT popup window or the premium rack popup window to a different screen External HA data could not be recalled because the state of connections to the external HA has changed since the scene was stored The PW800 EXT power supply connected to the CL series console has stopped operating The following operation has not been performed yet because the USB flash drive is being accessed 271 Message File Already Exists File Error xx File Protected Flash Memory Initializing Finished Help File Not Found Illegal Address Illegal MAC Address Cannot Use Network Illegal Storage Format Internal Power Supply is Cut Off Internal Power Supply is Turned On KEY IN CUE Turned Off Loading Aborted Loading Finished Low Battery Maximum Number of Audio Files Exceeded Memory Error All Memories were Initialized MIDI Data Framing Error MIDI Data Overrun MIDI Rx Buffer Full MIDI Tx Buffer Full No Access From Recorder No channel selected No Copy Item Selected No Corresponding Help Items No ID3 Tag exists You can not edit No Response from External HA No Response from I O DEVICE Appendices Meaning The USB flash drive already contains a file directory with the same name as the one you are attempting to save rename or create Internal file access error Overwriti
297. ddress UL Ox7F is received all metering data transmission will be immediately stopped disabled Transmission When PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO is on the message will be sent as it is STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS O011nnnn 3n 0 15 Device numberzMIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 3E Digital mixer MODEL ID 00010010 19 CLSeries DATA CATEGORY 00100001 21 REMOTE LEVEL METER DATA Ommmmmmm mm ADDRESS UL Ommmmmmm mm ADDRESS LU Ommmmmmm mm ADDRESS LL ch CountH cl CountL EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 270 Appendices CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual Warning Error Messages Message xxx Parameters Copied xxx Parameters Initialized xxx Parameters Pasted xxx Parameters Swapped with Copy Buffer ALTERNATE FUNCTION Turned off Assignment is Restricted to Max 8 Sources Cannot Assign Cannot Bookmark This Popup Cannot Mount This Type of Device in This Position Cannot Paste Cannot Recall Cannot Select This Channel Cannot Store Cannot Undo Channel Copied Channel Moved Channel Returned to Default Settings Couldn t Access File Couldn t Write File Current User Changed xxx Directory Not Empty EDITOR Data Framing Error EDITOR Data Overrun EDITOR Rx Buffer Full EDITOR Tx Buffer Full EFFECT CUE Turned Off External HA Connection Conflict Exter
298. del name indication This shows the ID number model name and version of the I O device 3 DANTE SETUP button Press this button to open the DANTE SETUP popup window in which you can make settings for the audio network 143 CU 5 66 3 C 1 Reference Manual Using an external head If an I O card such as an MY16 ES64 card supports the remote protocol of an external head amp in the CLs slot you will be able to remotely control from the CL console some parameters of the external head amp Yamaha SB168 ES or AD8HR such as phantom power 48V on off status gain and HPF For details on the I O card settings refer to the owners manual for the I O card Connecting the CL series console to an AD8HR To remotely control the AD8HR from the CL series console install an MY16 ES64 EtherSound card in Slot 1 on the CL unit then use an Ethernet cable to connect the CL unit to the NAI48 ES Then connect the HA REMOTE connector on the NAI48 ES to the HA REMOTE 1 connector on the AD8HR using an RS422 D sub 9 pin cable This connection enables you to remotely control the AD8HR from the CL series console To transmit audio signals input to the AD8HR to the CL series console connect the DIGITAL OUT or B connector on the AD8HR to the AES EBU connector on the NAIA8 ES using a D sub 25 pin AES EBU cable Signals will be sent or received between the NAI48 ES and the CL series console via the MY16 ES64 card Alternatively you can
299. der bank selection You can set this parameter separately for INPUT input channels OUTPUT output channels and CUSTOM Custom fader bank If the LINK button is on and you select the corresponding fader bank the channel in that bank that was selected most recently will be selected and its SEL key will light IDENTIFY I O DEVICE PORT BY SEL Specifies whether to enable a function that allows you to identify the I O device port connected to a channel by pressing the SEL key for that channel If this ON button is lit pressing a SEL key on the panel will cause the signal indicator to flash for the port of the I O device that is assigned to the corresponding channel by the INPUT PATCH OUTPUT PATCH settings CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual POPUP APPEARS WHEN KNOB S PRESSED Specifies whether pressing a knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section while the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen is displayed will cause a popup window 1ch to appear If the ON button is lit a popup window 1ch will open or close whenever you press a knob NOTE If you press the SEND or PAN knob a popup window 8ch will open GAIN KNOB FUNCTION Specifies what will happen when you operate the GAIN knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section on the panel When the ANALOG GAIN button is lit you can adjust analog gain on the head amp When the DIGITAL GAIN button is lit you can adjust digital gain on the console SCENE UP DOWN Specifies what the SCENE MEM
300. des the following items PATCH 1 HAH 001 VERSION 01 50 i DANTE 5 0 0 DANTE Rio3224 D E DANTE i 5 ES 03224 0 w RECALL DANTE EXTERNAL HA 2 Rio3224 D VIRTUAL AES EBU 1 2 AES EBU 3 4 RES EBUS 6 AES EBUT S 1 Display switch buttons Press one of these buttons to view the corresponding I O device If you press and hold down the button all LEDs of the corresponding I O device will blink 2 ID model name indication This shows the ID number model name and version of the I O device 140 CU 2 66 3 C 1 Reference Manual 3 DANTE SETUP button Press this button to open the DANTE SETUP popup window in which you can make settings for the audio network HA display This shows the HA settings of the I O device Press this area to open the I O DEVICE HA popup window in which you can make detailed head amp settings 483 480 484 480 480 4580 4 Analog gain knob Indicates the analog gain setting This item is only for display and cannot be edited 5 48V indicator Indicates the phantom power 48V on off status for each port 6 OVER indicator Warns you when the input signal is clipping 7 HPF indicator Indicates the high pass filter on or off status for each port INPUT display This shows the input settings of the I O device If you press the SEL key of an input channel the corresponding port will light OUTPUT display This sh
301. e LEGO Meso Mee XO p cii 263 1 2 4 Es 6 Appendices Preference setting and the state of the ALTERNATE function will determine whether this will be analog gain or digital gain The send destination that is the target of Sends On Fader will be selected Preference setting and the state of the ALTERNATE function will determine whether turning the encoder will switch the PRE POST setting of the corresponding send or will switch the corresponding send on off when pressed Preference setting and the state of the ALT function will determine whether pressing the encoder will switch the high pass filter on off Preference setting and the state of the ALT function will determine whether pressing the encoder will switch DYNAMICS 1 on off Preference setting and the state of the ALT function will determine whether pressing the encoder will switch DYNAMICS 2 on off CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual MIDI Data Format This section explains the format of the data that the CL series is able to understand send and receive 1 CHANNEL MESSAGE 1 1 NOTE OFF 8n Reception These messages are echoed to MIDI OUT if OTHER COMMAND ECHO is ON They are received if Rx CH matches and used to control effects STATUS 1000nnnn 8 Note off message DATA Onnnnnnn nn Note number Ovvvvvvw Velocity ignored 1 2 NOTE ON 9n Reception
302. e Gain Compensation function is turned on an indicator will appear showing the position of the analog gain when the function is turned on 2 OVER indicator Lights when a signal at the input port or from the rack output exceeds the full scale level This indicator is available only if an input channel is selected 3 48V indicator Indicates the 48V on off status for each channel 4 Phase indicator Indicates the phase setting for each channel NOTE If the input channel is patched to a slot for which the connection to the head amp is not recognized the knob 1 will be replaced with the slot port number of the patch destination In addition the indicator 3 will not be displayed If the input channel is patched to the VIRTUAL RACK the knob 1 will be replaced with the port ID of the rack If nothing is patched to the input channel the knob 1 will be replaced with a dotted line If you press the DIGITAL GAIN parameter select button 1 GAIN knob Indicates the digital gain setting for each channel Press this knob to control the gain value using the multifunction knob 2 OVER indicator Lights when a signal at the input port or from the rack output exceeds the full scale level This indicator is available only if an input channel is selected 3 Phase indicator Indicates the phase setting for each channel 33 Input channels If you press the PATCH parameter select button
303. e IP address used by CL Extension you refer to the following Webel IO ED SCRIBIT SUOMI Ore DANTE ACCEL must specify the IP address manually Accelerator firmware supports redundant networking http www yamahaproaudio com NUENDO LIVE SETUP Assign DEVICE by an IP ADDRESS 2 When you have finished making settings press the OK button to close the NUENDO LIVE SET UP popup window IP ADDRESS CANCEL This screen contains the following items 7 IP ADDRESS knobs Use the multifunction knobs to specify the IP address NOTE As the IP address specify the IP address of the PC that is running Nuendo Live e Set the address of that PC in the range of 169 254 0 0 169 254 255 255 and set the subnet mask as 255 255 0 0 For the PC in which DANTE ACCEL is installed the Dante port of DANTE ACCEL as well as the Ethernet port of the PC must both be connected to the same network Refer to the illustration below cL Dante 1 91 CU 5 C Vl 3 6 1 1 Reference Manual Playing a multi track project 1 2 In the Nuendo Live screen press the DANTE INPUT PATCH button Assign the signals from Nuendo Live to the desired DANTE1 DANTE64 ports For example press the PORT SELECT button for DANTE1 The PORT SELECT popup window will appear DANTE INPUT PATCH From Network To Console P x DANTE1 YOO1 001 DANTE9 YOO1 009 DANTE17 YOO1 017 DANTE25 yoo1 025 DA
304. e audio quality but will increase the size of the data NOTE The word clock rate at which the CL series console is currently operating will automatically be selected as the sampling rate for the audio file Press the REC 0 button The REC button and the PAUSE indicator of the PLAY PAUSE gt button will light The current song indicator area will show RECORDING To start recording press the PLAY PAUSE gt II button During recording the REC 8 button and the PLAY gt indicator of the PLAY PAUSE gt button will light You can also see the elapsed recording time To stop recording press the STOP button The audio file will be saved to the USB flash drive NOTE e In the default state the recorded audio file will be saved in the SONGS folder within the folder You may also specify a folder of a level below the SONGS folder The recorded file will be given a default title and file name You can change this later To audition the recorded content proceed as follows 10 1 Select a recorded audio file and press the PLAY PAUSE gt button The recorded content will be played back via the input channel you specified in step 4 You can also turn on the CUE button in the PLAYBACK OUT field to audition it 10 2 To stop playback press the STOP button Recorder Playing back audio files from a USB flash drive You can play back audio files that have been saved
305. e by the INPUT PATCH Global parameter settings In the same way turning on the Global parameters INPUT NAME OUTPUT PATCH OUTPUT NAME and HA will cause the corresponding safe parameters of each channel to light green CU 5 VL 3 V Reference Manual On screen buttons and corresponding parameters apply to the following channels STEREO MONO Input MIX channel channel channel WITH MIXSEND YO WITH MATRIX SEND Sendievelio MATRIXbus _ 9 WMpmmes 9 9 HA HAelatedsotings 0 _ _ We Hsu _ o 9 9 9 DWAT Dynamics tsetings 0 o 9 9 MATRIX Button name channel Corresponding parameter DWA2 MXstND SediwsoMXbs 0 _ MATRIX SEND FADER CH ON Send level to MATRIXbus O Fadersetings ON key settings 0 TO ST On off setting for STEREO bus assignment PAN etc On off setting for MONO bus assignment Input Patching L9 Digital gain settings oO INPUT PATCH DIGITAL GAIN INSERT INSERT PATCH DIRECT OUT MIX ON MATRIX ON DELAY NAME OUTPUT PATCH Insert patch settings Direct Out settings MIX Send On Off o o EN oO Oo o MEN o 0 O0 9 etes stereo only ST IN channels do not feature these buttons BAL T SAFE PARAMETER SELECT field DCA Enables you to se
306. e channel name 6 Category select list Selects the type of the port you want to display on the screen 7 Port select buttons Enable you to select a port in the current category To cancel the selection press the same button once again 3 Use the output port select tabs and the output port select buttons to specify the output port that will be assigned to that channel If the output port select buttons are not shown at the bottom of the window press the PATCH tab 4 Use the Bank Select keys and the SEL keys to switch the output channels being controlled and specify their output ports in the same way 5 When you have finished making settings press the x symbol located in the upper right to close the window You will return to the OVERVIEW screen 17 Input and output patching Selecting the output channel for each output port 1 In the Function Access Area press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen OUTPUT PORT button CURRENT USER STORAGE TP CREATE SAVE LOAD Administrator USER KEY PASSWORD CHANGE How all operations are permitted SYSTEM SETUP 48V MASTER BUS SETUP ON MIXER SETUP WORDCLOCK CASCADE MIDI GPI SLOT PORT BATTERY MAIN NETWORK POWER SUPPLY SUB DANTE BRIGHTNESS LOCK NAME COLOR SCREEN PANEL LAMP dii Q S M O S S S scene 000 Initial Data 2 Inthe SYSTEM SETUP field located
307. e signal flow for the virtual racks NOTE The CL console provides a rack for mounting an I O device such as an Rio series external head amps Yamaha AD8HR SB168 ES etc as well as the virtual rack for GEQ effects and Premium Rack For details see I O device and external head amp on page 138 114 CU 5 66 3 C 1 Reference Manual Virtual rack operations This section explains how to mount a GEQ or effect in the virtual rack and patch the input and output of the rack as an example 1 In the Function Access Area press the RACK button to access the VIRTUAL RACK window GEQ 1 8 GEQ 9 16 PREMIUM CH 1 REV X Hall JE RtIL 0 00 00 REU X HALL 5 2114 2007 8 ADMIN REIR Send To REV X Room ROOM un 214120071 REV X Plate REU X PLATE 2149 2007 Reverb Hall REVERB HALL IN OUT ST 25 IN OUT IN ouT Rt2L ST IN 2R Rt2R ST IN 3b Rt3L ST IN Rt3R ST 46 gt REAL 2 Inthe upper part of the VIRTUAL RACK window press the GEQ 1 8 GEQ 9 16 or EFFECT tab to access the GEQ or EFFECT field VIRTUAL RACK GEQ 9 16 EFFECT PREMIUM VIRTUAL RACK GEQ 1 8 GEQ 9 16 PREMIUM I REU X Hall gt Bd L ert War ST IN uod REU X Room gt Rt2L m PRIN 200T ST IN gt Plate P REL gt EUNT ST IN Reverb Hall gt REIL t ih gt REAR 4 F
308. e this library Although are two types 31 BandGEQ and Flex15GEQ you are free to recall items between differing types However only 31BandGEQ settings that use less than fifteen bands can be recalled to a Flex15GEQ 200 items can be recalled from the library Number 000 is read only data for initialization and the remaining library numbers can be freely read or written To recall an item from the GEQ library press the LIBRARY button located at the top of the GEQ popup window GEQ 1 INPUT OUTPUT GEQ 1A INS MIX 1 1 Flex15GEQ NOTE e Store and recall operations are performed on individual GEQ units For one rack you can store and recall two Flex15GEQ units independently as A and B To access the GEQ popup window press the rack in the GEQ field B Effect library Use the Effect library to store and recall effect settings 199 items can be recalled from the effect library Numbers 001 027 are read only presets and the remaining library numbers can be freely read or written To recall an item from the effect library press the LIBRARY button located at the top of the EFFECT popup window EFFECT 1 EFFECT 1 NOTE If you recall an effect whose effect type is COMP276 COMP276S COMP260 2605 EQUALIZER610 OPENDECK M BAND DYNA or M BAND COMP the other effects may be momentarily muted in some cases 137 Graphic EQ effects and Premium Rack B Premium Rack library
309. e unable to specify them for playback When an audio file is played the path in the TITLE LIST screen will indicate YPE SONGS e You cannot play audio files during recording or in recording standby mode A specified audio file will be played back only once regardless of the playback mode settings Audio file names must be eight characters plus three extension characters If you change the file name after specifying the file for playback or if you delete or copy the file repeatedly the specified file may become unrecognizable in rare cases 1 Connect a USB flash drive containing the audio files to the USB connector 2 Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area The SCENE LIST window will appear in which you can perform various operations related to scene memory 3 Press the PLAYBACK LINK tab at the bottom of the SCENE LIST window Scene memory The PLAYBACK LINK field is shown in the right half of the SCENE LIST window SCENE LIST ac COPY PASTE CLEAR NO TITLE x LINK SONG TITLE OFFSET SCENE 01 Test lt Test f SCENE 03 TestAtf SCENE 04 TestAtf CURRENT SETTING RECALL f UNDO 1 PLAY button Sets the Playback Link functions on off status for each scene 2 Song select popup button Press this button to open the SONG SELECT popup window in which you can select a song and set the offset time time duration from scene recall until the start of playbac
310. ears immediately below the button 7 DYNAMICS OUTPUT meters GR meter These meters indicate the output levels of signals after dynamics processing and the amount of gain reduction If GATE is selected as the dynamics type a three step indicator appears indicating the open close status of the gate Type Any type other than GATE GATE 61 and Dynamics If GATE is selected as the dynamics type the indicator status means the following EN Yellow Green Off dark On Off status On Gate status Open Close status Close 30 dB or more less than dB Amount of gain reduction Dynamics graph This graph displays the dynamics parameter values The currently selected dynamics type appears below the graph Press the graph to access the DYNAMICS Ich popup window for that channel 9 THRESHOLD knob Indicates the threshold value for the dynamics You can use the corresponding multifunction knobs to adjust the value DYNAMICS ON OFF button Switches dynamics on or off CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual DYNAMICS 1 2 popup window CH1 48 CH49 72 ST IN CL5 CH49 64 ST IN CL3 ST IN CL1 OUTPUT This window enables you to make settings of the global dynamics parameters for the corresponding channel DYNAMICS 1 CH1 P CH2 A ch 2 P 4 LIBRARY DEFAULT cory cha 5 2 cho chia FAIS 1 LIBRARY button 2 D
311. ected port appears on the button 2 INSERT IN button Press this button to open the PORT SELECT popup window in which you can select an input port The name of the currently selected port appears on the button 21 Input and output patching 3 INSERT ON OFF button Switches the insert on or off To change the currently selected insert point press one of the three blocks that does not contain any buttons OUT IN FXI FX L A L A f DVHA2 You can set the I O ports to function as an insert for each block 4 APPLY TO ALL INPUT button input channels only Specifies whether the insert position Direct Out position will be applied to all input channels 5 APPLY TO ALL OUTPUT button output channels only Specifies whether the insert position settings will be applied to all output channels INSERT IN HA field This field will appear if you have selected an input port that features a head amp as the insert in INSERT IN HA T48V GAIN 6 48V button Switches head amp phantom power 48V on or off 7 A GAIN knob Indicates the analog gain setting for the head amp Press this knob so that you will be able to use the multifunction knob to adjust the gain HA meter Displays the level of the HA input signal CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual INSERT DIRECT OUT popup window 8ch INSERT DIRECT OUT PRE EG PRE EQ IN r EC DIREC
312. ed ES button Scrolls to the chapter that precedes the currently displayed location button Returns to the preceding item in the history of links you pressed PPS button Proceeds to the subsequent item in the history of links you pressed To close the window press the Help button of the Function Access Area or the x symbol of the HELP popup window 194 Help function Using USER DEFINED keys to recall Help directly 1 Before you proceed load the Help file from your USB flash drive 2 Inthe Function Access Area press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen CURRENT USER STORAGE 0 00 00 ADMIN TP CREATE SAVE LOAD Administrator USER KEY PASSWORD CHANGE are permitted SYSTEM SETUP 48V MASTER BUS SETUP OFF OH MIXER SETUP METER WORD CLOCK CASCADE OUTPUT MIDI GPI T gt SLOT PORT OVER pan ON BATTERY MAIN pelle NETWORK POWER SUPPLY SUB DANTE BRIGHTNESS LOCK i NAME NAME COLOR SCREEN PANEL LAMP BANK B OARA S scene 000 amp Initial Data 3 Inthe upper left of the screen press the USER SETUP button to access the USER SETUP popup window CU 5 6 VL 3 V 1 Reference Manual 4 Press the USER DEFINED KEYS tab to select the USER DEFINED KEYS page USER DEFINED KEYS for_Administrator SENDS OH FADER SEHDS OH FADER MTRX1 2
313. ed HPF EQ 3 LIBRARY DEFAULT 6 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 80 0 B B FREQUENCY FREQUENCY FREQUENCY FREQUENCY FREQUENCY FREQUENCY FREQUENCY FREQUENCY 1 Channel select button Selects the channel that you want to control The current channel icon and number appear on the button and the channel name appears immediately below the button 2 EQ graph This graph displays the parameter values for the EQ and filter The currently selected EQ type appears below the graph 3 EQ ON OFF button Switches the EQ on or off The OVER indicator located to the right above the button lights if the post EQ signal is clipping 4 HPF FREQUENCY knob Indicates the cutoff frequency of the HPF You can use the multifunction knobs to adjust this 5 HPF ON OFF button Switches the HPF on or off CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual popup window CH1 48 CH49 72 ST IN CL5 CH49 64 ST IN CL3 ST IN CL1 OUTPUT This window displays the corresponding input channels or output channels simultaneously This page is only for display and does not allow the parameters to be edited It is useful when you need to quickly check multiple EQ settings or when you want to copy and paste EQ settings between distant channels HPF EQ cht chs 3 Du DEFAULT PASTE COMPARE ES LIBRARY chs c
314. ed for the corresponding channel In the Function Access Area press the RACK button to access the VIRTUAL RACK window and use the EFFECT tab to display the EFFECT field Press the effect rack that you inserted into the channel The EFFECT popup window will appear In this popup window you can edit the effect parameters Select the effect type and edit the effect parameters For details on editing the effect parameters refer to Editing the internal effect parameters NOTE The levels before and after the effect are shown by the input and output meters in the upper right of the EFFECT popup window e Adjust the effect send master level and the effect parameters so that the signal does not reach the overload point at the input or output stage of the effect Using the fader of the channel you selected as the rack s output destination in step 3 adjust the level as appropriate CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual Editing the internal effect parameters This section explains how to change the effect type and edit the parameters 1 Follow steps 1 3 described in Virtual rack operations on page 115 to mount an effect in a rack A rack in which an effect is mounted will show the following information THA Hall REV x HALL mart 2IN 20UT 1 Effect title type This area indicates the effect title the name of the type that is used and a graphic The number of input output channels 1 IN 2 O
315. ee that the contents of the assignment tables will match PARAMETER CHANGE messages are always used You can choose either MULTI MIDI CH or SINGLE CH If SINGLE is selected You can choose the Rx CH OMNI CH and Tx CH You can choose whether a bank select message will be added bank of up to 16 can be specified If MULTI is selected The Rx and Tx channels will be the same The assignment table will use the settings for each MIDI channel Bank select messages will not be added You can make settings for up to sixteen MIDI channels STATUS 1100nnnn Cn Program change DATA Onnnnnnn nn Program number 0 127 CU 5 VL 3 V Reference Manual 2 SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGE 2 1 SONG SELECT Reception F3 Select the track number shown in the TITLE LIST screen of the USB memory recorder STATUS 11110011 F3 Song select Song number 05555555 ss Song number 0 127 2 2 TIMING CLOCK Reception This message is used to control effects This message is transmitted twenty four times per quarter note Echoing of this message depends on the OTHER item in the ECHO settings F8 STATUS 11111000 F8 Timing clock 2 3 ACTIVE SENSING Reception Once this message has been received MIDI communication will be initialized e g Running Status will be cleared if no message is received for an interval of 400 ms This message is not subject to echoing FE STATUS 11111110 FE Active sensing 2 4 SYSTEM RESET FF Re
316. eived when PARAMETER CHANGE Rx is on and the Device number 01000101 ASCII CODE 01100010 1 ASCII CODE of both Rx CH and SUB STATUS are matched The data will be echoed when oot ee Dit10103 NON ASCIICODE PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO is on The corresponding effect will function 01101001 i ASCII CODE 01101110 n ASCII CODE immediately the data is received depending on the effect type 01110011 ASCII CODE 01110100 t ASCII CODE 01010011 5 ASCII CODE STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message MODULE NAME Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE 01110100 t ASCII CODE ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE 01110010 r ASCII CODE SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE sd Ed GROUP ID 00111110 3E Digital mixer Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE MODEL ID DBGOTODIO X5 CL sees Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE RUINA UU D OTHER DATA Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE FUNCTION NAME 01001101 M Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE 01101111 o DATA Onnnnnnn nh Request Number High Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE 01100100 d Onnnnnnn nl Request Number Low Ommmmmmm mm ASCII 01000110 11110111 F7 End of exclusive nh Number High 01111000 x Onnnnnnn nl Number Low 01010100 T ch Channel High 4 5 3 Module Name eL Chan
317. el This method is convenient if you want to monitor a signal that is being sent to the selected MIX MATRIX bus Use the faders in the Channel Strip section on the top panel to adjust the send level of signals routed from the input channels to the selected MIX MATRIX bus NOTE You can assign the SENDS ON FADER function to a USER DEFINED key This lets you quickly switch to SENDS ON FADER mode for a specific MIX MATRIX bus and quickly switch back again Repeat steps 4 5 to adjust the send level for other MIX MATRIX buses in the same way When you have finished adjusting the MIX MATRIX send levels press the x symbol in the Function Access Area The Function Access Area display will return to its prior state and the CL console will exit SENDS ON FADER mode and return to normal mode CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual Correcting delay between channels Input Delay This section explains how to correct delay between input channels by using Input Delay function This function is useful when you want to correct the phase variance caused by microphone locations on the stage to add depth to the sound by using phase variance or to correct a delay a gap that may exist between video and audio that are sent from a site for broadcast on TV 1 Use the SEL keys on the top panel to select the input channel that will send signals to the MIX MATRIX bus 2 Press a knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to access the SELECTED CHANNEL
318. el Low 01110010 r Module Name mper MODULE is ASCII CODE SCENE LIB SCENE 1 300 INPUT EQ LIB 41 200 4 6 2 Function Name Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE OUTPUT EQ LIB __ 4 200 Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Dynamics LIB DYNA 42 200 ARE Number tx rx Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE INPUT CH LIB INCHNNL 1 200 d tx Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE OUTPUT CH LIB OUTCHNL 1 200 i tx Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE GEQ LIB 1 200 0 tx Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE EFFECT LIB EFFECT 55 200 Control Change 0 tx Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE ia 1 100 DATA ee Effect number 0 RACK1 7 RACK8 js o gt 4 6 3 Pressi Opt 2A LIB OPT 2A_ 1 100 Module Name 11110111 F7 End of exclusive EQP 1A LIB EQ 1A__ 1 100 Mixer Setting MIXERSET DynamicEQ LIB DYNAEQ 1 100 Outport Setting OUT PORT 4 7 2 Module Name u Monitor Settin MONITOR_ Dante Input Patch LIB DANTEIN_ 1 10 9 ondes Module Name NUNBET b Number LIB NUM Freeze Play button FRZPLAY O RACK1 2 4 RACK5 6 RACK7 Program Change Table PRGMCHG Freeze Record button FRZREC 2 RACK3 4 RACKS5 6 RACK7 Control Change Table CTRLCHG This will not work when the Effect Type is different Preference Current PREF CUR Preference Admin PREF ADM Preference Guest PREF GST User Defined Keys Current UDEF CUR 269
319. elect the DCA group that you want to control 66 Grouping and linking Using mute groups This section explains how to assign channels to mute groups and use the USER DEFINED keys to control them Assigning channels to mute groups As with the DCA group there are the following two ways to assign channels to mute groups e You can select specific mute group first and then specify the channels to be assigned to the group or e You can select a specific channel and then specify the mute group to which it should be assigned Selecting the channels that will belong to a specific mute group 1 Inthe Function Access Area press the CH JOB m button CH ASSIGN The Function Access Area will change as follows CH LINK 2 Press the MUTE GROUP button to access the GROUP DCA MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE popup window MUTE GROUP MUTE GROUP button RECALL SAFE CH SORT COPY MOVE ue DEFAULT CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual In this popup window you can select the channels that will be assigned to each mute group The popup window includes the following items DCA MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE Choose MUTE GROUP number and press SEL of member CHs CH17 32 MIX 1 8 2 MUTE GROUP CH33 48 CH49 64 MIX 9 16 ASSIGN CH65 72 STIN MIK 17 24 STEREO MATRIX MONO 6 os NOM S O00 CLOSE 1 CLEAR ALL button Clears all channels that are assigned to the currently selected mute gr
320. elect it then press the SEL keys on the top panel to add the corresponding channels to the selected fader bank 5 Channel select popup button Opens the channel select popup window in which you can change the channel specified for CHANNEL ASSIGN 6 CLEAR ALL button Clears the current fader bank assignment Pressing this button will open a confirmation dialog box Press OK to clear the assignment Otherwise press CANCEL to return to the previous screen without changing the setting Use the Bank Select keys to recall the fader settings to the top panel for the channels you want to add to the custom fader bank Press the bank select button for the custom fader bank you want to set up In the CHANNEL ASSIGN field press the number button for the fader you want to set up On the top panel press the SEL key of the channel that you want to assign to that fader number The name of the selected channel will appear on the channel select popup button CU 5 UL 3 V Reference Manual 8 assign channels to other faders repeat steps 4 through 7 9 If necessary select channels by pressing the channel select popup buttons CH SELECT El Select candidate MIX1 E CUSTOM MX 1 4 MIX MATRIX Use the list in the left column to select the desired channel group then use the buttons in the right column to select channels When you have finished selecting the channels press the CLOSE button
321. elects the monitor source METER Detects and indicates the level of the monitor signal or cue signal DIMMER Attenuates the monitor cue signal by a fixed amount MONITOR LEVEL Adjusts the output level ofthe MONITOR OUT L R C channels If PHONES LEVEL LINK is ON this setting will also affect the level at the PHONES Out jack MONITOR FADER Use the STEREO MASTER fader or MONO MASTER fader to adjust the output level of the MONITOR OUT L R C channels MONITOR FADER is positioned in series with MONITOR LEVEL If PHONES LEVEL LINK is ON this setting will also affect the level at the PHONES Out jack ON on off Switches the Monitor function on or off DELAY Monitor delay Delays monitor signals The Delay function is disabled if cue signals are being output PHONES LEVEL Headphone level Adjusts the output level at the PHONES Out jack PHONES LEVEL LINK Headphone Level Link function If this function is turned on the MONITOR LEVEL knob will adjust the level of signals sent to the PHONES Out jack CUE INTERRUPTION Cue Interruption function If this function is turned on pressing the CUE key on the top panel will cause the cue signal of the corresponding channel or DCA group to be sent as the monitor output from the selected output port With the factory default settings this function is turned on Turn it off if you do not want to output cue signals to the monitoring speakers or headphones CU 5 6 UL 3 V Refe
322. en the EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT popup window in which you can specify the input ports to which the external HA mounted in the rack will be connected 5 VIEW switch buttons Switch the virtual rack display between SB168 ES and AD8HR Select the view according to the connected device 146 CU 2 66 3 C 1 Reference Manual 6 COMM PORT switch buttons Specifies whether the external HA connected to the slot will be controlled remotely Select SLOTI if you want to remotely control the external HA 4 Press the SLOT1 COMM PORT switch button The external HA units that can be controlled will appear in the virtual rack 5 To specify the input ports for an external HA press the EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT popup button for that rack The EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT popup window will appear The popup window includes the following items EXTERNAL PORT SELECT 2 Select port 1 SB168 ES 2 SB168 ES 3 SB168 ES 1 PORT SELECT buttons Specify the input ports to which the external HA is connected Use the PORT SELECT buttons to specify the input ports to which the audio output of the external HA is connected When you have finished making settings press the CLOSE button to close the popup window NOTE If an external HA is connected to one of the slots on the CL series console you must specify an appropriate input port manually If this is set incorrectly the external HA will not be detected correctly wh
323. en you patch input ports to input channels 7 remotely control an external HA press the rack in which the external HA you want to control is mounted The EXTERNAL HA popup window will appear Here you can remotely control the external HA by using the on screen knobs and buttons on the CL series console or the knobs on the top panel I O device and external head amp EXTERNAL 1 ashr 2 3 6 48V 48V 48V A GAIN A GAIN A GAIN 48V 48V GRIN GAIN elelelele je e 49 49 49 FREQUENCY FREQUENCY FREQUENCY wer MI Es Es JE Es Es 48 8 48 8 48 8 40 8 FREQUENCY FREQUENCY FREQUENCY FREQUENCY 1 48V MASTER If an external HA is connected the on off status of the master phantom power is shown here Switching this on or off is performed on the external HA itself 2 48V button Switches phantom power on or off for each channel 3 GAIN knob Indicates the gain level of the external HA To adjust the value press the knob to select it and use multifunction knobs 1 8 The level meter located immediately to the right of the knob shows the input level of the corresponding port 4 FREQUENCY knob HPF button These controllers switch on or off the high pass filter built into the external HA and adjust its cutoff frequency If you press the FREQUENCY knob to select it you will be able to adjust it using the corresponding multifunction knob 5
324. end destination channel must also be set to ON 5 Applicable to parameters that function only when ALL is selected 6 Applicable only to On Off 7 Valid when they are set for either the Send source channel or Send destination channel 8 Settings marked GLOBAL in this table apply to all channels these settings are GLOBAL RECALL SAFE FOCUS PARAMETER and GLOBAL PASTE for PATCH NAME 9 Applies to ALL only when using GLOBAL PASTE and only to ON OFF 12 For GLOBAL PASTE the MIX MATRIX STEREO and MONO settings of each channel will be set in common as the OUTPUT RECALL SAFE FOCUS RECALL GLOBAL PASTE Parameter USER LEVEL Parameter Select button Name con Colo o DEA MASTER fon 9 poon O o PCAUVEJON Ime GROUP ASSIGN 5 Applicable to parameters that function only when ALL is selected 9 Applies to ALL only when using GLOBAL PASTE and only to ON OFF Appendices 258 CU 5 C UL 3 1 Reference Manual Appendices Functions that can be assigned to USER DEFINED keys DYNAMICS LIBRARY FUNCTION PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2 Explanation INPUT EQ LIBRARY OUTPUT EQ LIBRARY Toggle ALTERNATE FUNCTION each time it is LIBRARY EFFECT LIBRARY ressed ALTERNATE p GEQ LIBRARY FUNCTION UNLATCH Switch to ALTERNATE FUNCTION only while pressed BRIGHTNESS BANK CHANGE s Eee the brightness settings stored INPUT CH LIBRARY OUTPUT EQ LIBRARY CH ON SPECIFIC
325. ends the signal of a mic connected to the TALKBACK jack to the desired bus This is used mainly to convey instructions from the operator or sound engineer to the performers and staff If necessary you can also use a mic connected to an INPUT jack on the I O device or the OMNI IN jack on the CL unit for talkback CL series consoles also feature an oscillator that can output a sine wave or pink noise to the desired bus so that you will be able to check external equipment or to test the acoustical response of the room or hall The diagram below shows the signal flow of the talkback and oscillator signals MIX stf MATRIX CUE 12 2324 LR C 12 78 LR N CASCADE IN SS SLOT1 1 16 Lt or O SELECT __ 48V MASTER S L 48V gt 0 ee ar TALKBACK ae Lat x z DANTE OMNIIN P 18 9 Talkback and Oscillator Using Talkback The Talkback function sends the signal that is input at the input jacks to the desired bus 1 In the Function Access Area press the MONITOR button to access the MONITOR screen In the MONITOR screen the TALKBACK field enables you to check the current talkback settings and turn talkback on or off If you want to view or edit the talkback settings in greater detail use the TALKBACK popup window desc
326. er the Flex15GEQ individually displays two GEQ units A and B mounted in a single rack INPUT NO ASSIGN OUTPUT NO ASSIGN GEQ 1 31BandGEQ 1 25k 2k 3 15k 1 6k 2 5k 4k 800 0 1 12 5 20k Ok 16k 6 1 Rack select tabs Switch among GEQ 1 8 among GEQ 9 16 or among EFFECT1 8 For a rack in which a Flex 15 GEQ is mounted the tabs will be split as xA and xB x is the rack number 2 INPUT PATCH button Opens the CH SELECT popup window in which you can select the input source of the rack The operating procedure is the same as for the INPUT PATCH button in the GEQ field 3 OUTPUT PATCH button Opens the CH SELECT popup window enabling you to select the output destination of the rack The operating procedure is the same as for the OUTPUT PATCH button in the GEQ field 4 GEQ LINK button Links adjacent GEQ units In the case of a 31bandGEQ the units in adjacent odd numbered even numbered racks will be linked In the case of a Flex15GEQ the GEQ A and GEQ B within the same rack will be linked NOTE The GEQ LINK button is shown only if linking is possible 5 FLAT button Returns all bands of the currently selected GEQ to 0 dB 6 GEQ ON OFF button Switches the currently selected GEQ on or off In the GEO field or the EFFECT field press the rack in which you mounted the GEQ 119 3 Graphic EQ effects and Premium Rack If you are using a stereo source link the two G
327. er change This packet shows smallest library number range that exists and not read only Top number is requested number or more Example SCENE is stored 5 6 7 10 100 and 101 Request Number 0 Data Valid Top Number 5 End Number 7 Request Number 8 Data Valid Top Number 10 End Number 10 Request Number 11 Data Valid Top Number 100 End Number 101 Request Number 102 Data Invalid Top Number 0 End Number 0 STATUS ID No SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID DATA CATEGORY FUNCTION NAME MODULE DATA EOX 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 00010010 00000000 01001100 01101001 01100010 01000101 01111000 01101001 01110011 01110100 Ommmmmmm Ommmmmmm Ommmmmmm Ommmmmmm Ommmmmmm Ommmmmmm Ommmmmmm Ommmmmmm Osssssss Onnnnnnn Onnnnnnn ttttttt Ottttttt 0eeeeeee 11110111 43 ln 19 00 7 7 gn mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm ss nh nl th EL eh el F7 System exclusive message Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel Digital mixer CL Series OTHER DATA ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE Data Status 0 Invalid data 1 Valid Data Request Number High Request
328. er in the list will be executed When you execute a specific event on the CL series console Bank Select and Program Change messages for the bank number and program number assigned to that event will be transmitted on the Tx channel If the same event is assigned more than once in the list the lowest numbered bank number and program number will be transmitted NOTE The settings of the OMNI and BANK buttons are ignored in Multi mode e f the BANK button is on and only a Program Change on an applicable MIDI channel is received the last selected bank number will be used e f the BANK button is on the OMNI button can also be turned on at the same time In this case Bank Select and Program Change messages of all MIDI channels will be received Use the buttons in the PROGRAM CHANGE field to turn transmission and reception on or off and make settings for echo output This field includes the following items Tx button Rx button ECHO button Switches Program Change transmission on or off Switches Program Change reception on or off Selects whether incoming Program Changes are echoed out from the MIDI transmission port CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual 8 change the event assignment for each program number press the desired event in the list The MIDI PROGRAM CHANGE popup window will appear In this window you can specify the event assigned to each pr
329. er input in the same way NOTE The USB memory recorder always records and plays back in stereo If you want to record in monaural with the same signal for left and right you must assign both of the recorder inputs to the same channel To assign channels to the recorder playback outputs press the PLAYBACK OUT popup button L or R The CH SELECT popup window will appear CH SELECT 2 Select candidate PB OUT L 1 Category List Enables you to select the type of channels CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual 2 Channel select buttons Select the channels that will be patched to the USB memory recorder s playback outputs from the following choices 1 72 een INPUT channels 1 72 e STIN IL IR STIN 8L 8R ST IN channels 1 8 L R NOTE In the case of the CL3 CL1 channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown 8 Use the category list and the channel select buttons to select the channel that you want to patch to the USB memory recorder output If you select a channel to which another signal is already patched a dialog box will ask you to confirm the patch change Press the OK button in the dialog box NOTE The recorder playback output can be patched to multiple channels 9 When you have finished assigning the channel press the CLOSE button You will return to the RECORDER screen 10 Assign a channel to the other output in the same way Recorder
330. er sync on off FF D de do d on DYNA FLANGE Two input two output dynamically controlled flanger UR DOWN Upward or downward frequency change cm pou Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback FQ peaking type frequency SSS poom Qpeaking ype bandwidth SOS 1 6 0 ms 46 0 s fs 44 1 kHz 5 0 ms 42 3 s fs 48 kHz CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual DYNA PHASER Two input two output dynamically controlled phaser or URDOWN Upward or downward frequency change Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for 0 reverse phase feedback 1 6 0 ms 46 0 s fs 44 1 kHz 5 0 ms 42 3 fs 48 kHz HQ PITCH One input two output high quality pitch shifter NE s0t0S0cents Pinsin OOOO S Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for 0 TES reverse phase feedback SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off NOTE AT Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY RR H3 b JI B ddd 4 d da d d aa Maximum value depends on the tempo setting 237 Appendices DUAL PITCH Two input two output pitch shifter PITCH 1 24 to 24 semitones Channel 1 pitch shift FINE 50 to 50 cents Channel 1 pitch shift fine Channel 1 level plus values for normal phase minus values for reverse
331. erent menu instead of pressing the EXIT button Other functions Fine tuning the input and output gain Calibration function If necessary you can make fine adjustments to the input and output gain 1 While holding down the SCENE MEMORY STORE key on the panel turn on the power to the CL unit After the opening screen the following startup menu screen will appear MODE SELECT INITIALIZE ALL MEMORIES INITIALIZE ALL MEMORIES Initialize All Memories INITIALIZE a MODE SELECT STORE 743 2 Inthe MODE SELECT field select the item you want to adjust and then press the button The corresponding setting screen will appear You can make the following three gain adjustments for analog input and output CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual Other functions e INPUT PORT TRIM Fine adjustment of the analog input gain e SLOT OUTPUT TRIM Fine adjustment of the slot output port gain Access the INPUT PORT TRIM window and make fine adjustments to the gain of the specified Access the SLOT OUTPUT TRIM window and make fine adjustments to the gain of the output analog input port in 0 1 dB steps ports of the specified slot in 0 01 dB steps INPUT PORT TRIM MODE MODE SELECT SLOT OUTPUT PORT TRIM MODE MODE SELECT ALL SLOT 1 OUTPUT 4 3 0 00 0 00 1 1 0 00 0 00 SLOT 2 OUTPUT 5 51 6 amp 0 00 0 00 12 13 SLOT OUTPUT oO TRIM
332. eries console To do this choose input ports from DANTE 1 64 in the GAIN PATCH popup window NOTE By default DANTE 1 64 are assigned to input channels 1 64 Output patching Use the OUTPUT PORT popup window to patch CL consoles output channels and Dante audio network In this window assign output channel signals to DANTE 1 64 ports NOTE By default 1 24 are assigned to DANTE 1 24 MATRIX 1 8 are assigned to DANTE 25 32 STEREO L R are assigned to DANTE 33 84 and MONO is assigned to DANTE 35 Next patch the output signals from DANTE 1 64 assigned in the OUTPUT PORT popup window to I O device outputs Use the OUTPUT PATCH popup window of the I O device to make these assignments CU 5 C VUL 3 C V Reference Manual Changing the output patch settings To change the patching you can either select the output port that will be the output destination of each output channel or you can select the output channel that will be the output source for each output port Selecting the output port for each output channel 1 Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to access the OVERVIEW screen containing the output channel for which you want to assign the output port Channel number Channel name MIX4 4 DAHTE2 DAHTES DAHTE4 DANTES DANTE6 DAHTE7 DANTES d DS 0 00 00 ADMIN Send To R scene 000 a Initial Data 2 In the top part of the screen p
333. ermines the level of input signal required to THRESHOLD dB 54 to 0 55 points posue 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 5 1 1 7 1 2 0 1 This determines the amount of compression that is 2 5 1 3 0 1 3 5 1 4 0 1 5 0 1 6 0 1 the change in output signal level relative to change 8 0 1 10 1 20 1 1 16 points in input signal level This determines how soon the signal will be compressed once the compressor has been triggered ATTACK ms 0 120 121 points This determines how soon the compressor returns to its normal gain once the trigger signal level drops below the threshold The value is expressed as the duration required for the level to change by 6 dB OUT GAIN dB 0 0 to 418 0 181 points This sets the compressor s output signal level This determines how compression is applied at the threshold For higher knee settings compression is applied gradually as the signal exceeds the specified threshold creating a more natural sound 44 1kHz 6 ms 46 0 sec RELEASE ms 48kHz 5 ms 42 3 sec 160 points Hard 1 5 6 points e I O Characteristics KNEE hard OUT GAIN 0 0dB e Time Series Analysis RATIO oo 1 i Input Signal i Output Signal gt gt gt pe THRESHOLD 2 ATTACK RELEASE 5 5 8 RATIO 8 iud og N j UNE I THRESHOLD gt Time Input Level Time 231 Appendices EXPANDER An expander attenuates signals be
334. ess to the parameters by certain users the Console Lock function that temporarily denies access to the console the Preference settings that customize the operating environment and Save Load operations using a USB flash drive User Level settings User Level settings allow you to restrict the parameters that can be operated by each user or to change the settings of USER DEFINED keys and preference settings for each user Settings for each user can be stored as a user authentication key inside the console or together on a USB flash drive allowing users to be switched easily This can be convenient in the following situations e Unintended or mistaken operation can be prevented The range of functionality operable by an outside engineer guest engineer can be limited In situations in which multiple operators alternate with each other output settings etc can be locked to prevent unintended operations e Preferences of each operator can easily be switched User types and user authentication keys There are three types of user as follows To operate the CL series console you must log in as a user e Administrator The administrator of the CL console can use all of its functionality Only one set of Administrator settings is internally maintained in the console The Administrator can create user authentication keys for other users Even ifthe console was locked by another user the administrator can use the admini
335. ettings are made are marked by a FADE indicator in the STATUS field of the SCENE LIST window COMMENT tab Recall a scene for which the Fade function is turned on The faders will begin to move immediately after Recall occurs and will reach the values of the recalled scene over the course of the specified fade time NOTE The Fade function settings can be applied individually even if faders are linked by Channel Link e You can stop a fade effect by holding down a SEL key while you stop the corresponding moving fader f you recall the same scene while faders are moving the faders of all channels or DCA groups will move immediately to their target positions CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual Outputting a control signal to an external device in tandem with scene recall GPI OUT A contol signal can be output to an external device connected to the GPI connector of the CL series console when you recall a specific scene Proceed as follows NOTE For more information on the GPI OUT settings refer to Using GP OUT on page 223 1 Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area The SCENE LIST window will appear in which you can perform various operations for scene memory SCENE SCENE 02 Press OUT tab at the bottom of the SCENE LIST window The GPI OUT field will appear SCENE LIST GPI OUT NO PORTS TITLE Y PORT4 SCENE 01 TRIGGER f am SC
336. evel of audible volume will also change In this case use the OUTPUT knob to adjust the volume level Opt 2A Opt 2A is a processor that emulates a popular vintage model of tube opto compressors It features smooth compression produced using optical components such as a photocell and a light source to control the level It also features beautiful high range overtones created by the warm distortion typical of tube circuits resulting in elegant and sophisticated sounds PREMIUM 3 INPUT OUTPUT ASSIGN assign Opt 2A NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN L Ort 2A St L QYAMAHA e d 5 GRATIO 1 GAIN knob Adjusts the output level 2 PEAK REDUCTION knob Adjusts the compression amount of the signal 3 RATIO knob Adjusts the compression ratio 4 METER SELECT knob Switches the meter display GAIN REDUCTION indicates the amount of gain reduction when the compressor is operating With 18 dB as the reference level of the output signal the OUTPUT 10 and OUTPUT 4 settings respectively will cause the value 10 dB or 4 dB from this reference level to be shown as OVU on the meter CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual 1 1 is a processor that emulates a famous passive type vintage EQ It features unique style of operation allowing you to individually boost and attenuate cut each of two frequency ranges high and low The frequency response is utterly
337. f the screen press the MIDI GPI button to access the MIDI GPI popup window Press the MIDI SETUP tab to access the MIDI SETUP page and select the port and MIDI channel on which Parameter Changes will be transmitted and received as described in Basic MIDI settings on page 149 NOTE e Parameter changes include a device number that specifies the transmitting or receiving device The transmit Tx channel and receive Rx channel specified on the MIDI SETUP page are used as the device number Please be aware that if the device number included in the transmitted Parameter Change does not match the device number of the receiving CL console the message will be ignored Do not turn Parameter Change and Control Change transmission reception on at the same time Otherwise a large amount of data will flood the MIDI port and may cause overflows or other problems Use the Tx button and Rx button in the PARAMETER CHANGE field to turn on Parameter Change transmission reception In this state when you operate specific parameters on the CL console the corresponding Parameter Change messages will be transmitted If valid Parameter Change messages are received from an external device the parameters assigned to those Parameter Changes will be controlled 157 MIDI CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual User settings Security This chapter explains the following settings and operations the User Level settings that restrict acc
338. f the selected channels press the TARGET CHs field To execute the initialization press the DEFAULT button The parameters of the selected channel s will be initialized After initialization the TARGET field will be empty nothing is selected To close the CH DEFAULT MODE popup window press the CLOSE button CU 5 C VUL 3 C V Reference Manual Scene memory This chapter explains how to perform scene memory operations About scene memories On CL series consoles you can assign a name to a set of mix parameter and input output port patch settings and store the mix settings in memory and later recall them from memory as a scene Each scene is assigned a number in the range of 000 300 Scene 000 15 a read only scene used to initialize the mix parameters Scenes 001 300 are writable scenes Each scene contains the position of the top panel faders and ON key status as well as the following parameters Input output port patching e Channel name and color e Bus settings e Head amp settings e Digital gain settings EQ settings e Dynamics 1 and 2 settings Input delay settings e Rack GEQ effect Premium Rack settings e Pan balance settings e Insert Direct Out settings e On off status and send level of signals sent to MIX buses On off status and send level of signals sent to MATRIX buses e Settings for signals sent to the STEREO MONO bus e DCA group settings e Mute group settings
339. ference Manual Other functions Redundant connections Mounting an I O device on the Dante audio network Two consoles are sharing 256 ch HA remote maximum size Heres how to select which of the multiple I O devices on the Dante audio network will be mounted so that they can be used Up to 24 units can be mounted for one CL series console 3224 1 Inthe lower part of the DANTE SETUP popup screen press the DEVICE MOUNT tab to access the DEVICE MOUNT field 4 D eG DANTE SETUP Rio3224 2 8103224 t 1 CLEAR ALL REFRESH Rio3224 4 8103224 5 8103224 5 Rio3224 7 8103224 8 CL Mon 5 hops 0 5 ms REMOTE HA DEVICE MOUNT ASSIGN This screen contains the following items 1 CLEAR ALL button Clears all I O devices in the list to an unmounted state 2 REFRESH button Updates the displayed list of I O devices on the Dante audio network 3 VO device select buttons Press one of the buttons to open the DEVICE SELECT popup window The upper line of the button shows the device label The lower line of the button shows the model name and the number of inputs and outputs gt If no device has been mounted the upper row will indicate and the lower row will show nothing 21 7 CU gt Cu_ 3 1 1 Reference Manual 2 Press I O device select button to access the DEVICE SELECT popup window DEVICE SELECT 1 Select HO
340. following website http www yamahaproaudio com Using Nuendo Live Steinbergs Nuendo Live DAW software can be used with the CL series console taking advantage of functionality that makes them work well together For details refer to Using the CL console with Nuendo Live on page 188 CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual Word clock settings In a Dante network the master device supplies accurate word clock to other devices on the network If the master device is removed from the network or breaks down another device will automatically take over as the clock master To make this setting in the Function Access Area press the SETUP button then WORD CLOCK SLOT button to access the WORD CLOCK SLOT popup window WORD CLOCK SLOT MASTER CLOCK SELECT LOCKED SRC ON UNLOCKED UNLOCK LOCKED BUT NOT SYNC ED UNKNOWN INT IN 48k 44 11 SLOT SETUP ee 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 SLOT 1 FREQUENCY SRC EMPHASIS STATUS FREQUENCY SRC EMPHASIS STATUS FREQUENCY SRC EMPHASIS STATUS Setting up Dante Virtual Soundcard Install a Dante Virtual Soundcard DVS and the Dante Controller in a computer that you want to use for audio recording Dante Virtual Soundcard Gudinate Then connect the GbE compatible network port on the computer to a GbE compatible network Dante Virtual Soundcard switch Configure the computer to obtain an IP OOOO EAE address automati
341. gain meter Indicates the level after digital gain GAIN PATCH popup window 1 48 49 72 ST IN CL5 49 64 ST IN CL3 ST IN CL1 This window displays the head amp settings of the corresponding input channels Here you can also adjust the head amp gain in groups of the selected eight channels by using the multifunction knobs in the Centralogic section 2 D GAIN PATCH CH h fm ch 2 6 CH12 x ch fm C CHSS CH56 1 ch56 6 6 6 H64 gt PUGNAE ESAE AE E 6 6 6 ES C j C O a oc FX3R B FXAL A ST IN ti ENTE RtSL Rt5R FXSRG FXGR B FX LU FAIR FXBL A 1 1 Parameter select buttons Select one of the following parameters to view in the window e ANALOG GAIN Analog gain DIGITAL GAIN Digital gain COPATCIT E Patch selection 2 GC ALL ON GC ALL OFF buttons Switch Gain Compensation on or off for all input channels simultaneously 3 Channel select button Selects the channel You can select multiple channels simultaneously CU 5 VL 3 V Reference Manual If you press the ANALOG parameter select button 1 GAIN knob Indicates the analog gain setting for each channel Press this knob to control the gain value using the multifunction knob If th
342. gnal is clipping at some point in the channel 6 TO ST PAN TO ST BALANCE knob If the type of the MIX channel signal is MONO this knob will function as a PAN knob that adjusts the left and right pan position of the signal sent to the STEREO bus If the type of MIX channel signal is STEREO this knob will function as a BALANCE knob that adjusts the volume level balance of left and right signals sent to the STEREO bus To adjust the value press the knob to select it and then operate the corresponding multifunction knob 49 Output channels If the ST MONO LCR mode select button is set to LCR mode the following button and knob are displayed instead of the ST MONO button 4 7 LCR button This button is an overall on off button for signals sent from a channel to the STEREO bus and MONO bus If this button is off no signals will be sent from the corresponding input channel to the STEREO bus or MONO bus CSR knob Adjusts the relative level of signals sent from the channel to the STEREO L R bus and to the MONO bus in the range of 0 10096 To adjust the value press the knob to select it and then operate the corresponding multifunction knob CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual STEREO MONO popup window CH1 48 CH49 72 ST IN CL5 CH49 64 ST IN CL3 ST IN CL1 OUTPUT This window displays the status of signals sent from the corresponding channel to the STEREO bus MONO bus You can also adjust the pan or bal
343. gned to the group or e You can select a specific channel and then specify the DCA group to which it should be assigned NOTE DCA groups can be used only with input channels group settings are saved as part of the scene B Selecting channels to belong to a specific DCA group 1 In the Function Access Area press the CH JOB button The CH JOB button lets you perform grouping linking and copying operations between channels When you press this button the Function Access Area will change as follows DCA GROUP button 2 Press the DCA GROUP button to access the DCA MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE popup window In the DCA MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE popup window ifthe DCA GROUP ASSIGN button has been selected select the channels to be assigned to the DCA group This popup window includes the following items t CLEAR ALL DCA MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE Choose DCA GROUP number and press SEL of member CHs DCA GROUP CH17 32 ASSIGN CH33 48 CH49 64 CH65 72 ST IN 1 CLEAR ALL button Clears all channels that are assigned to the currently selected DCA group 2 DCA GROUP ASSIGN MUTE GROUP ASSIGN buttons Grouping and linking CH JOB x CH ASSIGN CH LINK DCA GROUP MUTE GROUP RECALL SAFE CH SORT COPY MOVE DEFAULT Toggle between the DCA GROUP ASSIGN popup window and the MUTE GROUP ASSIGN popup window CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual 3 DCA gr
344. h nl eh el ih il ch eL dd dd dd dd dd F7 System exclusive message Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel Digital mixer CL Series OTHER DATA ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE 4 4 2 Format PARAMETER REQUEST Receive The PARAMETER CHANGE will be sent with Device number Rx CH immediately the data is received STATUS ID NO SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID DATA CATEGORY FUNCTION NAME MODULE NAME 11110000 01000011 0011nnnn 00111110 00010010 00000000 01001100 01101001 01100010 01000001 01110100 01110010 01100010 01110100 Ommmmmmm Ommmmmmm Ommmmmmm Ommmmmmm Ommmmmmm Ommmmmmm Ommmmmmm Ommmmmmm FO 43 3n 19 00 3 En yn En mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm System exclusive message Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel Digital mixer CL Series OTHER DATA ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE ASCII CODE Scene Library number High Scene Library number Low Element High Element Low Index High Index Low Channel H
345. h 1 ch 2 ch 4 5 7 METERING POINT field Select one of the following as the metering point at which the level will be detected For INPUT METER METERING POINT gt eese Immediately before the HPF PRE FADER Pre fader immediately before INPUT DELAY POST Immediately after the ON key For OUTPUT METER METERING POINT Immediately before the EQ PRE FADER Immediately before the fader POST Immediately after the ON key NOTE On the or CL1 console the metering point for output channels will also affect the optional meter bridge MBCL PEAK HOLD button Turn on this button to hold the peak level indication on each meter Turn off this button to clear the peak hold indication PEAK HOLD 2 If necessary press a button the METERING POINT field to switch the metering point The metering point for the level meters can be set independently for input channels and output channels If you want the peak levels of the level meter to be held press the HOLD button to turn it on PEAK HOLD button on off operations will affect both input channels and output channels as well as the MBCL meter bridge When you turn this button off the peak level indications that had been held will be cleared NOTE You can also assign the PEAK HOLD butt
346. hannel for which the Mute Safe function see page 70 has been turned on 5 indicator will light up green at the right end of the bottom row 67 CU 5 3 A Reference Manual Selecting the mute groups to which a specific channel will belong 1 2 Pressa knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to access the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen In this screen you can view the mix parameters for the currently selected channel Press the SEL key for the input channel output channel that you want to assign Use the mute group select buttons to select the mute group s to which the currently selected channel will be assigned multiple selections are allowed 4 Select the mute group s for other channels in the same way 68 Grouping and linking Using mute groups To control mute groups you can use the MUTE GROUP MASTER buttons in the MUTE GROUP ASSIGN popup window In addition it may prove convenient if you assign the Mute On Off function for a mute group 1 8 to a USER DEFINED key 1 In the Function Access Area press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen CURRENT USER STORAGE TE CREATE SAVE LOAD Administrator USER KEY PASSWORD CHANGE are permitted SYSTEM SETUP 48V MASTER BUS SETUP ON MIXER SETUP WORD CLOCK CASCADE OUTPUT MIDI GPI SLOT PORT BATTERY MAIN NETWORK POWER SUPPLY SUB DANTE LAG OME CONTRAST BRIGHTNESS T LOCK UE NAME NAME
347. he volume balance of the left right signals sent from the STEREO channel to the STEREO bus You can turn on PAN LINK in the BUS SETUP popup window so that the setting of the PAN parameter will also be applied to signals sent to two MIX or MATRIX buses that are set to stereo 27 CU s gt Cu_ 3 A Reference Manual LCR Left Center Right Sends the input channel signal to the STEREO bus MONO bus as a three channel signal that consists of the L R channel plus the center channel MIX ON OFF MIX send on off This is an on off switch for signals sent from the input channel to MIX buses 1 24 MATRIX LEVEL 1 24 MATRIX send levels 1 24 Adjusts the send level of signals sent from the input channel to VARI type MIX buses 1 24 As the position from which the signal is sent to the MIX bus you can choose from the following immediately before EQ pre fader or post fader MATRIX ON OFF MATRIX send on off This is an on off switch for signals sent from the input channel to MATRIX buses 1 8 MATRIX LEVEL 1 8 MATRIX send levels 1 8 Adjusts the send level of the signal sent from the input channel to MATRIX buses 1 8 As the position from which the signal is sent to the MATRIX bus you can choose from the following immediately before the EQ pre fader or post fader INSERT MONO channels only You can patch the desired output input ports to insert an external device such as an effect processor For the position of the insert out insert
348. he fader of the selected channel will not cause a signal to be output FADER START A trigger signal 250 msec long will be output when the fader of the selected channel moves upward through the specified UPSTROKE level 138 0 dB to 10 0 dB from a point below it FADER STOP A trigger signal 250 msec long will be output when the fader of the selected channel reaches the specified DOWNSTROKE level dB to 9 95 dB FADER TALLY A trigger signal will be output when the fader of the selected channel moves upward through the specified UPSTROKE level 138 0 dB to 10 0 dB from a point below it This signal will be held until the fader reaches the specified DOWNSTROKE level ee dB to 9 95 dB or until that GPI OUT port receives a different trigger 225 CU 5 C UL 3 1 Reference Manual The following illustration shows how the signal that is output from the GPI OUT port will change in each fader mode when a fader is operated In this example UPSTROKE in the THRESHOLD field is set to 60 00 and DOWNSTROKE is set to eo This illustration shows the case in which 9 is selected as the polarity of the GPI OUT port If the polarity is 888 the polarity of the output signal will be reversed 5 10 10 10 10 10 5 i 5 5 i 5 5 3 o A ap 8 H m FADER START 250 msec FADER STOP 250 msec FADER TALLY NOTE At the high level the output signal of the port will be
349. he next song that is marked with a PLAY check symbol If you hold down this button for two seconds or longer fast forward will occur If you operate this button during playback playback will resume from the point at which the button was released 17 REC button Places the recorder in recording standby mode The pause indicator of the PLAY PAUSE b button will light NOTE You can also assign the function of each button to a USER DEFINED key see page 169 Recorder PLAY MODE field This field enables you to specify how the recorder will behave when playback of the current song is complete 12 SINGLE button If this button is on only the current song will play If this button is off when the current song finishes playing the recorder will play the next song in the list that is marked with a PLAY check symbol 3 REPEAT button If this button is on playback will repeat If the SINGLE button is on only the current song will play repeatedly If the SINGLE button is off all songs in the list that are marked with a PLAY check symbol will repeatedly play in the order of the list If this is off the song will play only once If the SINGLE button is on the current song will play only once and then stop If the SINGLE button is off all songs in the list that are marked with a PLAY check symbol will play once in the order of the list and then playback will stop 3 Connect a USB flash drive with sufficient free capacit
350. he panning of signals sent from the MIX channel to the STEREO L R bus and MONO C bus and the level balance of signals sent to the MONO C bus and STEREO L R bus Refer to page 38 for details on how the signal level sent from an LCR mode MIX channel to each bus will change according to the operation of the TO ST PAN knob CU 5 VL 3 V Reference Manual Sending signals from MIX channels and STEREO MONO channels to MATRIX buses This section explains how to send a signal from a MIX or STEREO MONO channel to MATRIX buses 1 8 You can do this in either of the following three ways Using the SELECTED CHANNEL section With this method you use the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to adjust the send levels to the MATRIX buses This method allows you to simultaneously control signals sent from a specific MIX STEREO L R or MONO C channel to all MATRIX buses Using the Centralogic section With this method you use the multifunction knobs in the Centralogic section to adjust the send levels to the MATRIX buses This method allows you to simultaneously control signals sent from up to eight MIX STEREO L R or MONO C channels to a specific MATRIX bus Using the faders SENDS ON FADER mode With this method you switch the CL series unit to SENDS ON FADER mode and use the faders on the top panel to adjust the level of signals sent to the MATRIX buses When using this method signals sent from MIX and STER
351. he power of the CL series console is turned on POWERON EN DEF DEFINED KEY 1 The function assigned to the USER DEFINED KEY ACTIVE IND USER DEFINED KEY 16 key becomes active 224 7 8 9 Other functions In each field select the desired function or parameter When you have finished making settings press the OK button Repeat steps 5 through 8 to specify functions and parameters for other ports Using FADER START Make FADER START settings if you want a device connected to a GPI OUT port to operate in tandem with fader operations 1 2 3 Connect an external device to the CL series console s connector In the function access area press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen Press the MIDI GPI button The MIDI GPI screen will appear MIDI GPI 8 654321 ELLE 15141312 1110 9 sign al METER OVER SETUP CONTROL FADER START 000 Initial Data PROGRAM MIDI SETUP CHANGE CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual 4 Press the FADER START tab to access the FADER START The following items are displayed t CLEAR ALL MIDI GPI x FADER START OUTPUT DESTINATION 7 our 1 Press SEL to select member CHs CH17 32 MIX 1 8 CH33 48 CH49 64 MIX 9 16 CH65 72 ST IN DCA MIX 17 24 STEREO MATRIX MONO THRESHOLD UPSTROKE DOVHSTROKE FADER START 1 CLEAR ALL button Press this button
352. he send destination MIX bus to stereo For details on bus assignments see Basic settings for MIX buses and MATRIX buses on page 202 INPUTL INPUT R L RETURN RETURN L RETURN RETURN INPUT Lor RH Follow steps 1 3 described in Virtual rack operations on page 115 to mount an effect in a rack The rack in which an effect is mounted will indicate the effect type used by that effect the number of inputs and outputs and the levels before and following the effect P Fx 1 gt NO ASSIGN gt STINIL P REIL STINIR gt REIR IN OUT REY X Hall 2 HALL 21 4 200 1 UE SES P Fx 2 NO ASSIGN gt STIN2L TERTIUM a gt REAL REV X Room REU X ROOM oom 2 N 20UT1 STIN2R gt REAR STINSL P REBL MIK19 P Fx 3 gt NO ASSIGN gt IN OUT REV X Plate REV PLATE mare 2IN 20UT STINSR gt REBR CU 5 6 VL 3 V Reference Manual 2 Press the INPUT PATCH L button to open the CH SELECT popup window and select a MIX channel as the input source for the rack For details on the CH SELECT popup window refer to step 5 of Virtual rack operations on page 115 The output of the MIX channel you are using as the effect send is now assigned to the L input of the effect If you are using a stereo source assign the L R signals of the stereo MIX channel to the L R inputs of the rack 3 Press the OUTPUT PATCH L button to open the
353. higher than the current one Subdirectory Press this button to move to the corresponding sub directory 04 18 2011 NOTE f you select a folder in this way that folder will automatically be selected as the recording destination Recorder The folders that can be selected are restricted to the SONGS folder inside the folder and folders located below the SONGS folder The CL series console can recognize a file name that is a maximum of 64 single byte characters If the file name is longer than this the desired file may not play correctly A maximum of 300 songs can be managed in a single directory A maximum of 64 subdirectories can be managed Use the multifunction knob or press the on screen file name to select the desired file Press a button in the PLAY MODE to select the playback mode You can choose from the following four playback modes buton ben _ button button Starting with the currently selected song in the title list songs will play back consecutively and playback will stop at the last song on the list Starting with the currently selected song on the title list songs will play Off On back consecutively until the last song Then playback will return to the first song and will continue until you stop playback If you have selected a consecutive playback mode in step 5 press the PLAY check symbol column for each song you want to play When performing consec
354. hlighted in blue in the list If you press another scene number in the list the list will scroll and that scene will become the current scene 7 SCENE SELECT knob Use the multifunction knobs to select a scene You can view the currently selected scene number immediately below the SCENE SELECT knob MULTI SELECT button You can select consecutive multiple scenes by turning on this button and rotating the multifunction knob If this button is off you can still select consecutive multiple scenes by rotating the multifunction knob while pressing and holding it down 9 LAST SCENE button Press this button to select the scene that was recalled most recently SCENE STORE popup button This button stores the current mix settings Press this button to display the SCENE STORE popup window which will enable you to assign a name to a scene and store it 17 STORE UNDO button Undoes the Store operation This button is valid only immediately after you perform an Overwrite store operation 2 RECALL SCENE button Recalls the currently selected scene 3 RECALL UNDO button Undoes the Recall operation This button is valid only immediately after you perform a Recall operation Page switching tabs Switch views on the right side of the scene list 5 PREVIEW button Press this to select PREVIEW mode which allows you to view and edit the scene settings in the display and the panel without affecting the signal processing of the cur
355. ho A cho A A A a A 2 A 2 CH35 ch35 CH43 ch43 1 Channel select button Selects the channel that you want to control in the SELECTED CHANNEL section The current channel icon number and color appear on the button 2 EQ graph Indicates the total frequency response of the EQ or filter 3 Tabs Use these tabs to select a channel that you want to view on the screen 3 Access the HPF EQ popup window 1ch and then press the EQ ON button to enable the EQ If the HPF EQ popup window 1ch is displayed you will be able to edit all of the EQ parameters 58 4 and Dynamics If you want to use the high pass filter on an input channel operate the HPF knob or HPF ON OFF button in the HPF EQ popup window Input channels provide a high pass filter that is independent of the four band EQ The HPF ON OFF button switches the high pass filter on or off and the HPF knob adjusts the cutoff frequency NOTE Output channels do not feature a high pass filter that is independent of the EQ However you can turn on the high pass filter button on the popup window to use the LOW band EQ as a high pass filter For both input channels and output channels you can turn on the low pass filter button to use the HIGH band EQ as a low pass filter If you want to copy EQ settings to another channel or initialize the EQ settings use the tool buttons in the HPF EQ popup window For details on
356. ht channels sent to the two MATRIX buses INSERT You can patch the desired output input ports to insert an external device such as an effect processor You can switch the insert out and insert in locations METER Indicates the level of the output channel You can switch the position at which the level is detected KEY IN MIX channels 21 24 only You can send the output signals of MIX channels 21 24 to dynamics processors and use them as key in signals to control the dynamics RACK IN PATCH Patches the output signal of an output channel to an input of the rack OUTPUT PATCH Assigns an output port to an output channel MONITOR SELECT Selects the output signal of an output channel as a monitor source Output channels Specifying the channel name icon and channel color This section explains how to specify the channel name icon and channel color for each output channel 1 Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to access the OVERVIEW screen that includes the output channel for which you want to specify the channel name icon and channel color Channel number Channel name field 152 MIX4 MIX5 MIX6 MIX MIx8 2 MX 3 4 5 MX 6 MX 7 8 MP MX 1 DAR DAHTE2 DANTE4 DANTES DANTE DANTES 001 001 001 002 001 003 001 004 001 005 001 006 001 007 001 008 0 00 00 ADMIN Send To MIX1 R 000 E In
357. ic section to adjust the level of the group of up to eight selected channels and switch them on or off NOTE The bottom line of the OVERVIEW screen shows the channels or DCA groups that can be controlled by the faders ON keys and CUE keys in the Centralogic section e The top line of the OVERVIEW screen shows the channels that can be controlled by multifunction knobs 1 8 in the Centralogic section Use the fields on the OVERVIEW screen and the multifunction knobs to adjust the parameters for the group of up to eight channels CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual OVERVIEW screen CHANNEL NAME field This field appears at the top and bottom of the screen and displays the channel number name and icon for the currently selected eight channels The name of the currently selected channel is highlighted aA Selected channel Unselected channel NOTE If you have retained the channels assigned to the faders in the Centralogic section by pressing and holding down a Bank Select key the channel names shown at the top and bottom of the OVERVIEW screen may differ 12 Centralogic section GAIN PATCH field This field enables you to make HA head amp analog or digital gain settings and view the operational status of the head amp The view and the function of the controllers in this field vary depending on the type of the selected channel If the head amp is patched 1 GAIN knob Sets the analog g
358. icates the real time number of additional bands that can be controlled in the current GEQ If you have used all fifteen bands you will have to return one of these bands to the flat position before you can operate any other band FADER ASSIGN E 5 AVAILABLE BANDS 5 No 2 No 3 SER No 4 9 No 5 9 No 6 No 7 8 80Hz 100Hz 125Hz 160Hz 200Hz 250Hz 315Hz NOTE The ON key will light if you raise or lower a fader even the slightest amount This indicates that the corresponding band has been modified To quickly return a boosted or cut band to the flat position press the corresponding ON key in the Centralogic section to make it go dark Repeat steps 4 and 5 to adjust up to fifteen bands NOTE If you switch the display to a different screen the fader assignments in the Centralogic section will forcibly be defeated However if you once again display the same rack the group of bands you had previously been controlling will automatically be assigned to the faders When you have finished making settings turn off the buttons in the FADER ASSIGN field The faders and ON keys in the Centralogic section will return to their previous function NOTE When you close the GEQ popup window the buttons in the FADER ASSIGN field automatically turn off If you want to copy the currently displayed Flex15GEQ settings to the GEQ of another rack or to initialize the settings you can do so using the tool buttons at the
359. icates which settings affect the behavior of each input channel and output channel parameter It also indicates whether or not they can be linked as stereo and whether or not they are relevant to the RECALL SAFE GLOBAL PASTE and USER LEVEL settings and a channel library Input channels 7 RECALL SAFE FOCUS RECALL GLOBAL 8 Channel Parameter Stereo 1 CHANNEL LINK USER LEVEL Parameter Select button Library Digital Gain DIGITAL GAIN Digital Gain mwan ooo o o INPUT NAME GLOBAL INPUT NAME INPUTNAME INPUT INSERT INPUT INSERT DIRECT OUT INPUT HPF INPUT EQ INPUT Co To NENM o HQ Dynamics Key In Filter O _ INPUT DYNAMICS1 INPUT DYNAI INPUT PROCESSING Lis O INPUTDYNAMICS2 Lu O HPF tt E INPUT DYNAMICS2 INPUT MIX ON 2 INPUT MIX SEND 2 moroen NPUTPROCESING Pan Balance On To Matrix Pan Balance DELAY INPUT MIX SEND INPUT MATRIX ON INPUT MATRIX SEND 3 To Mix INPUT MATRIX SEND INPUT DELAY 9 INPUT DELAY TO STEREO TO STEREO 254 CU Ct_ 3 C1 Reference Manual Appendices RECALL SAFE FOCUS RECALL GLOBAL PASTE Channel Parameter Stereo CHANNEL LINK USER LEVEL Parameter Select button Library I 2 o amp l 5 wuem wes
360. igh Channel Low Data28 31bit Data21 27bit Data14 20bit Data7 1 3bit Data0 6bit End of exclusive DATA Onnnnnnn nh Onnnnnnn nl eh el 01111111 ih 01111111 11 Occccccc ch cl EOX 11110111 F7 4 4 3 Module Name Module Name SCENE LIB INPUT EQ LIB OUTPUT EQ LIB Dynamics LIB INPUT CH LIB OUTPUT CH LIB GEQ LIB EFFECT LIB Portico5033 LIB Portico5043 LIB U76 LIB Opt 2A LIB EQP 1A LIB DynamicEQ LIB Dante Input Patch LIB SCENE INEQ OUTEQ DYNA INCHNNL_ OUTCHNNL EFFECT P5033 P5043 U76 OPT 2A EQ 1A__ DYNAEQ DANTEIN_ Scene Library number High Scene Library number Low Element High Element Low Index High Index Low Channel High Channel Low End of exclusive Number 0 300 O response only 1 200 1 40 response only 1 200 1 3 response only 1 200 1 41 response only 0 200 0 response only 0 200 0 response only 0 200 0 response only 1 200 1 27 response only 0 100 0 response only 0 100 0 response only 0 100 0 response only 0 100 0 only 0 100 0 response only 0 100 0 response only 0 10 0 only 268 Appendices 4 5 EXIST LIBRARY RANGE 4 5 1 Format PARAMETER CHANGE Transmission When CL series receives Library Exist request command from outside the answer will be sent back with the following Paramet
361. ight The Alternate function features two options LATCH and UNLATCH If you select UNLATCH Alternate mode is turned on only while you are pressing and holding down the USER DEFINED key If you select LATCH you will be able to turn Alternate mode on or off by the key presses You do not need to hold down the key NOTE The console exits Alternate mode when you switch the display between the OVERVIEW screen and the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen or when you open a popup window e n Alternate mode will be displayed in the user name field of the Function Access Area In Alternate mode the following knobs change their behavior e GAIN knob Rotate the knob to adjust the digital gain value If DIGITAL GAIN has been selected for HA KNOB FUNCTION on the PREFERENCE page in the USER SETUP popup window rotate this knob to adjust the analog gain value of the head amp MIX MATRIX knob Rotate this knob to switch between PRE and POST for the corresponding send signal Press this knob to switch the corresponding send signal on or off HPF knob Press this knob to switch the high pass filter on or off DYNAMICS 1 knob Press this knob to switch DYNAMICS 1 on or off DYNAMICS 2 knob Press this knob to switch DYNAMICS 2 on or off NOTE In Alternate mode all knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section other than those knobs mentioned above will be disabled CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual USER DEFINED knobs This
362. ight half of the SCENE LIST window GLOBAL SCENE LIST TITLE t SCENE 01 PARAMS WITH SCENE 02 OUT SEND OTHER PARAMS WITH SCENE 03 OUT SEND WITH n OTHER OUT DCA PARAMS CURRENT SETTING 4 N QUT WITH OTHER FOCUS SET RACK HA palcu paTcH OUT SEND DCA PARAMS RECALL 004 1 FOCUS button Enables or disables the Focus function for each scene 2 SET popup button Press this button to access the FOCUS RECALL popup screen which allows you to select the parameters that will be subject to recall 87 Scene memory 3 FOCUS PARAMETER indicators These indicators show the focus recall settings that are specified for each scene 4 CURRENT SETTING field Here you can specify the content that will be saved by the next scene store operation 3 Press the SET button for the scene you want to set The FOCUS RECALL popup window will appear The window contains the following items FOCUS RECALL Press SEL to select TARGET CH and choose parameters for FOCUS RECALL FOCUS PARAMETER INPUT INPUT HA PATCH NAME OUTPUT PATCH FOCUS CH OUTPUT CH NAME LINK GEQ RACK 1A 1B 2A 2B 3A 3B 4B SR SB 6A 6B TB 8A SB 9A 9B 10A 108 11A 11B 12A 126 13A 13B 14A 14B 15A 156 16A 168 MIX 17 24 EFFECT RACK STIN 1R 1B 2A 2B 3A 3B 4B STEREO SR SB 6A 6B TB 3A SB PREMIUM RACK MATRIX MONO IR 187 129 2B 1597 3B 4B SAD 1507 SAN SE ISAN
363. ign a single channel to more than one DCA group In this case the value will be the sum of the levels of all assigned DCA group faders When you finish making assignments press the CLOSE button to close the popup window and press the x symbol in the Function Access Area CH JOB display You will return to the previous screen The DCA MUTE GROUP field of the OVERVIEW screen indicates the DCA group s to which each channel is assigned Numbers that are lit yellow in the upper and middle rows of this field indicate the DCA groups to which that channel belongs NOTE You can also access the DCA MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE popup window by pressing the DCA MUTE GROUP field in the OVERVIEW screen 65 Grouping and linking B Selecting the DCA groups to which a specific channel will belong 1 Press a SEL key to select the input channel for which you want to make assignments 2 Pressaknob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to access the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen On this screen you can view all mix parameters for the currently selected channel 3 Use the DCA group select buttons to select the DCA group s to which the currently selected channel will be assigned multiple selections are allowed 4 Select the DCA group s for other channels in the same way CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual Controlling DCA groups Use the faders in the Centralogic section to control DCA groups 1 2 Assign input channels to DCA
364. ill be displayed in this location The LCR indicator indicates the on off status of all signals sent from that channel to the STEREO bus MONO bus 4 Access the eight channel TO STEREO MONO popup window CU 5 6 VL 3 V Reference Manual 5 Use the MODE button to select either ST MONO mode LCR mode for each channel In the MASTER section on the top panel make sure that the ON key for the STEREO channel MONO channel is turned on and then raise the fader to an appropriate level 7 In the INPUT section on the top panel make sure that the ON key is turned for the input channel you want to control and then raise the fader to an appropriate position The subsequent steps will differ depending on whether ST MONO mode or LCR mode was selected for the channel in step 5 B Channels for which ST MONO mode is selected 8 In the TO STEREO MONO popup window use the STEREO MONO button to individually turn on off the signal sent from the input channel to the STEREO bus MONO bus For a channel that is set to ST MONO mode signals sent to the STEREO bus and to the MONO bus can be switched on or off individually 9 In the TO STEREO MONO popup window use the TO ST PAN knob to set the panning of a signal sent from the input channel to the STEREO bus B Channels for which LCR mode is selected 8 In the TO STEREO MONO popup window use the LCR button to turn signals sent from the input channel to the STEREO bus MO
365. ill increase in accordance with the number of units from the cascade master Other functions Operations on a cascade slave CL unit 1 In the Function Access Area press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen 2 In the SYSTEM SETUP field located in the center of the SETUP screen press the CASCADE button to open the CASCADE popup window This window enables you to select an I O port used for cascade connections The window consists of two pages The CASCADE IN PATCH page and the CASCADE OUT PATCH page To switch pages press the corresponding tab at the bottom of the window 3 Press the CASCADE OUT PATCH tab to access the CASCADE OUT PATCH page In this screen you can select the slot and output port that will output each bus CASCADE CASCADE OUT PATCH CASCADE LINK MODE CASCADE COMM PORT MATRIX 2 _ MATRIX 4 STEREO 1 STEREO R us MATRIX 6 MONO ASCADE OUT PATCH 1 Port select popup buttons CASCADE OUT PATCH section Enable you to select the output port for cascade connections for each of MIX 1 24 MATRIX 1 8 STEREO L R MONO and CUE L R buses Press the button to open the PORT SELECT popup window in which you can select a port 2 CASCADE LINK MODE buttons Specify whether only cue operations will be linked or all linkable operations including scene store recall operations will also be linked when CL series consoles are cascade connected 3 CASCADE COMM PORT buttons Specify the com
366. in the center of the screen press the OUTPUT PORT button to open the OUTPUT PORT popup window CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual In the OUTPUT PORT popup window you can assign the source channel for each output port This popup window includes the following items OUTPUT PORT SLOT1 2 SLOT1 3 SLOT1 4 SLOT1 5 SLOT1 6 SLOT1 7 Mix 7 0 00ms MIX6 MX 6 0 O00ms SITE MX 5 0 00ms SLE MX 4 0 00ms 3 0 00ms MIC TET MX 2 0 00ms 0 0 0 0 sample sample sample sample sample sample DELAY DELAY DELAY 0 0 sample sample DELAY DELAY DELAY DELAY 0 0 0 0 0 0 GAIN GAIN b DIGITAL PATCH OUT SLOTS SLOTS OMNI 1 8 9 16 1 8 VIEW 60 60 60 60 SLOT1 E 4DANTE 9 16 1 8 9 16 1 Slot number Card type If an output channel of slot 1 3 is selected for operations this area indicates the slot number and the type of I O card installed in that slot 2 DELAY SCALE button Press this button to open the DELAY SCALE popup window in which you can select the unit for the delay time 3 Output port This is the type and number of the output port to which the channel is assigned 4 Channel select popup button Enables you to select the channel that you want to assign to the output port The name of the currently selected channel is displayed 5 Delay time knob Sets the delay time of the output po
367. indow 1 Use the controllers on the top panel or the buttons on the touch screen to set the mix parameters as desired 2 Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area The SCENE LIST window will appear in which you can perform various scene related operations The window includes the following items CD 9 GLOBALT ch 1 2 NO TITLE 1 ti COMMENT STATUS 0 00 00 STAMP 7 ADMIN Send To MIXI OSO zl Focus Pl SCENE 001 Orenins PLAY 06 28 2012 6 charter 01 TEC GP SCENE 003 cherter 02 06 28 2012 z CURRENT SETTING T RECALL charter 01 8 UNDO scene 002 _ CH CHR M CH5 CH6 CH CHS s SCENE 002 chj 2 DOM 2 D 1 Scene list This area lists various data about the scenes stored in memory 2 NO TITLE buttons Press these buttons to sort the listed scenes by number or title Press the same button repeatedly to toggle between ascending order and descending order 3 Scene number Indicates the current scene number 4 Scene title Indicates the scene title Press this title to display the SCENE TITLE EDIT popup window in which you can edit the title Scene memory 5 Write protect Indicates the Write Protect on off status Press this button to write protect the scene A lock icon will appear Press it again to cancel write protection 6 Current scene The currently selected scene that is the current scene is hig
368. indow will close and a dialog box will ask you to confirm the Store operation STORE CONFIRMATION Store to SCENE MEMORY 001 CANCEL To execute the Store operation press the OK button The current mix settings will be stored to the scene number you selected in step 2 When the Store operation is complete the scene number in the Function Access Area will stop blinking If you want to cancel the Store operation press the CANCEL button instead of the OK button NOTE You can make settings such that the Store Confirmation dialog box will not appear see page 168 In this case pressing the SCENE MEMORY STORE key once will display the SCENE STORE popup window as usual and pressing it once again will execute the Store operation Alternatively you can rapidly press the SCENE MEMORY STORE key twice to store without seeing the SCENE STORE popup window To recall a stored scene use the SCENE MEMORY INC DEC keys to select the scene number that you want to recall The number of the currently selected scene appears in the SCENE field of the Function Access Area Press the SCENE MEMORY RECALL key A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Recall operation To execute the Recall operation press the OK button The scene you selected in step 7 will be recalled If you want to cancel the Recall operation press the CANCEL button instead of the OK button CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual Using the SCENE LIST w
369. ing SEL key s to make it light multiple selections are allowed The corresponding channel s are highlighted in the DESTINATION CHs field of the window The channels that can be selected will depend on the channel you selected in step 3 If you want to defeat all of the selected copy destination channels press the DESTINATION CHs field If you have selected a MIX MATRIX channel as the copy source use the buttons in the COPY TARGET field to select the parameters you want to copy To execute the copy press the COPY button The copy will be executed and the settings will overwrite the parameters of the copy destination channel s After the copy has been executed the SOURCE CH field and DESTINATION CHs field will be empty To close the CH COPY MODE popup window press the CLOSE button 74 Grouping and linking Moving the parameters of a channel The settings of a specific input channel can be moved to a different input channel When you execute a Move operation the numbering of the channels between the move source and move destination will move forward or backward by one Move 3 4 r Move by one You can move settings between the following combinations of channels e Between input channels e Between ST IN channels 1 Inthe Function Access Area press the CH JOB button ae z to access the CH JOB menu CH ASSIGN 2 Press the MOVE button to access the CH MOVE MODE popup window DCA GROUP MU
370. io3224 D on a Dante network you can maintain the constant level of signal output to the audio network by using the Gain Compensation function If the FOH console and the monitoring console are sharing an I O device or if you are performing digital recording via Dante connections using this function will maintain the signal output at a constant level from the I O device to the network even if the analog gain value on the I O device is changed To do so follow the steps below 1 2 Press one of the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section The SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen for the selected channel will appear Sets the analog gain as described previously Press the GAIN field in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen The GAIN PATCH popup window will appear Press the GC button located to the right of the A GAIN knob GAIN PATCH GC GC ALL ON OFF CHI ch 1 INPUT PATCH INPUT PORT CHI DANTE gt 001 001 When the function is turned on the button will light Press the button once again to turn it off If you adjust the analog gain value while the Gain Compensation function is turned on the head amp level will change accordingly However the level of the signal output to the audio network will automatically be corrected to the level obtained when you turned Gain Compensation on If you turn Gain Compensation off while in this state the analog gain and the compensated gain within the I O device will return to the set
371. ire internal patching with the driver For more information refer to the DAW software manual If you re using Nuendo Live DAW software see also Using the CL console with Nuendo Live on page 188 Audio recording and playback After you have made the driver settings in your DAW software you can record and play back audio For multi track recording set the input ports for tracks in DAW software to the ports that receive audio signals from the I O device For a virtual sound check you must route recorded audio signals to the input channels on the CL console To do so to patch the signals so that the signals will be output from the DAW software to DANTE 1 64 on the CL console It may be convenient for you later if you store two sets ofthe DANTE INPUT PATCH settings in the library one set for routing audio signals from the I O device and another set for routing audio signals from DAW software In this way you will be able to switch between patch settings without starting Dante Controller In addition you will be able to patch a specific channel such as a vocal to the I O device to monitor during a virtual sound check CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual Input channels This chapter explains various operations for input channels Signal flow for input channels The input channels comprise the section that processes signals received from the I O devices rear panel input jacks or slots 1 3 and sends them to the STEREO bus
372. is logged in but if you are logged in as the Administrator you will also be able to change the Guest settings 1 2 In the Function Access Area press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen Press the SETUP button to open the USER SETUP popup window PREFERENCE for User01 STORE RECALL meme AUTO CHANNEL OUTPUT CUE gt SEL LINK PANEL OPERATION STORE CONFIRMATION RECALL CONFIRMATION LINK FADER BANK gt SEL LINK PATCH LINK CUSTOM PATCH CONFIRMATION STEAL PATCH CONFIRMATION ON LOCALE SETUP ERROR MESSAGE IDENTIFY 1 0 DEVICE PORT BY SEL POPUP APPEARS WHEN KNOB S PRESSED GAIN KNOB FUNCTION SCENE UP DOWN LIST ORDER MIDI 1 0 ERROR ON NAME DISPLAY MEE FULL USER DEFINED USER DEFINED PREFERENCE KEYS KNOBS CUSTOM FADER DIGITAL ERROR USER LEVEL Press the PREFERENCE tab to access the PREFERENCE page If you are logged in as the Administrator you can also turn on the FOR GUEST button in the lower right of the screen to access the PREFERENCE for Guest page and make preference settings for the Guest account This page includes the following items 7 STORE RECALL field Enables you to turn on or off options related to scene store recall operations e STORE CONFIRMATION e RECALL CONFIRMATION If these ON buttons are lit a confirmation message will appear when you perform a Store or Recall operation respectively 168 User se
373. itial Data 2 Access the PATCH NAME popup window by pressing the channel number channel name field of the channel to which you want to assign the channel name icon and channel color CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual Output channels Sending signals from MIX channels to the STEREO MONO bus aded This section explains how to send a signal from a MIX channel to the STEREO bus or MONO bus E There are two ways to send signals to the STEREO bus or MONO bus ST MONO mode and LCR mode You can select the mode individually for each channel Features of each mode are the same as for input channels PATCH N ME x pen 1 Usethe Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to access the OVERVIEW screen d that includes the MIX channel from which you want to send the signal to the STEREO MONO bus MIX MIxX4 MIXS MIX6 MIX MIXS MX 1 MX 2 MX 3 MX 4 MX 5 MX 6 7 8 DANTE DAHTE2 DAHTES DANTE4 DAHTES DANTE6 DANTE DANTES 001 001 001 002 001 003 001 004 001 005 001 006 001 007 001 008 Follow the steps for the input channels see page 29 scene 000 AR E C C C C C C c MIX3 MIx4 gt MIXS MIX ITE TY 3 MX 4 5 NX 6 7 MX 8 Initial Data STEREO MONO field 2 Inthe STEREO MONO field press a knob to select the channel you want to adjust and then press the k
374. k Also the title of the selected song will appear on the button 3 Offset time display Indicates the time duration from scene recall until the start of playback of the specified audio file Set the offset time in the SONG SELECT popup window 4 CURRENT SETTING field Specifies the content that will be saved by the next scene store operation CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual 4 Press the song select popup button for a scene to which you want to link the audio file The SONG SELECT popup window will appear In this popup window you can select an audio file you want to link with the scene and set the offset time 2 SONG SELECT x PATH gu G YPE SONGS SONG TITLE ARTIST ME TIME OS NO ASSIGN OFFSET 6 Song01 Artist01 00 04 57 P m 7 Song02 Artist02 00 05 10 995 01503 ArtistO3 00 03 51 CANCEL 1 Change directory button Press this button to move to the next higher level NOTE You cannot move to levels higher than YPE SONGS 2 PATH indicator This area indicates the current directory path 3 SONG TITLE FILE NAME switch buttons Switch between the song title list and the file name list 4 SONG TITLE list button 5 ARTIST list button Press these buttons to sort the audio file list at the current directory level by song title and artist name respectively 6 Song list Displays the title artist name and audio file time duration of the audio
375. k SLOT 3 SLOT SETUP 122 3 6 9 10 1 12 13 14 15 16 SLOT 1 FREQUENCY PUE xc c SRC EMPHASIS STATUS FREQUENCY SRC EMPHASIS STATUS FREQUENCY SRC EMPHASIS STATUS MASTER CLOCK SELECT field 1 Master clock frequency display Indicates the frequency 44 1 kHz 48 kHz of the currently selected master clock If the unit is not synching to the master clock UNLOCK will appear NOTE If sample rate pull up down has been specified in the Dante Controller application this area indicates the change in the sample rate as a percentage such as 4 0 0 1 4 0 4 1667 etc 2 Master clock select buttons Use the buttons to select the clock source that you want to use as the word clock master from the following options INT 48 k INT 44 1 k The CL console internal clock sampling rate 48 kHz or 44 1 kHz will be the clock source e WORD CLOCK IN The word clock supplied from the WORD CLOCK IN jack on the rear panel of the console will be used as the clock source CU 5 6 VL 3 V Reference Manual e DANTE 48 e DANTE 44 1 The word clock supplied from the Dante jack on the rear panel of the console will be used as the clock source e SLOT 1 3 The word clock supplied via a digital I O card installed in a console slot will be used as the clock source Word clock can be selected in pairs for each slot 3 Clock status
376. l The tabs correspond to the following output ports e DANTE 1 8 9 16 17 24 25 32 33 40 41 48 49 56 57 64 These tabs control the output channels of the Dante connectors SLOT1 1 8 9 16 e SLOT2 1 8 9 16 SLOT3 1 8 9 16 These tabs enable you to control output channels 1 8 and 9 16 of slots 1 3 respectively OMNI 1 8 This tab enables you to control OMNI jacks 1 8 DIGITAL OUT This tab enables you to control the L R channels of the DIGITAL OUT connector PATCH VIEW1 PATCH VIEW2 These tabs display lists of patches To assign a channel to an output port press the channel select popup window for that port gt Ccu 3 C 1 3 Reference Manual Input and output patching The CH SELECT popup window will appear This popup window includes the following items D Use the channel select tabs and the channel select buttons to select the source channel and press the CLOSE button 2 setect candidate You will return to the OUTPUT PORT popup window NOTE DANTE If PATCH CONFIRMATION is ON a confirmation dialog box will appear when you attempt to change the patch settings If STEAL PATCH CONFIRMATION is ON a confirmation dialog box will appear when you attempt to change a location that is already patched elsewhere 6 Make settings for delay phase and output as necessary 7 Repeat steps 3 6 to assign channels to other output ports MIX MATRIX 8 Whe
377. le see ette 193 Playing back audio files 185 Recording audio 183 Saving and loading setup data 177 USB memory recordet etos 181 USER DEFINED 169 Functions that can be assigned 259 Recalling ioa doe hun dirti recs 194 USER DEFINED Kni0b 9 sdsccsseussenesvasataicezacesees 171 Functions that can be assigned 262 User Level eos 158 V c 114 jvc e 115 W Warning Error Messages 271 Word elot dm P B 198 CU 5 VL 3 V Reference Manual YAMAHA Yamaha Pro Audio Global Web Site http www yamahaproaudio com Yamaha Manual Library http www yamaha co jp manual C S G Pro Audio Division 2012 2013 Yamaha Corporation 3011P CO
378. lect parameters for a DCA group that will be affected by Recall Safe operations If the ALL button is on all DCA master parameters will be subject to Recall Safe If LEVEL ON is on the DCA master level and on off status will be subject to Recall Safe DCA9 DCA10 DCA11 DCA12 DCA13 DCA14 DCA15 DCA16 90 3 Scene memory To select the channel or DCA group that will be affected by Recall Safe operations press the corresponding SEL key The corresponding channel or DCA group will be enclosed by a white frame in the CH RECALL SAFE field However this white frame does not mean that the Recall Safe setting is now enabled The selected channel or DCA groups 1 8 or 9 16 will be recalled to the SAFE PARAMETER SELECT field NOTE If the CH RECALL SAFE field s SET BY SEL button is on Recall Safe will be enabled when you press the SEL key and the corresponding channel or DCA group will be highlighted in the CH RECALL SAFE field You can select parameters as described in step 4 even after turning Recall Safe on If you want to enable Recall Safe for specific parameters of the selected channel or DCA group make the following settings in the SAFE PARAMETER SELECT field NOTE Simply selecting a parameter in step 4 does not enable Recall Safe To turn Recall Safe on or off you must also perform the operation described in step 5 see page 91 e While the APPLY TO ALL INPUT button or the APPLY TO ALL OUTPUT button is on operation
379. level ATTACK 5 50 to 0 10 ms Attack time of the compressor Turning this all the way to the right produces the fastest attack RELEASE 1100 0 to 56 4 ms Release time of the compressor Turning this all the way to the right produces the fastest release RATIO ALL 4 8 12 20 Switches the compression ratio Pressing ALL produces the strongest effect METER OFF 4 8 GR Switches the meter display Opt 2A This processor emulates a well known vintage model of vacuum tube opto compressor OUTPUT 10 GAIN REDUCTION METER SELECT OUTPUT 4 Switches the meter display EQ 1A This processor emulates a vintage EQ that s considered a classic example of a passive EQ HIGH BAND WIDTH 0 0 to 10 0 Band width of the high range filter HIGH ATTEN SEL 5k 10k 20k Hz Frequency range attenuated by the high range filter HIGH ATTEN 0 0 to 10 0 Attenuation amount of the high range filter Turns the processor on off If this is off the filter section will be bypassed but the signal will pass through the input output transformers and the amp circuit 246 Appendices Dynamic EQ This is a newly developed equalizer that dynamically changes the EQ gain in response to the input signal controlling the amount of EQ cut or boost in a way similar to a compressor or expander BAND ON OFF OFF ON Turns the corresponding band on off If this is on the sidechain signal that controls the dynamics will be sent to the CU
380. library will be OUTPUT CH LIB OUTCHNNL Clear Only INPUT EQ LIB 41 199 0 tx changed immediately the data is received GEQ LIB Clear Only OUTPUT EQ LIB 4 199 0 Transmission EFFECT LIB EFFECT Clear Only Dynamics LIB 42 199 0 tx PARAMETER CHANGE will be sent in reply to Request If PARAMETER CHANGE 033 LIB 5033_ INPUT CH LIB 1 199 0 T ECHO is on the message will be sent as it is Portico5043 LIB Clear Only 1 188 U76 LIB 076 Clear Only tx STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message Opt 2A LIB OPT 2A Clear Only GEQ LIB 1 199 0 tx ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA EQP 1A LIB EQ 1 A Clear Only EFFECT LIB 28 199 0 tx SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel DynamicEQ LIB DYNAEQ Clear Only Premium Effect LIB 1 100 0 tx GROUP ID 00111110 3E Digital mixer Dante Input Patch LIB DANTEIN Clear Only Dante Input Patch LIB 1 10 0 tx MODEL ID 00010010 19 CLSeries LibRcl SCENE 0 300 5 tx rx DATA CATEGORY 00000000 00 OTHER DATA INPUT EQ LIB 1 199 1 EX rx FUNCTION NAME 01001100 1 ASCII CODE OUTPUT EQ LIB 1 199 52 3 4 tX rx 01101001 i ASCII CODE Dynamics LIB 1 199 1 2 3 4 8 tx rx 01100010 b ASCII CODE INPUT CH LIB 0 199 1 tx rx Offfffff ASCII CODE OUTPUT CH LIB 0 199 2 3 4 tx rx Offfffff ff ASCIICODE GEQ LIB 0 199 6 tx rx Offfffff ASCIICODE EFFECT LIB 1 199 7 tx rx Offfffff ASCII C
381. ll be assigned to the USER DEFINED key that you selected in step 4 USER DEFINED KEY SETUP 2 Select Parameters for USER DEFINED KEY No 13 FUNCTION PARAMETER 1 EFFECT RACK 4 CANCEL NOTE f you specify CURRENT PAGE in the PARAMETER 1 column the Tap Tempo function can be used for the currently displayed effect rack e f you specify RACK x 1 8 in the PARAMETER 1 column you will be able to use the Tap Tempo function only for a specific effect rack e For more information on USER DEFINED keys see USER DEFINED keys on page 169 In the Function Access Area press the RACK button to access the VIRTUAL RACK window and then use the EFFECT tab to display the EFFECT field Press the rack in which the effect you want to control is mounted The EFFECT popup window will appear CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual 9 10 Press the effect type field to open the EFFECT TYPE popup window and select an effect type that includes the BPM parameter The BPM parameter is included in delay type and modulation type effects and can be used to specify the delay time or modulation speed NOTE For details on the parameters of each effect type refer to the Appendices see page 233 Set the SYNC parameter to ON At the desired tempo repeatedly press the USER DEFINED key to which you assigned the Tap Tempo function The average interval BPM at which you press the key will be calculated
382. low a specified THRESHOLD by a specified RATIO THRESHOLD dB 54 to 0 55 points e iit of input signal required to 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 5 1 1 7 1 2 0 1 2 5 1 3 0 1 3 5 1 4 0 1 5 0 1 6 0 1 8 0 1 10 1 20 1 1 16 points This determines the amount of expansion This determines how soon the expander returns to its normal gain once the trigger signal level exceeds the threshold This determines how soon the signal is expanded once the signal level drops below the threshold The value is expressed as the duration required for the level to change by 6 dB OUT GAIN dB 0 0 to 18 0 181 points This sets the expander s output signal level This determines how expansion is applied at the threshold For higher knee settings expansion is applied gradually as the signal falls below the specified threshold creating a more natural sound ATTACK ms 0 120 121 points 44 1kHz 6 ms 46 0 sec RELEASE ms 48kHz 5 ms 42 3 sec 160 points Hard 1 5 6 points I O Characteristics KNEE hard OUT GAIN 0 0dB e Time Series Analysis RATIO oo 1 gt Input Signal gt Output Signal gt gt amp THRESHOLD ATTACK RELEASE amp 2 8 TE c 5 THRESHOLD B d E o j Input Level Time Time RATIO CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual COMPANDER HARD COMPANDER SOFT COMPANDER S The hard and sof
383. ls Input 44 Channel library operations fem 45 Output channels de M Signal flow for output channels issis 46 Specifying the channel name icon and channel 47 Sending signals from MIX channels to the STEREO MONO bus 48 Sending signals from MIX channels and STEREO MONO channels to MATRE Noc P ON 5 Correcting delay between channels Output 55 Channel 55 Contents EO and SO About EO ANC YMA WS MEN 56 56 IT 39 Using the EO or Dynamics 63 Grouping and linking eee OF About DCA groups and Mute groups esee 64 RADCA 64 ASST AES 66 Soe 70 Copying moving or initializing a 73 Scene 1 FF SCCM TMS eT DSIna Scene TICINO EC 77 ENCIME NICE
384. ly in the input field the text will scroll horizontally Press the OK button to close the popup window 7 If necessary use the SONG TITLE FILE NAME SORT button ARTIST SORT button and MOVE UP MOVE DOWN buttons on screen to change the order of the title list Use the following buttons to change the order of the title list SONG TITLE FILE NAME SORT button Press this button to sort the title list in numerical gt alphabetical order by title file name Pressing the button repeatedly will alternate between ascending and descending order ARTIST SORT button Press this button to sort the title list in numerical gt alphabetical order by artist name Pressing the button repeatedly will alternate between ascending and descending order MOVE UP MOVE DOWN buttons Press these buttons to move the track number of the file currently selected in the title list upward or downward by one SAVE LIST button Press this button to store the title list order and playback selections the PLAY check symbol to a USB flash drive as a play list You should perform this operation if you want the state of the title list to be preserved even after you disconnect the USB flash drive or turn off the power to the console Since these settings are stored for each folder a confirmation dialog box will ask you whether you want to save them when you attempt to change folders CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual Using the CL console with Nuendo Live
385. mat The date and time you specify here will affect the time stamp used when saving a scene 1 2 In the Function Access Area press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen In the center of the SETUP screen press the DATE TIME button to access the DATE TIME popup window DATE TIME x DATE 01 2012 0 TIME FORMAT gt MM DD YYYY 24 Hour DD MM YYvYY 7 12 Hour YvvYY WM DD 00 00 MODE MODE CANCEL OK This popup window includes the following items 1 DATE Specifies the date of the internal clock 2 TIME Specifies the time of the internal clock 3 FORMAT Specifies the format in which the time of the internal clock is displayed In the FORMAT field press the MODE buttons several times to select the desired format for date and time display You can select from the following display formats Date MM DD YYYY Month Day Year DD MM YYYY Day Month Year YYYY MM DD Year Month Day Time 24 Hour hours shown in the range of 0 23 12 Hour hours shown from 0am 11am and Opm 11pm Use multifunction knobs 1 6 on the top panel to specify the current date and time When you have finished making settings press the OK button The date time and display format you specified will be finalized and the popup window will close If you press the CANCEL button or the x symbol instead of the OK button your changes will be discarded and the popup window will close
386. mmm mm ASCII CODE DATA Onnnnnnn nh Number High Onnnnnnn nl Number Low ch Channel High cl Channel Low EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive MODULE NAME 4 2 2 Function Name Function Name Store LibStr Recall LibRcl Unknown Factor Store LibUnStr Unknown Factor Recall LibUnRcl Store Undo only Score LibStrUd Recall Undo only Scene LibRclUd CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual Appendices 4 2 3 Module Name Function Number Channel 1 tx rx Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Module Name Dynamics LIB 0 1 2 53 4 B tx Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Scene SCENE INPUT CH LIB 0 1 tx Ommmmmmm mm ASCII CODE Output EQ ___ 0 6 tx DATA Osssssss sh number source start High Dynamics DYNA _ _ _ EFFECT LIB 0 7 tx Osssssss sl number source start Low Input CH INCHNNL_ Premium Effect LIB 0 9 tx Oeeeeeee eh number source end High Output CH OUTCHNNL Dante Input Patch LIB 0 5 Ux 1 number source end Low Effect EFFECT LibStrUd SCENE 0 0 Oddddddd dh number destination start High Portico5033 p5033 LibRclUd SCENE 0 0 Oddddddd dl number destination to start Low Portico5043 P5043 1 0 CH1 71 72 EOX 11110111 F7 End ofexclusive U76 U76 72 ST IN 1L 87 51 IN 8R EQP 1A 3 512 1 519 MATRIX 8 DynamicEQ DYNAEQ _ L 1026 STERE
387. munication port used for transmitting and receiving link information when operations such as cue and scene store recall are linked between cascade connected CL series consoles 200 CU 5 6 3 1 1 Reference Manual 4 Press the port select popup button for the bus for which you want to assign the port The PORT SELECT popup window will appear PORT SELECT Select candidate This popup window contains the following items 1 Category select list Selects the port slot 1 3 that will be shown on the screen 2 Port select buttons Within the specified slot these buttons select the ports that will be patched D Use the category select list and port select buttons to select the desired slot and output ports and then press the CLOSE button The port will be assigned to the selected bus 6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to assign ports to other buses NOTE You cannot assign two or more buses to the same output port If you select a port to which a signal route has already been assigned the previous assignment will be canceled Other functions 7 If you want to use the Cascade Link function to link parameters and events between two CL consoles proceed as follows 1 Use the CASCADE COMM PORT field to select the port that will transmit and receive control signals for cascade link You can choose from the following items NONE No link operation e MIDI Use MIDI port e SLOTI
388. n choose from the following items NONE No port will be used MID MIDI IN Rx and OUT Tx connectors on the rear panel SLOT1 A card that supports serial transmission and is installed in Slot 1 on the rear panel 2 PORT NO field If you select SLOT 1 in the TERMINAL field choose port number 1 8 in this field The number of available ports will vary depending on the card that is installed The currently available card is valid only for port 1 Specify the type of port and the port number Use buttons to select an item Press the OK button to confirm the selected port and close the MIDI SETUP popup window NOTE Alternatively you can select a port by pressing the desired port name in the field or by pressing the field to highlight it and then rotating one of the multifunction knobs to select the port 151 specify the channel on which MIDI messages will be transmitted or received press the channel select popup button The MIDI SETUP popup window for selecting the channel will appear Operations in this window are the same for both transmission Tx and reception Rx This window includes the following items MIDI SETUP 2 Select MIDI Tx Channel CANCEL 1 CH field Enables you to select CH1 CH106 as the channel that will transmit or receive MIDI messages 7 Select the channel Use the buttons to select an item Press the OK button to confirm the selected channel and clo
389. n controlling MIX channels or MATRIX channels Eo 3 4 Other CUE group These cue signals are operated via buttons displayed on the touch screen This group is enabled if you turn on the CUE button in the EFFECT popup window or the PREMIUM popup window or if you turn on the KEY IN CUE button in the DYNAMICS 1 popup window This group will automatically be disabled when you exit the corresponding popup window On screen CUE button You cannot turn on cue monitoring between different groups simultaneously Normally the group to which the most recently pressed CUE key or on screen CUE KEY IN CUE button belongs will take priority and the CUE keys for the previously selected group will be defeated However if you have switched the cue signal group in a specific order when the CUE MODE setting is MIX CUE the state of the CUE keys for the previously selected group will be restored when the current cue signal is defeated The following illustration shows the priority of the CUE keys After you Other CUE group have switched groups from lower to upper levels if you then defeat cue for INPUT CUE group the upper group the previous CUE key status of the group immediately below will be restored DCA CUE group For example if you switch groups in the order of OUTPUT CUE group gt DCA OUTPUT CUE group CUE group gt INPUT CUE group gt Other CUE group you can then successively defeat the CUE
390. n you have finished making settings click the x symbol in the upper right of the window to return to the previous screen Changing the input patch settings This section explains how to change the patching of each input channel 1 Category select list 1 Usethe Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to access the OVERVIEW screen Selects the category of channel shown in the popup window The categories correspond to the for the input channel to which you want to assign the input source following channels They vary depending on the output port type MIX MATRIX MIX 1 MIX 24 MATRIX 1 MATRIX 8 ehs Zo cha Zo chs A che A che ST MONO MONI CUE STEREO L STEREO R MONO C MONI L MONI R D o Oo o o o o MONI C CUE L e DIRECT OUT 1 32 CH1 CH32 Direct Outs DIRRECT OUT 33 64 CH33 CH64 Direct Outs DIRECT OUT 65 72 CH65 CH72 Direct Outs e INSERT OUT 1 32 CH1 CH32 Insert outs e INSERT OUT 33 64 CH33 CH64 Insert outs e INSERT OUT 65 72 CH65 CH72 Insert outs INSERT OUT MIX MATRIX Insert outs MIX1 MIX24 MATRIX 1 MATRIX8 e INSERT OUT ST MONO Insert outs for STEREO L STEREO R and MONO C e CASCADE MIX MATRINX 24 MATRIX1 MATRIXS8 e CASCADE ST MONO CUE STEREO STEREO
391. nal Power Supply is Cut Off File Access is Busy Meaning Parameter xxx was copied to the copy buffer Parameter xxx was initialized Parameter xxx was pasted from the copy buffer Parameter xxx was exchanged with the contents of the copy buffer ALTERNATE FUNCTION was turned off The Monitor Define function allows a maximum of eight sources to be selected but you attempted to assign more than eight In the USER DEFINED KEYS popup of the CL3 CL1 you attempted to edit an item that cannot be edited for that model This popup window cannot be bookmarked You attempted to mount a specific device at a position where it cannot be mounted Cannot paste the character string Failed to recall a scene memory or library You attempted to select a channel that cannot be operated due to your user level or some other reason Failed to store a scene memory or library You pressed the UNDO button when Undo was not available Channel settings have been copied Channel settings have been moved Channel settings have been returned to the default settings File on the USB flash drive could not be accessed for some reason File could not be saved to the USB flash drive Current user was changed to xxx You attempted to delete a directory but failed because there were files remaining in the directory Invalid signals are being exchanged with CL Editor Too much data is being received at the CL Editor input port Too much
392. nation is set to monaural or FIXED this knob will not appear ST IH 1L ST IH 2L SEND LEVEL knob Indicates the level of signals sent to the selected send destination Press this knob to control the level using the multifunction knobs If the send source is monaural this knob functions as a PAN knob Use the TO MATRIX SEND ON OFF buttons to switch signals sent from the MIX and STEREO MONO channels to the currently selected MATRIX bus on or off 7 If necessary you can use the PRE buttons to select the point from which the signal is sent from the MIX or STEREO MONO channel to the MATRIX bus 8 Repeat steps 3 6 to adjust the send level for other MATRIX buses in the same way If the send source is stereo you can use the PAN BALANCE mode setting in the TO STEREO MONO popup window to select whether PAN BALANCE will function as a PAN or BALANCE knob Moo um TO STEREO MONO RtiL Rt2L ST MONO ST MONO LCR LCR MODE MODE C PAN PAN BALANCE gt BALANCE MODE MODE 53 CU 5 UL 3 A 1 Reference Manual Using the faders SENDS ON FADER mode You can use the faders on the top panel to adjust signals that are sent from the MIX and STEREO channels to a specific MATRIX bus 1 2 3 Make sure that an output port is assigned to the MATRIX bus to which you want to send signals and that your monitor system etc is connected to the corresponding output
393. nction is on Program Change messages received from an external device will be retransmitted without modification 3 PROGRAM CHANGE MODE field Enables you to select the Program Change transmit receive mode SINGLE If this button is on Program Changes will be transmitted and received on a single MIDI channel Single mode MULT If this button is on Program Changes will be transmitted and received on multiple MIDI channels Multi mode MIDI If this button is on Program Changes on all MIDI channels will be transmitted and received in Single mode Multi mode transmission reception and Single mode transmission are disabled 5 BANK If this button is on Bank Select messages be transmitted and received in Single mode Bank Select messages switch the group of Program Change messages to be used 4 CONTROL CHANGE field Enables you to switch MIDI Control Change message transmission and reception on or off Ee D c Switches Control Change transmission on or off Eo em Switches Control Change reception on or off ROH Switches on or off echo output of Control Change messages If this function is on Control Change messages received from an external device will be retransmitted without modification 5 CONTROL CHANGE MODE field Enables you to select the Control Change transmission reception mode If this button is on CL mix parame
394. nd connect the output ports of the sending unit the cascade slave to the input ports of the receiving unit the cascade master The following illustration shows an example in which three eight channel digital I O cards for each unit are installed in the cascade slave CL unit and in the cascade master CL unit The DIGITAL OUT jacks of the sending unit are connected to the DIGITAL IN jacks of the receiving unit Audio signals of unit A Audio signals of A B Cascade slave Cascade master Digital In this example up to twenty four buses chosen from MIX bus 1 24 MATRIX bus 1 8 STEREO bus L R MONO C bus and CUE bus L R can be shared and the mixed signals transmitted from the cascade master CL unit If you use three 16 ch digital I O cards all buses can be shared among the devices You must specify bus assignments for each or channel on each CL unit Separate procedures are outlined below for the cascade slave and the cascade master NOTE e f you are making a cascade connection between the CL unit and the PM5D you can use the CL unit as the cascade slave by setting the PM5D s CASCADE IN PORT SELECT to a slot However only the audio signals will be cascaded and the control signals cannot be linked You can also use an AD DA card to make cascade connections with an analog mixer There is no limit to the number of units that can be cascade connected but the signal delay at the cascade slave w
395. ndicates the send point of the corresponding bus If the PRE button on the MIX SEND 8ch screen is turned ON this PRE indicator will be turned on 3 ON button Press the right hand button to switch on or off the signal sent to two bus channels NOTE If the indices of a SEND PAN knob are white the send point is assigned as PRE if the indices are black it is assigned as POST If the send point is PRE you can specify the PRE point as either VARI PRE EQ or VARI PRE FADER in the BUS SETUP popup that appears when you press the SETUP button BUS SETUP button If the type of the destination bus is set to FIXED controllers 1 2 mentioned above will not be displayed The send level will be fixed at nominal level and the send point will be fixed at POST FADER For details see Basic settings for MIX buses and MATHIX buses on page 202 Press the SEND LEVEL knob or PAN knob on screen to open the SEND 8ch popup window CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual GAIN PATCH field This field enables you to make HA head amp analog gain settings and view the operational status of the head amp 1 GAIN knob Sets the analog gain of the head amp For a channel to which the head amp has not been patched a gray circle appears instead of the knob Press the knob to open the GAIN PATCH Ich popup window If the Gain Compensation function is turned on an indicator appears showing the level of the signal output to the audio network
396. nels MATRIX SEND CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual 4 If you turned on the MIX ON MIX SEND MATRIX or MATRIX SEND buttons step 3 use the buttons in the SEND PARAMETER field to specify the bus es for which you want operations to be linked multiple selections are allowed The table below lists the buttons you can select in the SEND PARAMETER field MIX 1 24 MIX buses 1 24 MATRIX 1 8 MATRIX buses 1 8 NOTE If nothing is selected in the SEND PARAMETER field the send on off and send level parameters will not be linked To link channels hold down the SEL key for the link source input channel and press the SEL key for the link destination channel At this time the values of the parameters you selected in steps 3 and 4 will be copied from the link source to the link destination channel Subsequent operations of the parameters you selected in steps 3 and 4 will be linked between channels that belong to the same link group The current link status is displayed in the channel display field of the window NOTE f you want to link three or more channels hold down the link source SEL key and successively press the SEL key for each channel you want to add to the link group e When you press the SEL key for a channel that belongs to a link group to make it light the SEL keys of all channels that belong to the same link group will blink f you link an input channel to a ST IN channel pa
397. ng was not possible because the file on the USB flash drive is write protected Memory initialization has been completed The help file has not been loaded The IP address or Gateway address setting is invalid Communication via the Network connector is not possible because the MAC address setting has been damaged for some reason Please contact your Yamaha service center listed at the end of the Owner s Manual separate document The USB flash drive could not be accessed because its format is invalid or unsupported The internal INT power supply has stopped operating Alternatively some other problem has occurred Contact a Yamaha service center listed at the end of the owner s manual separate document The internal INT power supply has started up normally KEY IN CUE was defeated because you switched from the DYNAMICS 1 popup window of an input channel to a different screen Loading from USB flash drive was aborted Finished loading from USB flash drive The backup battery voltage is low The number of songs that can be managed by the USB memory recorder has been exceeded All data has been initialized because the data in internal backup memory has been lost due to failure of the backup battery or some other reason Please contact your Yamaha service center listed at the end of the operating manual separate document An inappropriate signal is being input to the MIDI input port Too much data is being received at
398. ngs of each channel will be set in common as the OUTPUT 257 CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual STEREO MONO Channels Remeron Color SO SIEREO MONO NAME GLOBAL OUTPUTNAME STEREO OUTPUT PATCH GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH OUTPUT PATCH O f o MONO INSERT PATCH GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH OUTPUTPATCH o STEREO MONO INSERT PATCH GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH output parca 0 MONO INSERT SEO MONO PROCESSING STEREO MONO SERT STEREO MONO PROCESSING _ tt Key In Source Dynamics STEREO MONOtQ MONO PROCESSING STEREO monoa MONOPROCESNG _ STEREO MONO MATRIX ON STEREO MONO FADER ON STEREO MONO MATRIX SEND STEREO MONO FADER ON o STEREO MONO MATRIX SEND STEREO MONO FADER ON 0 O O NENNEN O O CO To Matrix de SO ERE Balance d O d O0 i o EE NN E mo MONO MATRXSEND STEREO MONO BAL TO ST BAL GLOBAL PASTE ONLY STEREO MONO FADERION O STEREO MONORADJON _ STEREO MONOTADER STEREO MONOFADON _ Emm m w ooo o ERE Recall Safe Focus ecal GobalPate a 4 These parameters are available if FADER ON or PROCESSING for the Send source channel is set to ON At that time WITH SEND for the S
399. nob in unit of ms and below the knob in the currently selected scale If ms millisecond has been selected for the DELAY SCALE nothing will appear above the knob CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual INPUT DELAY CH1 48 CH49 72 ST IN CL5 CH49 64 ST IN CL3 ST IN CL1 DELAY scaLe Sample NG INPUT DELAY CH3 ch 3 CH4 CHS ch4 lt CH6 ch5s ch 6 CHT CH1 CH2 j ch lt ch 1 ch 2 0 00 0 00 ms 7 ms 0 0 0 0 sample sample sample sample sample sample nu PA CH10 2 CH11 2 cng Ps c CH14 PA ch10 chil chl4 vM 74 ME vL 74 oe le aad A 2 VA 0 00 72 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 sample 0 00 ms ms ms 0 0 0 0 sample sample sample sample 2 CH27 CH28 2 29 2 CH31 PA ro 4 ch 28 29 a ch3l AEN e ch27 0 00 0 00 i sample sample ms A 2 A 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 ms ms ms ms 0 0 0 sample sample sample sample 0 00 ms CH43 CH44 CH45 CH46 na na i 0 00 0 00 v ms 0 00 ms 0 sample CH23 j ch23 0 00 0 sample CH22 ch22 0 sample CH20 ch20 0 sample CHIT chi 2 t oe sample pr same le CH32 PA ch32 0 00 ms 0 00 ms sample CH25 ch25 CH26 ch26 CH30 ch30 0 0 f sample sample CH39 ch39 a fi
400. nob once again to access the TO STEREO MONO popup window In the TO STEREO MONO popup window you can control a signal that is sent from the MIX channel to the STEREO MONO bus This popup window features four types of view Use the tabs near the bottom of the window to select one of the four views These windows include the following items 48 CU 5 3 A Reference Manual TO STEREO MONO popup window 8ch You can control the on off and pan balance settings of the signal sent from MIX channels to the STEREO L R bus and MONO C bus in groups of eight channels TO STEREO MONO MIX2 MIX3 4 MIXS MIX6 MIX8 Mx 5 ST MONO LCR MX 6 ST MONO LCR MX 8 ST MONO LCR MX 2 ST MONO LOR MX 3 ST MONO LCR 4 ST MONO LCR MODE MODE MODE v MODE 2 C E 2 x C C PAN PAN PAN PAN 1 Channel select button Selects the channel You can select multiple channels simultaneously 2 Mode LEDs 3 MODE ST MONO LCR mode select button Press this button repeatedly to toggle between ST MONO and LCR The LED of the currently selected mode will light 4 ST MONO buttons These buttons are individual on off switches for signals that are sent from each channel to the STEREO bus MONO bus when the MONO button is set to ST MONO mode 5 gt clipping indicator Lights to indicate a si
401. nob so that you will be able to use the multifunction knob to adjust the gain HA meter Indicates the input level of a mic connected to the selected input port GC ON button Turns the Gain Compensation gain correction function on or off The button will appear if the input jack of the I O device is patched Gain Compensation meter Indicates the level after Gain Compensation It will appear if the input jack of the I O device is patched NOTE These parameters and meters will not appear if no input port is selected 3 TALKBACK ON button Switches talkback on or off 4 ASSIGN field Channel select buttons Enable you to select a channel bus on which the talkback signal is sent e CLEAR ALL button Press this button to clear all selections 3 Connect a mic to the TALKBACK jack on the front panel and then rotate the TALKBACK GAIN knob to adjust the input sensitivity of the mic signal The meter in the TALKBACK IN field indicates the input level of the mic connected to the TALKBACK jack If you want phantom power 48V to be supplied to the TALKBACK jack turn on the 48V button located in the TALKBACK IN field CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual 4 If you want to use input jack other than the TALKBACK jack as supplementary input for talkback follow the steps below 4 1 Press the INPUT TO TALKBACK patch button in the INPUT TO TALKBACK field to open the PORT SELECT popup window 4 2 Press the button
402. ns Select the type of filter from or LPF To disable the filter press the button that is turned on 6 deme ORG Indicates the filter Q You can adjust the value by using the multifunction knob e FREQUENCY knob Indicates the filter cutoff frequency You can adjust the value by using the multifunction knob 3 KEY IN CUE button Enables you to cue monitor the signal that has been selected as the KEY IN SOURCE signal Cue will be canceled if you have selected a dynamics type that does not feature this button or if you move to a different screen CU 5 6 VL 3 V Reference Manual DYNAMICS 1 2 popup window 8ch This window displays the settings for eight channels including the currently selected channel You can switch between eight channel groups such as 1 8 and 9 16 Compared to the one channel display fewer parameters can be controlled This window is convenient if you want to adjust the threshold or certain other parameters while watching the adjacent channels to the left and the right DYNAMICS 1 DEFRULT LIBRARY CH 1 CH 2 CH 6 1 LIBRARY button 2 DEFAULT button 3 COPY button 4 PASTE button 5 COMPARE button These buttons are the same as those on the DYNAMICS Ich popup window 6 Channel select button Selects the channel that you want to control The current channel icon and number appear on the button and the channel name app
403. ns the following items YQ SETUP DOO D CURRENT USER STORAGE D saveitoap Administrator USER KEY PASSWORD CHANGE How all operations are permitted SYSTEM SETUP 48V MASTER BUS SETUP ON MIXER SETUP WORD CLOCK CASCADE z MIDI Z GPI i SLOT BATTERY NETWORK POWER SUPPLY DANTE CONTRAST BRIGHTNESS NAME NAME CH COLOR SCREEN PANEL LAMP OMOMOMG CONSOLE LOCK 9 9 20 CURRENT USER field This field enables you to make various user related settings 1 USER SETUP popup button Press this button to open the USER SETUP popup window in which you can make various settings for each user 2 CURRENT USER popup button Press this button to open the LOG IN popup window in which you can switch log in users Other functions 3 COMMENT EDIT popup button Press this button to open the USER COMMENT EDIT popup window in which you can enter comments 4 PASSWORD CHANGE popup button Press this button to open the PASSWORD CHANGE popup window in which you can change the password 5 SAVE KEY popup button Enables you to save the user authentication key Press this button to open the SAVE KEY popup window see page 165 STORAGE field This field enables you to create save or load a user authentication key 6 CREATE USER KEY popup button Press this button to open the CREATE USER KEY popup window in which you can create a new
404. nsert in DIRECT OUT field This field enables you to make insert settings DIRECT OUT 1 Popup button Press this button to open the INSERT DIRECT OUT Ich popup window The Direct Out level value will appear below the button 2 ON button Switches the Direct Out on or off RECALL SAFE field This field enables you to make Recall Safe settings 1 Popup button Press this button to open the RECALL SAFE popup window 2 ON button Switches the Recall Safe status on or off 3 PARTIAL indicator This will light if recall safe applies only to some of the parameters not to all channel settings SELECTED CHANNEL section FADER field This field enables you to view and make settings for the channel on off status and the level 1 Fader Displays the current level Use the faders on the top panel to set the levels 2 Level indicator Displays the current level setting by numerical value If the signal is clipping at any point in the channel the XCLIP indicator will light 3 ON button Switches the channel status on or off The button is linked with the corresponding ON key on the top panel DCA MUTE field i This field enables you to view and select the DCA or mute group to which I D the channel is assigned M 1 Tabs Select DCA or mute asa group to set Pressthe selected tab once again to open the DCA MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE popup window When the group tab i
405. nt from the MIX STEREO MONO channels to the currently selected MATRIX bus MATRIX channels will continue showing the channel fader values and ON setting In SENDS ON FADER mode the Function Access Area in the display will show the buttons that enable you to switch between MIX1 16 ON FADER mode and MIX17 24 MATRIX ON FADER mode and the buttons that enable you to select the destination MIX MATRIX buses CH 1 E CH 2 CH 3 CH 4 CH 5 CH 6 CH 7 CH 8 ch 1 ch 2 ch 3 ch 4 ch 5 ch ch 7 ch 8 OBO BBY ee ge gv lt R scene 000 Initial Data 43 Input channels Press the MIX1 16 MIX17 24 MATRIX switch button repeatedly to select MIX1 16 or MIX17 24 MATRIX In this way you can use the MIX MATRIX bus select buttons to specify the destination MIX MATRIX buses Use the MIX MATRIX bus selection buttons in the Function Access Area to select the send destination MIX MATRIX bus NOTE Alternatively press a SEND LEVEL knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to display a popup window from which you can select a MIX MATRIX bus You can also select a MIX MATRIX bus by using the Bank Select keys and the SEL keys in the Centralogic section If you select the buses by pressing the SEL keys the setting of the MIX1 16 MIX17 24 MATRIX switch button will be changed automatically f you press the currently selected MIX MATRIX bus select button again cue monitoring will be turned on for the related MIX MATRIX chann
406. o Dual In Stereo Dual Out Premium Rack x 8 systems CU 5 6 VL 3 V Reference Manual Appendices ON X ONON 44O INNO 7 9DpOW ATOd INNO O ONOW NO INWO 2 ATOd NO INWO T pue j1esoM 5 5 9SAI3OV SSION IIV 44O0 NO S 43UD IV 49590 330 punos TIY sobessop 99M UOWWOD SATSNTOXH woe qsds KEK KKKKKKKKK KK LoL 0 O 6LL I23UD eTqeubtssw COE It L gHSN HS I Nd IN 66 86 eed 8c 9 joeles xueg cCE 0 330 939N oo O23UO 32 53 UO 930N SOTOA enu pezraouew sobessop I 3 negJjed obue S T L pooueu 9I I SET obueuo 2 Zequnn 930N 9uueuo O T JILI TID ID SIO ZIOZ ACW eTosuop VHVWVA CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual 275 Index A Assignable encoders 172 Functions that can be assigned 263 Audio file links to a scene recall 94 C Calibration function 207 208 209 211 Cascade 200 1
407. of the same channel SELF POST EQ The post EQ signal of the same channel o MIX OUT 21 24 Output signals of MIX channels 21 24 e CH1 72 POST EQ ST INIL 8R POST EQ MIX1 24 POST EQ MTRX1 8 POST EQ ST L R MONO POST EQ The post EQ signal of the corresponding channel 1 The selectable signals are limited to the corresponding eight channel group NOTE In the case of the CL3 CL1 channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown 4 3 Press the CLOSE button to close the popup window If you want to copy dynamics settings to another channel or initialize the dynamics settings use the tool buttons in the popup window NOTE Dynamics settings can be saved and recalled at any time using the dedicated library You can also take advantage of a wide variety of presets suitable for various instruments or situations e You can also access the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen and use the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to edit the dynamics settings see page 9 e Even when the DYNAMICS 1 2 popup window is displayed you can use the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to control the dynamics CU 5 VL 3 V Reference Manual Using the EQ Dynamics libraries You can use dedicated libraries to store and recall EQ and dynamics settings EQ library LIBRARY button There is an INPUT EQ LIBRARY that lets you store and recall EQ settings for input
408. ogram number This popup window includes the following items 2 MIDI PROGRAM CHANGE BANK1 1 El Select Prodram Change Parameters DESTINATION LIBRARY CANCEL 1 TYPE field Enables you to select the type of event The following table lists the events you can select SCENE Scene memory recall operations EFFECT Effect library recall operations PREMIUM RACK Premium Rack library recall operations 2 DESTINATION field Enables you to select the rack for which you want to recall a library item If EFFECT or PREMIUM RACK is selected in the TYPE field the rack number will be shown If SCENE is selected this will indicate and no choice is available for this field 9 LIBRARY NUMBER LIBRARY NAME field Enables you to select the scene or library item to recall If you selected SCENE or EFFECT in the TYPE field the LIBRARY NUMBER and LIBRARY NAME field will appear If you selected PREMIUM RACK in the TYPE field the LIBRARY NUMBER field will appear 154 9 10 MIDI Use the TYPE field to select the type of event to assign If the type is other than SCENE use the DESTINATION field to select the rack number into which you want to recall the item Use the LIBRARY NUMBER LIBRARY NAME field to select the scene or library number that will be recalled Use the buttons to select an item Press the OK button to confirm the change and close the MIDI PROGRAM CHANGE popup window NOTE You
409. oint is set to PRE SEND ON OFF button Switches the send of each send source channel on or off 9 SEND PAN BALANCE knob Sets the panning or balance of signals sent to the stereo send destination If the send destination is set to monaural or FIXED this knob will not appear If the send source is monaural this knob functions as a PAN knob If the send source is stereo you can use the PAN BALANCE mode setting in the TO STEREO MONO popup window to select whether PAN BALANCE will function as a PAN or BALANCE knob TO STEREO MONO RtiL Rt2L ST MONO gt ST MONO LCR LCR MODE MODE PAN PAN BALANCE gt BALANCE MODE MODE Input channels The knob for the mode selected here will appear MIX SEND to MIX 1 ST IH 1L ST IH 2L SEND LEVEL knob Indicates the level of signals sent to the selected send destination Press this knob to control the level using the multifunction knobs If the send destination is set to FIXED only a gray circle will appear Use the TO MIX MATRIX SEND ON OFF buttons to switch signals sent from the input channels to the currently selected MIX MATRIX bus on or off If necessary use the PRE buttons to select the send point of a signal that is sent from each input channel to a VARI type MIX MATRIX bus NOTE e f the PRE button is on you can also select PRE EQ immediately before the EQ or PRE FADER immediately before the fader for each MIX MAT
410. on MIX bus will appear This popup window contains on off switches for the signals sent from each channel to the corresponding bus and lets you select the send point PRE or POST see page 41 NOTE At this time you make sure that the send level from the ST IN channel you selected in step 3 to the corresponding MIX bus is set to dB If you raise this send level the output of the effect will be returned to the input of the same effect possibly causing oscillation 9 To adjust the master level of the effect send call up the MIX channel you specified as the input source of the rack in step 2 to the Centralogic section and adjust the corresponding fader Set the level as high as possible without allowing the post effect signal to reach the overload point NOTE The input and output levels of the effect are shown by the input output meters in the upper right of the EFFECT popup window 10 adjust the effect return level operate the ST IN channel that you selected as the output destination for the rack in step 3 Inserting an internal effect into a channel This section explains how to insert an effect into a channel by assigning the input output of the internal effect to the input output of the desired channel except for a ST IN channel 1 Follow steps 1 3 described in Virtual rack operations on page 115 to mount an effect in a rack The rack in which an effect is mounted will indicate the effect type used by that effe
411. on on off function to a USER DEFINED key see page 169 CU 5 UL 3 V Reference Manual Using an MBCL meter bridge optional the or CL1 console If the optional meter bridge MBCL is installed on the CL3 or CL1 console you will always be able to view the output levels of MIX MATRIX STEREO MONO and CUE channels The MBCL meters indicate the output levels 12 segment steps OVER 3 dB 6 dB 9 dB 12 dB 15 dB 18 dB 24 dB 30 dB 40 dB 50 dB 60 dB You can select the metering point the point at which the level is detected from the following choices For information on how to change the metering point refer to the section Operations in the METER screen on page 111 Immediately before the EQ PRE FADER Immediately before the fader POST Immediately after the ON key 113 Meters CU 5 6 VL 3 V 1 Reference Manual Graphic EQ effects and Premium Rack Graphic EQ effects and Premium Rack GEQ RACK1 GEQ1 INSERT IN PATCH MIX INPUT CH This chapter explains how to use the built in graphic EQ effects and Premium Rack e 2 oo STEREO SLOT2 1 16 INSERT OUT 4 SLOT3 1 16 LR MONO C MATRIX About the virtual rack INSERT OUT gt GEQ2 16 IN CH INSERT IN 1 72 64 48 To CH INSERT IN CL series consoles enable you to use the built in graphic EQ subsequently abbrevi
412. on or off the Gain Compensation function that maintains a consistent signal level on the audio network 5 FREQUENCY knob HPF button These controllers switch on or off the high pass filter built into the head amp of the I O unit and adjust its cutoff frequency If you press the FREQUENCY knob to select it you will be able to adjust it using the corresponding multifunction knob 6 Displayed port switch tabs These tabs switch the port that is displayed in the I O DEVICE HA popup window 7 GC ALL ON button GC ALL OFF button Switch Gain Compensation on or off for all input channels simultaneously CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual DANTEG RLL GAIN PATCH field Press the GAIN PATCH field of the channel for which you want to adjust the I O G RLL OFF DANTE 001 007 A GAIN m A GAIN 0 0 D GAIN 0 0 D GRIN remotely control the I O device s head amp from an input channel of the CL series console use the bank select keys in the Centralogic section to access the OVERVIEW screen that includes the channel for which you want to control the head amp 4 device s head amp The GAIN PATCH popup window will appear GAIN PATCH CH1 CH2 ch 1 ch 2 ch 3 ch 4 ch 5 ch 6 DANTEI DANTE2 DANTES DANTEA DANTES 5 When have finished making settings window press the x symbol to close the popup 142 6 popup window will ap
413. on this button and the RECORDER INPUT CUE button simultaneously PLAYBACK OUT meters Indicates the level of the recorder playback output signal 3 To assign channels to the recorder inputs press the RECORDER INPUT popup button L or R The CH SELECT popup window will appear CH SELECT El Select candidate REC IH L 1 Category list Enables you to select the type of channels 2 Channel select buttons Select the channels that will be patched to the USB memory recorder s inputs e MIX 1 24 MIX channels 1 24 e MIRX 1 8 MATRIX channels 1 8 STEREO channel L R Recorder e SILC esee STEREO channel L mixed with the MONO C channel ST STEREO channel R mixed with the MONO C channel MONO channel e Direct output of an INPUT channel 1 72 NOTE In the case of the CL3 CL1 channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown Use the category list and the channel select buttons to select the channel that you want to patch to the USB memory recorder output If you select a channel to which a channel is already patched a dialog box will ask you to confirm the patch change Press the OK button in the dialog box When you have finished assigning the channel press the CLOSE button You will return to the RECORDER screen Assign a channel to the oth
414. ones 1 INPUT OUTPUT NO ASSIGN mo RssicN _ U 6 NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN L ft L R U76 LIMITING AMPLIFIER E INPUT MATTACK IRELEASE 81 35 OdB 3 5195 175 4 gra 3 4 1 INPUT knob Adjusts the input level As the input level gets higher more compression is applied 2 ATTACK knob Adjusts the compressors attack time Fully rotate the knob clockwise to set the fastest attack time 3 RELEASE knob Adjusts the compressor s release time Fully rotate the knob clockwise to set the fastest release time 4 RATIO switch buttons Use these five buttons to set the compression ratio button with the higher number will raise the compression ratio more Pressing the ALL button selects All mode in which the RATIO will become high and sharp compression with a faster release time will be applied creating substantially distorted aggressive sound 5 METER switch buttons Switch the meter display x cj cm Indicates the amount of gain reduction applied by the compressor 4 8 Each meter uses 18 dB as the reference level ofthe output signal and indicates OVU for the value of the reference level added by 4 dB or 8 dB Turns off the meter display 134 Graphic EQ effects and Premium Rack 6 OUTPUT knob Adjusts the output level If you have adjusted the amount of gain reduction by changing the INPUT level the l
415. onsole will be followed by the other CL console Other functions Basic settings for MIX buses and MATRIX buses This section explains how to change the basic settings for MIX buses and MATRIX buses such as switching between stereo and monaural and selecting the send point from which the signal of an input channel will be sent The settings you make in the following procedure will be saved as part of the scene 1 In the Function Access Area press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen 2 Inthe center right of the SETUP screen press the BUS SETUP button to open the BUS SETUP popup window In the BUS SETUP popup window you can make various settings for MIX buses and MATRIX buses BUS SETUP MIX BUS 1 16 SETUP FOR INPUT CHANNEL SIGNAL TYPE PRE FADER SEND POINT BUS TYPE PAN LINK BUS SETUP MIX BUS 17 24 MATRIX BUS SETUP _ FOR INPUT CHANNELS SIGNAL TYPE PRE FADER SEND POINT BUS TYPE PAN LINK VARI ADER PRE FA 1 PRE FADER MIX 1 2 MIX 17 18 VARI PRE FADER MIX 3 4 MIX 19 20 VAR MIX 5 6 MIX 21 22 TERE MIX 7 8 MIX 23 24 WAS 9 10 MATRIX 1 2 MIX 11 12 MATRIX 3 4 PRE FADER MIX 13 14 MATRIX 5 6 PRE FADER HHHHHHHH HHHIHHHHH MIX 15 16 n A MIX 1 16 page MATRIX 7 8 PRE FADER PRE FADER MIX BUS 17 24 MATRIX BUS page 1 SIGNAL TYPE switch buttons Select how signals are processed for every adjacent pair of buses Select either STEREO stereo signal or MONOx2
416. ontrol press the GPI IN SETUP popup button The GPI IN SETUP popup window will appear GPI IN SETUP El Select Parameters for GPI IN 1 FUNCTION PARAMETER 1 CL EDITOR CONTROL CANCEL NOTE The items that can be selected are the same as for the USER DEFINED keys In each field select the desired function or parameter NOTE e With latched operation the function will switch between active and inactive each time a trigger is input from the external switch In this case we recommend that you use a non locking type of external switch With unlatched operation the function will be active only while the signal from the external switch is at the high level or low level In this case you may use either a non locking or a locking type of external switch as appropriate for your needs When you have finished making settings press the OK button You will return to the GPI screen Repeat steps 5 through 8 to specify functions and parameters for other ports NOTE Settings in the GPI screen are common to all scenes They can be saved as SETUP data 223 Other functions Using GPI OUT The GPI OUT ports of the GPI OUT connector allow you to control an external device by performing operations on the CL series console 1 Connect an external device to the CL series console s GPI connector 2 In the function access area press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen Press the MIDI GPI button The M
417. ontrol response It inherited the history of the 1073 which was praised as one of the greatest devices developed Mr Rupert Neve Yamahas VCM technology has modeled the EQ to the last detail including the input output transformer that was designed by Mr Rupert Neve himself As a result this processor model produces musically high quality sound even when bypassed Its response features unique effects For example if the Lo setting is cut the low range becomes tight and if the Hi setting is raised the desired range will be boosted without hurting your ears PREMIUM 1 INPUT OUTPUT INS CH 1 a 5033 INS CH 1 ch 1 Port icoS033 Dual ch 1 Portico Series 5 Equalizer 098 V 2 0 0 dB 80 00 Hz 1 ALL BYPASS button Switches EQ bypass on or off Even when EQ bypass is on the signal will pass through the input output transformer and amp circuits 2 TRIM knob Adjusts the input gain of the effect 3 LF LMF MF HMF HF Frequency knobs Adjust the frequency for each band 4 LF LMF MF HMF HF Gain knobs Adjust the amount of boost or cut for each band 5 LMF MF HMF Q knobs Adjust the Q steepness of each band The higher the Q value the narrower the range in which you can control the gain for the band CU 5 6 VL 3 V Reference Manual 6 IN button Turn LMF MF HMEF EQ on or respectively 7 LF HF IN button Turn LF and HF EQ on or
418. onversely operations or scene changes performed on the CL series console can send control signals to an external device For details on how to send control signals to an external device when you switch scenes refer to Outputting a control signal to an external device in tandem with scene recall GPI OUT on page 93 Using IN You can use the GPI IN ports of the GPI connector to control the parameters of the CL series console from an external device For example you could use an external switch to turn the CL series consoles Talkback on off operate the Tap Tempo function or switch scenes 1 2 Connect an external device to the CL series console s GPI connector In the function access area press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen _ CH1 ch 1 0 00 00 ADMIN Send To MIXI CURRENT USER STORAGE CREATE SAVE LOAD Administrator USER KEY IPASSWORD CHANGE How all operations are permitted SYSTEM SETUP 48V MASTER BUS SETUP MIXER SETUP WORD CLOCK CASCADE iI SLOT METER OUTPUT E PORT OVER BATTERY POWER SUPPLY DANTE MAIN NETWORK SUB 60 SETUP R scene 000 a Initial Data BRIGHTNESS NAME CH COLOR SCREEN PANEL LAMP CONTRAST NAME O CONSOL LOCK B CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual 3 Press the MIDI GPI button The MIDI SETUP screen will appear MIDI SETUP PORT CH PROGRAM CHANGE CONTRO
419. open If the receiving device requires high level take it from the 5V power supply pin However in this case the amount of current is limited for details refer to the Input output characteristics section in the separate Owner s Manual For each GPI OUT port specify the channel that will cause the external device to operate and the type of operation When you have finished making settings click the x symbol located in the upper right to close the FADER MODE screen 226 Other functions CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual Appendices EQ Library List Bass Drum 1 Bass Drum 2 Snare Drum 1 Snare Drum 2 Tom tom 1 High Hat Percussion ew men PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING SHELF PF Toons 265 Hz 1 06 wz 5 30 knz a 125 100 05 PEAKING PEAKING TPF 80 0 Hz 400 Hz 2 50 wz 125 kez a 14 4s 22 TT FEARING PEAKING PEAKING HSHEF PF 132 He 315 wie 5 00 kez a 125 4s om PEAKING PEAKING PEAKINC PF veo ve 335 Hz 236z rat 10 010 FEARING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING fe 2048 758 2098 1 PF 212 2 50 nz ao 14 109 125 028 ESHELF PEAKING PEAKING G 204 0008 3008 PF Tons 425 He 1 06 nie 13 2 eRe rat 20 99 PEAKING PEAKING
420. orresponding multifunction knob 5 Asnecessary use the multifunction knob to adjust the MIX BAL knob Adjusts the balance between the original sound and the effect sound included in the output signal from the effect This parameter is provided for all effect types If you are using the effect via send and return set this to 10096 effect sound only NOTE For more information on setting the effect parameters see Editing the internal effect parameters on page 125 To adjust the effect send level of an input channel use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to access the OVERVIEW screen that includes the input channel you want to control CU 5 VL 3 V Reference Manual 7 Use the MIX1 16 MIX17 24 and MATRIX keys of the SELECTED CHANNEL section top panel so that the SEND field shows the MIX bus that is patched as the effect send You can also use the MIX1 16 MIX17 24 and MATRIX buttons in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen to switch the displayed bus Press the TO MIX SEND LEVEL knob that corresponds to the desired MIX bus and turn the multifunction knob to adjust the send level of the signal sent from each channel to the MIX bus In this state you can adjust the send level of the signal sent from the input channel to the internal effect Adjust the send level of other input channels in the same way If you press the selected knob once again the MIX SEND popup window 8ch for the send destinati
421. ou can enter the comment 3 PASSWORD Enables you to specify a password of up to eight characters Press this area to access a keyboard window in which you can enter the password 4 POWER USER Specifies whether Power User privileges will be granted to this user 5 ACCESS PERMISSION These settings specify the range of operations that the user can perform For details on each item refer to page 166 NOTE In the case of the CL3 CL1 faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown 4 5 User settings Security When you have specified the user name comment password power user privileges on off and user rights press the CREATE button The CREATE KEY popup window will appear CREATE KEV Select Destination to Create New User Key CREATE TO INTERNAL STORAGE User 01 g 6 g 10 CREATE TO USB STORAGE PATH of User 02 CLU CANCEL If you want to create a user authentication key in the console s internal memory press a button in the CREATE TO INTERNAL STORAGE field You can store ten keys in the consoles internal memory If you want to create a user authentication key on your USB flash drive press the button in the CREATE TO USB STORAGE field NOTE The file name of the user authentication key will be the current user name and it will be created and saved in the root directory Press the CREATE TO button The user authentication key will be crea
422. oup 2 DCA GROUP ASSIGN MUTE GROUP ASSIGN buttons Toggle between the DCA GROUP ASSIGN popup window and the MUTE GROUP ASSIGN popup window 3 Mute group assign field This area displays the channels assigned to the currently selected mute group While this window is displayed press the SEL key for the channel that you want to assign to the mute group The on screen fader for that channel will turn red and the channel will be assigned to the mute group Press the same SEL key once again if you want to remove the channel from the group If the MUTE SAFE button is on this field displays the channels that are targets for mute safe that is excluded from the mute groups The operation procedure to apply or cancel mute safe to the channels is the same as that for assigning or removing channels to or from a mute group The on screen faders of the assigned channels will turn green 4 Mute group select button Selects the mute group that you want to assign 5 MUTE SAFE button Use this button if you want to exclude a specific channel from all mute groups regardless of its assignment settings The mute group assign field displays the channels that are excluded from the mute groups For more information on mute safe Using the Mute Safe function on page 70 Grouping and linking 6 MUTE GROUP MASTER button Switches the corresponding mute group on or off 7 DIMMER LEVEL knob Sets the dimmer level for the corresponding mute g
423. oup assign field This area displays the channels assigned to the currently selected DCA group While this window is displayed press the SEL key for the channel that you want to assign to the DCA group The on screen fader for that channel will turn yellow and the channel will be assigned to the DCA group Press the same SEL key once again if you want to remove the channel from the group 4 DCA group select button Selects the DCA group that you want to assign NOTE e In the case of the CL3 CL1 faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown f the DCA 1 8 key or DCA 9 16 key has been selected in the Centralogic section you can access the DCA MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE popup window by pressing the SEL key twice in rapid succession In this case the DCA MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE popup window will appear with the corresponding DCA GROUP 1 16 button selected for that DCA group Use the DCA GROUP 1 16 buttons to select the DCA group to which you want to assign channels Use the SEL keys of the input channels to select the input channels that you want to assign to the group multiple selections are allowed The SEL keys of the assigned channels will light and the corresponding channels will be highlighted in yellow in the DCA group assign field of the window To cancel an assignment press a lit SEL key once again to make it go dark Assign channels to other DCA groups in the same way NOTE You can ass
424. out while the USB memory recorder was operating The USB flash drive s Protect setting is turned on Recorder processing was halted because the USB flash drive was disconnected while the USB memory recorder was operating The USB device was disconnected because of excessive USB current Recorder was halted because synchronization to the word clock was lost The format of the audio file is invalid The password you input was incorrect The CL series console cannot synchronize because the source selected by MASTER CLOCK SELECT in the WORD CLOCK screen is not appropriate The current user does not have permission to create a user key CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual Electrical characteristics All faders are nominal when measured Output impedance of signal generator 1500hms Fs 44 1 kHz or 48 kHz 20 Hz 20 kHz referenced to the nominal output level 1 kHz OMNI OUT 1 8 6000 1 5 0 5 OMNIIN 1a OMNIOUT 1 8 6000 mu 1 15 00 05 Fs 44 1 kHz 48 kHz 81 kHz level 62 dBu 66 dB Output level 4 0 dBu uie S i OMNI IN 1 8 OMNI OUT 1 8 6000 Input level 10 dBu 6 dB Output level 4 0 dBu Typ dn Full scale output Output level owwiouris OUT 1 8 600 0 101 0 dBu 5 30 dBFs phones level control max Total Harmonic Distortion Fs 44 1 kHz or 48 kHz Max Unit 4 dBu 20 Hz 20 kHz GAIN 66dB 0 1 OMNII
425. ows the output settings of the I O device Press here to access the OUTPUT PATCH popup window where you can make output port settings for the I O device If you press the SEL key of an output channel the corresponding port will light 141 I O device and external head amp 2 Toremotely control the head amp of an I O device press the I O device in the HA display The I O DEVICE HA popup window will appear In this window you can remotely control the head amp on the I O device from the CL series console by using the on screen knobs and buttons or the multifunction knobs on the top panel 1 0 DEVICE 1 HA 1 001 gt 810322401 2 3 4 5 6 7 T48V 48V 48V 48V 48V 48V 48V R GRIN GRIN R GRIN GAIN R GRIN R GRIN R GRIN 6 x x N P J 80 0 80 0 80 0 80 0 FREQUENCY FREQUENCY FREQUENCY FREQUENCY OUTPUT 80 0 80 0 80 0 FREQUENCY FREQUENCY FREQUENCY 1 48V MASTER Indicates the on off status of the I O device s master phantom power Switching this on or off is performed on the I O device itself 2 48V button Switch phantom power on or off for each channel 3 GAIN knob Indicates the gain of the head amp on the I O device To adjust the value press the knob to select it and use multifunction knobs 1 8 The level meter located immediately to the right of the knob shows the input level of the corresponding port 4 GC button Switches
426. password has not been set pressing this button will execute the Console Lock immediately 197 Other functions CONTRAST BRIGHTNESS field This field enables you to set the LCD brightness and contrast BANK A BANK B buttons Select a bank to which you want to save the brightness and contrast settings You can save two different settings in bank A and B and switch between them if desired CONTRAST NAME knob Adjusts the contrast of the channel name display 0 BRIGHTNESS NAME knob Adjusts the brightness of the channel name display BRIGHTNESS CH COLOR knob Adjusts the brightness balance of the channel color and the channel name display BRIGHTNESS SCREEN knob Adjusts the brightness of the display BRIGHTNESS PANEL knob Adjusts the brightness of the panel LEDs BRIGHTNESS LAMP knob Adjusts the brightness of the lamp connected to the LAMP connector CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual Word clock and slot settings Word clock refers to the clock that provides the basis of timing for digital audio signal processing To send and receive digital audio signals between devices those devices must be synchronized to the same word clock If digital audio signals are transferred in an unsynchronized state the data may not be transmitted or received correctly and noise may be present in the signal even if the sampling rates are the same Specifically you must first decide which device will transmit the reference
427. paste destination scenes Scenes specified between FROM and TO inclusive become the paste destination Use multifunction knob 7 to specify the FROM value and multifunction knob 8 to specify the TO value Press the PASTE button The selected items of the current scene will be pasted to the scene s in memory A progress bar will be displayed as the data is being pasted During the paste operation the STOP button will appear Press the STOP button if you want to abort the operation In that case part of data will be pasted and you will be unable to undo the operation 86 CU 5 6 VL 3 V Reference Manual Using the Focus function Focus is a function that lets you specify the scene parameters that will be recalled loaded when you recall a scene You can specify these settings for each scene This function is useful if you want to recall only the input channel settings of a specific scene NOTE In contrast to Focus the CL series console features a Recall Safe function that enables you to exclude specific channels and parameters from recall operations However while the Focus function is specified for each scene Recall Safe settings are applied to all scenes Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area The SCENE LIST window will appear in which you can perform various operations for scene memory 1 2 Press the FOCUS tab at the bottom of the SCENE LIST window The FOCUS field will appear in the r
428. pear 1 0 DEVICE 1 001 gt Rio3224 D OUTPUT1 OUTPUTS OUTPUT2 OUTPUT4 OUTPUTS OUTPUT6 OUTPUTS OUTPUT11 OUTPUT10 OUTPUTI2 X OUTPUTI3 OUTPUTI4 AES EBUT AES EBU AES EBU3 AES EBU4 AES EBUS AES EBU ul I O device and external head amp OUTPUT OUTPUTS ue OUTPUTIS OUTPUTI6 AES EBU e AESZEBU8 If you press a rack in which an output I O device is mounted the OUTPUT PATCH If you need to make output port settings make these settings as described in step 7 and following of the I O device patching procedure see page 140 3 Reference Manual I O device and external head amp Remotely controlling an amp 2 Press a displayed I O device to open the OUTPUT PATCH popup window Heres how to remotely control amp that s connected to the Dante connector 1 0 DEVICE 9 Y001 5 XMV4280 D OUTPUT1 OUTPUT2 OUTPUTS OUTPUT4 DANTE EXTERNAL PATCH HA VERSION 11 50 RNTE sn DANTE XM 4280 D 9 DANTE E 0 0 10 XM 4140 D If you need to make output port settings make these settings as described in step 7 and following of the I O device patching procedure see page 140 1 In the upper part of the 1 0 DEVICE screen press the AMP tab to access the AMP field The AMP field includes the following items 1 Display switch buttons Press one of these buttons to view the corresponding I O device 2 ID mo
429. pen the HPF EQ ich popup window SELECTED CHANNEL section EQ graph field This field graphically indicates the approximate response of the EQ Press this field to open the HPF EQ Ich popup window in which you can set the attenuator HPF and EQ 100 DYNAMICS 1 DYNAMICS 2 field This field enables you to view and set the Dynamics 1 2 parameters 7 3m INT 1 OVER indicator Warns you when the signal is clipping 2 Level meter Displays the output signal level green and the amount of gain reduction orange when the Dynamics is on The current threshold setting is shown as a white vertical line 3 Threshold Specifies the threshold 4 Parameters Indicate the values of parameters that vary depending on the currently selected dynamics type Press this field to open the DYNAMICS 1 DYNAMICS 2 Ich popup window in which you can make detailed parameter settings CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual INSERT field INSERT This field enables you to make insert settings 1 Popup button RACK 1 Press this button to open the INSERT DIRECT OUT Ich popup window 2 ON button Switches the insert on or off 1H 3 RACK EDIT popup button Appears if an effect or Premium Rack is inserted Press this button to display the edit screen for the inserted rack 4 IN indicator Appears if a port has been assigned to the insert in patch It lights when the signal is sent to the i
430. peration If desired you can access a specific channel in the SELECTED CHANNEL section or access a specific screen in the display to examine the values in detail 4 If desired use the panel controls to edit the settings Operating a panel control in Preview mode will edit the settings of the scene you recalled in step 3 but will not affect the signal processing of the current scene 5 If you want to store the changes you made in step 4 select the scene number in which you want to store the scene and press the SCENE MEMORY STORE key The settings you edited in step 4 will be stored into memory 6 When you have finished viewing or editing the settings of the scene press the PREVIEW button of the panel or the PREVIEW button in the SCENE LIST window The PREVIEW button will go dark the CL series console will exit Preview mode and return to the normal state NOTE PREVIEW mode applies to all parameters included in scene memory all parameters included in the INPUT PATCH and OUTPUT PATCH functions and HA parameters Scene memory Functions in Preview mode The current scene will be modified by the following software and external operations e CL Editor e Stage Mix e MIDI Rx e GPIIN Similarly edits for the current scene will be conveyed to the following software and external devices e CL Editor e Stage Mix e MIDI Tx e GPI OUT The meters will indicate the state of signal processing for the current scene Playback Link
431. port In the function access area press the SENDS ON FADER button The CL series unit will switch to SENDS ON FADER mode The faders in the Channel Strip section and Master section will move to the send levels of the signals that are routed from each channel to the currently selected MIX MATRIX bus The ON keys will also change to the SEND ON status In SENDS ON FADER mode the Function Access Area in the display will show the buttons that enable you to switch between MIX 1 16 ON FADER mode and MIX 17 24 MATRIX ON FADER mode and the buttons that enable you to select the destination MIX MATRIX buses MIX4 MX 4 MIx2 MIX3 MIXS MIX6 MIXT MIXS MX 1 MX 2 MX 3 MX 5 MX 6 MX 7 MX 8 IN MX 1 14 47 07 ADMIN Send To MIX1 5 MIXt 16 DANTE1 DANTE2 DAHTE4 DANTE DANTES Em 000 Initial Data Use the MIX 1 16 and MIX 17 24 MATRIX select buttons to switch between MIX 1 16 and MIX 17 24 MATRIX Now you can use the MIX MATRIX bus select buttons to specify the destination MIX MATRIX buses 54 4 Output channels Use the MIX MATRIX bus selection buttons in the function access area to select the send destination MATRIX bus NOTE Alternatively press a SEND LEVEL knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to display a popup window from which you can select a MIX MATRIX bus You can also select a MIX MATRIX bus by using the Bank Select keys
432. protect setting on or off press the READ ONLY field for the file protect symbol is displayed for write protected files These files cannot be overwritten NOTE You cannot edit the file name or comment of a write protected file CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual Copying and pasting file Follow the steps below to copy a desired file into buffer memory and then paste it with a different file name 1 Turn the multifunction knob to select the copy source file and press the COPY button The highlighted line in the file list indicates the file that is selected for operations 2 If necessary press the directory icon and change the directory To move to the next higher level press the arrow button in the PATH field 3 Press the PASTE button keyboard window will appear allowing you to enter the file name 4 Enter the file name and press the PASTE button NOTE You cannot use a file name that already exists when you paste a file Deleting a file 1 Rotate the multifunction knob to select a file to delete then press the DELETE button A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Delete operation 2 To execute the Delete operation press the OK button NOTE You cannot delete a protected file B Creating a directory 1 if necessary press the directory icon and change the directory To move to the next higher level press the arrow button in the PATH field 2 Press the MAKE DIR button A key
433. quest for Level Meter the corresponding metering data will be sent in every 50 millisecond for 10 seconds If metering information is expected to be continuously sent Request is needed to be sent in at least every 10 seconds Receive The data will be echoed when PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO is ON Transmission When transmission is enabled by receiving Request the corresponding metering data will be sent in constant interval for a given period of time The interval and time will vary depending on devices When rebooted or port setting is changed the transmission will be disabled When PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO is on the message will be sent as it is STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS O001nnnn 1n n20 15 Device numberzMIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 3E Digital mixer MODEL ID 00010010 19 CLSeries DATA CATEGORY 00100001 21 REMOTE LEVEL METER DATA Ommmmmmm mm ADDRESS UL Ommmmmmm mm ADDRESS LU Ommmmmmm mm ADDRESS LL Daetal EOX 11110111 F7 End ofexclusive 4 9 2 Format PARAMETER REQUEST Receive Data will be received when PARAMETER CHANGE Rx is on and the Device number of both Rx CH and SUB STATUS are matched The data will be echoed when PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO is on the corresponding metering data will be sent via Rx CH in constant interval for a given period of time The interval and time will vary depending on devices When A
434. r the insertion and the location of the insert out in points can be specified individually for each channel 1 As desired connect your external equipment to an OMNI IN OUT jack or to an I O card installed slots 1 3 NOTE If you install a digital I O card in a slot and digitally connect an external device you must synchronize the word clock of the CL console and the external device see page 198 Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to access the OVERVIEW screen for the channel to which you want to assign the input source Press the INSERT DIRECT OUT field to access the INSERT DIRECT OUT popup window In the INSERT DIRECT OUT popup window you can view or change the type of input output port used for insertion and the location at which insertion will occur There are two variations of this popup window one channel and eight channel Each window view includes the following items INSERT DIRECT OUT popup window 1ch INSERT DIRECT OUT INSERT DIRECT OUT MIX1 MX 1 ch 1 INSERT INSERT IN HA HA OUT IN OMNI 1 1 tf OUT IN INSERT zi er Hep rne Jor oni E INSERT FADER OH OFF DIRECT __ OUT INSERT POINT amp DIRECT OUT POINT INSERT POINT DIRECT OUT LEVEL 00 INSERT OUT button Press this button to open the PORT SELECT popup window in which you can select an output port The name of the currently sel
435. r popup has been bookmarked The password has been changed CUE was cancelled for PLAYBACK OUT because you switched from the RECORDER screen to another screen Audio file link playback is not possible because recording is in progress You attempted to edit in the DANTE PATCH screen at a time when patching was not possible The cooling fan of the internal power supply has stopped If a malfunction has occurred please contact your Yamaha service center listed at the end of the operating manual separate document Processing was interrupted The operation was ignored because this function cannot be used during Preview Preview was disabled Preview was enabled When specifying the user password the password was not entered a second time A codec error occurred in the RECORDER screen Operation of the button was cancelled because time is required for recorder processing CUE was cancelled for RECORDER IN because you switched from the RECORDER screen to another screen The channel was removed from the link group Saving to the USB flash drive has been interrupted Finished saving to USB flash drive No data has been stored in the scene you attempted to recall or the data has been damaged so that it cannot be recalled You attempted to overwrite store a protected scene You attempted to overwrite store a read only scene The audio playback link for the scene was cancelled Invalid signals are being input from the
436. rameters that do not exist for a ST IN channel will be ignored If you want to add a new channel to an existing link group hold down any SEL key within the group and press the SEL key for the channel that you want to add to the group NOTE If the link destination channel is already assigned to another link group the channel will be removed from the previous group and added to the newly assigned group To remove a channel from a link group hold down any SEL key in the same link group and press the SEL key for the channel that you want to remove NOTE You can also remove all linked channels from the same link group temporarily This can be helpful if you want to edit parameters that are linked to each other while maintaining the same relative level differences For example this may be the case for parameters such as the HA analog gain and fader or if you want to change the level balance between channels that belong to the same link group While pressing and holding down the SEL key for the desired linked channel adjust the parameter value While you are holding down the SEL key the HA analog gain and fader values will not be linked However you cannot temporarily cancel this link during the fading phase of a recalled scene M CHI ch CHS ch 9 CHIT chi CH25 ch25 CH33 ch33 CH41 ch41 CH49 ch49 CHS ch57 CHES ch65 ST IN 1L RtiL 72 frr ch 2 CH10
437. reation NOTE By pressing the same location again you can change the sorting order ascending or descending D If you want to edit the title or comment of a scene press the TITLE field or COMMENT field of the scene to access the SCENE TITLE EDIT or SCENE COMMENT EDIT popup window NOTE You cannot edit the title or comment of a read only scene or a write protected scene 6 enable disable the protect setting press the protect symbol protect symbol is displayed for write protected scenes These scenes cannot be overwritten NOTE The R symbol for scene number 000 cannot be disabled 7 Usethe tool buttons to edit the scene memory For details refer to the section Scene memory editing that follows Scene memory editing The scenes stored in scene memory can be copied and pasted to other scene numbers or cleared erased 1 Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area The SCENE LIST window will appear in which you can perform various operations for scene memory You can edit scene memories using the buttons located in the upper part of the SCENE LIST window The function of each button is described below Cor CLEAR CUT INSERT 1 COPY button Press this button to copy the scene to buffer memory 2 PASTE button Press this button to overwrite the selected scene with the scene in buffer memory 3 CLEAR button Press this button to erase the selected scene 83 Scene memory
438. rence Manual Using the Monitor function This section explains how to select the desired monitor source and monitor it from the PHONES Out jack or external monitor speakers 1 Connect your monitor system to the OMNI OUT jacks or 2TR OUT DIGITAL jack on the rear panel Monitor signals can be sent to any desired output jack or output channel To monitor through headphones make sure that your headphones are connected to the PHONES Out jack on the front pad 2 Inthe Function Access Area press the MONITOR button to access the MONITOR screen In the MONITOR screen the MONITOR field lets you check the current monitor settings and turn monitoring on or off The MONITOR screen contains the following items 2 9 5 CLEAR CUE CUE MOD T PFL 0 0 CUE MONITOR SOURCE SELECT DIMMER MONITOR I oc o STEREO MONO as OVER OVER 6 C 3 pa zB PHOHES OMHI Ei 12 LEVEL LINK 4 PB OUT 12 30 30 1 2 20 0 00 FADER rs DEF IHE ON ASSIGN MSIE WAJE CH1 48 ASSIGN OUTPUT PINK NOISE BURST NOISE S CH49 72 STIH MATRIX 1 8 ST MONO TALKBACK IN ASSIGN TALKBACK OH MATRIX 1 8 ST MONO 1 MONITOR popup display button Enables you to access the MONITOR popup window in which you can make detailed monitor settings 98 Monitor and Cue functions 2 SOURCE SELECT field Selects the monitor source If DEFINE has been sele
439. rent scene CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual 3 To store a scene rotate one of the multifunction knobs to select the store destination scene number NOTE You can select multiple scene numbers as the store destination To do so press the MULTI SELECT button to turn it on and then rotate a multifunction knob Alternatively rotate the multifunction knob while pressing and holding it down If you selected multiple scenes as the store destination the same contents will be stored in all selected scene numbers This is convenient if you want to create several variations based on the same mix settings You can also use the SCENE MEMORY INC DEC keys to select scene numbers 4 Press the STORE button The SCENE STORE popup window will appear allowing you to assign a title or comment to the scene D Assign a title or comment to the scene as desired G Pressthe STORE button located at the bottom of the SCENE STORE popup window The SCENE STORE popup window will close and a dialog box will ask you to confirm the Store operation 7 To execute the Store operation press the OK button The current mix settings will be stored to the scene number you selected in step 3 If you want to cancel the Store operation press the CANCEL button instead of the OK button 8 If you want to cancel the overwrite store operation that you just performed press the STORE UNDO button Immediately after overwrite storing a scene you
440. ress the TAB button to switch to the next channel You can also press the ENTER button to close the popup window in the same way as using the x symbol 30 Input channels Making HA Head Amp settings This section explains how to make HA Head Amp related settings phantom power on off gain phase for each input channel Setting the analog gain 1 To adjust only the HA analog gain use the GAIN knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section 2 To edit detailed parameter settings such as phantom power on off or phase use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to access the OVERVIEW screen that includes the input channel for which you want to adjust the head amp GAIN PAT CH field 9 Q L fore 000 Initial Data 3 Press the GAIN PATCH field of the channel for which you want to adjust the head amp The GAIN PATCH popup window will appear This popup window features four types of view Use the tabs near the bottom of the window to select one of these four views Each window view includes the following items CU 5 6 VL 3 V Reference Manual GAIN PATCH popup window 1ch GC GAIN PATCH ALL ON GC ALL OFF INPUT PATCH INPUT PORT CHI DANTE p 001 001 0 0 D GAIN 1 Channel icon Channel number Channel name indicator Displays the channel icon channel number and channel name 2 HA section Appears if the head amp is patched to the input channel This section enables
441. ress the channel number channel name field to access the PATCH NAME popup window 16 Input and output patching In the PATCH NAME popup window you can change the channel name icon and output port assigned to each output channel The window includes the following items 4 PATCH NAME SLOTI ER DANTE D 1 MIXI 1 DANTE 1 32 DANTE 435 64 1 PATCH button Indicates the port that is patched to the input or output channel Press this button to enable the PATCH tab at the bottom of the screen The PORT SELECT popup window will appear enabling you to select the network and port 2 Channel select button Selects the channel to set NOTE Switching channels on this screen will not affect the channel selection on the console 3 Channel icon button Indicates the icon and color that are currently selected for the corresponding channel Press this button to enable the ICON tab at the bottom of the screen The CH COLOR ICON popup window will appear enabling you to select the color icon and channel name 4 Channel number display box Indicates the channel number This item cannot be changed CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual 5 Channel name edit box Indicates the currently specified channel Press the inside of this box to enable the NAME tab at the bottom of the screen The SOFT KEYBOARD popup window will appear enabling you to edit th
442. ribed in step 2 and subsequent steps MONITOR CLEAR CUE DCA OUTPUT OUTPUT PRE PFL 0 0 SOURCE SELECT DIMMER nd ourPur STEREO MOHO nm E L R LUR e PHOHES OMHI 12 MEINES LEVEL LINK a 4 ados 18 18 1 2 20 0 00 FADER E DEF IHI ON ASSIGN PS en MOHO Edi MONITOR SINE WAVE PINK NOISE BURST NOISE MIR CH49 72 STIN OUTPUT MRTRIX ST MONO TALKBACK IN INPUT TO TALKBACK MIX ue MATRIX ST MONO 1 TALKBACK popup display button Enables you to access the TALKBACK popup window in which you can make detailed talkback settings 2 TALKBACK IN field 48V indicator Indicates the on off status of the 48V phantom power supplied to the TALKBACK jack TALKBACK IN level meter Meters the level of signals after the input gain at the TALKBACK jack CU 5 VL 3 V Reference Manual 3 INPUT TO TALKBACK field INPUT TALKBACK patch button H Press the button to open the PORT SELECT popup window in which you can patch a desired input port to an input port to patch to talkback The selected port name will appear on the button 48V indicator Indicates the on off status of the 48V phantom power supplied to the selected port e ANALOG GAIN knob Sets the analog gain ofthe selected port You
443. ring recording the file being recorded will first be closed and then recording will continue with a new file RECORDER REC amp START Start recording immediately without entering record ready mode The specified audio file will be played once from the beginning Audio files to be played should be saved in the SONGS folder inside the YPE folder Please note that a file cannot be DIRECT PEAY specified if it is saved in the root directory or in any other folder When you execute playback the path in the TITLE LIST screen will move to YPE SONGS INC RECALL I Recall the scene of the next existing number REC RECALL 2 Recall the scene of the previous existing number DIRECT RECALL SCENE 000 300 recall the scene of the specified Execute RECALL UNDO Execute STORE UNDO If INPUT or ST IN is selected switch the function of the Selected Channel section s send encoders from TO MIX1 16 TO MIX17 24 MATRIX Switches the MIX ON FADER function for the selected MIX on and off SCENE RECALL UNDO STORE UNDO SEND ENCODER MIX1 16 MIX17 24 MATRIX MODE MIX1 MIX24 Switches the MATRIX ON FADER function for the selected MATRIX and off Switches the MIX ON FADER function on and off Switches the MATRIX ON FADER function on and off Switches the SENDS ON FADER function on and off SENDS ON FADER MIX ON FADER MATRIX ON FADER SENDS ON FADER Appendices FUNCTION PARAMETER 1 PARA
444. roup when the dimmer function is enabled NOTE e n the case of the CL3 CL1 faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown f the dimmer level is set to any level other than ee dB and the corresponding MUTE GROUP MASTER button is turned on this button will light orange 3 Use the MUTE GROUP 1 8 buttons to select the mute group to which you want to assign channels 4 Press the SEL key for the input channels output channels that you want to assign multiple selections are allowed The SEL keys for the assigned channels will light and the corresponding channels will be highlighted in red in the mute group assign field of the window To cancel an assignment press a lit SEL key once again to make it go dark 5 Assign channels to other mute groups in the same way NOTE You may assign a single channel to more than one mute group 6 When you finish making assignments press the CLOSE button to close the popup window and press the x symbol in the Function Access Area CH JOB display You will return to the previous screen The DCA MUTE GROUP field of the OVERVIEW screen indicates the mute group s to which each channel is assigned Numbers that are lit red in the lower row of this field indicate the mute groups to which that channel belongs NOTE If the dimmer level is set to any level other than ee dB and the corresponding MUTE GROUP MASTER button is turned on these numbers will light orange For a c
445. roup will be assigned to the USER DEFINED key that you selected in step 4 and you will return to the USER DEFINED KEYS page ALTERHATE FUNCTION TOGGLE PAGE CHAHGE BOOKMARK PAGE CHAHGE BOOKMARK PAGE CHANGE BOOKMARK PAGE CHANGE BOOKMARK MUTE MASTER MUTE GROUP 2 8 USER LEVEL 10 Grouping and linking USER DEFINED KEY SETUP 2 Select Parameters for USER DEFINED KEY No 15 FUNCTION PARAMETER 1 MUTE GROUP 3 CANCEL In the same way assign the Mute On Off function for another mute group to a different USER DEFINED key When you finish assigning functions to USER DEFINED keys press the x symbol to close the USER DEFINED KEYS page In the Function Access Area press the SETUP button to close the SETUP screen To mute a mute group press the USER DEFINED key 1 16 that has been assigned to the desired mute group The LED of the USER DEFINED key will light and all channels that belong to the selected mute group will be muted At this time the ON keys for the muted channels will blink You can turn on multiple USER DEFINED keys to mute multiple mute groups To defeat muting for a mute group press the USER DEFINED key that you lit in step 9 Even if a channel is assigned to a mute group it will not be affected by operations of the USER DEFINED key if the ON key for that channel is already turned off to begin with
446. rs for USER DEFINED KEY LNo 12 FUNCTION PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2 TALKBACK CANCEL NOTE The list shown is the same for all models of the CL series For the CL3 CL1 the display will indicate Cannot Assign if you specify a parameter that does not exist on that model 5 Make sure that the FUNCTION field is enclosed by a frame then use the buttons in the lower part of the field or the multifunction knobs on the top panel to select the function you want to assign For details on the assignable functions and their parameters refer to Functions that can be assigned to USER DEFINED keys on page 259 If the selected function has parameters press the PARAMETER 1 or 2 field to move the frame and select parameters 1 and 2 in the same way 7 Press the OK button to close the USER DEFINED KEY SETUP window 8 Assign the desired functions to other USER DEFINED keys in the same way 9 To execute an assigned function press the corresponding USER DEFINED 1 16 key on the panel User settings Security Using the Alternate function If you assign the Alternate function ALTERNATE FUNCTION to a USER DEFINED key you will be able to switch parameters on or off by operating the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section while pressing and holding down the USER DEFINED key The console enters Alternate mode when you press and hold down the USER DEFINED key to which the Alternate function has been assigned the key will l
447. rt Press this knob to select it and then use multifunction knobs 1 8 to adjust the settings The millisecond delay time value is indicated above the knob and the delay time value in the units selected in the DELAY SCALE popup window is indicated below the knob NOTE If you have selected ms millisecond as the scale the delay time value will not appear above the knob 18 Input and output patching 6 DELAY button Switches the output port delay on or off 7 Phase button Switches the phase of the signal assigned to the output port between normal phase and reverse phase GAIN knob Adjusts the output gain of the output port To adjust this value press the knob on screen to select it and then operate multifunction knobs 1 8 Rotate the knob to set the value in the range of 96 to 24 dB in 1 0 dB steps Rotate the knob while pressing and holding it down to set the value in 0 1 dB steps The current value appears immediately below the knob 9 Level meter Indicates the level of the signal assigned to the output port Output port select tabs Switch the output ports controlled in the popup window in groups of up to eight ports Tabs are categorized into three groups DANTE SLOT and PATCH VIEW To display tabs in the desired group press the group name button located at the right or left end of the bottom row Use the output port select tabs at the bottom of the popup window to select the output port you want to contro
448. s in the SAFE PARAMETER SELECT field will apply to all input channels or output channels If an input channel is selected Use the buttons in the lower part of the SAFE PARAMETER SELECT field except for the ALI button to select the parameters that will be subject to Recall Safe multiple selections are allowed If you want all parameters to be subject to Recall Safe turn on the ALL button this is the default setting If a ST IN channel is selected Use the same steps as those for an input channel Different buttons will be displayed If a MIX channel is selected Use the buttons in the lower part of the SAFE PARAMETER SELECT field except for the ALL button to select the parameters that will be subject to Recall Safe multiple selections are allowed In addition you can use the WITH MIX SEND button displayed in the lower left of the field to enable Recall Safe for the on off status and send level of signals sent from input channels to MIX buses If you want all parameters shown in the lower part of the field to be subject to Recall Safe turn on the ALL button this is the default setting If a MATRIX channel is selected Use the same steps as those for a MIX channel Different types of buttons will be displayed If a DCA group is selected If you press a SEL key for a DCA group all parameters for the DCA groups selected from DCA groups 1 8 and DCA groups 9 16 will be displayed simultaneously For the parameters that
449. s an item in the field to highlight it you will be able to rotate one of the multifunction knobs to select an event 10 Assign events to other control numbers in the same way When you operate the parameters you assigned on the CL series console Control Change messages will be transmitted to external devices Similarly if the corresponding Control Change messages are received from an external device on the appropriate channel the parameters assigned to those control numbers will change NOTE e You can use the CLEAR ALL button to erase all assignments to control numbers The INITIALIZE ALL button will return all control number assignments to their default state e Assignments to control numbers are maintained as settings for the entire system rather than for individual scenes 1 56 CU 5 6 UL 3 1 1 Reference Manual Using Parameter Changes to control parameters On the CL series console you can use a type of system exclusive messages called Parameter Changes to control specific events fader knob operations ON key on off operations system and user settings etc as an alternative to using Control Changes or NRPN messages For details on the Parameter Changes that can be transmitted and received refer to MIDI data format in the Appendices 1 Connect the CL series console to an external device 2 3 4 In the Function Access Area press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen In the center o
450. s of the writing operation will close NOTE e f you are going to overwrite a file or save a file with the same name in the same folder a dialog will ask you to confirm the overwrite You can enter a comment of up to 32 characters You may enter a file name of more than eight characters However the drive name path name and file name are limited to a total of 256 characters If you exceed this limit you will be unable to save the file If an error message appears at the bottom of the screen shorten the file name and try saving the file again CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual Loading a file from the USB flash drive Follow the steps below to load CL settings file extension CLF from the USB flash drive into the CL series console You can use the same procedure to load the following files as well as setting files Contents of le CL console internal setting file CL console user authentication key TEXT Text file for displaying Help Image file for display in the CONSOLE LOCK screen 256 or more colors uncompressed bitmap format NOTICE Some data may contain settings that will cause the console to output signals immediately after the data is loaded Therefore before loading data turn off the power to the equipment connected to the CL series console and or lower the volume of such equipment so that there will not be a problem even if a signal is output from the CL console 1 In the Function Access Area pres
451. s playing or paused is shown at the left edge of the title list gt Playing Paused 3 Track number Indicates the file number on the list 4 Sub directory If there is a folder at a lower level a folder icon is shown at the track number position You can move to the lower level by pressing the folder icon 5 PLAY check symbol Enables you to select multiple files that will be played back consecutively B SELECT knob Use the multifunction knob to switch the current song The title list will scroll up or down 7 NOW PLAYING button If you turn this button on the currently playing song will always be selected in the list it will have a blue background MOVE UP MOVE DOWN buttons Sort the current song list in descending or ascending order 9 Display switch buttons Switch between the SONG TITLE display and the FILE NAME display on the list SAVE LIST button Saves the order of the current title list and PLAY check symbol setting as a playlist 17 RELOAD button Loads the playlist that was saved most recently Use this button to revert the current playlist you are editing back to the previous setting You use the change directory button on screen and the folder icon in the NO column to view a content list of the folder that includes the desired file If the directory on the USB flash drive is displayed Upperlevel Press this button to move up to the directory that is one level
452. s selected 2 DCA group select buttons Select the DCA group to which the channel is assigned 3 Mute group indicators Indicate the mute group to which the channel is assigned When the mute group tab is selected 4 Mute group select buttons Select the mute group to which the channel is assigned NOTE If the dimmer level is set to the mute group this button lights orange 5 MUTE SAFE button Temporarily removes the channel from the mute group 6 DCA group indicators Indicate the DCA group to which the channel is assigned MUTE 3 IB CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual Centralogic section This chapter explains how to use the Centralogic section and the OVERVIEW screen to simultaneously control up to eight channels About the Centralogic section The Centralogic section is located below the touch screen and lets you recall and simultaneously control a set of up to eight input channels output channels or DCA groups Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to select the channels that you want to control 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 olol SCENE MEMORY PREVIEW 1 E3 EI Ez E ES E O cm oven oven Joven Joven Joven Joven over INPUT OUTPUT MONITOR 5 5 6 O s O s LEVEL 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 8
453. s the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen 2 Press the SAVE LOAD button to access the SAVE LOAD popup window VOLUME NAME HIDE FREE SIZE 498 0MB 99 _ READ OHLY TIME FILE NAME COMMENT TYPE STAMP USERO1 CLU B f B CREATE USER KEY 000 Initial Data VITH DANTE SETUP AHD 1 0 RACK To select the file that you want to load press the name of the desired file in the file list or rotate the corresponding multifunction knob on the panel The highlighted line in the file list indicates the file that is selected for operations If you want the DANTE SETUP and I O device related settings saved in the CL settings file file name extension CLF to be applied to the CL console press the WITH DANTE SETUP AND I O DEVICE button to turn it on Press the LOAD button A confirmation dialog box will appear 178 User settings Security Press the OK button to begin loading the file When the file has finished loading the PROCESSING popup window that shows the progress of the loading operation will close If you cancel this procedure while it is in progress data up to the cancellation point will still be loaded Some setting data may not be loaded depending on the USER LEVEL setting during the load operation Editing the files saved on the USB flash drive This section explains how to perform editing operations such as sorting the files and directories on the USB fla
454. screen By accessing the METER screen you can view the input and output levels of all channels on the screen and switch the level meter s metering points the points in the signal route at which the level is detected 1 In the Function Access Area press the METER field to access the METER screen _ CHI ch 1 0 00 00 ADMIN Send To MIX1 METER OVER 6 9 12 R scene 000 Initial Data INPUT METER screen This screen shows the meters and faders for all input channels INPUT 17 18 19 20 21 22 2324 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 12345678 OUTPUT 9 10 1 12 13 14 15 16 33 34 35 36 37 38 3940 _ 4142 43 44 45 46 47 48 4950 51 52 53 54 55 56 _ 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 00 00 00 00 711 2345678 00 00 009 00 00 00 00 00 09 00 00 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 00 METERING POINT HPF MESES POST PEAK HOLD HOLD co 00 00 dB c0 dB co dB co co co co co CH2 ch 2 CH4 ch 4 CHS ch 5 CH1 ch 1 NOTE OUTPUT METER screen This screen shows the meters and faders for all output channel OUTPUT MIX MATRIX 12345678 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 _ 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 12345678 CUb MONITOR L R STEREO MONO METERING POINT PRE PRI pos 0 ON HOLD
455. se the MIDI SETUP popup window NOTE Alternatively you can select the channel by pressing the desired channel in the field or by rotating one of the multifunction knobs When transmitting or receiving Parameter Changes the channel number you specify here is used as the device number a number that identifies the transmitting or receiving unit 8 Turn transmission reception on or off for each MIDI message NOTE For details on using Program Change messages refer to Using Program Changes to recall scenes and library items below For details on using Control Change messages refer to Using Control Changes to control parameters on page 155 MIDI CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual Using Program Changes to recall scenes and library items The CL series console lets you assign a specific event scene recall or effect library recall to each Program Change number so that when this event is executed on the CL console a Program Change message of the corresponding number will be transmitted to an external device Conversely the corresponding event can be executed when a Program Change message is received from an external device 1 Connect the CL series console to an external device The following illustration shows an example of using the MIDI IN OUT connectors to transmit and receive MIDI messages MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI IN
456. ser settings are executed Parameter Change SysEx system exclusive messages can be transmitted to an external device Conversely events can be executed when Parameter Changes are received from an external device Using this capability CL operations can be recorded and played back on a MIDI sequencer or other external device In addition changes in system and user settings can be received and executed by another CL console NOTE You can select the port used for transmission and reception of MIDI messages from the rear panel MIDI IN OUT connectors or an I O card installed in a slot 1 All of the functionality described in this section will be available on the port you select MIDI Basic MIDI settings You can select the type of MIDI messages the CL series console will transmit and receive the MIDI port that will be used and the MIDI channel 1 In the Function Access Area press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen _ CH1 ch 1 CURRENT USER STORAGE 0 00 00 ADMIN ini CREATE SAVE LOAD Send To MIXI Administrator eles PASSWORD CHANGE How all operations are permitted SYSTEM SETUP 48V MASTER BUS SETUP OH MIXER SETUP WORD CLOCK CASCADE OUTPUT X iI SLOT PORT OVER METER POWER SUPPLY sus DANTE BATTERY MAIN NETWORK 60 LR M CONSOLE nr CONTRAST BRIGHTNESS gre LOCK NAME CH COLOR SCREEN PANEL LAMP Q T Q Q Q Initial Data
457. ses and the left knob adjusts the volume balance of the left and right signals sent to the two MIX MATRIX buses Rotating the left TO MIX MATRIX SEND BAL knob counter clockwise will increase the amount of signal sent from the L channel to the odd numbered MIX MATRIX bus and rotating it clockwise will increase the amount sent from the R channel to the even numbered MIX MATRIX bus If PAN mode has been selected in the TO STEREO MONO popup window 8ch the left knob will function as the PAN knob The right knob will function as send level just as in BALANCE mode Make sure that the TO MIX MATRIX SEND ON OFF button is turned on for the send destination MIX bus If this button is off press the button on screen to turn it on In the SELECTED CHANNEL section use the MIX MATRIX SEND LEVEL knobs to adjust the send levels to the MIX MATRIX buses NOTE If you want to monitor the signal being sent to a specific MIX MATRIX bus use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to access the corresponding MIX MATRIX channel and then press the appropriate CUE key in the Centralogic section You can use the SEL keys on the top panel to switch input channels and control the send level to all MIX MATRIX buses in the same way CU 5 6 VL 3 V Reference Manual Using the Centralogic section You can use the multifunction knobs in the Centralogic section to adjust the send level of signals sent from eight consecutive input channels to a
458. settings ofthe Fade function are made independently for each scene 1 Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area The SCENE LIST window will appear in which you can perform various operations for scene memory CURRENT SETTING SET SCENE 002 SGENE 02 2 Press the FADE TIME tab at the bottom of the SCENE LIST window The FADE TIME field is shown in the right half of the SCENE LIST window SCENE LIST BB COPY PRSTE CLERR NO TITLE FADE TIME SCENE 01 SCENE 03 SCENE 04 3 CURRENT SETTING v P RECALL z SET 002 UNDO FADE TIME 1 SET popup button Press this button to open the FADE TIME popup window in which you can select a channel for which you want to use the Fade function and specify the fade time the duration of time over which the fader will reach its new value 2 FADER button Enables or disables the Fade function for each scene CU 5 UL 3 V 1 Reference Manual 3 FADE TIME display This area indicates the fade time specified for each scene 4 CURRENT SETTING field Specifies the content that will be saved by the next scene store operation 3 Press the SET button to access the FADE TIME popup window In this popup window you can select the channels to which Fade will be applied and adjust the fade time x am CLEAR ALL FADE TIME SET ALL CH17 32 MIX 1 8 CH33 48 CH49 64 MIX 9 16 CH65 72 STIN MIX 17 24 ey 5L MATR
459. sfiter cutoff equency OOU U U 0 05 40 00He Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for 0 reverse phase feedback WAVE Modulation waveform SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off NOTE Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ 1 Be de d da d d on REV FLANGE One input two output reverb and flanger effects in series mmd PAPE THRU 27 2 He B 00 ie High pasfiter cutoff equency y 0054000H Modulation speed ERAS 09 35 499 Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for a reverse phase feedback WAVE Modulation waveform SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off NOTE Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ Us RO de d ded d 8 on CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual REV SYMPHO One input two output reverb and symphonic effects in parallel pk HPF THRU High passfiter cutoff equency O U 0os4000H O Oo Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ 1 Be ddd de d de d d 8 oon REV gt SYMPHO One input two output reverb and symphonic effects in series Parameter Description Reverb and symphonic reverb balance 0 REVBAL 100 0 all symphonic reverb 100 all reverb THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency 0 05 4
460. sh drive editing the file names or comments copying and pasting B File editing 1 2 In the Function Access Area press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen Press the SAVE LOAD button to access the SAVE LOAD popup window The list will show the files and sub directories that have been saved 5 DOG u _ CH ch 1 0 00 00 ADMIN PATH VOLUME NAME HIDE FREE SIZE 498 0MB 99 READ TIME STAMP FILE NAME ONLY COMMENT USERO1 CLU EZB SETUP CREATE E USER KEY LOAD FORMAT scene 000 Initial Data 12 8 9 0 1 COPY button Copies a file into buffer memory a temporary holding area 2 PASTE button Pastes the file from buffer memory 3 DELETE button Deletes the selected file or directory NOTE A directory cannot be deleted unless it is empty The message Directory Not Empty will appear CU 5 6 VL 3 V Reference Manual 4 MAKE DIR button Creates a new directory 5 PATH Indicates the name of the current directory Press the arrow button to move to the next higher level If the current directory is the top level the arrow button is dimmed 6 VOLUME NAME FREE SIZE Indicates the volume name and the amount of free space on the USB flash drive If the USB flash drive is write protected a protect symbol will appear in the VOLUME NAME field 7 File list This area lists the files that are saved on the
461. sign signals to the input and output of the USB memory recorder and perform recording and playback operations zz RECORDER ofe E i us PATH VOLUME NAME CAST AKI0 2 omm FREE SIZE 1 868 92 NO FILE NAME M ARTIST v TIME Artist 00 00 13 _ SONGOO2 MP3 Artist 00 00 07 MOVE MOVE FILE SAVE PLAY MODE 001 00 00 00 00 00 13 I gt l hs 192kbps RECORDER INPUT PLAYBACK OUT 1 RECORDER INPUT popup buttons L R Press these buttons to open the CH SELECT popup window in which you can select the signals patched to the recorder s L R input channels 2 RECORDER INPUT GAIN knob Sets the level of the signal input to the recorder 3 RECORDER INPUT CUE button Press this button to audition the signal input to the recorder NOTE You cannot turn on this button and the PLAYBACK OUTPUT CUE button simultaneously CU 5 6 VL 3 V Reference Manual 4 RECORDER INPUT meters Indicate the level of the signals input to the recorder 5 PLAYBACK OUT popup buttons L R Press these buttons to open the CH SELECT popup window in which you can select the signals patched to the recorder s L R output channels for playback 6 PLAYBACK OUT GAIN knob Sets the level of the recorder playback output signal 7 PLAYBACK OUT CUE button Press this button to audition the signal output from the recorder NOTE You cannot turn
462. signal level exceeds the specified THRESHOLD the output level is attenuated by a specified amount RANGE THRESHOLD dB 54 to 0 55 points oe midger signal q g This determines the amount of attenuation when RANGE dB 70 to 0 71 points ducking is activated This determines how soon the signal is ducked once ATTACK AMS ee Cd ROMs the ducker has been triggered 44 1kHz 0 02 ms 2 13 sec This determines how long ducking remains active 48kHz 0 02 ms 1 96 sec 160 points has fallen below the This determines how soon the ducker returns to its normal gain once the trigger signal level drops below the threshold The value is expressed as the duration required for the level to change by 6 dB HOLD ms 44 1kHz 6 ms 46 0 sec DECAY ms 48kHz 5 ms 42 3 sec 160 points e I O Characteristics e Time Series Analysis Input Signal Output Signal HOLD THRESHOLD ATTACK DECAY k LI Output Level Input Level Output Level TE AN THRESHOLD A RANGE RANGE lt _ gt Input Level Time Time CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual COMPRESSOR The COMP processor attenuates signals above a specified THRESHOLD by a specified RATIO The COMP processor can also be used as a limiter which with a RATIO of 00 1 reduces the level to the threshold This means that the limiter s output level never actually exceeds the threshold This det
463. specific MIX MATRIX bus 1 sure that an output port is assigned to each MIX MATRIX bus to which you want to send signals and that your monitor system external effect or other device is connected to the corresponding output port 2 Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to access the OVERVIEW screen that includes the input channel that you want to control In the OVERVIEW screen you can use the TO MIX TO MATRIX field to adjust the send levels to the MIX MATRIX bus _ CH1 ch 1 0 00 00 ADMIN Send To MIXI lees 000 Initial Data 3 Press the TO MIX MATRIX SEND LEVEL knob for the desired send destination MIX MATRIX bus A bold frame will appear around all TO MIX MATRIX SEND LEVEL knobs for that MIX MATRIX bus 41 4 Input channels Use multifunction knobs 1 8 to adjust the send level of signals sent from the up to eight input channels to the selected MIX MATRIX bus If necessary you can use the Bank Select keys to switch the input channels that you want to assign to the Centralogic section and adjust the send levels from other input channels to the selected MIX MATRIX bus NOTE If you want to monitor a signal being sent to a specific MIX MATRIX bus use the Bank Select keys to assign the corresponding MIX channel to the Centralogic section and then press the CUE key for that MIX MATRIX channel If you want to make detailed settings for MIX MATRIX sends press the TO MIX MATRIX
464. ss a desired knob on the touch screen and then use the USER DEFINED knob to immediately operate that on screen knob At this time a pink frame is shown around the knob in the touch screen indicating that you can operate that knob CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual Assignable encoders You can assign the desired function to the GAIN PAN ASSIGN knob on the fader strip of each channel and control the function using the knob 1 2 Press the USER SETUP button to access the USER SETUP popup window In the Function Access Area press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen USER DEFINED KNOBS and ASSIGNABLE ENCODER for Administrator USER DEFINED KNOBS ASSIGNABLE ENCODER e BRIGHTHESS LAMP SELECTED SEND A BRIGHTHESS 3 Press the USER DEFINED KNOBS tab to select the USER DEFINED KNOBS page If you are logged in as the Administrator you can also turn on the FOR GUEST button in the lower right of the screen to access the USER DEFINED KNOBS and ASSIGNABLE ENCODER for Guest page and make assignable knob settings for the Guest account 172 4 User settings Security Press the button in the ASSIGNABLE ENCODER field The ASSIGNABLE ENCODER SETUP popup window will appear ASSIGNABLE ENCODER SETUP kd Select The Assiqnable Encoder Function FUNCTION SELECTED SEND CANCEL Use the 3 buttons the lower part of the field or the multifunction knobs on the top
465. strator password to unlock it v A Guest can use only the range of functionality permitted by the Administrator Only one set of Guest settings is maintained inside the console A User can use only the range of functionality permitted by the Administrator User settings are saved internally or on a USB flash drive as user authentication keys Multiple sets of user settings up to ten in internal memory can be saved each with the desired user name A User who has Power User privileges can create or edit user authentication keys with a specified user level When a user logs in the user settings for that user are applied User settings include the following information e Password except for Guest e USER DEFINED knobs e User Level settings except for Administrator e Assignable encoders e Preferences e Custom fader bank e USER DEFINED keys MASTER fader Privileges for each user are as follows Editing user setup data such as USER DEFINED keys and Preferences Logged in user User settings Security User authentication Editing User Password Editing key Level settings setting comments rd e e Administrator Available Available Can edit the Cannot edit the user settings for level since the adminis Available Available Administrator trator can always perform and for Guest all operations Can edit the settings for Guest Power user Available Available A
466. stricts operation of that channels send parameters From MIX From MATRIX Restricts operation of that channel s DCA group fader ON OFF and ICON COLOR NAME Restricts changes of assignment to that DCA group DCA MASTER e DCA GROUP ASSIGN s SET BY SED uocem If this button is on you can press the panel SEL key of a channel to enable or disable the operating restrictions for that channel 2 CURRENT SCENE Specifies the operations that can be performed on the current scene memory e INPUT PATCH INPUT Restricts operations for input channel patching and names e OUTPUT PATCH OUTPUT Restricts operations for output channel patching and names e BUS SETUPD cens Restricts operations for bus setup e GEQ RACK EFFECT RACK PREMIUM RACK Restricts operations for the racks Press this area to open the RACK USER LEVEL popup window in which you can set this restriction However there will be no restriction on operating the MIDI CLK button displayed for delay type and modulation type effects or the PLAY REC button displayed for the FREEZE effect MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MUTE GROUP MASTER Restricts operations for mute group assignment and mute group master NOTE In the case of the CL3 CL1 faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown 3 SCENE LIST Specifies the operations that can be performed on scene memories e STORE SORT operations e
467. t 4 If desired you can paste see page 83 or insert the cut scene that was held in the buffer memory NOTE Be aware that if you copy or cut another scene before you paste or insert the newly copied or cut scene will overwrite the scene in the buffer memory 84 CU 5 3 A Reference Manual Inserting a scene You can insert a scene held in buffer memory at a desired scene number location 1 Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area The SCENE LIST window will appear 2 Perform the Copy operation see page 83 or Cut operation so that the scene you want to insert is placed in buffer memory NOTE You cannot copy or cut multiple scenes as the source 3 Rotate one of the multifunction knobs to select the insert destination scene number and then press the INSERT button A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Insert operation CONFIRMATION Insert Scene CANCEL NOTE f you select multiple scenes as the insert destination the same scene will be inserted the selected number of times If the scene list has been sorted in any way other than by number in the column the INSERT button will be unavailable If nothing has been stored in the buffer memory the INSERT button will be unavailable The INSERT button will be unavailable if there is already a scene stored at scene number 300 or if the Insert operation would cause an already stored scene to exceed number 300
468. t but successful synchronization cannot occur until a valid connection is established If the indicator for the port selected as the clock source has turned light blue and the clock frequency appears in the upper left of the MASTER CLOCK SELECT field this indicates that the CL series console is operating correctly with the new clock NOTE f the indicator for the selected clock does not turn light blue make sure that the external device is correctly connected and that the external device is set to transmit clock data Noise may occur at the output jacks when the word clock setting is changed To protect your speaker system be sure to turn down the power amp volume before changing the word clock setting If you attempt to select a channel for which SRC is on as the word clock source a message will appear warning you that the sampling rate converter will be disabled Other functions SLOT SETUP field This field enables you to make various settings related to the MY slots on the rear panel of the console SLOT SETUP weer 5468 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 FREQUENCY SRC EMPHASIS STATUS 1 Card name Indicates the type of card installed in the slot If nothing is installed will appear 2 SRC buttons The SRC Sampling Rate Converter function can be switched on or off for a slot in which an MY card MY8 AE96S that features the SRC function is installed If another type of card is installed
469. t Out Direct Out Point Pre HPF Pre EQ Pre Fader Post On Function Dynamics 1 Dynamics2 Fader On Pan Balance DCA Group Mute Group Mix Send Matrix Send LCR Pan DELAY Parameter Type Gate Ducking Comp Expander Threshold Gate 72 dB to 0 dB Others 54 dB to 0 dB Ratio 1 1 to 1 Attack 0 msec to 120 msec Hold 48 kHz 0 02 msec to 1 96 sec 44 1 kHz 0 02 msec to 2 13 sec Decay 48 kHz 5 msec to 42 3 sec 44 1 kHz 6 msec to 46 1 sec Releace 48 kHz 5msec to 42 3 sec 44 1 kHz 6 msec to 46 1 sec Range Gate dB to 0 dB Ducking 70 dB to 0 dB Gain 0 0 dB to 8dB Knee Hard to 5 soft Key In Self Pre EQ Self Post EQ Mix Out21 24 Ch1 STIN8R 8ch block Key In Filter HPF LPF BPF Type Comp De Esser Compander H Compander S Threshold 54 dB to 0 dB Ratio 1 1 to 1 Compander 1 1 to 20 1 Attack 0 msec to 120 msec Release 48 kHz 5 msec to 42 3 sec 44 1 kHz 6 msec to 46 1 sec Gain 18 dB 0 dB 0 dB to 18 dB Knee to 5 soft Key In Self Pre EQ Self Post EQ Mix Out21 24 Ch1 STIN8R 8ch block Width 1 dB to 90 dB Frequency 1 0 KHz to 12 5KHz TYPE HPF BPF Q 0 10 to 10 0 Level 1024 steps co 138 dB to 10 dB On Off Position L63 to R63 Pan Mode Pan Balance 16 Groups 8 Groups 24 sends Fix Variable can be set each two mixes Mix Send Point Pre EQ Pre Fader Post On Level 1024 steps 138 dB to 10 dB 8 Sends M
470. t companders combine the effects of the compressor expander and limiter Output Level THRESHOLD AE Input Level OdB WIDTH The companders function differently at the following levels 1 0 dB and higher 2 Exceeding the threshold 3 Below the threshold and width The hard compander has an expansion ratio of 5 1 while the soft compander has an expansion ratio of 1 5 1 The expander is essentially turned off when the width is set to maximum The compressor has a fixed knee setting of 2 The gain is automatically adjusted according to the ratio and threshold values and can be increased by up to 18 dB The OUT GAIN parameter enables you to compensate for the overall level change caused by the compression and expansion processes THRESHOLD dB 54 to 0 55 points Du Me the level at which compression is 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 3 Lb 1 5 1 T 7 1 2 0 1 2 5 1 3 0 1 3 5 1 4 0 1 5 0 1 6 0 1 8 0 1 10 1 20 1 15 points Functions as a limiter Functions as a compressor Functions as an expander This determines the amount of compression This determines how soon the signal is compressed or expanded once the compander has been triggered ATTACK ms 0 120 121 points This determines how soon the compressor or expander returns to the normal gain once the trigger signal level drops below or exceeds the threshold respectively The value is expressed as the duration required for the level to ch
471. te group S Safe will appear on the third row If the dimmer level has been set for a mute group the color of the characters changes from red to orange Press this field to open the DCA MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE popup window CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual Input and output patching This chapter explains how to edit the input patching and output patching how to connect inserts and how to use direct outputs CL console internal patching and Dante audio network patching The following diagram shows the signal flow through the CL series console I O devices and Dante audio network Dante Network Up to 512 channels 64 512 pante patching oy 5 0 0 0 3 CL internal patching 15 Input and output patching Input patching CL series consoles and I O devices feature two types of patching Dante audio network patching and CL console internal patching For Dante audio network patching you will use the DANTE INPUT PATCH popup window In this window you can patch CL console and I O device inputs Sixty four 64 channels can be input from a Dante audio network to a CL series console You can choose up to 64 channels from maximum of 512 channels logical value of Dante audio network signals Select the I O devices within 64 channels that you want to control from the CL series console Then route the input signals that were patched in the DANTE INPUT PATCH popup window to channels on the CL s
472. ted in the location specified in step 5 or step 6 CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual Logging in To operate the CL series console you must log in as the Administrator Guest or a User User settings for the Administrator and Guest are saved in the console itself However to log in as a User you must either select a key that is saved in the console itself or connect the USB flash drive in which a user authentication key has been saved If you use a user authentication key on a USB flash drive you will continue as the logged in user even if you remove the USB flash drive after logging in NOTE If the power is turned off and then on again the console will generally start up in the log in state in which the power was turned off If a user password has been assigned you will need to enter the password However if you cancel the input you will be forcibly logged in as Guest Logging in as Administrator 1 In the Function Access Area press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen 0 00 00 ADMIN Send To MIX1 STORAGE CREATE SAVE LOAD Administrator USER KEY PASSWORD How all operations are permitted 48V MASTER BUS SETUP SYSTEM SETUP OFI OH MIXER SETUP WORD CLOCK CASCADE SLOT METER T OUTPUT MIDI GPI DVER PORT MAIN INT SUB BATTERY POWER SUPPLY DANTE NETWORK CONSOLE BI CONTRAST BRIGHTNESS E NAME NAME COLOR SCREEN PANEL LAMP a O O Q Q
473. ters will transmitted received as NRPN messages on one MIDI channel NRPN mode TABLE button If this button is on the CL mix parameters will be transmitted received as Control Change messages on one MIDI channel TABLE mode 6 PARAMETER CHANGE field Enables you to turn SysEx system exclusive messages on or off These special messages are used to change the CL parameters Switches Parameter Change transmission on or off B o M Switches Parameter Change reception on or off e ECHO Switches or off echo output of Parameter Change messages If this function is on Parameter Change messages received from an external device will be retransmitted without modification 7 OTHER COMMAND field Switches on or off echo output of other messages If this function is on other messages received from an external device will be retransmitted without modification CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual 4 specify the port that will be used to transmit or receive each type of MIDI message press the transmit Tx or receive Rx port select popup button The MIDI SETUP popup window for selecting the port will appear Operations in this window are the same for both transmission Tx and reception Rx This window includes the following items MIDI SETUP TERMINAL PORT NO CANCEL 1 TERMINAL field Enables you to select the port that will transmit or receive MIDI messages You ca
474. the FADER ASSIGN field The faders and ON keys in the Centralogic section will return to their previous function NOTE When you close the GEQ popup window the buttons in the FADER ASSIGN field automatically turn off If you want to copy the currently displayed 31BandGEQ settings to the GEQ of another rack or to initialize the settings you can do so using the tool buttons at the top of the popup window For details on how to use these buttons refer to Using the tool buttons in the separate Owner s Manual NOTE e Only 31BandGEQ settings that use fifteen bands or less be copied to a Flex15GEQ GEQ settings can be saved and recalled at any time using the dedicated library CU 5 UL 3 V Reference Manual Using the Flex15GEQ You will use the Centralogic sections faders 1 8 and ON keys to control the Flex15GEQ 1 Refer to steps 1 6 in the Virtual rack operations section page 115 to mount a Flex15GEQ in a rack and set its input source and output destination A rack in which a Flex15GEQ is mounted will show information for two GEQ units A and B NOTE If you mount a Flex15GEQ two monaural 31BandGEQ units will be placed in a single rack However only up to fifteen bands can be adjusted for each unit Press the rack in which you mounted the Flex15GEQ The GEQ popup window for GEQ A or GEQ B will appear GEQ 14 INPUT NO ASSIGN OUTPUT NO ASSIGN GEQ 14 GEQ 1B GEQ 1A
475. the MONITOR OUT L R C channels to the desired output jacks you can also monitor the same signal through external speakers You can select the following signals as the monitor source e STEREO channel output signal MONO channel output signal e STEREO MONO channel output signal e OMNI IN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 channel input signal for monitoring a two channnel pair e RECORDER PLAYBACK output signal combination of up to eight MIX MATRIX STEREO or MONO channel output signals RECORDER PLAYBACK output signals and OMNI IN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 input signals The Cue function enables you to check an individual channel or DCA group by temporarily monitoring it via MONITOR OUT CUE OUT or PHONES When you press the CUE key on the top panel the cue signal ofthe corresponding channel or DCA group is sent as the monitor output or cue output from the selected output port NOTE Be aware that if you turn CUE INTERRUPTION off in the MONITOR popup window the cue signal will not be sent to the connected monitor speakers However the cue signal will always be sent to the PHONES Out jack The following diagram shows the cue monitor signal flow UE TRIM CUE ON MONITOR DELAY AUTO BYPASS o INPUT OUTPUT DCA
476. the OVERVIEW screen NOTE You can also select input ports from the GAIN PATCH popup window PATCH ICON D Repeat step 2 4 to assign input ports for other channels 1 PATCH button Indicates the currently selected input port If you press this button when selecting an icon or changing the channel name you will return to the input port select screen 2 Channel icon button Indicates the icon that is selected for the corresponding channel When you press this button a screen will appear in which you can select an icon or sample name 3 Channel name input box Indicates the name that is assigned to the corresponding channel When you press this field a keyboard window allowing you to assign a name will appear 4 Category select list Selects the category of input port shown in the popup window The categories correspond to the following input ports They vary depending on the channel type e DANTEI 32 DANTEI DANTE32 DANTE33 64 DANTE33 DANTE64 OMNI PB OUT OMNII OMNIS PB OUT L PB OUT R SLOT are SLOT1 1 SLOT1 16 SLOT2 1 SLOT2 16 SLOT SLOT3 1 SLOT3 16 20 CU 5 3 A Reference Manual Inserting an external device into a channel If desired you can insert an effect processor or other external device into the signal path of an INPUT MIX MATRIX STEREO or MONO channel When doing so the type of input output port used fo
477. the Recall Safe function NOTE Switching channels using this button will not affect the channel selection on the top panel 6 Selected channel display This area indicates the icon number color and name of the currently selected channel 7 APPLY TO ALL INPUT button input channels only Turn on this button to apply the Recall Safe parameter selection for one input channel to all other input channels This can be convenient if you want to apply Recall Safe to the same parameters for all input channels APPLY TO ALL OUTPUT button output channels only Turn on this button to apply Recall Safe parameter selection for one output channel to all other output channels This can be convenient if you want to apply Recall Safe to the same parameters for all output channels Scene memory SAFE PARAMETER SELECT field excluding DCA groups Selects Recall Safe parameters for the selected channel The button indication varies depending on the channel type as follows e Input channel NOTE ST IN channels do not feature INSERT INSERT PATCH or DIRECT OUT button e MIX channel MATRIX channel STEREO channel e MONO channel If Recall Safe is turned on for global parameters the safe parameter select buttons of the selected channel will light green as follows In this illustration the items that are lit green indicate that the INPUT PATCH INSERT PATCH and DIRECT OUT parameters have been set to Saf
478. the SETUP screen press the 48V MASTER field s ON button or OFF button If this button is off phantom power will not be supplied even if the 48V button of an OMNI jack input channel or TALKBACK IN is on NOTE This 48V MASTER setting does not affect the inputs of external racks such as DANTE inputs I O devices Each rack has a 48V MASTER switch and will operate according to its setting CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual Specifying the brightness of the touch screen LEDs channel name displays and lamps Follow the steps below to specify the brightness of the touch screen top panel LEDs channel name displays and lamps connected to the rear panel LAMP connectors 1 2 In the Function Access Area press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen In the field located in the right of the bottom row of the SETUP screen press the BANK A or BANK B button You can save two different brightness settings in bank A and B and switch between them rapidly if desired CONTRAST NAME Q BRIGHTNESS SCREEN PANEL LAMP Q NAME CH COLOR ROME BAHK B Use the multifunction knobs to set the following parameters CONTRAST field NAME octies Adjusts the contrast of the characters in the channel name displays on the top panel NAME Adjusts the brightness of the channel name displays on the top panel This will also change the CH COLOR brightness If you want to adjust the CH COLOR
479. the gain reduction method between FF Feed Forward circuit and FB Feed Back circuit The button will light when FB circuit is selected The FF circuit is used in most contemporary compressors This type is useful when you want to apply compression thoroughly while maintaining a consistent tonal color The FB circuit is used in vintage compressors This type is suitable when you want to apply a smooth compression while adding a tonal color that is characteristic to the device 4 GAIN REDUCTION meter Indicates the amount of gain reduction 5 THRESHOLD knob Adjusts the threshold at which compression starts to be applied 6 RATIO knob Adjusts the compression ratio Fully rotate the knob clockwise to switch to the limiter ATTACK knob Adjusts the compressor s attack time RELEASE knob Adjusts the compressor s release time 9 GAIN knob Adjusts the output gain CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual 076 1776 is processor that emulates popular vintage compressor used in a wide range of situations This processor does not provide the threshold parameter that is found on conventional compressors Instead the intensity of compression is determined by the balance between the input gain and the output gain The All mode setting for the RATIO parameter allows you to create a heavily compressed sound that is typical of this model It produces an aggressive tonal character with a rich addition of overt
480. the on screen knob or the multifunction knobs on the top panel to specify the address If you plan to connect the CL series console to your computer in a one to one connection we recommend that you use the following default values Make sure that the IP address and Gateway address do not match the addresses of any other device on the network IP address 192 168 0 128 or similar Gateway address 192 168 0 1 or similar Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 or similar For details on settings related to connecting to a LAN refer to the CL Editor Installation Guide When you have finished making settings press the OK button If you changed the setting a confirmation dialog box will appear ATTENTION Change NETWORK settings To complete this operation you will need to restart the CL Console CANCEL To make the setting press the OK button The changes will be finalized and the popup screen will close If you decide to cancel the change press the CANCEL button instead of the OK button NOTE In order for the change to take effect you must power off the CL series console and then turn it on again Restart the CL series console CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual Other functions Initializing the unit to factory default settings dialog box will ask you to confirm the initialization Press the INITIALIZE button A dialog box will ask you to reconfirm the operation If an error occurs in the CL console internal memory
481. the song selected in the list The file name cannot be edited here 2 ARTIST EDIT button Enables you to edit the artist name of the song selected in the list 3 SONG TITLE FILE NAME SORT button Sorts the list in numerical alphabetical order of the title or file name 4 ARTIST SORT button Sorts the list in numerical alphabetical order of the artist name 5 SAVE LIST button Saves the order of the current title list and PLAY check symbol settings to a USB flash drive as a playlist 187 Recorder 6 SONG TITLE FILE NAME button Enables you to select either song title or file name to be displayed in the SONG TITLE FILE NAME field 3 In the screen you can use the folder icon in the NO column and the change directory button to view the contents of the folder that includes the desired file 4 If you want to edit a title in the title list press the SONG TITLE FILE NAME EDIT button If you want to edit the artist name press the ARTIST EDIT button popup window will appear allowing you to edit the text NOTE e f the title or artist name contains characters that cannot be displayed these characters will be converted into for display The title and the artist name can be edited only for format audio files 5 Edit the title or artist name A maximum of 128 single byte characters 64 double byte characters can be input for both the title and for the artist name If the text cannot be shown complete
482. this column will correspond to the bank number Indicates the program number 1 128 CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual e PROGRAM CHANGE EVENT Indicates the type number title of the event assigned to each channel bank number or program number Press an individual event display area to access the MIDI PROGRAM CHANGE popup window in which you can select the event that you want to assign 4 Scroll knob Press this knob to scroll the list using the multifunction knob 5 CLEAR ALL button Press this button to erase all events from the list 6 INITIALIZE ALL button Press this button to restore all event assignments on the list to their default state 6 Use the buttons in the PROGRAM CHANGE MODE field to select the Program Change transmission reception mode You can select one of the following two Program Change transmission reception modes Multi mode when the MULTI button is Program changes of all MIDI channels will be transmitted and received The transmit receive channel specified in the MIDI SETUP page will be ignored When a Program Change is received the event assigned to the corresponding MIDI channel and program number in the list will be executed When you execute the specified event on the CL series console the Program Change of the corresponding MIDI channel and program number in the list will be transmitted e Single mode when the SINGLE button is Only Program
483. through headphones 9 Make settings for Dimmer Delay Monaural and CUE INTERRUPTION as desired NOTE Monitor on off operations selection of the monitor source and dimmer on off operations can also be assigned to USER DEFINED keys see page 169 101 Monitor and Cue functions Using the Cue function About CUE groups Cue signals on the CL series console can be categorized into the following four groups INPUT CUE group The cue signals of input channels make up this group To enable Cue for this group press the CUE key for any input channel to turn Cue on 1 ON E3 If input channels ST IN channels assigned to the Centralogic section you can also use the CUE keys in the Centralogic section to enable Cue for this group 2 DCA CUE group The cue signals of DCA groups make up this group To enable Cue for this group press the CUE key of one of the DCA groups to turn Cue on 4 Vy SEL Es Input channel CUE key CUE Centralogic section CUE key oe pow when controlling DCA groups _ DCA 3 OUTPUT CUE group The cue signals of output channels make up this group To enable Cue for this group press the CUE key of one of the output channels A RN CUE CUE key in the Master section CU 5 UL 3 V Reference Manual CUE key in the Centralogic section whe
484. tings that were in effect when you turned Gain Compensation on Therefore the signal level on the audio network will remain the same NOTE Since the compensated gain is the gain used to automatically compensate the gain within the O device it is not shown as a parameter The position at the moment this was turned on will be displayed 34 Input channels Adjusting the digital gain If the Gain Compensation function is turned on digital gain will be used to adjust the level of the signal input to the CLs input channels Follow the steps below 1 2 3 Press the SEL key for the input channel that you want to control Press one of the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section The SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen for the selected channel will appear Press the GAIN field The GAIN PATCH popup window will appear GAIN PATCH GC GC ALL ON OFF ch 1 INPUT PATCH INPUT PORT CHI DAHTEI p 001 001 ch 1 Use multifunction knob 8 to adjust the D GAIN parameter NOTE e Press the SETUP button then the USER SETUP button select the PREFERENCE tab and then set the GAIN KNOB FUNCTION to DIGITAL GAIN You will be able to adjust the digital gain value by using the GAIN knob on the corresponding channel strip or the GAIN knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section e You can also operate the digital gain by assigning INPUT GAIN gt DIGITAL GAIN to a USER DEFINED knob or by assigning an ALTERNATE function to
485. to clear all selections 2 OUTPUT DESTINATION field e GPI OUTT1 GPI OUTS buttons Select the GPI OUT port for which you want to make settings 3 Fader indicator This indicates the selected fader Use the SEL keys of the console panel to select a fader NOTE In the case of the CL3 CL1 channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown Other functions 4 THRESHOLD field UPSTROKE DOWNSTROKE knobs These specify the level that will be the threshold for outputting a trigger signal A trigger signal will be output when the fader exceeds the UPSTROKE level or when the fader falls below the DOWNSTROKE level If FADER TALLY is selected as the fader mode UPSTROKE and DOWNSTROKE specify the level range for which a trigger signal will be output You can use the multifunction knobs to operate these parameters NOTE e The THRESHOLD values specified by the UPSTROKE DOWNSTROKE knobs are common to all GPI OUT ports However you can individually choose the channel fader for each GPI OUT port Only the UPSTROKE value will be valid if MODE is set to FADER START and only the DOWNSTROKE value will be valid if MODE is set to FADER STOP If MODE is set to FADER TALLY both the UPSTROKE and DOWNSTROKE values will be valid 5 MODE field Here you can select the mode of fader operation that will be the trigger for signal output from the GPI OUT port You can choose from the following fader modes NO ASSIGN Operating t
486. to edit the Dante patch settings You can operate these buttons regardless of the state of the DANTE PATCH BY select buttons on other CL series consoles on the network NOTE Settings that are shared with the I O device BIT LATENCY W CLOCK will reflect the settings of the CL series console whose CONSOLE ID is set to 1 e If the DANTE CONTROLLER button is selected in the DANTE PATCH BY section and you attempt to edit the Dante patching or related settings the message This Operation is Not Allowed will appear at the bottom of the screen CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual Switching the CONSOLE ID and SECONDARY PORT 1 Inthe SETUP field select the CONSOLE ID and the SECONDARY PORT The button you switched is shown in red DANTE SETUP CONSOLE ID After changing this setup Network Audio Module will be rebooted automatically audio will mute for about 30 seconds SECONDARY PORT CANCEL DANTE PATCH BY LATENCY ms Latency Maximum Network Size 0 25 ms Gigabit network with one switches Three devices 0 5 ms Gigabit network with three switches Five devices 1 0 ms Gigabit network with eight switches Ten devices 5 0 ms Safe value Safe value in the case of Daisy Chain Switches _ REMOTE HA SETUP DEVICE MOUNT ASSIGN 2 Press the APPLY button A popup window will appear asking you to confirm the change to the CONSOLE ID and SECONDARY PORT ATTENTION Change DANTE settings After
487. to individual scenes the Recall Safe settings are globally applied to all scenes 1 Inthe Function Access Area press the CH JOB button to access the CH JOB popup window CH JOB x CH ASSIGN 2 Press the RECALL SAFE button to access the CH LINK RECALL SAFE MODE popup window DCA GROUP RECALL SAFE button In this popup window you can make settings for the Recall Safe function The window contains the following items RECALL SAFE MUTE GROUP CH SORT COPY MOVE ue DEFAULT 2 00 T RECALL MODE SETAL x RECALL SAFE MODE 2 Press SEL to select TARQET CH and choose parameters for RECALL SAFE 2 Press SEL to select TARGET CH and choose parameters for RECALL SAFE CH RECALL SAFE RECALL SAFE GLOBAL RECALL SAFE CH 1 16 CH17 32 MIX 1 8 CH 1 16 CH17 32 MIX 1 8 GEQ RACK GEQ RACK CH33 48 CH49 64 MIX 9 16 CH33 48 CH49 64 MIX 9 16 24 FF CH65 72 TY MIX 17 24 EFFECT RACK ANERUAEM Sire DOCE MIX 17 24 EFFECT RACK 5 MATRIX MONO PREMIUM RACK STEREO MATRIX MONO PREMIUM RACK PANEL SNAPSHOT PANEL SNAPSHOT ET ch1 ALL INPUT APPLY TO ALL OUTPUT OUTPUT INSERT B MATRIX PATCH SAFE APPLY TO S OO INPUT PATCH DIGITAL GAIN CLOSE 1 CLEAR ALL button SET ALL button The CLEAR ALL button turns off disables the
488. to use these buttons refer to Using the tool buttons in the separate Owner s Manual NOTE Effect settings can be stored and recalled using the effect library 127 Graphic EQ effects and Premium Rack Using the Tap Tempo function Tap tempo is a function that lets you specify the delay time of a delay effect or the modulation speed of a modulation effect by striking a key at the desired interval To use the Tap function you must first assign Tap Tempo to a USER DEFINED key and then operate that USER DEFINED key 1 In the Function Access Area press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen CURRENT USER STORAGE CREATE SAVE LOAD Administrator USER KEY PASSWORD CHANGE 6ns are permitted SYSTEM SETUP 48V MASTER BUS SETUP OH MIXER SETUP WORD CLOCK CASCADE SLOT OUTPUT PORT MIDI GPI OK 56 BATTERY POWER SUPPLY DANTE NETWORK BRIGHTNESS NAME CH COLOR SCREEN PANEL OR ORONO CONTRAST CONSOLE NAME Q ce TU p LAMP Q In the upper left of the screen press the USER SETUP button to access the USER SETUP popup window FE 000 Initial Data CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual This window includes several pages which you can switch between using the tabs located at the bottom of the window USER SETUP PREFERENCE for Administrator STORE RECALL STORE CONFIRMATION RECALL CONFIRMATION PATCH PATCH CONF
489. top of the popup window For details on how to use these buttons refer to Using the tool buttons in the separate Owner s Manual NOTE GEQ settings can be saved and recalled using the dedicated library CU 5 VL 3 V Reference Manual About the internal effects The internal effects of the CL series console can be mounted in EFFECT racks 1 8 and patched to an output channels output or input channels input or inserted into a channel For each effect mounted in a rack you can choose one of 54 types of effect With the default settings the signals from MIX channels 17 24 are input to racks 1 8 and from the racks are then output to ST IN 1 8 L R NOTE Some effect types can be mounted only in racks 1 3 5 or 7 To use an internal effect via send and return assign the output of a MIX channel to the input of the effect and assign the output of the effect to an input channel In this case the corresponding output channel is used as a master channel for the effect send and the input channel is used as an effect return channel Rack 1 Rack 2 Output of the output channel Input of the input channel OUTPUT PATCH INPUT PATCH Rack 8 Alternatively you can assign the input and output of the internal effect to the insert out in of a desired channel except for a ST IN channel so that the effect is inserted into that channel EFFECT Excluding a ST IN channel Insert in of
490. tor DIGITAL OUT A connector HA REMOTE 1 connector AD8HR 1 HA REMOTE 2 connector DIGITAL OUT A connector HA REMOTE 1 connector AD8HR 2 HA REMOTE 2 connector DIGITAL OUT A connector HA REMOTE 1 connector AD8HR 3 HA REMOTE 2 connector 4 Up to six units 144 CU 5 66 _ 6 amp Reference Manual I O device and external head amp Connecting the CL series console to an SB168 ES B Ring connection To remotely control the SB168 ES from the CL series console install an MY16 ES64 EtherSound card CL5 in Slot 1 on the CL then use an Ethernet cable to connect the CL to the SB168 ES This connection A enables you to remotely control the SB168 ES from the CL series console Audio signal gt Remote signal gt Alternatively you can use a daisy chain or ring connection and install two MY16 EX expansion cards in the slots on the CL unit to remotely control up to three SB168 ES units simultaneously NOTE Remote control data will be received and transmitted only at Slot 1 on the CL series console
491. tput ports of the I O device select and press the I O device the DANTE PATCH field of the I O device screen to access the OUTPUT PATCH popup window The OUTPUT PATCH popup window will appear 1 0 DEVICE 1 OUTPUT PATCH x 1 0 DEVICE 1 YOO1 Rio3224 D OUTPUT OUTPUT2 OUTPUTS OUTPUT4 OUTPUTS OUTPUT6 OUTPUT OUTPUTS us ur OUTPUTS OUTPUTIO X OUTPUTI1 OUTPUTI2 OUTPUTI3 X OUTPUTI4 OUTPUTIS OUTPUTI6 4ES EBUI AES EBU2 AES EBU3 AES EBU4 AES EBUS AES EBUG 7 AES EBU8 17 24 AA 1 Port select buttons Press one of the buttons to open the PORT SELECT popup window 8 If you want to change the patching press the port select button The PORT SELECT popup window will appear PORT SELECT 2 Select candidate R 63224 0 1 OUTPUT 1 033 064 1 Category select list Select the Dante port to which the signal you want to output is assigned I O device and external head amp 2 Port select buttons Select the Dante port DANTE 1 64 to which the signal you want to output is assigned 3 CLOSE button Completes the settings and closes the popup window 9 the same way specify the channels that you want to output to other OUTPUT ports Remotely controlling an Rio unit Heres how to remotely control an Rio unit thats connected to the Dante connector 1 Inthe upper part of the 1 DEVICE screen press the Rio tab to access the Rio field The Rio field inclu
492. ttings Security 2 PATCH field Enables you to turn on or off options related to patch operations PATCH CONFIRMATION If this ON button is lit a confirmation message will appear when you edit an input patch or output patch e STEAL PATCH CONFIRMATION If this ON button is lit a confirmation message will appear when you edit an input or output patch item that is already patched to a port 3 LOCALE SETUP field In the SAVE LOAD screen or RECORDER screen select JA if you want Japanese to be displayed This does not select the Help language 4 ERROR MESSAGE field Specifies whether error messages will be displayed e DIGITAL I O ERROR If this ON button is lit an error message will appear when a digital I O error occurs e MIDI I O ERROR If this is on an error message will appear when a MIDI transmit receive error occurs 5 PANEL OPERATION field Enables you to make settings for options related to panel operation AUTO CHANNEL SELECT Specifies whether the corresponding channel will be selected when you operate the ON key or fader for the channel You can set this parameter separately for INPUT input channels and OUTPUT output channels CUE SEL LINK Specifies whether channel selection will be linked with cue operations If the LINK button is on channels for which cue operations were performed will be selected FADER BANK SEL LINK Specifies whether channel selection will be linked with fa
493. ue High 128 Control value Low 2 2 When only Low data is received rxValue curValue amp 16256 Control value Low 2 3 When only High data is received rxValue Control value High 128 curValue amp 127 3 If the assigned parameter has 16 384 or more but less than 2 097 152 steps paramWidth 2097152 3 1 When High Middle and Low data is received rxValue Control value High 16384 Control value Middle 128 Control value Low 3 2 When only Low data is received rxValue curValue amp 2097024 Control value Low 3 3 When only Middle data is received rxValue curValue amp 2080895 Control value Middle 128 3 4 When only High data is received rxValue curValue amp 16383 Control value High 16384 3 5 When only Middle and Low data is received rxValue curValue amp 2080768 Control value Middle 128 Control value Low 3 6 When only High and Low data is received rxValue curValue amp 16256 Control value High 16384 Control value Low 3 7 When only High and Middle data is received rxValue curValue amp 127 Control value High 16384 Control value Middle 128 if rxValue paramWidth rxValue paramWidth param rxValue mod 2 add 264 Appendices If NRPN is selected STATUS 1011nnnn Bn Control change DATA 01100010 62 NRPNLSB Ovvvvvvv vv Parameter number LSB STATUS 1011nnnn Bn Control change DATA 0110001
494. um value depends on the tempo setting CHORUS Two input two output chorus effect 005 3000 Moduatonspesd o WAVE EQ peaking type frequency SSS 100910 FQ peaking type bandwidth SSS 1 fF A d de d d oon LSH F CU 5 6 VL 3 V Reference Manual FLANGE Two input two output flange effect 005 4000 Hz GAN 559358959 Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for 9 reverse phase feedback WAVE Modulation waveform SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off 100 H800 kiz EO peaking ype frequency 100 010 0 peaking ype bandwidth SSS Us GS RIM ddd ode d 4 d d 55 SYMPHONIC Two input two output symphonic effect Fato oomo moona WAVE EQ peaking type frequency SSS 10910 FO peaking type bandwidth 7 ddd D d 4 d d 55 LSH F 236 Appendices PHASER Two input two output 16 stage phaser FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for 0 TERTIUM PERO UD reverse phase feedback OFFSET 0 100 Lowest phase shifted frequency offset PHASE 0 00 354 38 degrees Left and right modulation phase balance STAGE 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 Number of phase shift stages SYNC OFF ON Tempo paramet
495. unlike that of a conventional EQ and is a uniquely distinctive characteristic of this model The input output circuits and vacuum tubes produce a tonal character that is highly musical and well balanced Graphic EQ effects and Premium Rack 7 HIGH BOOST knob Sets the amount of boost applied to the frequency band specified by the HIGH FREQUENCY knob HIGH ATTEN knob Sets the amount of attenuation applied to the frequency band specified by the ATTEN SEL knob 4 9 D 8 9 PREMIUM 4 INPUT NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN EQ 1A NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN L EQ 1A St L R po Boost AMEN 4 5 6 4 5 6 6 6 4 6 3 7 7 7 yi 7 f ty Boost ATTEN ATEN SEL 5 5 A 5 10 20 YAMAHA PROGRAM EQUALIZER IN A C BROAD _ LOW FREQUENCY BANDWIDTH _ HIGHFREQUENCY __ te ell 10 BOOST 2 ELO BHI BOOST G GH 0 00 100 2 0 00 2 50 0 00 10kHz 0 00 10kHz D 2 CD IN switch Turns the processor on or off When the switch is off the signal will bypass the filter section but pass through the input output transformer and amp circuits 2 LOW FREQUENCY knob Sets the frequency of the low range filter 3 LOW BOOST knob Sets the amount of boost applied to the frequency band specified by the LOW FREQUENCY knob 4 LOW ATTEN knob Sets the amount of attenuation applied to the frequency band specified
496. up window will appear allowing you to change the control number assignment 4 CLEAR ALL button Press this button to clear all event assignments on the list 5 INITIALIZE ALL button Press this button to restore all event assignments on the list to their default state 6 Scroll knob Scrolls the contents of the list You can use a multifunction knob to operate this CU 5 6 VL 3 V Reference Manual 6 Use the buttons the CONTROL CHANGE field to select the Control Change transmission reception mode You can choose one of the following two modes for Control Change transmission reception NRPN mode when the NRPN button is on Various mix parameters on the CL series console will be transmitted and received on a single MIDI channel as NRPN messages If you select this mode the assignments on the list will be ignored TABLE mode when the TABLE button is on Various mix parameters on the CL series console will be transmitted and received on a single MIDI channel as Control Change messages NOTE The channel on which Control Changes are transmitted and received is specified by the PORT CH field on the MIDI SETUP page see page 150 Use the buttons in the CONTROL CHANGE field to turn transmission and reception on or off and make settings for echo output Each button has the following function Tx button Switches Control Change transmission on or off Rx button
497. up method select button is SUPPORTED DEVICE If you want to select and mount an I O device that is supported by the CL series press the SUPPORTED DEVICE button to see the SUPPORTED DEVICE field These settings can be made even when not connected to a Dante audio network DEVICE SELECT 1 Select HO ASSIGN DEVICE LIST SUPPORTED DEVICE DYS or MANUAL then assign Device type and UHIT ID LI NLNE OFFLINE SUPPORTED DEVICE TYPE OVAMAHA SESS seme mE wee PT rT Rio3224 D Ee Rio3224 D 32IN 240UT UNIT ID Q CANCEL This screen contains the following items 1 DEVICE TYPE This area shows a list of the I O device types that are supported by the CL series From the list choose the type of I O device that you want to mount 2 DEVICE TYPE select knob Use the multi function knob to select the type of I O device that you want to mount 3 VO device indication This area shows the selected I O device The upper line shows the front panel of the I O device The lower line shows the model name and the number of inputs and outputs 4 UNIT ID knob Use the multifunction knobs to specify the UNIT ID The indicator shows the UNIT ID 219 Other functions NOTE If there is one I O device set the I O device s UNIT ID to 1 If multiple devices are connected assign the ID numbers so that there is no conflict between devices For devices other than
498. us VARI or FIXED 6 As desired turn the buttons in the PAN LINK field on or off In the PAN LINK field you can specity whether the panning of the signal routed from an input channel to the stereo bus will be linked with operation of the INPUT TO ST PAN knob if the input channel s SIGNAL is set to STEREO and BUS TYPE is set to VARI If the PAN LINK button is on If the send destination bus is stereo the PAN knob that appears in the location of the SEND LEVEL knob on the screens for input channels will be linked with the INPUT TO ST PAN knob If the PAN LINK button is off The PAN knob that appears in the location ofthe SEND LEVEL knob of input channels in various screens is not linked with INPUT TO ST it can be operated independently Other functions Switching the entire phantom power supply on off 1 In the function access area press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen CURRENT USER 5 TP CREATE SAVE LOAD Administrator USER KEY PASSWORD CHANGE How all operations are permitted SYSTEM SETUP 48V MASTER BUS SETUP OFT OH MIXER SETUP WORD CLOCK CASCADE OUTPUT ES PORT DANTE DANTE SETUP BATTERY MAIN NETWORK POWER SUPPLY sue DANTE CONSOLE ra CONTRAST NAME NAME CH COLOR SCREEN PANEL LAMP BANK ys Q Q at scene 000 a 000 Initial Data BRIGHTNESS SETUP 2 Inthe center of
499. use a daisy chain connection to remotely control multiple AD8HR units simultaneously To do this connect the 8 HA REMOTE 2 connector to the second AD8HRS HA REMOTE 1 connector If you use the NAI48 ES you can connect up to six AD8HR units In this case to input AD8HRS audio signals into the CL series console install two MY16 EX cards on the CL unit since each slot on the CL unit accepts up to 16 channel signals Then use an Ethernet cable to make connections to the MY16 ES64 I O device and external head amp Audio signal gt sep 80666660 686666606 elei efel Bag a og 8 Remote signal gt 8 9 89 m NAI48 ES HA REMOTE connec
500. used as a gate ducking device compressor or expander while Dynamics 2 can be used as a compressor hard compander soft compander or de esser Output channels provide one dynamics processor which can be used as a compressor expander hard compander or soft compander Using EQ This section explains the four band EQ that is provided on input channels and output channels 1 Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to access the OVERVIEW screen that includes the channel for which you want to control the EQ The EQ field shows the response of the EQ In this OVERVIEW screen you can edit the parameter by using the EQ knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section If you want to edit while watching the ATT HPF EQ parameter values press the EQ field in the OVERVIEW screen to access the HPF EQ popup window In the HPF EQ popup window you can edit the EQ and high pass filter parameters and switch them on off This popup window features five types of views Each window view includes the following items 56 EQ and Dynamics HPF EQ popup window 1ch This lets you view and edit all EQ parameters of the currently selected channel This is convenient if you want to make detailed EQ settings for a specific channel 0 Q9 w iJ cy HPF EQ is DEFRULT HPF EQ LIBRARY MIX1 9 CHI MX 1 10 0k LOW MID 7 d ai 0 0 1 LIBRARY button Press this button to open the EQ Libr
501. utive playback the files marked with a check symbol will be played Press the PLAY PAUSE gt II button The song you selected in step 4 will begin playing NOTE The USB memory recorder can play back audio files that feature a sampling rate of 44 1 kHz or 48 kHz Even if the sampling rate at which the CL series console is operating differs from the sampling rate of the audio file being played the SRC Sampling Rate Converter function will automatically convert the rate so that the file will be played back correctly e f the REPEAT button is on playback will continue until you stop playback To stop playback press the STOP button CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual Editing the title list You can change the order of the audio files shown in the title list and edit the titles or artist names 1 Connect a USB flash drive containing audio files to the USB connector 2 Inthe Function Access Area press the RECORDER button to access the RECORDER screen USB tab ER ofe us PATH VOLUMI CRST RKI0 2 wrevsoness FREE sve 1 868 92 NO FILE NAME ARTIST TIME Jl 00 00 13 7 SONGO02 MP3 Artist 00 00 07 f MOVE MOVE SAVE PLAY MODE 001 00 00 00 00 00 13 SINGLE C REC RATE da 192kbps a RECORDER INPUT gt PLAYBACK OUT mec D SONG TITLE FILE NAME EDIT button Enables you to edit the title of
502. utton of each of those units to turn off the ID 2 SECONDARY PORT select buttons Specify how the Dante audio network is configured 3 CANCEL button When editing the CONSOLE ID or SECONDARY PORT settings you can press this button to cancel the changes you made 4 APPLY button After changing the CONSOLE ID or SECONDARY PORT settings press this button to apply the changes you made 214 Other functions 5 BIT select buttons Enable you to set the audio bit depth to 24 bit or 32 bit NOTE 24bit Use this when transmitting and receiving data to or from an Rio unit When using a CL series system you will normally use this setting 32bit This is effective when transmitting and receiving 25 bit or larger data when using cascade or gain compensation but the amount of data being transmitted will increase 20 30 compared to 24 bit 6 LATENCY select buttons Enable you to set the Dante audio network latency to 0 25 ms 0 5 ms 1 0 ms or 5 0 ms The latency setting varies depending on the network connection method and size For details refer to Setting the Dante audio network latency on page 215 7 DANTE PATCH BY select buttons Use these select buttons when using Dante Controller to make Dante patch settings If the THIS CONSOLE button is selected the DANTE INPUT PATCH and DANTE OUTPUT PATCH settings can be edited from the CL series console If the DANTE CONTROLLER button is selected it will not be possible
503. utton s for the channel s in this section multiple selections are allowed The ASSIGNED indicator is lit green for a tab that contains a selection You can press the CLEAR ALL button to defeat all selections NOTE In the case of the CL3 CL1 channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown 4 Meter section Indicates the oscillator output level 5 OSCILLATOR OUTPUT button 3 4 Turns the oscillator on or off Press a button in the MODE field to select the type of signal you want to output Use the knobs and buttons in the parameter field to adjust the oscillator parameters The displayed parameters will differ depending on the oscillator selected in the MODE field The knobs shown in the parameter field can be operated using the corresponding multifunction knobs Press a button in the ASSIGN field to specify the input channel s or bus es to which the oscillator signal will be sent multiple selections are allowed To enable the oscillator press the OUTPUT button to turn it on The oscillator signal will be sent to the input channel or bus you selected in step 5 When you press the button again the oscillator will turn off 110 Talkback and Oscillator CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual Meters This chapter explains the METER screen that shows the input and output level meters for all channels and operations related to the optional MBCL meter bridge Operations in the METER
504. utton to access the CH JOB menu CH JOB x CH ASSIGN 2 Press the COPY button to access the CH COPY MODE popup window CH LINK GROUP This popup window enables you to copy channel settings The window contains the following items MUTE GROUP RECALL SAFE COPY button CH SORT CH COPY MODE DEFAULT Select SOURCE and DESTINATION with SEL J and press COPY button SOURCE CH DESTINATION CHs Multiple Selection Select SOURCE CH with SEL 73 COPY TARGET field e MODULE PARAMETERS button WITH MIX SEND WITH MATRIX SEND button 2 DESTINATION CHs field Grouping and linking 1 SOURCE CH field This field displays the copy source channel While this window is displayed press a SEL key on the top panel to select a channel The field will indicate the selected channel Before selection After selection CH COPY MODE CH COPY MODE 2 Select SOURCE and DESTINATION with SEL EJ Select SOURCE CH and DESTINATION CHs with SEL switches J and press COPY button EJ and press COPY button SOURCE CH DESTINATION CHs Multiple Selection CH 1 16 CH17 32 CH 1 16 CH17 32 SOURCE CH DESTINATION Multiple Selection CH33 48 CH49 64 gt CH33 48 CH49 64 Select SOURCE CH with SEL CH65 72 ST IN CH65 72 ST IN If the copy source is a MIX MATRIX channel buttons will appear so you will be able to select parameters to copy MIX 9 16 M
505. vailable Available Available Available Normal user User without Available N A Power User Viewing only privileges Guest Available Available only Setting the Administrator password With the factory settings the Administrator password is not set meaning that anyone can log in with Administrator privileges and perform all operations If you want to restrict the operations of other users you must specify an Administrator password Available Excluding User Level settings Available Available 1 In the Function Access Area press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen _ CH1 ch 1 STORAGE 0 00 00 ADMIN Send To 1 CURRENT USER UNUS s CREATE Admi USER KEY PASSWORD CHANGE How all operations are permitted SYSTEM SETUP 48V MASTER BUS SETUP OFT OH MIXER SETUP WORD CLOCK CASCADE OUTPUT MIDI GPI METER SLOT PORT QUER BRTTERY MAIN POWER SUPPLY sue DANTE DANTE SETUP NETWORK DANTE CONSOLE aa CONTRAST BRIGHTNESS i NAME NAME COLOR SCREEN PANEL LAMP BANK B ys Q Q _ scene 000 a 000 Initial Data CU 5 6 VL 3 V Reference Manual 2 3 Press the PASSWORD CHANGE button A keyboard window will appear allowing you to enter a password PASSWORD CHANGE USER NEW PASSWORD RE ENTER PASSWORD Administrator PASTE INS DEL SHIFT LOCK CANCEL Enter
506. want to assign a function The USER DEFINED KNOB SETUP window will appear In this window you can select a function to assign to the USER DEFINED knob and select the parameters User settings Security USER DEFINED KNOB SETUP 2 Select Parameters for USER DEFINED KNOB LAJ FUNCTION PARAMETER 1 BRIGHTNESS t 4 CANCEL NOTE The list shown is the same for all models of the CL series For the CL3 CL1 the display will indicate Cannot Assign if you specify a parameter that does not exist on that model 5 Make sure that the FUNCTION field is enclosed by a frame then use the 4 amp buttons in the lower part of the field or the multifunction knobs on the top panel to select the function you want to assign For details on the assignable functions and their parameters refer to Functions that can be assigned to USER DEFINED knobs on page 262 Ifthe selected function has parameters press the PARAMETER 1 or 2 field to move the frame then select parameters 1 and 2 in the same way 7 Press the OK button to close the USER DEFINED KNOB SETUP window 8 Assign the desired functions to other USER DEFINED knobs in the same way 9 execute an assigned function press the corresponding USER DEFINED 1 4 knob on the panel About TOUCH AND TURN XXE Q9 ws The TOUCH AND TURN function is assigned to the USER DEFINED 4 knob by default If this function is assigned to one of the USER DEFINED knobs you can pre
507. want to use for the channel You can use the channel color select buttons to select the color of the channel The selected icon or color will appear on the icon button in the upper part of the window To edit the channel name based on a sample name use the sample name setup buttons to select a sample name The sample name you selected will be entered in the channel name field in the upper part of the window To enter the channel name directly proceed to Step 6 NOTE You can also add or edit characters in the channel name field after you have entered the sample name If you want to quickly assign channel names that consist of a common name plus consecutive number such as Vocal 1 or Vocal 2 enter a sample name first and then add a number CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual 6 If you want to enter a channel name directly or edit a sample name that has been entered press the channel name field in the upper part of the window The keyboard window will appear in the lower part of the screen allowing you to enter or edit the characters PATCH NAME PATCH 1 SHIFT LOCK 7 Use the SEL keys to switch input channels and specify the icon or channel name for other channels in the same way When the PATCH NAME popup window is displayed you can use the SEL keys to switch the channel to be controlled When you finish your data input press the x symbol in the upper right of the window NOTE P
508. window will appear and you will automatically scroll to the corresponding item If there are multiple explanations for the same controller you can repeat step 9 to successively display these explanations 11 To close the window once again press the USER DEFINED key to which the Help function is assigned B Directly recalling the Help for a specific controller in the LCD screen 9 while holding down the USER DEFINED key to which you have assigned the Help function press the on screen controller for which you want to recall Help The on screen buttons and tabs will not function as long as you continue holding down the USER DEFINED key to which the Help function is assigned 10 if thereis corresponding Help item the HELP popup window will appear and you will automatically scroll to the corresponding item If there are multiple explanations for the same controller close the HELP popup window and then repeat step 9 to successively view these explanations 11 To close the window once again press the USER DEFINED key to which the Help function is assigned CU 5 6 VL 3 V Reference Manual Other functions This chapter explains various functions of CL series consoles that are not covered in other chapters About the SETUP screen The SETUP screen enables you to set various parameters that apply to the entire CL console To access the SETUP screen press the SETUP button in the Function Access Area The screen contai
509. word clock for the entire system the word clock master and then set the remaining devices the word clock slaves so that they synchronize to the word clock master If you wish to use the CL series console as a word clock slave that is synchronized to the word clock supplied from an external device you must specify the appropriate clock source the port through which the word clock is obtained This section explains how to select the clock source that the CL series console will use 1 In the Function Access Area press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen CURRENT USER STORAGE 0 00 00 ADMIN P CREATE SAVE LOAD Send To Administrator USER KEY PASSWORD CHANGE How all operations are permitted SYSTEM SETUP 48V MASTER BUS SETUP OFT OH WORD CLOCK OUTPUT MIDI GPI METER SLOT PORT OVER POWER SUPPLY SUB DANTE NETWORK BATTERY MRIN CONTRAST BRIGHTNESS CH COLOR SCREEN PANEL LAMP P RT Q Q Q PT Initial Data CONSOLE LOCK Other functions 2 Inthe SYSTEM SETUP field at the center of the screen press the WORD CLOCK SLOT SETUP button to open the WORD CLOCK SLOT SETUP popup window This popup window contains the following items MASTER CLOCK SELECT UNLOCK LOCKED SRC ON UNLOCKED LOCKED BUT NOT SYNC ED UNKNOWN INT INT 48k 44 11 WORD CLOCK IN DANTE DAHTI 48k 44 1
510. x is ON when you operate a specified parameter the four messages NRPN control number 62h 63h and DATA ENTRY control number 06h 26h are transmitted on the Tx CH channel For the parameters that can be assigned refer to Parameters that can be assigned to control changes on page 248 CONTROL CHANGE messages are not used for transmission to CL Editor because there is no guarantee that the contents of the assignment tables will match PARAMETER CHANGE messages are always used CONTROL CHANGE numbers 0 and 32 are for selecting banks STATUS 1011nnnn Bn Control change DATA O00 Control number 00 Ovvvvvvv Control Value 0 127 STATUS 1011nnnn Bn Control change DATA 20 Control number 32 Ovvvvvvv vw Control Value 0 127 If TABLE is selected STATUS 1011nnnn Bn Control change DATA Onnnnnnn nn Control number 1 5 7 31 33 37 38 95 102 119 Ovvvvvvv vv Control Value 0 127 Numbers 0 32 and 96 101 cannot be used Control number 6 38 can be used Equation for converting a Control Value to parameter data paramSteps paramMax paramMin 1 add paramWidth paramSteps mod paramWidth add paramSteps curValue paramSteps add mod 2 1 If the assigned parameter has fewer than 128 steps paramWidth 128 rxValue Control value 2 If the assigned parameter has 128 or more but less than 16 384 steps paramWidth 16384 2 1 When High and Low data is received rxValue Control val
511. xternal head amp The EXTERNAL HA field includes the following items You can remotely control from the CL series console an external head amp external HA connected via MY16 ES64 or NAI48 ES IZO DEVICE e 1 Connect the CL series console to an external HA For details refer to the Using an external head amp on page 144 section and the owner s manual of your external HA T SB168 ES 480 MASTER 2 Inthe Function Access Area press the I O DEVICE button to access the I O DEVICE window 2 SB168 ES 48U MASTER Send To MII 3 SB168 ES 480 MASTER IT um DEVICE 1 EXTERNAL field Inthe upper part of the I O DEVICE window press the EXTERNAL HA tab to display Indicates the state of the connected external HA EAS ESE Rouen 2 ID Model name 48V master Displays information for the external HA mounted in the rack The ID number is automatically assigned in order of the connected devices from 1 to six This field also enables you to view the on off status of the master phantom power 3 Virtual racks This section accommodates up to six racks in which remotely controllable external HA units can be mounted If an external HA is mounted this field will indicate the HA settings GAIN setting and on off status of the phantom power and HPF Press a rack to open the EXTERNAL HA popup window 4 EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT popup button Press this button to op
512. y to the USB connector The FREE SIZE field indicates the amount of free capacity When you connect a USB flash drive to the USB connector a YPE folder and a SONGS folder within that YPE folder will be created automatically in the root directory of the USB flash drive The files created by recording operations will be saved in the above SONGS folder or in the currently selected folder below that level B Directory structure of a USB flash drive YPE folder Root directory Songs folder Song audio file 4 Assign the desired channels to the input and output of the USB memory recorder see page 181 CU 5 VL 3 V Reference Manual 10 To monitor the signal being recorded raise the fader for the channel s that are patched to the input of the recorder The level of the input signal to the recorder is shown by the RECORDER INPUT field s level meter in the RECORDER screen If necessary use the GAIN knob in the RECORDER INPUT field to adjust the input level to the recorder NOTE The signal being recorded will not be output from the recorder output jacks PLAYBACK OUT e Operating the GAIN knob will not affect the level of the signal being output to other ports from the corresponding output channel Press the REC RATE field in the lower right of the screen then select the bit rate for the audio file that will be recorded You can choose 96 kbps 128 kbps or 192 kbps Higher bit rates will improve th
513. yback time of the current song during playback 4 Current song format Indicates the file format and bit rate of the current song the file being played back 5 REC RATE button Switches the recording rate 6 Display switch button Switches between displaying and hiding the RECORDER INPUT and PLAYBACK OUT fields at the bottom of the song list 7 REW button Moves the playback point to the beginning of the current song If the playback point has already been located at the beginning the point will move to the beginning of the preceding song that has been checked for playback When the playback point is not at the beginning of the current song holding down this button for two seconds or longer will rewind the playback point If you operate this button during playback playback will resume from the point at which the button was released STOP button The recorder will change from play record recording standby mode to stop mode 9 PLAY PAUSE button Changes the recorder mode as follows Stop mode gt Playback mode then starts playback from the beginning of the current song Playback mode gt Playback pause mode Playback pause mode gt Playback mode then starts playback from the paused point Recording standby mode gt Recording mode Recording mode gt Recording pause mode Recording pause mode gt Recording mode then starts recording from the paused point FF button Moves the playback point to the beginning of t
514. you normally operate the unit Press the EXIT button The CL unit will start up in normal operating mode NOTE Alternatively you can continue operation by selecting a different menu instead of pressing the EXIT button CU 5 6 UL 3 V Reference Manual Adjusting the faders Calibration function Depending on the environment in which you use the CL series console discrepancies may occur in the motion of the motor faders You can use the Calibration function to correct these discrepancies NOTE For information about adjusting the input gain or the detection point of the touch screen refer to the appropriate sections in this chapter 1 While holding down the SCENE MEMORY STORE key on the panel turn on the power to the CL unit After the opening screen the following startup menu screen will appear MODE SELECT IHITIALIZE ALL MEMORIES INITIALIZE ALL MEMORIES INITIALIZE lA v MODE SELECT INITIALIZE 208 2 Other functions Press the FADER CALIBRATION button The FADER CALIBRATION MODE screen will appear enabling you to adjust the faders The specified faders in the channel strip section Centralogic section and Master section will be semi automatically calibrated This window will also appear if a problem is detected in the fader settings while the CL is starting up FADER CALIBRATION MODE MODE SELECT INITIALIZE ALL MEMORIES IHITIALIZE CURREHT MEMORIES TOUCH SCREEH CALIBRATION
515. you to operate the following HA related controllers e 48V button Switches head amp phantom power 48V on or off e A GAIN analog gain knob Indicates the analog gain of the head amp Use the multifunction knob to adjust the level If the Gain Compensation function is turned on an indicator will appear showing the position of the analog gain when the function is turned on HA meter Displays the level of the HA input signal NOTE Ifa slot is patched to the channel this section 2 will display the type of the slot MY card and slot meter instead If a rack is patched to the channel this section 2 will display the rack type and the effect type f nothing is patched section 2 will be blank e GC Gain Compensation ON OFF button Turns the Gain Compensation gain correction function on or off If the Gain Compensation function is turned on the level of the signal output from the I O device to the audio network will be stabilized For example if the FOH console and the monitoring console are sharing the input signal from the I O device and if the analog gain is adjusted on the FOH console this function will prevent the level of the signal received on the monitoring console from fluctuating Ifthe Gain Compensation function is turned off the analog gain and digital gain will return to the level that was obtained when you turned on the function Therefore the level on the digital network will remain the same
516. z 2k 10k Eight bands 2 00 kHz 10 0 kHz 4k 20k Eight bands 4 00 kKHz 20 0 kHz When you press one of these buttons the faders for the bands selected on screen will turn white and the numbers of the corresponding faders in the Centralogic section will be displayed Now you can use the faders in the Centralogic section to control the band NOTE The above operation is possible even if the Centralogic section is locked When you turn off the button in the FADER ASSIGN field it will return to the locked state Operate the faders in the Centralogic section The corresponding frequency region will be boosted or cut NOTE When a fader in the Centralogic section is set to the center flat position the corresponding ON key indicator will turn off This indicates that the corresponding band is not being modified If you raise or lower the fader even the slightest amount the ON key will light indicating that this band has been modified If you press a lit ON key to make it go dark the corresponding band will immediately return to the flat state Repeat steps 4 and 5 to adjust each band NOTE If you switch the display to a different screen or rack the fader assignments in the Centralogic section will forcibly be defeated However if you once again display the same rack the group of bands you had previously been controlling will automatically be assigned to the faders When you have finished making settings turn off the buttons in

Yamaha CL5/CL3/CL1 V1.5 Reference Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents